UNIT I GRAMMAR: REVIEW OF TENSES

Present Continuous and Simple Present

Present Continuous is used to:
— talk about something which is in progress at the moment of speaking
"Where are the children?" "They're playing in the garden."
"What are you doing at the moment?" "I'm writing a letter."
You can switch off the TV. I'm not watching it. Look, there's Sally. Who is she talking to? "Where is
Margaret?" "She's having a bath." Let's go out now. It isn't raining any more, (at a party) Hello, Ann. Are
you enjoying the party?
— talk about something which is in progress around the present, but not necessarily at the moment of
speaking
She's looking for a job at the moment.
Please don't take that book. Ann is reading it.
Andrew is spending a lot of time in the library these days,
as he's writing an article.
Have you heard about Tom? He's building his own house.
— talk about something which is in progress for a limited period around the present (temporary state,
current situations)
Robert is on holiday this week. He's staying with his sister in Bournemouth.
"You're working hard today." "Yes, I have a lot to do." They are living in Hong Kong for the time being. I
can't phone Peter. The phone isn't working. Dick is a student, but he's working as a barman during the
holidays.
— talk about situations which are changing or developing around the present
Your children are growing up very quickly. Computers are becoming more and more important in our lives.
The population of the world is rising very fast.
— talk about planned future arrangements
She's arriving at the airport tomorrow at noon. I'm having lunch with Helen tomorrow. We're spending next
winter in Australia. We're leaving at ten o'clock on Friday. I'm meeting Janet later this evening.
— express a habit, to talk about something that happens more often than is normal, (repeated actions
with adverbs like always, forever, constantly and continually) It can express a pleasant habit.
I like Peter. He's always smiling. He's always giving people things.
However, there's usually an element of criticism.
She's always grumbling. (I find it annoying.)
You're forever losing things. (You lose things too often.)
He's constantly complaining about something.
The secretary is always phoning her friends during office
hours. (She phones her friends too often.)
It is also possible to say: The secretary always phones her friends during office hours.
This is a more neutral comment and not necessarily a criticism. We put always, forever, constantly and
continually before the main verb.
Jenny is constantly (always, forever, continually) arguing with her father.
— give a commentary on a performance or activity She's taking off her tracksuit and ...
Comment on the uses of the Present Continuous.
1. I'm always paying for your coffee. Why can't you pay for a change? 2. We're spending next winter in
Australia. 3. Don't rush me. I'm working as fast as I can. 4. We're enjoying our holiday here very much. 5.
Young people are becoming more and more politically aware these days. 6. Ben and Patty are in London
on holiday. They are staying at a small hotel near Hyde Park. 7. I'm meeting Sue on Saturday evening. 8.
You are constantly panicing, aren't you? Calm down. 9. Is he arriving tomorrow? 10. What are you
drinking? It looks awful. 11. She is always helping people. 12. She is still waiting to see the boss. 13. He
is always upsetting people by asking personal questions. 14. She is running 1,500 metres in the next
Olympics. 15. What is Maria doing these days? — She is studying English at a school in London. 16. She
is forever forgetting to lock the front door. 17. He's hurrying to catch his train. 18. Prices are rising all the
time. Everything is getting more and more expensive. 19. Tom isn't playing football this season. He wants
to concentrate on his studies. 20. Is your English getting better? 21. I'm having treatment on my bad back
for a few weeks. 22. He's always lying. You can't believe a word he says. 23. Let's go out now. It isn't
raining any more. 24. Please be quiet. I'm trying to concentrate. 25. My sister is very busy these days.
She's writing an article. 26. I'm learning English at evening classes this year. 27. Jennifer's always losing
her key. 28. Are you seeing Nigel tomorrow? 29. I'm living with friends until I find a place of my own. 30.
You are spending a lot of money these days.
Simple Present is used to:
— talk about repeated actions or habits (habitual actions)
I have a shower every morning.
Most evenings my parents stay at home and watch TV.
Do you go to the cinema very often?
What time does Kate finish work?
How often do you go to the dentist?
In summer Tom usually plays tennis twice a week.
Ann doesn't often drink coffee.
— talk about situations which are permanent (continuing for a long time)
Mr and Mrs Shaw live in Bristol. (That is their permanent
home.)
Barry works in a shop.
She wears expensive clothes.
— talk about general truths
Summer follows spring.
The River Amazon flows into the Atlantic Ocean.
It rains a lot in Britain in March and April.
— give instructions
You turn left at the corner. First you weigh the ingredients.
— tell a joke or a story, to describe the dramatic action of a play (dramatic use)
The Englishman goes to the Irishman and says...
— talk about fixed future events (timetables, calendar)
Our plane leaves at nine. The course ends in two weeks. The World Cup begins tomorrow. What time
does the film start?
— make suggestions
Why don't they go on a day-trip? Why don't you join us?
— make commentaries
Becker serves (подаёт мяч) to Lendl.
— make observations and declarations
I hope so. I love you. It says here that...
Simple Present is also used with certain verbs not normally used in the continuous forms. These verbs
are called stative. They refer to states rather than actions.
These are the groups of verbs:
1. verbs of the mind and thinking: believe, think, consider, understand, suppose, expect, agree, know,
remember, forget, doubt, mean, mind
What do you think of that book?
I believe you are the man I'm looking for.
She knows now what she has done wrong.
Paul doesn't mind if you use his car.
Do you remember me now?
I see the point. = I understand the point.
He feels that he is right. = He is of the opinion that he
is right.
2. verbs of emotion and feeling: like, dislike, hate, love, want, wish, prefer, care
I like playing football.
I hate getting up early in the morning.
3. verbs of the senses :see, smell, taste, hear
I hear the sound of gun-fire. The cake smells good. The wine tastes sweet.
4. verbs of possession: have, possess, belong to, own
I have two sisters.
He owns a Rolls Royce.
The book belongs to me.
She doesn't possess a thing in the world.
5. certain other verbs: concern, depend on, include, need,
owe,seem and others
I need a bath.
. That doesn't concern me. A newspaper costs about 20 p.
Some of these verbs can be used in the continuous tenses when the verb expresses an activity, not a
state. However the meaning changes slightly.
Compare:
I think it's a great idea, (think as opinion, i.e. a state) He's thinking of emigrating, (think as mental process,
i.e.an activity)
The soup tastes delicious, (a state) I'm tasting the soup to see if it needs more salt, (an activity)
I expect you'd like something to eat. (expect meaning suppose)
She's expecting a baby. (She's pregnant.) Jane has a car. (possession)
The Browns are having dinner at the moment, (an activity),
Some of the stative verbs can be used in the continuous form when they show that a process is taking
place gradually or that a situation is temporary or unusual:
I'm on holiday in Blackpool and I'm loving every minute of it.
I'm slowly remembering all the details of the accident. You're being very silly.
Comment on the uses of the Simple Present.
1. Nurses look after patients in hospitals. 2. Why don't you give up smoking? 3.1 am weighing myself. I
weigh 65 kilos. 4. This coat belongs to you. 5. She drives to London once a week. 6. Can he manage? —
I hope so. 7. She loves her baby more than anything. 8.1 occasionally eat meat. 9. Do you see that bird
over there? 10.1 wear old clothes at home. 11. The car stops outside the National Bank. Three men get
out and the driver stays in the car. The three men walk into the bank and take out their guns. 12.
Vegetarians don't eat meat or fish. 13. Let me explain what you have to do. First you take the photos and
sort them into categories. Then you file them according to subject. 14.1 often forget things. 15. Why
doesn't he take up tennis? 16. Gases expand when heated. 17. Something smells strange. 18. We drink a
lot of tea. 19. My uncle works in a factory. 20. The coach leaves at 6 this morning. 21. You know what I
mean. 22. Do you like the
10
music? — Yes, it's nice. 23.1 always go out on Sundays. 24. The concert starts at 7 next Friday. 25. They
pay $60 a week rent. 26.1 need two notebooks. 27. We sit here every evening. I sometimes read a book.
28. He laughs a lot. 29. Ellis throws the ball in to Snow, but he loses it. 30. Watson gives the ball to
Tanner. Tanner goes past two men, he shoots, but the ball hits a Liverpool player. 31. Does he seem
unfriendly? 32. He never gets up early. 33. I have a car, but I don't use it very often. 34. How many
cigarettes do you smoke a day? 35. What time do banks close in England? 36. If you need money, why
don't you get a job? 37. I play the piano, but I don't play very well. 38. The earth goes round the sun. 39.
How often do you write to your parents? 40. You cook it for five minutes, and then you put the onions in.
41. What do you think of the film? 42.1 cry at sad films. 43. The sun rises in the east. 44. I think you are
right. 45. My car doesn't go very fast. 46. Does Brazil export cocoa? 47. Hot air rises. 46. It's not right, you
know — I agree. 49.1 hear a bird. It is singing. 50. I'm hungry. I want a sandwich. 51. The conference
starts on June 3 rd and finishes on June 10th. 52. She works from Mondays to Fridays. She doesn't work
at weekends. 53. How often do you go swimming?— I go about once a week. 54. Loud music gives me a
headache.
Present Continuous (I'm doing) or Simple Present (Ido)?
Present Continuous (/ am doing) Simple Present (/ do)
Use the Present Continuous to talk Use the Simple Present to talk
about something which is happening about things m general or things
at or around the time of speaking: which happen repeatedly:
The kettle is boiling. Can you rum Water boils at 100 degrees Celsius.
it off?
Listen to those people. What Excuse me, do you speak English?
language are they speaking?
"Where's Tom?" "He's playing Tom plays tennis on Saturday.
tennis."
(you find a stranger in your room) What do you usually do at weekends?
What are you doing here? What do you do? (= What's your job?)
Silvia is m Britain for three Most neonle learn to swim when
months. She's learning English. they are children.
Use the Present Continuous for Use the Simple Present for a
a temporary situation: permanent situation:
I'm living with some friends until My parents live in London. They
I can find a flat. have been there for 20 years.
The machine isn't working. It That machine doesn't work. It hasn't
broke down this morning. worked for years.
I'm sleeping on a sofa these days I always sleep eight hours every
because my bed is broken. night.
Self check
I. Complete the following dialogues by using the words in parentheses. Also give short answers to the
questions as necessary. Use the Simple Present or the Present Continuous.
1. A: (Mary, have) a bicycle?
B: Yes,.... She (have) a ten-speed bike.
2. A: (It, rain) right now?
B: No,... . At least, I (think, not) so.
3. A: (You, like) sour oranges? B: No,... . I (like) sweet ones.
4. A: (Your friends, write) a lot of letters?
B: Yes,.... I (get) lots of letters all the time.
5. A: (The students, take) a test in class right now? B: No,.... They (do) an exercise.
6. A: (You, know) Tom Adams? B: No,.... I've never met him.
7. A: (Your desk, have) any drawers? B: Yes,.... It has six drawers.
8. A: (Jean, study) at the library this evening?
B: No,.... She (be) at the student union. She (play) pool
with her friend.
A: (Jean, play) pool every evening? В: No,.... She usually (study) at the library. A: (She, be) a good
player?
B: Yes,.... She (play) pool three or four times a week. A: (You, know) how to play pool? B: Yes,.... But I
(be, not) very good.
12
A: Let's play sometime.
B: Okay. That sounds like fun.
П. Complete the sentences by using the words in parentheses. Use the Simple Present or the Present
Continuous. Some of the sentences are negative. Some of the sentences are questions. Supply the short
answer to a question if necessary.
1. A: Shhh. I (hear) a noise. (You, hear) it too? B: Yes,.... I wonder what it is.
2. A: Ron, (be) this your hat?
B: No,.... It (belong, not) to me. Maybe it (belong) to Kevin.
Why (you, not, ask) him? A: Okay.
3. A: Johnny, (you, listen) to me?
B: Of course I..., Mom. You (want) me to take out the garbage. Right? A: Right! And right now!
4. A: (You, see) that man over there?
B: Which man? The man in the brown jacket?
A: No, I (talk) about the man who (wear) the blue shirt.
B: Oh, that man.
A: (You, know) him?
B: No, I (think, not) so.
A: I (know, not) him either.
5. A: Shhh.
B: Why? (The baby, sleep)?
A: Uh-huh. She (take) her afternoon nap.
B: Okay, I'll talk softly. I (want, not) to wake her up.
6. A: A penny for your thoughts. /О чем вы задумались?/ В: Huh?
A: What (you, think) about right now?
B: I (think) about English grammar. I (think, not) about
anything else now. A: I (believe, not) you! B: But it's true.
III. Complete the sentences. Use the Simple Present or Present Continuous.
Г. Alice (take, not) the bus to school every day. She usually (walk) instead. (Take, you) the bus to get to
school every day, or
13
(walk, you)? 2. It (rain, not) right now. The sun (shine). (Rain, it) a lot here? 3. Right now I (look) at the
board. (I, see) some words on the blackboard. 4. I (need) to call my parents today and tell them about my
new apartment. They can't call me because they (know, not) my new telephone number. 5. The tea is
good. I (like) it. What kind is it? I (prefer) tea to coffee. How about you? 6. Right now the children (be) at
the beach. They (have) a good time. They (have) a beach ball and they (play) with it. They (like) to play
catch. Their parents (sunbathe). They (try) to get a tan. . They (listen) to some music on a transistor radio.
They also (hear) the sound of sea gulls and the sound of the waves. 7. Right now I (think) about sea gulls
and waves. I (think) that sea gulls are beautiful birds. 8. Sam is at the library. He (sit) at a table. He (write)
a composition. He (use) a dictionary to lookup the spelling of some words. The dictionary (belong, not) to
him. It (belong) to his roommate. Sam (look) up words in the dictionary because he (want) to make sure
that he doesn't have any misspelled words in his paper.
9. A: Which colour (prefer, you), red or blue? B: I (like) blue better than red. Why? A: According to this
magazine article I (read) right now, people who (prefer) blue to red (be) calm and (value) honesty and
loyalty in their friends. A preference for the colour red (mean) that a person (be) aggressive and (love)
excitement. B: Oh? That (sound) like a bunch of nonsense to me.
10. A: (Believe, you) in flying saucers? B: What (talk, you) about?
A: You know, spaceships from outer space with alien creatures aboard. B: In my opinion, flying saucers
(exist) only in people's
imagination.
11. Janice: What (write, you) in your notebook?
Diane: I (make) notes about questions I want to ask the
teacher.
Janice: (Prepare, you, always) so thoroughly for every class? Diane: I (try, always) to.
12. Bob: Jack really makes me angry! Sue: Why?
Bob: Well, for one thing, he (interrupt, always) me. I can
14
barely get a whole sentence out of my mouth. Sue: Is that all? Bob: No. He (ask, always) me to do his
homework for him.
I have enough homework of my own without doing
his homework too!
13. Mother: Susie! Get your fingers out of the dessert! What
(do, you)?
Susie: I (taste) the cake. It (taste) good. Mother: Well, you'll just have to wait until dinnertime. You
can have some then.
14. This morning it (rain). I can see Janet from my window. She (stand) at the corner of 5th and Pine. She
(hold) her umbrella over her head. She (wait) for the bus. 15. Right now I (look) at Janet. She (look)
angry. I wonder what's the matter. She (have) a frown on her face. She certainly (have, not) any fun right
now. 16.1 can't afford that thing. It (cost) too much. 17.1 (own, not) an umbrella. I (wear) a waterproof hat
on rainy days. 18. The house is in a mess, because we've got the workmen in. The plumber (put) in a new
bath, the electricians (rewire) the system, and the carpenter (build) us some new bookshelves. 19. You
(hear)ihe wind? It (blow) very strongly tonight. 20. You (see) my car keys anywhere? — No, I (look) for
them but I (not see) them. 21. Why you (walk) so fast today? You (walk, usually) quite slowly. — I (hurry)
because I (meet) my mother at 4 o'clock and she (not like) to be kept waiting. 22. You (recognize) that
man? — I (think) I have seen him before but I (not remember) his name. 23. Look at that crowd. I
(wonder) what they (wait) for. 24. Stop! You (not see) the notice? — I (see) it but I can't read it because I
(not wear) my glasses. What it (say)? — It (say), "These premises are patrolled by guard dogs." 25. You
(need) another blanket or you (feel) warm enough? 26. It (save) time if I (take) the path through the
wood? — No, it (not matter) which path you take. 27.1 (save) up because I (go) abroad in July. 28.1
(think) it is a pity you don't take more exercise. You (get) fat. 29. The plane that you (look) at now just
(take) off for Paris. 30. Tom never (do) any work in the garden; he always (work) on his car. — What he
(do) in his car now? — I (think) he (polish) it. 31. That film (come) to the local cinema next week. You
(want) to see it? 32. How Peter (get) on at school? — Very well. He (seem) to like the life. 33. Why Mrs
Pitt (look) so angry? — Mr Pitt (smoke) a
15
cigarette and (drop) the ash on the carpet. 34. This is our itinerary. We (leave) home on the 8th, (arrive) in
Paris on the 9th, (spend) the day in Paris, and (set) out that night for Venice. — That (sound) most
interesting. You must tell me all about it when you (get) back. 35. This story is about a boy who (make)
friends with a snake which he (find) in his garden. Then he (go) away but he (not forget) the snake and
some years later he (return) and (look) for it. He (find) the snake who (recognize) its old friend and (coil)
round him affectionally. But, unfortunately, the snake is by now a full-grown boa-constrictor and its
embrace (kill) the poor boy. — The snake (feel) sorry about this? — I (not know). The story (end) here.
36. How you (end) a letter that (begin), "Dear Sir"? — I always (put), "Yours truly", but Tom (prefer) "Yours
faithfully". 37. What the word "catastrophe" (mean)? — It (mean) "disaster". 38. What you (wait) for? — I
(wait) for the shop to open. — But it (not open) till 9.00. — I (know) but I (want) to be early as their sale
(start) today. 39. Why you (smoke) a cigar, Mrs Pitt? You (not smoke) cigars as a rule. —-I (smoke) it
because I (want) the ash. This book (say) that cigar ash mixed with oil (remove) heat stains from wood.
40. Who (own) this umbrella? — I (not know). Everybody (use) it but nobody (know) who (own) it. 41. You
(mind) if I (ask) you a question? — That (depend) on the question. — It (concern) your brother. — I
(refuse) to answer any questions about my brother. 42. The last train (leave) the station at 11.30. 43. You
(enjoy) yourself or would you like to leave now? — I (enjoy) myself very much. I (want) to stay to the end.
44. How you (get) to work as a rule? — I usually (go) by bus but tomorrow I (go) in Tom's car. 45. Why
you (put) on your coat? — I (go) for a walk. You (come) with me? — Yes, I'd love to come. You (mind) if I
bring my dog? 46. You (belong) to your local library? — Yes, I do. — You (read) a lot? — Yes, quite a lot.
— How often you (change) your books? — I (change) one every day. 47. You (like) this necklace? I (give)
it to my daughter for her birthday tomorrow. 48. These workmen are never satisfied; they always
(complain). 49. You (write) to him tonight? — Yes, I always (write) to him on his birthday. You (want) to
send any message? 50. Tom and Mr Pitt (have) a long conversation. I (wonder) what they (talk) about. 51.
You (believe) all that the newspapers say? — No, I (not believe) any of it. — Then why you (read)
16
newspapers? 52. This car (make) a very strange noise. You (think) it is all right? — Oh, that noise (not
matter). It always (make) a noise like that. 53. The fire (smoke) horribly. I can't see acfoss the room. — I
(expect) that birds (build) a nest in the chimney. — Why you (not put) wire across the tops of your
chimneys? — Tom (do) that sometimes but it (not seem) to make any difference. 54. The children are
very quiet. Go and see what they (do). — They (cut) up some $ 5 notes. 55. What you (wait) for? — I
(wait) for my change; the boy just (get) it. 56. I can't hear what you (say); the traffic (make) too much
noise. 57. She always (lose) her glasses and(ask) me to look for them. 58. Someone (knock) at the door.
Shall I answer it? — I (come) in a minute. I just (wash) my hands. 59. You (do) anything this evening? —
No, I'm not. — Well, I (go) to the cinema. Would you like to come with me? 60. We (have) breakfast at
8.00 tomorrow as Tom (catch) an early train. 61. They (dig) an enormous hole just outside my gate. —
What they (do) that for? — I don't know. Perhaps they (look) for oil. 62. What (make) that terrible noise?
— It's the pneumatic drill. They (repair) the road. 63. (You sit) comfortably? Good! I (hope) you (study) this
text carefully because I (have) news for you. The Guiness Book of Records (not include) records for
eating any more. People who (try) to swallow 47 hard boiled eggs in half a minute will have to do it for
pleasure and not to get into the record book. "We (regard) these records as unhealthy," said the book's
editor, Mr Donald McFarlan. 64. We (hope) you (enjoy) this marvellous weather as much as we are. We
(sunbathe) and (go) swimming every day. Next week we (go) boating. 65. The play is set m London in
1890. The action (take) place in Sir Don Wyatt's mansion. When the curtain (go) up, the hero and heroine
(sit) in the lounge. They (argue).
66. Ann sees Tom putting on his coat and says: Where you (go), Tom?
Tom: I (go) to buy some cigarettes. You (want) an evening paper?
Ann: No, thanks. You always (buy) cigarettes, Tom. How many you (smoke) a day?
Tom: I (not smoke) very many—perhaps 20. Jack (smoke) far more than I (do). He (spend) £10 a week
on cigarettes.
67. Mary (see) Peter standing at the bus stop.
Mary: Hello, Peter. What bus you (wait) for?
Peter: Hello, Mary. I (wait) for a 9 or a 14.
Mary: You usually (go) to work by car, don't you?
Peter: Yes, but the car (belong) to my mother and she sometimes (want) it. She (use) it today to take Bob
to the dentist.
Mary: I usually (go) by car too. Jack (take) me because he (pass) my office on his way to the factory. But
this week he (work) in a factory in the opposite direction, so I (queue) like you.
Peter: Here's a 9 now. You (come) on it or you (wait) for a 14?
Mary:I (think) I'll take the 9. If I (wait) for a 141 may be late, and if you (be) late at my office everyone
(look) at you.
68. Mary and Ann (wait) outside a telephone box. Inside the box a boy (dial) a number.
Mary: You (know) that boy?
Ann: Yes, he's a friend of my brother's. He (phone) his
girl friend every day from this box. Mary: Where he (come) from? Ann: He (come) from Japan. He's a
very clever boy; he
(speak) four languages. Mary: I (wonder) what he (speak) now. Ann: Well, his girl friend (come) from
Japan too; so I
(suppose) he (speak) Japanese.
69. It is 8.30. Tom and Ann (have) breakfast. They both (open) their letters.
Tom: No one ever (write) to me. All I (get) is bills! You (have)
anything interesting? Ann: I've got a letter from Hugh. He (say) he (come) to
London next week and (want) us to meet him for
lunch.
70. Peter: You (have) traffic wardens in your country? Pedro: No, I (not think) so. You (not see) them in
my town
anyway. What exactly a traffic warden (do)? Peter: He (walk) up and down the street and if a car (stay)
too long at a parking place or (park) in a no-parking area he (stick) a parking ticket to the windscreen.
Look! He (put) a ticket on Tom's car. Tom
18
will be furious when he (see) it. He (hate) getting parking tickets.
71. What (happen) in your class? The teacher (give) lectures every day? No. He (give) one lecture a
week, and on the other days he (show) films or (discuss) books with us.
72. Why that man (stand) in the middle of the road? —
He (try) to get across. He (wait) for a gap in the traffic. — Why he (not use) the subway? —
Lots of people (not bother) to use the subway. They (prefer) to risk their lives crossing here.
73. You (wear) a new coat, aren't you? — Yes. You (like) it? —
The colour (suit) you but it (not fit) you very well. It's much too big.
74. Ann (on telephone): You (do) anything at the moment, Sally?
Sally: Yes. I (pack); I (catch) a plane to New York in three
hours' time. Ann: Lucky girl! How long you (stay) in New York?
75. Jack: I just (go) out to get an evening paper.
Ann: But it (pour)! Why you (not wait) till the rain (stop)?
76. Mrs Jones: My daughter never (write) to me so I never
(know) what she (do). Your son (write) to you, Mrs Smith? Mrs Smith: Yes, I hear from him every week.
He (seem)
to like writing letters. 77.1 (see) my solicitor tomorrow; I (change) my will. —
You always (change) your will. Why you (not leave) it alone?
78. You (look) very thoughtful. What you (think) about? — I (think) about my retirement. —
But you're only 25. You only just (start) your career. — I (know); but I (read) an article which (say) that a
sensible man (start) thinking about retirement at 25.
79. Jack: How much longer you (stay) in England?
Paul: Only one more day. I (leave) tomorrow night. I (go)
to Holland for two weeks. Jack: And you (come) back to England after that or you
(go) home? Paul: It (depend) on my father. But if he (agree) to let me
go on studying here I'll certainly come back. And
I (expect) he will agree. By the way, Jack, Ann
19
(see) me off at Victoria tomorrow. Why you (not come) too? You could have coffee with her afterwards.
80. What all those people (do) in the middle of the street? And why they (wear) such extraordinary
clothes? —
They (make) a film. Most of the crowd are local people who
(work) as extras. —
It (sound) great fun. You (think) I could get a job as a film
extra? —
I (not know) but I (see) Ann over there; when they (finish)
this scene I'll ask her if they still (take) on extras. —
Ann (act) in the film? —
She has a small part. She (not act) very well. I (imagine) she
got the part because she (know) the director.
81. Mrs Jones: What you (look) for, Tom?
Mr Jones: I (look) for the garage key. I always (look) for the garage key, because nobody ever (put) it
back on its hook.
Mrs Jones: I always (put) it back on its hook. Why you (not try) your pockets?
82. Imagine that you (travel) by train, in a crowded compartment. One of the passengers (read) a
newspaper; another (do) a crossword puzzle; another (look) out of the window. Suddenly the train (stop)
with a jerk and your suitcase (fall) off the rack on to somebody's toes.
83.1 (hear) that you have bought a new house. —
Yes, but I (not live) in it yet. They still (work) on it, and the
work (take) longer than I expected. —
I (think) repair jobs always (take) longer than one (expect).
IV. Translate from Russian into English.
1. Позвони ему сейчас. Я думаю, он еще не спит. 2. Я сейчас много работаю. Я сдаю экзамены. 3.
Он не видит, что я на него смотрю. Он читает что-то с большим интересом. 4. Где Нина? — У нее
урок английского языка. У нее всегда английский по пятницам. 5. Давай пойдем прогуляемся.
Дождя нет. 6. Мой брат работает инженером на заводе. Он говорит, ему очень нравится его работа.
7. Ваша дочь ходит в школу? — Да, она в пятом классе. — Вы помогаете ей по математике? —
20
Постоянно. 8. Мой отец хорошо знает английский язык. Он читает английские книги без словаря. 9.
Послушай. Звонит телефон. 10. Мой сын плохо успевает в школе. Он тратит слишком много
времени на спорт и слишком мало времени на уроки. 11. Где ты обычно проводишь отпуск? — В
Белоруссии. Мои родители живут там. — Там есть река или озеро? — Там есть большое и
красивое озеро. Я хорошо провожу там время. 12. Мой брат живет далеко от меня. Я не часто его
вижу. 13. Куда ты торопишься? — В кино. Мой друг ждет меня около кинотеатра. 14. Кому
принадлежит этот дом? — Это дом моего дяди. 15. Сколько стоит этот магнитофон? — 200
долларов. 16. С кем она разговаривает? — Со своим начальником. 17. Мой брат дипломат. Он
часто ездит за границу. 18. Мужчина так пристально смотрит на вас. Вы его знаете? 19. Что ты
слушаешь? — Я слушаю народные песни, я очень люблю их. 20. У моего брата есть автомобиль,
но я никогда им не пользуюсь. Я хочу купить свой автомобиль. 21. Позвони на вокзач и узнай, когда
приходит поезд из Берлина. 22. Я не люблю ее. Она постоянно ворчит. 23. Ты часто пишешь своим
родителям? — Каждую неделю. 24. Не бери эту книгу. Мой брат читает ее. 25. Темнеет. Включи
свет. 26. Я никогда не езжу на работу. Я всегда хожу пешком. 27. Ты идешь в университет? — Нет.
Я иду в библиотеку. 28. Она очень рассеянная. Она постоянно теряет вещи. 29. Моя сестра живет
сейчас в Москве. Она там учится в Московском университете. 30. Дождь все еще идет? — Да. 31.
Мы уезжаем в пятницу в 8 часов утра. Мы встречаемся на вокзале в 7.30. 32. За что он ей так
нравится? — Она говорит, что он добрый и умный. 33. Вы помните меня? Мы вместе учились в
институте. 34. Почему бы нам не поехать за город в воскресенье? — Хорошая идея. 35. Том сейчас
очень занят. Он строит гараж. 36. Когда приезжает твой отец? — Через неделю. 37. Что ты
думаешь об этом фильме? — Он скучноват. 38. О чем ты думаешь? — Я думаю о своем детстве.
39. В котором часу закрывается магазин? — В восемь. 40. Когда начинается спектакль? — В семь
часов вечера. 41. Какие товары экспортируе г ваша страна 9 42 Над чем вы смеетесь? — Том
рассказал нам смешную историю. 43. Он никогда не пропускает занятия без уважительных причин.
44. Мои родители сейчас на море. Они хорошо прово-
21
дят время. 45. Что ты ищешь? — Ключи от машины. 46. Почему ты меня не слушаешь? Это очень
важно. 47. Неужели ты не любишь футбол? Это такая захватывающая игра. 48. Я завтра
встречаюсь с Аней. Мы играем в теннис. 49. Что ты здесь делаешь"? — Просматриваю новые
журналы. Я делаю это каждую неделю. 50. Почему вы изучаете английский? — Собираюсь поехать
за границу на несколько месяцев. Кроме того, английский мне нужен для научной работы. 51. О
чем они говорят? — Думаю, они обсуждают итоги конференции. 52. Ты можешь выключить
телевизор. Я не смотрю его. 53. Кто присматривает за твоими детьми, когда ты на работе? — Как
правило, моя мать. Она сейчас не работает. 54. Почему ты так сердит? Почему ты кричишь на
меня? 55. Она не любит мясо, она предпочитает рыбу. 56. В ее диктанте много ошибок, хотя
обычно она делает мало ошибок. 57. Конференция начинается 8 июня и заканчивается 14 июня.
58. Где Аня? — Она принимает душ. 59. Почему ты не пишешь ей? — Я не знаю ее адреса. 60. Она
не знает, когда приедет ее брат. 61. Ты часто видишь Аню, не так ли? — Нет, она сейчас живет за
городом. 62. Сколько иностранных языков знает Джон? — Если не ошибаюсь, два. А сейчас он учит
арабский. — Правда? Он нужен ему для работы? — Да. Он собирается в Египет. 63. Следующий
поезд отправляется в 10 часов. Ты можешь успеть на него, если поспешишь. 64. Интересно, чем
она сейчас занимается.
Fluency
Listen, read and practise.
1. John: Do you see that man over at that table in the comer?
What's he doing? Ian: He's having an argument with the waiter. I think he's
complaining about his soup. John: You're right. He's shouting at the waiter. He's saying
that it tastes terrible. Can you hear what he's saying
now? Ian: Yes. He's telling the waiter there's a fly in his soup.
He doesn't see why he should pay for it.
22
2 Wife: Oh, don't put your coat on that chair! You' re al -ways leaving your clothes around. It's so untidy!
Husband: OK! OK! Calm down. Don't let's have an argument. You are always complaining these days.
Wife: I'm not surprised — living with you! Husband: Come on! You're forever telling me to relax. Why
don't you try it?
3. Tom: I'm flying to New York at the weekend. I'm staying at a hotel with my Uncle Joe and Aunt Jane.
He's an artist and she's a photographer. Nick: What's the hotel called?
Tom: The New York Tower. It has a restaurant at the top. The restaurant turns round eighteen times a day
so you can see the whole city. An orchestra plays there in the evening.
A Week in Vlctor's life
John: Tell me, Victor, what do you do Sundays?
Victor: On Sunday I try to sleep late.
John: And on weekdays?
Victor: Unfortunately, I never have much peace on weekdays, because I must work.
John: Work? You?
Victor: Yes, I'm a student of English — like you!
John: OK, Victor. What exactly do you do on weekdays?
Victor: On Monday morning I play golf.
John: Golf?
Victor: Yes. And on Monday afternoons I go swimming at the swimming pool. I need to relax after my
game of golf.
John: Oh, yes.
Victor: On Tuesdays and Wednesdays, after my serious music lessons at the music school I am a singer
in a rock group.
John: Stop! Stop! Please ... enough! What do you do on Thursdays?
Victor: I rest all day long. I wake up in the evening to set my alarm-clock for lunch-time on Friday. On
23
a letter
Fridays I go to the library to meet my friends to organise a picnic in the country among the birds and the
bees and the flowers and the trees.
John: Please, Victor. But there's one thing I don't understand. When do you learn English?
Victor: A quarter of an hour every evening, in a comfortable armchair, with my video English method and a
large glass of orange juice!
A. Ask questions on the text.
B. Imagine you are Victor. Tell about your week routine. Your friends will ask you some more questions to
get additional information.
C. Ask each other questions about a week in your lives.
D. Tell your partner what you usually do during the week. Your partner will ask you some questions to get
some details.
E. Which of the members of your family is the busiest? What is his/her week like?
Dear Mum and Dad,
How are you? The camp is OK. The weather is horrible. It is raining. We are all writing letters. What's the
weather like at home? We get up every morning at a quarter to eight and have a shower. The water is
always cold. It's really horrible!
Then we get dressed and have breakfast at half past eight. Breakfast is nice. We have three different
sorts of cereal, bacon and eggs, toast and marmalade and tea.
After breakfast we go riding or canoeing. We have a morning break at eleven o'clock. We usually have
orange juice and biscuits. Then we have free activities.
We have lunch at half past one. We have hamburgers and chips or fish and chips but the chips aren't very
nice. In the afternoon we usually play football or volleyball. Tea is at four o'clock and after tea we ride on
the mini motorbikes. They are great!
We have supper at seven. After supper we watch a video or have a disco. We can play our own
cassettes. Bedtime is at half
24
past nine. I am in a very big room with seven other girls. Our monitor is called Louise but we call her Lulu.
We're both all right and we aren't homesick! (I am a little bit, Andy.)
Love from Kate and Andy
A. Ask and answer questions on the text.
B. Describe the children's rest at the camp.
C. This is a passage from another letter. Tina's mother is writing a letter to a friend.
I'm sitting on the beach, eating an ice cream. Tina and Jack are swimming in the sea and Max is in the
park, playing with a friend. Tom's listening to the radio and reading. We're having a fantastic holiday.
Abercwim is a little fishing village in North Wales with a park, a castle, some Roman remains and some
lovely gardens, and there's a little fishing port with a light-house. Everybody here is really friendly. I think
we're lucky. This is our second holiday this year and we're doing just what we want to do: sleeping, eating
and playing games. The food is lovely too.
D. You 're on holiday in the south. Write a postcard to your friend describing a) your usual day b) what
you and your family are doing at the moment.
Happy birthday to you
Mike: Hello?
Sue: Hello, Mike. I'm ringing you up to wish you a happy
birthday. Mike: Sue, what a fantastic surprise! Where are you phoning
from? I can hear you so clearly. I thought you were in
Spain.
Sue: Yes, I am. And I'm having a marvellous time here. Mike: What's the weather like? It's pouring with
rain here. Sue: It's absolutely boiling. I'm living in my bikini, and
getting really brown. Mike: Lucky you. Hey, where are you ringing from? I can
hear people laughing and talking in the background.
25
Sue: Ah, that's because I'm in a cafe by the beach. Jill and I are having a drink here and writing our
postcards. I'm sending you one, so that you can see what it looks like here. I wish you were here, Mike. I
can see the beach from where I'm standing. There are thousands of people sunbathing, and there's ...
Mike: Hey, stop. You're making me jealous. There's nothing interesting happening here. Everybody's
complaining and saying what an awful summer we're having.
Sue: Oh, dear — still, I expect you're getting a lot of work done. How's it going?
Mike: Oh, fine. I'm working on the last article now. Actually, at this very moment I'm having a break and
making myself some coffee. Good God, that reminds me. Can you hold on a moment? The kettle's
probably boiling. Just a tick.
Sue: Hey, Mike, don't go. I'd better ring off now. This is costing me a fortune. I'll ring you again in a few
days, OK?
Mike: Right. Thanks for remembering my birthday. I'm feeling better already. Look after yourself. Miss you.
Sue: Me too. Goodbye.
Mike: Bye.
A. Questions
1. Where is Sue at the moment? 2. What is she doing in Spain? 3. Is she alone there? 4. Why is Sue
calling Mike? 5. Is Sue enj oying her holidays? 6. Why does Mike feel j ealous? 7. How is Mike doing?
B. Read the conversation and analyse its language peculiarities.
C. Give the appropriate English phrases from the text.
Откуда ты звонишь? Береги себя. Я работаю над последней статьей. Скучаю по тебе. Ты
вызываешь у меня зависть. Я звоню тебе, чтобы пожелать счастливого дня рождения. Какой
замечательный сюрприз! Я думал, что ты в Испании. Я прекрасно провожу время. Какая погода?
Здесь льет дождь. Все жалуются и говорят о том, какое ужасное у нас лето. Здесь страшная жара.
Спасибо, что не забыла о моем дне рождения. Я полагаю, что ты
26
продвигаешься со своей работой. Я уже чувствую себя лучше. Я позвоню тебе через несколько
дней, хорошо? Я отчетливо гебя слышу. Жаль, что тебя здесь нет. Тысячи людей загорают на
пляже. Подожди минутку. Тебе везет. Я слышу, как смеются и разговаривают люди. Мы здесь пьем
напитки и пишем почтовые открытки. Здесь ничего интересного не происходит. Как продвигаются
дела? В этот самый момент я отдыхаю. Это напомнило мне. Я лучше положу трубку. Мне это
дорого стоит.
D. Give a brief account of the conversation.
E. Roleplay the conversation.
F. Situation: You are having your holidays at the seaside. At the moment you're phoning your mother. She
wants to know whether you're having a good time.
G. Tell the class how you usually spend у our holidays.
What are you Doing here?
Barbara Cooper is in Milan on a business trip. She is sitting in a small cafe outside the central station
waiting to catch a train to Florence. Suddenly she sees an old school friend, Martha Hunt, walking past
the cafe.
Barbara: Martha! Martha: Barbara!
Barbara: What are you doing here? You live in Manchester, don't you?
Martha: Yes, that's right. I do. But I'm having a week's holiday
here. Barbara: What? Here in Milan?
Martha: Yes, I'm visiting a friend. You know him actually-
Roger.
Barbara: Yes. I remember Roger.
Martha: Well, he's working here as a freelance journalist. Barbara: Is he? That must be fun.
Martha: Well, he says he's enjoying it. What about you? What are you doing here? Having a holiday as
well?
27
Barbara: No, not me. I'm working. I'm looking for some
new shoe designs for the shop. Martha: Oh, yes. I read about you in the Old Cliftonians'
magazine. You're the manageress of a shoe shop now,
aren't you?
Barbara: Yes, that's right. It's doing quite well, in fact. Martha: Which hotel are you staying at, by the way?
Barbara: Well, I'm not staying in Milan any more. I'm catching the
train to Florence in half an hour. In fact I must go soon. Martha: Oh, that's a pity. Anyway, I must go too. I
must try
and come and see you in Bristol one day. Barbara: Yes, do. And give my regards to Roger. Martha: Yes, I
will. Well — look after yourself, don't work
too hard.
Barbara: No, I won't. Have a nice holiday, by the way! Martha: Thanks. Bye, Barbara.
A. Questions
1. Where are Barbara and Martha at the moment? 2. What are they doing in Milan? 3. How long are they
staying in Milan?
B. Read the text and comment on the uses of the Simple Present and Present Continuous.
C. Give the appropriate English phrases from the text.
Должно быть, это интересно. У меня поезд во Флоренцию через полчаса. Передай привет своему
другу. Между прочим, в какой гостинице ты остановилась? Меня больше не будет в Милане. Я
здесь неделю отдыхаю. Ты гаже здесь отдыхаешь? Ты заведуешь обувным магазином, не так ли?
Фактически наш магазин преуспевает. Жаль. Я должна постараться навестить тебя в Бристоле
когда-нибудь. Я навешаю друга. Я ищу новые образцы обуви для магазина. Он говорит, что ему это
нравится. Позаботься о себе, не работай слишком много. Хорошего тебе отдыха.
D. Ask detailed questions on the text. Your partner will answer the questions.
E. Give a brief account of the conversation.
28
F. Roleplay the conversation.
G. Situation: You are in London on business. You happen to meet your former classmate who has come
to London to take part in a conference. You start talking.
Cathy and Steve
Cathy and Steve are engaged, but unfortunately Cathy lives in Sussex and Steve in Yorkshire. It is nine
o'clock on Saturday morning, when the phone rings beside Steve's bed. He is still asleep.
Steve: Hello?
Cathy: Hello dear, where are you?
Steve: Where all civilized people should be at this time on a Saturday morning — in bed.
Cathy: Lazy thing!
Steve: What do you mean "lazy thing"? I earn my rest. I work jolly hard, you know.
Cathy: Of course you do, dear.
Steve: What about you? What are you doing?
Cathy: At the moment I'm drinking a cup of coffee and talking to my lazy fiance, but later I'm going shop-
ping. That's what I want to talk to you about.
Steve: Mmm.
Cathy: I'm getting the curtains for the bedroom. Steve: Good.
Cathy: Do you like the idea of pale green? Steve: That sounds all right.
Cathy: Plain... then there won't be any problem when we come to buy the carpet. But I want to order the
curtains today, because Aunt Phyllis is staying, and she's giving us the curtains as a wedding present. So
we're going together to choose the material. Steve: That's a good idea. Cathy: What are you doing
today? Steve: Well, this morning I've got a little shopping to do, then this afternoon I'm going to the
football with Jim. Cathy: All right. Love, enjoy yourself. Bye. Steve: Same to you. Bye.
29
A. Questions
1 . Do Cathy and Steve see one another every day? If not, why not? 2. Why isn't Steve at work when the
phone rings? 3. What does Cathy call Steve? 4. How does he defend himself? 5. What is Cathy doing
while she's talking to Steve? 6. What is she planning to buy? 7. Is she planning to buy flowered material?
S.Where is Steve going this afternoon?
B. Read the conversation. Comment on the uses of the Present Continuous and Simple Present.
C. Give a brief account of the conversation.
D. Roleplay the conversation.
old Arthur
Everyone knows him as Old Arthur. He lives in a little hut in the middle of a small wood, about a mile from
the village. He visits the village store twice a week to buy food and paraffin, and occasionally he collects
letters and his pension from the post office. A few weeks ago a reporter from the local newspaper
interviewed him. This is what he said:
I get up every morning with the birds. There is a stream near my hut and I fetch water from there. It's
good, clear, fresh water, better than you get in the city. Occasionally, in the winter, I have to break the ice.
I cook simple food on my old paraffin stove; mostly stews and things like that. Sometimes I go to the pub
and have a drink, but I don't see many people. I don't feel lonely. I know this wood very well, you see. I
know all the little birds and animals that live here and they know me. I don't have much money, but I don't
need much. I think I'm a lucky man.
A. Questions
1. Where does Old Arthur live? 2.Who interviewed him recently? 3. How far is it to the village? 4. How
often does Arthur go into the village?-5. What does he buy from the village store? 6. What does he collect
from the post office? 7. Where does he get his water from? S.What does he say about the water in the
stream? 9. What does he cook on?
B. Give short answers to the following questions.
1 . Is Arthur quite old? 2. Is he a lonely man? 3. Is the store in the village? 4. Is the water in the stream
clean? 5. Does old Arthur see many people? 6. Does he get his water from a tap? 7. Does he like the
birds and animals in the wood? 8. Does the stream sometimes freeze in winter? 9. Does Arthur cook on
an electric stove? 1 0. Does he get his pension from the post office?
C. Imagine that you are interviewing Old Arthur. These are the answers he gives to your questions. What
were the questions you asked him?
1 . In a little hut in the wood. 2. At the village store. 3. On my old paraffin stove. 4. Yes, I go there
occasionally for a drink. 5. From the stream. 6. No, I never feel lonely. 7. Not much, my eyes aren't too
good. 8. No, I haven't got a radio. 9. No, I was an only child, and my parents died when I was quite young.
10. No, I don't believe in doctors.
D. Situation: You are interviewing Old Arthur on his life in the wood. Add more details about Arthur's life.
E. Make up negative statements.
eg He only sees a few people. not/many He doesn't see many people.
1 . He only visits the village store twice a week. not/every day
2. He only breaks the ice on the water occasionally. not/often
3. He only collects his letters from the post office once a month.
not/every week
4. He cooks on a paraffin stove. not/a gas stove
5. He lives in a hut in the wood. not/an ordinary house
6. He gets his water from the stream. not/ a tap
7. There is no television in his hut.
30
31
not/television
8. There is no radio in his hut. not/radio
9. He usually feels quite cheerful, not/miserable
10. He only has one cooking pot. not/complicated meals
F. Speak on Arthur's life. What do you think of this sort of life? Do you think Arthur is really a lucky man?
G. Speak on the advantages and disadvantages of living in a village.
H. Do you have any friends or relatives who live in a village? Who are they? What do they do? What is
their life in the country like? Have you got a country house? Where is it? Have you got any conveniences
in the house? Do you like life in the country?
David in the Snowstorm
In London it doesn't often snow, but when it does, life becomes very difficult for everyone. Cars have to go
very slowly because the roads are covered in ice and wet snow, so there are traffic jams, and lots of
people arrive late for work. The snow usually melts quickly and this makes the pavements dangerous and
unpleasant to walk on. Only children really like the snow.
David works in the local library. He usually goes to work by bus, but this morning he's walking because
there don't seem to be any buses. He is wearing his winter coat and a scarf, but it is still snowing and the
wet snow is trickling down his neck, and making him feel very uncomfortable. He's looking forward to
having a nice, hot cup of coffee.
A. Questions
1. Does it often snow in London? 2. What effect does the snow have on people's lives? 3. What happens
to cars? 4. Do people arrive at work on time? 5. Does the snow melt quickly? 6. What is the result of the
snow melting? 7. Who likes the snow very much? 8. Where does David work? 9. Why is he walking to
work today? 10. What is he wearing? 11. What is trickling down
32
his neck? 12. What effect is this having on him? 13. What is David looking forward to?
B. Now dose the book and ask your own questions on the text.
C. What do you know about the English weather? What is the weather in your country like? What do you
like winter (summer, autumn, spring) for? What don't you like about each season of the year?
D. Situation: David and you are talking about the weather inyour countries.
A. Dау in the life of Takashi Tackashimi

Takashi Takashimi, a fashion designer from Tokyo, talks to Margot Townsend.

I get up at about ten o'clock. I don't like getting up early. I never eat breakfast — I sometimes have a cup
of tea. I eat nothing during the day. I just don't feel hungry at all.
I live about eight minutes from the office near Shibuya. I drive to the office every morning in my car — a
black BMW. I always wear black or navy blue. I sometimes wear a white shirt or T-shirt but no bright
colours.
I work from about noon till seven in the evening. I don't mind working late. Before a fashion show I usually
work until eleven or twelve at night. I eat out in restaurants about six nights a week. I hate going to new
restaurants. I usually go to a few old favourites.
I live with my daughter, who's eighteen. The house is always untidy. She doesn't like cooking or cleaning
and nor do I! I spend no time at all in my house — it's not a big part of my life.
I usually stay in Tokyo at the weekend. I don't mind that because I hate making plans. The traffic in Tokyo
is terrible but sometimes I just get in my car and drive.
I travel a lot. My work has taken me to different parts of the world.
A. Questions
1. Does Takashi get up early or late? 2. What colour clothes does he like wearing? 3. What sort of
restaurants does he hate
going to? 4. Why is his home untidy? 5. Why does he spend his weekends in Tokyo? 6. Does he travel a
lot?
B. What is Takashi's average day like? Is it very different from yours?
C. Situation: You and your friend are speaking about your daily routine.
Past Continuous and Simple Past
Simple Past is used to:
— talk about a past event which took place at a definite point in time
We went to the theatre last night.
Shakespeare died in 1616.
Did you have a good time on holiday?
When did she come?
Who saw Peter yesterday?
What did you do at the weekend?
Why didn't you phone me on Tuesday?
Why were you so angry?
Was Tom at work on Friday?
— describe past states and habits
I smoked forty cigarettes a day till I gave up. He lived in Rome for ten years, (but not now)
— narrate events in sequence
We got home, opened the door and found the house empty. He left the hotel, took a taxi and drove to the
theatre. The manager entered the office, sat down at the desk and began to look through the morning
mail. When I arrived at the railway station I went to the booking office and bought a ticket.
— report statements and questions
He said that he was a stranger. She asked if I knew her brother.
— tell a story
There was once a man who lived in a small house in the country. One day he left his house and went into
town. On his way he met...
*
past Continuous is used to:
— talk about something which was in progress at a past time. The action had started but it had not
finished at that time.
"What were you doing at 6 o'clock last night?"
"I was watching the news on television."
Between 10 and 11 this morning I was reading.
I saw you yesterday evening. You were waiting for a bus.
Was Sue working at ten o'clock yesterday morning?
— talk about temporary actions in progress in the past
I was living abroad in 1987. It was raining all night.
— talk about actions which were in progress when something else happened
As/Just as/When/While I was leaving, the phone rang. While/When/As/Just as she was paying for the
petrol, a boy stole her wallet from her car.
These are often introduced by conjunctions like when, as, just as and while, but the shorter action can be
introduced by when:
We were having supper when the phone rang.
— talk about actions in progress at the same time
While I was reading, Joan was playing the piano.
— give background to an event
I looked out of the window. It was raining.
It was a warm summer day. The sun was shining and the
birds were singing.
— talk about arrangements in the past
Everybody was excited because they were leaving for Paris the next day.
— talk about repeated actions that happened too often
When I worked here I was always making mistakes. She was constantly breaking the dishes.
Past Continuous is also used in polite inquiries.
I was wondering if you could give me a lift.
Used to (/ used to do)
We use used to+infinitive to talk about past habits which are now finished.
Robert used to play football when he was younger, but he stopped playing 20 years ago. (= Robert played
football regularly in the past, but he does not play now.)
More examples:
Kate used to go swimming a lot, but she never goes swimming now.
"Do you go to the cinema very often?" "Not now, but I used to."
We also use used to for past states and situations which are no longer true.
Robert used to be very slim when he was younger. I used to live in London, but I moved in 1980.
We only use used to to talk about the past. The negative of used to is normally didn 't use to (= did not
use to)
I didn't use to live in London.
Jack didn't use to go out very often until he met Jill.
We also use never used to eg You never used to like classical music.
We normally form questions with did...use to... 1
Where did you use to live?
Did you use to like classical music?
Note: When we talk about past habits we can also use would.
36
When we were children we used to/would play Cowboys and Indians together.
When I was a child, my elder brother used to/would take me to the cinema every Saturday morning.
When we talk about past states, we can use used to, but not •would.
My grandfather used to be a policeman, (not: My grandfather would be...)
Self check
I. Use the Simple Past or the Past Continuous Tense.
1.1 (hear, not) the thunder during the storm last night because I (sleep). 2. It was beautiful yesterday
when we went for a walk in the park. The sun (shine). A cool breeze (blow). The birds (sing). 3. My
brother and sister (argue) about something when I (walk) into the room. 4. I (get) a package in the mail.
When I (open) it, I (find) a surprise. 5. Stanley (climb) the stairs when he (trip) and (fall). Luckily, he (hurt,
not) himself. 6. While Mrs Emerson (read) the little boy a story, he (fall) asleep, so she (close) the book
and quietly (tiptoe) out of the room. 7.1 really (enjoy) my vacation last January. While it (snow) in Iowa,
the sun (shine) in Florida. While you (shovel) snow in Iowa, I (lie) on the beach in Florida. 8. It was my
first day of class. I (find, finally) the right room. The room (be, already) full of students. On one side of the
room, students (talk, busily) to each other in Spanish. Other students (speak) Japanese, and some
(converse) in Arabic. It (sound) like the United Nations. Some of the students, however, (sit, just) quietly
by themselves. I (choose) an empty seat in the last row and (sit) down. In a few minutes, the teacher
(walk) into the room and all the multilingual conversation (stop). 9. When I (arrive) she (have) lunch. She
(apologize) for starting without me but said that she always (lunch) at 12.30.10. He (wear, always) a
raincoat and (carry) an umbrella when he walked to the office. 11.1 (share) a flat with him when we were
students. He (complain, always) about my untidiness. 12. He suddenly (realize) that he (travel) in the
wrong direction. 13. He (play) the guitar outside her house when someone opened the window and
(throw) out a
37
bucket of water. 14.1 (open, just) the letter when the wind (blow) it out of my hand. 15; The burglar (open)
the safe when he (hear) footsteps. He immediately (put) out his torch and (crawl) under the bed. 16. The
boys (play) cards when they (hear) their father's step. They immediately (hide) the cards and (take) out
their lesson books. 17. He (not allow) us to go out in the boat yesterday as a strong wind (blow). 18. The
traffic (make) so much noise that I couldn't hear what he (say). 19. She (stand) at the bus-stop. I asked
her what bus she (wait) for. 20. When I (hear) his knock I (go) to the door and (open) it, but I (not
recognize) him at first because I (not wear) my glasses. 21. While the guests (dance) thieves (break) into
the house and (steal) a lot of fur coats. 22. She was very extravagant. She always (buy) herself new
clothes. 23. Her mother often (tell) her that she (spend) too much money but she never (listen). 24. Mr
Smith never (wake) up in time in the mornings and always (get) into trouble for being late; so one day he
(go) to town and (buy) an alarm clock. To get home he (have) to go through a field where a bad-tempered
bull usually (graze). This bull normally (not chase) people unless something (make) him angry,
ynfortunately, as Mr Smith (cross) the field, his alarm clock (go) off. This (annoy) the bull, who
immediately (begin) to chase Mr Smith. Mr Smith (carry) an open umbrella as it (rain) slightly. He (throw)
the umbrella to the ground and (run) away as fast as he could. The bull (stop) and (begin) to attack the
umbrella. While he (do) this Mr Smith escaped. 25. Why you (interrupt) me just now? I (have) a very
interesting conversation with Mr Pitt. 26. As they (walk) along the road they (hear) a car coming behind
them. Tom (turn) round and (hold) up his hand. The car (stop). 27. While he (make) his speech the
minister suddenly (feel) faint. But someone (bring) him a glass of water and after a few minutes he (be
able) to continue. 28.1 (see) you yesterday from the bus. Why you (use) a stick? — I (use) a stick
because I had hurt my leg that morning falling off a horse. — Whose horse you (ride)? 29. How you
(damage) your car so badly? —-1 (run) into a lamp-post yesterday. — I suppose you (drive) too quickly or
were not looking where you (go). 30.1 just (write) a cheque when I (remember) that I (have) nothing in the
bank 31. He (say) that he (build) himself a house and that he (think) it would be ready in two years. 32.
Why you (lend) him that book9 I (read, still) it. — I'm sorry. I (not know) that you (read, still) it
33. You (hear) what she just (say)? — No, I (listen, not). I (think) about something else. 34. Why you (not
be) at the meeting? — I (wait) for an overseas call from my family. 35. I'm sure you met Carol Jones at
the party last night. — I don't remember her. What (wear, she)? 36. How (break, you) your arm? — I (slip)
on the ice while I (cross) the street in front of the dorm. 37. Peter and Ann . (decide) to redecorate their
sitting-room themselves. They (choose) cream paint for the woodwork and apricot for the walls. When
John (look) in to see how they (get) on, Ann (mix), the paint, and Peter (wash) down the walls. They (be)
glad to see John and (ask) if he (do) anything special that day. He hastily (reply) he (go) to the theatre
and (go) away at once, because he (know) they (look) for someone to help them. They (begin) painting,
but (find) the walls (be) too wet. While they (wait) for the walls to dry, Ann (remember) she (have) a phone
call to make. Peter (start) painting while she (telephone), and (do) a whole wall before Ann (come) back.
He (grumble) that she always (telephone). Ann (retort) that Peter always (complain). They (work) in
silence for some time. Just as they (start) the third wall, the doorbell (ring). It (be) a friend of Peter's who
(want) to know if Peter (play) golf the following weekend. He (stay) talking to Peter in the hall while Ann
(go) on painting. At last he (leave). Peter (return), expecting Ann to say something about friends who
(come) and (waste) valuable time talking about golf. But Ann nobly (say) nothing. Then Peter (think) he
would do the ceiling. He just (climb) the step ladder when the doorbell (ring) again. Ann (say) she (get)
tired of interruptions but (go) and (open) the door. It (be) the postman with a letter from her aunt Mary,
saying she (come) to spend the weekend with them and (arrive) that evening at 6.30. 38. We (not get)
much sleep last night because the people next door (have) a noisy party. I (ring) up the landlord and (say)
that his tenants (make) too much noise. He (point out) that it (be) Saturday and that people in his house
often (have) parties on Saturday nights. 39. What you (do) before you (get) this job? — I (work) for Brown
and Company. — And how long you (stay) with them? — I (stay) for about six months. I (leave) because
they always (go) on strike. It (become) quite monotonous. 40. How you (break) your leg? — I (fall) off a
ladder when I (put) up curtains. The worst of it (be) that it (be) just before the holidays and I (go) away,
(had planned to go away) — So you

(not go) away? — No, of course not. I (cancel) my bookings and (spend) the holiday hobbling about at
home. 41. My neighbour (look) in last night and (say) that he (leave) the district and (go) to Yorkshire to a
new job. I (say) I (be) very sorry that he (go) and (tell) him to write to me from Yorkshire and tell me how
he (get) on. 42. As the goalkeeper (run) forward to seize the ball a bottle (strike) him on the shoulder. 43.
It (snow) heavily when he (wake) up. He (remember) that Jack (come) for lunch and (decide) to go down
to the station to meet him in case he (lose) his way in the snowy lanes. 44. It (be) midnight and I (be)
alone in the house. Outside it (rain) very hard. I (get) ready to go to bed when I suddenly (hear) a strange
noise outside my room in the corridor. Then, when I (look) at the door, I (notice) that someone (turn) the
handle! I (rush) over to the door and quickly (turn) the key in the lock. Then I (ask) in a trembling voice,
"Who is it?" 45. When I (introduce) Tom to Ryan, they (shake) hands and (smile) at each other. 46. Chris
(hurt) his finger when he was making his dinner last night. He accidentally (cut) it with a sharp knife.
II. Translate from Russian into English.
1. Вчера вечером шел сильный дождь, и мы не смогли пойти на стадион. 2. Я не ожидал тебя здесь
встретить. Когда ты приехал? 3. Я не успел на поезд в 10 часов и мне пришлось ждать следующего
целый час. 4. Мы не поняли друг друга. Я ждал его в здании университета, а он в это время ждал
меня на улице. 5. Стюардесса попросила пассажиров пристегнуть ремни, так как самолет шел на
посадку. 6. Ты вчера вечером был дома? — Нет, я ходил в театр. Мне очень понравился спектакль.
Игра актеров была великолепной. 7. Когда ты был в отпуске последний раз? — Прошлой зимой. —
Как ты его провел? — Прекрасно. Ходил на лыжах, катался на коньках. 8. Когда ты позвонил вчера,
я был занят. Я переводил наш новый контракт. 9. Вчера я опоздал на урок английского языка. Когда
я пришел, студенты писали сочинение. 10. Аня подмела пол, вымыла посуду, а потом стала
готовить домашнее задание. 11. Вчера мы купались, загорали, катались на лодке, играли в теннис.
Мы очень хорошо провели время. 12. Шел ли дождь, когда ты вышел из дома? 13. Он спускался
вниз по лестнице, когда я его увидел. 14. С кем ты
40
разговаривал, когда я встретил тебя в коридоре? 15. Что ты делала, когда я позвонила тебе вчера
вечером? — Я готовила ужин. 16. Ты была вчера дома в 5 часов? — Нет, я была в университете. В
это время я сдавала экзамен по грамматике. 17. В то время как я искал ключи в гостиной, моя жена
искала их в столовой. 18. Она без конца била посуду. 19. Она вечно жаловалась. 20. Почему тебя
не было на собрании вчера? — Я должен был встретить сестру на вокзале. 21. Когда ты видела его
в последний раз? — Неделю назад в библиотеке. 22. Пока я готовила обед, мой муж чинил
автомобиль. 23. Когда ты писал родителям в последний раз? — Месяц назад.
24. Мы жили в Москве 10 лет, а потом переехали в Минск.
25. Когда я вошел в зал, студенты все еще обсуждали первый доклад. 26. Мальчик ловил рыбу,
когда он упал в воду. 27. Пять лет назад я имел обыкновение рано вставать. 28. Неделю назад я
потерял свои очки, но два дня спустя я нашел их. 29. Стоял прекрасный летний день. Светило
солнце и пели птицы. 30. Он был очень занят, когда я его видел, так как на следующий день он
уезжал в командировку. 31. Почему ты был так сердит на него? 32. В прошлую субботу мой отец
ходил на рыбалку и поймал много рыбы. 33. Почему ты не позвонил мне? — Я вернулся домой
слишком поздно. 34. Кто видел вчера Елену? — Я. 35. Какие журналы он хотел показать мне? — Я
не знаю. 36. Вчера весь вечер они обсуждали планы на летний отпуск. 37. Вы работали на этом
заводе три года тому назад? 38. Вы просмотрели вчера эти документы? 39. Мы ужинали, когда моя
старшая сестра вернулась из университета. 40. Где ты встретил Анну? — Я встретил ее около
библиотеки, когда возвращался домой. 41. Кто купил подарок для Джейн? — Ник. 42. Сколько
писем вы напечатали вчера? — Двадцать. 43. Когда часы пробили двенадцать, мы пошли спать.
44. Я обедал, когда он мне позвонил. 45. Куда ты ходила после занятий? — В универмаг. 46. Когда
он вернулся из Лондона? — Неделю тому назад. 47. Он ведь показал тебе свою новую квартиру?
48. Дождь шел с пяти до семи. 49. Петр просматривал газеты, в то время как Аня смотрела
телепередачу. 50. Ты переводил статью весь вечер, не так ли? — Да, статья довольно трудная, и
мне пришлось многие слова смотреть по словарю. 51. Когда я пришел, машинистка все еще
печатала мои документы. 52. В прошлом го-
41

ду было много снега? — Да. 53. Когда вы получили это письмо? — Вчера утром. 54. Погода была
хорошая, и дети попросили меня повести их в парк. 55. На уроке английского языка преподаватель
задавал вопросы, а мы отвечали на них. 56. Я прочитал изложение сестры. В нем было несколько
ошибок. 57. Где вы его видели на прошлой неделе? — Мы видели его в театре. 58. Кто навестил
вас вчера? — Друзья моего сына. 59. Где ты была сегодня после обеда? Я приходила к тебе, но
тебя не было дома. 60. В котором часу ты сегодня обедал? — Я обедал в два. 61. Он пожал мне
руку и пожелал успеха в работе.
Fluency Listen, read and practise.
'Jane isn't very Pleased
John rang Jane last week. He wanted to invite her to the theatre. She was free on Friday, so they
arranged to meet outside the theatre at seven. It was raining and John came twenty minutes late. Jane
wasn't very pleased. They saw a thriller, but it wasn't very good. In fact, it was awful. They went to an
Italian restaurant after the theatre and had pizza and wine. The pizza was terrible and the wine wasn't
very good. John found he didn't have any money, so Jane paid for the meal. It was late when they came
out of the restaurant and there were no buses and no taxis, so they walked home in the rain. John rang
again the following Saturday to invite Jane to the cinema. Jane said she wasn't free.
A. Questions
1. When did John ring Jane the first time? 2. What did he want to do? 3. When was Jane free? 4. What
time did they arrange to meet? 5. What was the weather like? 6. When did John arrive? 7. Was Jane
pleased? 8. What did they see? 9. What was it like? 10. Where did they go after the theatre? 11. What did
they have? 12. Was the pizza good? What about the wine? 13. Who paid? 14. How did they get home?
15. What did John do the
42
following Saturday? 16. Was Jane free? 17. Why do you think she said she wasn't free?
B. Retell the text.
What's the Matter?
Yesterday Helen woke up at seven thirty. She had a quick shower, a cup of coffee, got into her car and
drove to work. She found a parking space outside the office door. "That's very strange," she thought as
she walked up to the front door of the office building; usually there were a lot of cars outside the office and
she left her car in another street.
The door was locked when she tried to open it. This was very unusual. She looked at her watch... it was
exactly nine o'clock! "The door is never locked at nine o'clock," she said to herself. She took out her key
and unlocked the door.
As she walked into the office, Helen saw that all the windows were closed. It was summer and her
secretary opened the windows and curtains when she arrived in the morning. But Helen's secretary
wasn't at her desk this morning. "Is there anybody here?" she shouted nervously. There was no answer.
Helen went to her office and sat down behind her desk. What was the matter? Where was everyone?
Then she saw her diary on the desk. "Oh no!" she said. "Today is Sunday!"
A. Ask questions on the text. Retell the text.
B. Have you ever had any experience of this sort?
'Reward for Virtue
My friend, Herbert, has always been fat, but things got so bad recently that he decided to go on a diet. He
began his diet a week * ago. First of all, he wrote a long list of the foods which were forbidden. The list
included most of the things Herbert loves: butter, potatoes, rice, beer, milk, chocolate and sweets.
Yesterday I paid him a visit. I rang the bell and was not surprised to see that Herbert was still as fat as
ever. He led me into his room and hurriedly hid a large parcel under his desk. It was obvious that he Was
very embarrassed. When I asked him what he was doing, he
43
smiled guiltily and then put the parcel on the desk. He explained that his diet was so strict that he had to
reward himself occasionally. Then he showed me the contents of the parcel. It contained five large bars of
chocolate and three bags of sweets!
A. Ask questions on the text. Retell the text.
Do the english Speak engdish?
I arrived in London at last. The railway station was big, black and dark. I did not know the way to my hotel,
so I asked a porter. I not only spoke English very carefully, but very clearly as well. The porter, however,
could not understand me. I repeated my question several times and at last he understood. He answered
me, but he spoke neither slowly nor clearly. "I'm a foreigner," I said. Then he spoke slowly, but I could not
understand him. My teacher never spoke English like that! The porter and I looked at each other and
smiled. Then he said something and I understood it. "You'll soon learn English!" he said. I wonder. In
England, each man speaks a different language. The English understand each other, but I don't
understand them! Do they speak English?
A. Ask questions on the text. Retell the text.
a Private Conversation
Last week I went to the theatre. I had a very good seat. The play was very interesting but I did not enjoy it.
A young man and a young woman were sitting behind me. They were talking loudly. I got very angry. I
looked at the man and the woman angrily. They did not pay any attention. In the end I could not bear it. I
turned round again. "I can't hear a word!" I said angrily. "It's none of your business," the young man said
rudely. "This is a private conversation!"
A. Ask questions on the text. Retell the text.
too late
The plane was late and detectives were waiting at the airport all morning. They were expecting a valuable
parcel of diamonds
44
from South Africa. A few hours earlier, someone had told the police that thieves would try to steal the
diamonds. When the plane arrived, some of the detectives were waiting inside the main building while
others were waiting on the airfield. Two men took the parcel off the plane and carried it into the Customs
House. While two detectives were keeping guard at the door, two others opened the parcel. To their
surprise, the precious parcel was full of stones and sand!
A. Ask and answer questions on the text. Retell the text.
an experience on the tube A woman is talking about her experience on the tube. I was travelling from
Hamburg to London. In fact it was on my way from Heathrow. I was very tired and I was looking forward
to getting home. As I was walking along the platform I saw two men walk up behind a young woman. She
was carrying her handbag over her shoulder. It was open. I was carrying two suitcases, but I walked
quickly and came up behind the two men. As one of them took the purse out of the handbag, I told him to
put it back. He dropped it immediately, turned and ran. A. Ask questions on the text. Retell the text.
an adventure
It was a typical summer afternoon; the sun was beating down, the cars were creeping slowly round the
corner of the park. Five or six children were playing in the stream by the fountain, jumping in and out of
the water, their laughter mixing with the noise of the traffic. All the world was wearing shorts or T-shirts, or
bathing costumes; yet Walter Harrison, sitting on a park bench in his overcoat, was feeling cold and
lonely. "Where will it all end?" he thought, as he watched the children splashing and laughing. After a few
minutes, he got up and walked through the park gates. His adventure was about to begin...
He stopped just before putting his key in the front door. Something was happening in the back garden...
Quietly, he crept around the side of the house and looked through the gate. Two
45
men were standing at the back of the house, holding a ladder. A third man was at the top of the ladder
and a fourth inside the house: he was passing furniture through the window to his partner, who then gave
it to his friends below. All four were working quietly and efficiently and the pile of furniture in the garden
was getting bigger and bigger by the minute. Walter could not believe his eyes: the strangers were
emptying his entire flat, and they were behaving as if it was the most normal thing in the world. He
coughed loudly and then said, "Excuse me!" — and the man at the top of the ladder dropped his portable
TV onto the concrete below. A. Ask and answer questions on the text. Retell the text.
an Accident
Mrs Cross is an old lady who lives in a village in the country outside Bristol. As she is a widow she lives
alone.
Last week she had an accident. It was raining and she was walking to the village store. She slipped on
the wet road, fell down and broke her hip. By chance, a local farmer was passing on his tractor. He went
back to his farm and telephoned for an ambulance.
hitckhiking
James was a student at Oxford University, where he was studying law. Like many students he did not
have much money because his grant was only just enough to live on. Last year, during the autumn term,
he decided to go to Manchester to visit some friends for the weekend, but he could not afford a train
ticket, and even the coach was too expensive, so he had to hitchhike. He caught a bus to the beginning of
the motorway and waited. It was a cold, windy November day and while he was waiting he got soaked to
the skin. After waiting two hours he finally got a lift from a lorry driver, who was in fact going all the way to
Manchester. James felt extremely relieved. The lorry driver seemed a friendly fellow of around 35,
reasonably well-dressed and he and James talked a lot. Suddenly, as they were driving along the
motorway, a police car raced past them and made them stop. They were taken to the police
46
station because the police suspected that the lorry was carrying stolen goods. A detective interrogated
James for two hours, and he even had to spend the night in a cell. He was eventually released the next
day. Apparently, the lorry was carrying stolen television sets. James swore that he would never hitchhike
again.
A. Ask and answer questions on the text. Retell the text.
B. Write about a memorable journey that you have made.
A wonderful holiday
Sandra Castle spent her holiday in Italy and had a wonderful time.
Hello. You look well. Where have you been?
I've just come back from Italy.
Oh. Did you have a good time?
Yes. Wonderful.
Where did you go exactly?
Rimini.
Did you go on a package holiday?
Yes, I did. It was very cheap.
Did you stay in a hotel?
Yes, I did.
And how long were you there?
A fortnight.
Did you go alone?
No, I went with my boyfriend.
And what was the weather like?
It was fantastic. It was really hot every day.
What did you do most days?
We went swimming and lay on the beach.
And what did you do in the evenings?
Some nights we went to a bar or a disco and other
nights we just stayed in the hotel.
Did you go on excursions?
No, we didn't.
Oh. Look at the time. I must rush. See you.
Bye.
A. Read the conversation. Ask each other questions about Sandra's holiday.
47
B. Roleplay the conversation.
C. Ask the person sitting next to you about one of his/her holidays. Ask about the weather, the hotel, the
room, the beach, the swimming pool, the food, the waiters. Here are some words ranging from good to
bad to help you answer.
Good OK Bad

fantastic not bad not very good

very nice quite good terrible
wonderful all right awful
very good OK really bad
Victor's trip to New york
Victor: I went to New York last week.
John: Really? When exactly did you go?
Victor: Last Monday. I flew. I went to the airport and
checked in. The girl behind the counter was beautiful. She said, "First class, business class or economy
class?"
John: Which did you choose? Did you have enough money for first or business class?
Victor: I hesitated, but I chose economy class.
John: Smoking or non-smoking?
Victor: Non-smoking. You know I gave up smoking a year ago.
John: Did you have anything to declare?
Victor: Mmh. No, but the customs officer told me to open my luggage.
John: Did he find anything?
Victor: No, he found nothing.
John: Victor, did you have an aisle seat?
Victor: No, I had a window seat.
John: Did you stay at a good hotel?
Victor: Not bad. I stayed at the Hotel Chelsea. It wasn't very expensive.
John: What sort of hotel was it?
Victor: It was full of artists and musicians.
John: I hope they didn't wake you up during the night.
48
Victor: No, because I didn't sleep during the night, I slept
during the day.
John: And what did you do during the night?
Victor: I went out.
John: Every night?
Victor: Practically.
John: Did you meet any nice girls?
Victor: Sure. I met a lot of nice girls.
John: Did you drink a lot of whisky?
Victor: Yes, I drank a lot of whisky.
John: Did you have a good time?
Victor: Yes, I had a great time.
Johnf Really!
A. Speak about Victor's trip to New York.
B. Roleplay the conversation.
C. Ask each other questions about your last journey by plane.
What a terrible holiday!
Tom MacDonald is talking about his holiday at Vista Beach. I have just come back from a fortnight at Vista
Beach. What a terrible holiday! The weather was awful, the town was boring, the hotel was dreadful and I
spent all the money. It rained almost every day and there was a strong wind which blew from the sea, so
that even when it didn't rain it was impossible to sit on the beach.
There wasn't much to do in the town — not many interesting places to visit. So I stayed in the hotel most
days and read a lot of books and watched a lot of rain. In the evenings I went out to
bars and discos and I drank a lot of wine — there were hundreds
of bars. The night life was good, but I didn't talk to many people,
because I didn't feel well.
The hotel looked beautiful in the travel brochure but when I
got there I found it was small and dirty. Most of the meals were badly cooked and the waiters were slow
and rather rude. I had a tiny room with one small window and a beautiful view of the local fish market.
What a smell! And what a noise! At five o'clock every morning the sound of lorries, fishermen and people
49
at the market always woke me up. I am back in England now
and I need a holiday.
A. Decide if the following sentences are true or false.
eg It didn't rain much. False. It rained a lot.
1 . He spent a lot of time on the beach.
2. He didn't spend much money.
3. He didn't have much good weather.
4. He didn't visit many places.
5. He didn't read many books.
6. There are a lot of bars at Vista Beach.
7. He didn't drink much wine.
8. He didn't speak to many people.
9. He ate a lot of good meals. 10. He got a lot of sleep.
B. Read the text and ask questions on the text.
C. Speak about Tom MacDonald's holiday at Vista Beach.
D. Speak about your last holiday. Say what you liked and what you didn 't like about it.
Last week it was New Year's Eve and we spent this holiday in Berlin. It was a new experience for us. First
of all everybody bought a lot of fireworks. Then on the evening of 31st December people gathered in
groups of friends and ate New Year's dinner or buffet meals. At 12 o'clock, midnight, the meals and
dancing stopped. Then everybody drank together and wished each other "Happy New Year". A moment
later thousands of fireworks went off in the sky above the city. At about 2 o'clock in the morning people
started eating cakes. They also drank strong coffee. Probably they didn't want to fall asleep.
A. Ask and answer questions on the text.
B. Tell how you celebrated New Year s Eve this year.
50
Today most people have a job of some kind, and their only free time is at the weekends. What do people
do with this time?
Let's take the Barclay family, for example. James Barclay works in one of Britain's larger cities. He's in his
middle forties. His wife is a secretary and they have two children, one ten and one thirteen. They have an
old car, and about once a month they are able to get out into the country. We talked to Jennifer, the eldest
daughter: "We don't go out a lot but sometimes we go to a place in the country which Mum and Dad
know. I think they knew it when they were, you know, younger. It's got a lake, well a pond really, and
trees. The dog likes it, he can run around and nobody really minds. It's a very quiet place. Dad doesn't do
very much. Often he just sleeps. Mum talks to the dog. Once, earlier this spring, Mum and Dad stopped at
a pub for a drink. Dad didn't want to stop because he said it was too expensive, but we stopped anyway,
and Mum and Dad went inside. Sharon and I stayed in the garden with the dog. Anyway, I think Mum
drank a bit too much. Dad didn't. He's too frightened of the police. You know, drinking and driving.
Anyway, we were driving down this road and we were stopped by the police. The policeman asked Dad to
blow into the bag, but he was really nervous and he couldn't do it. He's never been stopped by the police
before. Sharon and I were laughing in the back seat, but Mum was furious. "Give me that bag!" she
shouted at Dad. She took it from him and blew into it herself. "See?" she said to Dad. "Like that!" The
policeman looked at the bag, and then at my Mum. He said, "I can see you've had a few drinks, madam.
It's lucky you're not driving!"
A. Read the text. Ask and answer questions about the Barclays' drive into the country.
B. Retell the text.
C. Do you often go to the country? What was your last picnic like? How do you generally spend your
weekends? What about the members of your family?
51
Steve: Look, here's a letter from Jack Stevens. Do you remember him, Jill? I used to share a room with
him in my first year at college.
Jill: Jack Stevans? Is he the one who used to play the guitar very well?
Steve: Guitar? No, Jack didn't play the guitar! He used to play cards and win!
Jill : Did he smoke very heavily too?
Steve: Yes, that's right.
Jill: What does he say in the letter?
Steve: Oh. Didn't I say? He wants to come and see us!

Old Jim: We had a hard life! When I was a boy—eight years old—I used to work for a few pennies. I made
tea for the coalminers here in Derbyshire.
Grandson: How many hours did you use to work at the weekend, Grandad?
Old Jim: Well, we were busy from six o'clock on Saturday morning until eleven on Sunday evening. We
used to stay in the mines for thirty-six hours at the weekend.
Grandson: That was a long time, Grandad!
An old man was sitting on a seat in a small park, surrounded by new red brick houses. A young man with
a dog came up and sat down beside him.
"It's all changed," said the old man, shaking his head sadly. "You see over there, where those houses are.
That used to be the orchard. They used to grow some of the finest pears and apples in the County there.
And over there; you see that house with the green door; there used to be a pond there. When I was a lad,
we often used to fish in it. I don't know what happened to that pond. It must be there somewhere under
somebody's foundations."
52
"Are you sure it was there?" asked the young man. "Where the house with the green door stands?" "I'm
positive," replied the old man. The young man looked a little anxious. "That's my house," he said, "the one
with the green door."
A. Questions
1. Where was the old man sitting? 2. What was the park surrounded by? 3. What did the old man say? 4.
Why did the young man look anxious?
B. Turn the following thoughts into USED TO ideas:
eg They grew fine apples there. or
They used to grow fine apples there.
1. They kept cows in that field. 2. There was a tall hedge there. 3. We went to the seaside in the summer.
4. My father took us sailing on the lake. 5. We often went for picnics in the woods. 6. Silvia lived in Kiel,
now she lives in Munich. 7.1 liked sugar in my tea when I was very young, now I don't. 8. There was a
meadow where that school stands. 9. He had his own horses at one time.
C. Study this sentence:
My brother used to work for PanAm, now he works for Intercontinental Hotels.
We often use this combination of used to with a simple present idea. Make similar sentences:
1. Kim live Georgia/now Texas
2. Alice dancer/now actress
3. Sylvia play guitar/now cello
4. Bob drive long distance lorry/ now coach
5. Mr Church repair clocks/now watches
6. Cyril write The Times/now The Telegraph 1. George play for Spurs/now Fulham
8. Frank teach children/now adults
9. David soldier/now policeman
10. Amelia write love stories/now detective stories
53
Now what about you? Can you think of some similar statements you could make about yourself?
D. Think back to when you were a child. Answer the following questions as truthfully as possible, using
used to:
eg Where did you go to school? I used to go to school in Linz.
1. Give the name of a child you played with when you were young. 2. What sort of food did you like then?
3. What games did you enjoy? 4. What was your favourite season of the year? 5. What sort of things did
you do in the holidays? 6. What did you dislike doing? 7. Where did you live? 8. What toys did you have?
9. How did you go to school? 10. Which lessons did you like?
E. The negative form of used to is didn 't use to and to ask questions we use the form: Did you use to...?
Look at this conversation:
- Lousie, "Did you use to like school?" Sally, "Yes, I did, didn't you?" or "No, I didn't, did you?"
Make more conversations like this. Here are some ideas:
have many friends like your teachers enjoy writing compositions play a lot of games dislike any lessons
F. Think back to your first year at school. Write a short account of the things you used to do, and the way
you used to feel.

Sometimes I think about my childhood and remember how simple my life used to be. My life is different
today. I have more responsibilities today and more pressure.
I used to live in a big house with my parents and brothers and sisters. My mother used to cook my meals
and wash my clothes. My father used to play soccer with me. Sometimes, on the weekend, we used to go
fishing together. If I needed something,
54
I used to ask my family. They used to give me money for school books and clothes. Sometimes they gave
me money so I could go to the movies. When I was little, I didn't have to get up too early and I didn't have
much homework.
Today, I have to take care of myself. No one else cooks my meals or washes my clothes. And no one else
pays my rent. Today, I don't have much time for soccer and fishing. I have to get up early, and I have to
work hard. If I want to go to the movies or go on a date, I have to save my money. No one else gives it to
me. And I have to worry about my flat tires and running out of gas. Yes, it's hard work being an adult!
A. Now use the composition as a model and write about yourself. Compare your life now with your life
before. Give your composition a title and be sure to answer these questions. Paragraph 1
1. What do you remember about your childhood?
2. Is your life different today?
3. How is it different?
Paragraph 2
1. Where did you use to live or who did you live with?
2. Who used to take care of you?
3. What did you use to do in your free time?
4. Where did you get your spending money? Paragraph 3
1. Do you take care of yourself today?
2. What kinds of things do you have to do for yourself?
3. Do you have much free time?
4. How do you spend your time?
5. What do you do when you need money for special things?
6. Is it hard work being an adult?

I remember sailing on a pond that used to be my grandfather's sawmill — we had a boat, and we used to
go sailing on this. Also we used to do a lot of climbing trees. We used to climb those trees for apples,
which we then ate and made ourselves very sick. And my mother would come along and complain very
strongly,
55
but I don't think that stopped us at all. And of course in those days I had a bike, too, and I remember I
used to push it up this very long hill near our house and then I'd get on and ride down as fast as I could
go. My mother used to complain about that, too.
A. Read the text. Analyse the use of used to and would.
B. Ask and answer questions on the text. Retell the text.
C. Try to remember what you used to/would do some time ago.
Present Perfect and Present Perfect Continuous
The Present Perfect has three main uses.
1. It expresses an action which began in the past and still continues.
Kate and Ken have been married for twenty years. (=They
are still married now.)
She has worked in London for six months. (=She still works
in London now.)
How long have you lived here? (=You still live here now.)
Note the time expressions that are common with this use. We use/or with a period of time, and since with
a point in time.
two years ' 1970
a month the end of the lesson
for a few minutes since August
half an hour 800
ages Christmas
2. It expresses an experience that happened at some time in one's life. The action is in the past and
finished, but the effects of the action are still felt. When the action happened is not important.
I've been to the States. (I still remember.)
She's written poetry, children's stories and biographies.
(In her writing career)
Have you ever had an operation? (At any time in your life
up to now)
How many times has he been married? (In his life)
Note the adverbs that are common with this use.
56
Have you ever been to Australia?
I have never tried salmon before. It is very nice.
Note that questions and answers about definite times are expressed in the Past Simple.
When did you go to the States?
Was her poetry published while she was alive?
I broke my leg once, but I didn't have to stay in hospital.
He met his second wife in the dry cleaner's.
3. It expresses a past action that has a present result. The action is usually in the recent past.
I've lost my wallet.(I haven't got it now.) The taxi hasn't arrived. (We're still waiting for it.) What have you
done to your lip? (It's bleeding.) Peter has shaved his beard off. (He looks different.)
We often announce "news" in the Present Perfect, because the speaker is emphasizing the event as a
present fact.
Have you heard? The Prime Minister has resigned.
Susan's had her baby!
I've ruined the meal. It's burnt.
Note the adverbs that are common with this use.
I haven't done my homework yet. (Negative) Has the postman been yet1? (Question) I've already done my
homework. 1've/M.y/ seen some scissors. Now where did I put them? Again, details about definite time
will be in the Past Simple. She had a baby boy this morning. It was a difficult birth.
1. The Present Perfect Continuous expresses an activity which began in the past and is still continuing
now.
I've been working all day.
How long have you been sitting here?
I've been learning English for three years.
They've been listening to the radio all morning.
57
2. The Present Perfect Continuous expresses a past activity which has caused a present result.
I've been working all day. (I'm tired now.) Have you been crying? (Your eyes are red.) Roger's been
cutting the grass. (I can smell it.)
The past activity might be finished or it might not. The context usually makes this clear.
Look outside the window! It's been snowing! (It has
stopped snowing now.)
I've been writing this book for two years. (It isn't finished.)
Present Perfect Continuous and Present Perfect Simple
1. When we use the Present We use the Present Perfect Perfect Continuous^ the action
Simple when the action is finished, may be finished or not finished.
She's been doing her homework. She's done her homework.
(=Perhaps she has finished it, (=She has finished it.) perhaps she has not.)
2. We use the Present Perfect We use the Present Perfect Continuous to talk about how
Simple to talk about what long something has been in has been achieved in a period progress.
of time.
I've been walking all morning. I've walked six kilometres
so far this morning.
How long have you been having How many driving lessons
driving lessons? have you had?
3. We use the Present Perfect We use the Present Perfect Continuous for situations which
Simple for situations which are more temporary (continuing are more permanent (continuing for a
short time). for a longer time).
He's been living there for just He's always lived there, a few weeks.
I've been working very hard You've worked hard all your
recently. life.
There is sometimes no difference between the Simple and the Continuous.
I've played/I've been playing the piano since I was a boy. I've been living /I've lived in this flat for ten
years. How long has she been working/has she worked for the company?
Remember that state verbs rarely take the Continuous. I've had this book for ages. I've always loved
sunny days.
Present Perfect and Past Simple
1. The Present Perfect always connects the past and the present; the Past Simple tells us only about the
past:
a. We use the Present Perfect We use the Past Simple to talk
to talk about something which about something which started
started in the past and and finished in the past, continues up to the present.
I've lived in London for I lived in Manchester for ten
ten years. (=1 still live years. (=1 do not live in Manchester
in London now.) now.)
He has worked in a shop for He worked in a factory for ten
five years. (=He still years. (= He does not work in
works in the shop now.) the factory now.)
How long have you been How long were you there? (=
here? (=You are still here now.) You are not there now.')
• b. We also use the Present We use the Past Simple when
Perfect when the result of a the result of a past action is
past action is connected to not connected to the present, the present.
I've lost my wallet. (= I have I lost my wallet, but I've got
not got the wallet now.) it back again now.
We often use the Present Perfect We use the past to give
to announce "news". details of the news.
Someone has stolen my motorbike. I left the bike outside for
a few minutes and when I came back, it wasn't there.
2. When we say a definite past time eg yesterday, last week, six weeks ago, we always use the Past
Simple, never the Present Perfect.
I lost my wallet yesterday, (not: I've lost my wallet
yesterday.)
Someone stole my bicycle last week, (not: Someone has
We use the Present Perfect to talk about an indefinite time up to the present eg ever, never, recently.
Compare:
Present Perfect Past Simple
Have you ever seen a ghost? Did you see your friend yesterday?
I've never been to New York. I went to London last week.
I've started taking driving I started taking driving lessons lessons recently. six
weeks ago.
In conversations, we often begin indefinitely, with the Present Perfect, then we use the Past Simple when
we think about the definite time that something happened.
"Have you ever been to the United States?" "Yes, I went
there in 1985." "Did you go to New York (= when you
were there in 1985)?"
I've seen that film. I enjoyed it (= when I saw it) very
much.
3. We can use today, this morning, this afternoon, etc:
with the Present Perfect when with the past when these
these periods of time are not finished. periods of time are finished. I've spoken to Peter this morning.
I spoke to Peter this morning.
(It is still morning.) (It is now afternoon, evening,
or night time.)
4. We normally use a past tense, not the Present Perfect, to ask when something happened.
When did you arrive home last night? (not: When have
you arrived home last night
Present perfect and present tense
To say how long something has continued, we can use the Present Perfect, but not the Present
Continuous or Present Simple.
She has been waiting for an hour, (not: She is waiting for 60
an hour.) I've lived here since last year, (not: I live here since last year.)
Self check
I. Choose the correct form.
A. Lynne Carter, the manager of the Timeways Travel company, is interviewing a young man called Paul
Morris for a job.
Lynne: Your present company is Sun Travel, isn't it? How long have you worked/did you work there?
Paul: I've worked/I worked for them for two years.
Lynne: I see. And what were you doing before that?
Paul: I've worked/I worked for a student travel company in Spain.
Lynne: Oh, really? How long have you been/were you in Spain?
Paul: For nearly a year. I've moved/I moved back to London from Spain two years ago to join Sun Travel.
Lynne: I see. And do you drive, Paul?
Paul: Yes, I do. I've had/I had a driving license for five years.
Lynne: And have you got your own car?
Paul: No, not at the moment. I've had/I had a car in Spain, but I've sold/ I sold it before I've come/I came
back to Britain.
B. 1. We've been working/We're working since 9 o'clock. 2. I've been cleaning/I'm cleaning my flat for the
past two hours. 3. Look. Can you see Simon over there? He's been sitting/He's sitting in the corner. 4.
"How long have you been/are you ill?" "Since yesterday." 5. Have you known Sarah/Do you know Sarah
for very long? 6. I've been learning English/I'm learning English since last year. 7. They've lived/They live
in London now. They've been/They're there for the last six months.
C. 1. "Can I have a look at your newspaper?" "Certainly. You can keep it if you like. I've been reading/I've
read it." 2. They've been repairing/They've repaired the road all this week, but they haven't finished it yet.
3. I'm very sorry, but I've been breaking/
61
I've broken this chair. 4. Sally has been saving/has saved nearly two thousand pounds so far this year. 5.
What's the matter? Have you been losing/Have you lost something? 6. I've always been working/I've
always worked in the music industry. 7. Someone has been eating/has eaten my chocolates. There aren't
many left.
II. Put the verbs in brackets into the correct tense: Present Perfect, Present Perfect Continuous or Simple
Past.
1.1 (buy) a new house last year, but I (not sell) my old house yet, so at the moment I have two houses. 2.
When Ann (be) on her way to the station it (begin) to rain. Ann (run) back to her flat for her umbrella, but
this (make) her late for her train. 3. I'm sorry I'm late, (you, wait) long? 4. At 7 a.m. Charles (ring) Peter
and (say), "I'm going fishing, Peter. Would you like to come?" "But it's so early," (say) Peter. "I (not have)
breakfast yet. Why you (not tell) me last night?" 5. Tom (meet) Paul at lunch time and (say), "I (not see)
you at the bus stop this morning. You (miss) the bus?" "I (not miss) it," (reply) Paul. "I (not miss) a bus for
years. But this morning George (give) me a lift." 6. Those two men (stand) outside the house for over two
hours. Do you think we should call the police? 7. Ann (go) to Canada six months ago. She (work) in
Canada for a while and then (go) to the United States. 8. You look tired. I think you (work) too hard lately
and you (not/get) enough fresh air and exercise. 9. Peter (try) to come in quietly but his mother (hear) him
and (call) out, "Where you (be)? Your supper (be) in the oven for an hour." 10. "Annie's clothes are very
dirty. What (she/do)?" "She (play) in the garden." 11. Mary (be) in Japan for two years. She is working
there and likes it very much. — How she (go)? — She (go) by air. 12. Bill usually has breakfast at 8.00.
Yesterday at 8.30 Peter (meet) Bill and (offer) him an apple. "No, thanks," (say) Bill. "I just (have)
breakfast." 13.1 (read) his books when I was at school. I (enjoy) them very much. 14. The clock is slow.
— It isn't slow, it (stop). 15. He (not smoke) for two weeks. He is trying to give it up. 16. The actors (arrive)
yesterday and (start) rehearsals early this morning. 17. It (be) cold this year. I wonder when it is going to
get warmer. 18. You (lock) the door before you (leave) the house 9 19. You (wear) your hair long when you
were at school? — Yes, my mother (insist) on it. But when I (leave) school I (cut) my hair
62
and (wear) it short ever since. 20. Sally and her boyfriend Peter (go out) together since last winter. 21.
The concert (begin) at 2.30 and (last) for two hours. Everyone (enjoy) it very much. 22. We (miss) the
bus. Now we'll have to walk. 23. He (break) his leg in a skiing accident last year. 24. Mr Count (work) as a
cashier for twenty-five years. Then he (retire) and (go) to live in the country. 25. You (be) here before? —
Yes, I (spend) my holidays here last year. — You (have) a good time? — No, it never (stop) raining. 26.
Where is Tom? — I (not see) him today, but he (tell) Mary that he'd be in for dinner. 27. Where you (find)
this knife? — I (find) it in the garden. — Why you (not leave) it there? 28.1 (lose) my black gloves. You
(see) them anywhere? — I'm afraid I.... When you last (wear) them? — I (wear) them at the theatre. —
Perhaps you (leave) them at the theatre. 29. He (leave) the house at 8.00. — Where he (go)? — I (not
see) where he (go). 30. Why you (not bring) me the letters for signature? You (not type) them yet? 31.
Tom: You (sunbathe)? Mary: Don't be ridiculous! It (rain) all day. 32. You (finish) checking the accounts?
— No, not quite. I (do) about half so far. 33. How you (get) that scar? — I (get) it in a car accident a year
ago. 34. I (make) cakes. That is why my hands are all covered with flour. 35.1 (not know) that you (know)
Mrs Pitt. How long you (know) her? — I (know) her for ten years. 36. You (hear) his speech on the radio
last night? — Yes, I... — What you (think) of it? 37.1 (not know) that you (be) here. You (be) here long? —
Yes, I (be) here two months. — You (be) to the Cathedral? — Yes, I (go) there last Sunday. 38. You ever
(try) to give up smoking? — Yes, I (try) last year, but then I (find) that I was getting fat so I (start) again.
39. Peter: You (telephone) for ages. You not nearly (finish)? Jack: I (not get) through yet. I (try) to get our
Paris office but the line (be) engaged all morning. 40. You (see) today's paper? — No, anything
interesting (happen)? — Yes, two convicted murderers (escape) from the prison down the road. 41. Mary
(feed) the cat? — Yes, she (feed) him before lunch. — What she (give) him? — She (give) him some fish.
42. How long you (know) your new assistant? — I (know) him for two years. — What he (do) before he
(come) here? — I think he (be) in prison. 43. Arm (fail) her driving test three times because she's so bad
at reversing. But she (practise) reversing for the last week and I think she (get) a bit better at it. 44.1 (not
see) your aunt recently. — No. She (not
63
be) out of her house since she (buy) her colour TV. 45. How long that horrible monument (be) there? — It
(be) there six months. Lots of people (write) to the Town Council asking them to take it away but so far
nothing (be) done. 46. Tom is convinced that there is gold in these hills but we (search) for six months and
(not see) any sign of it. 47. How long you (be) out of work? — I'm not out of work now. I just (start) a new
job. — How you (find) the job? — I (answer) an advertisement in the paper. 48. Peter (be) a junior clerk
for three years, lately he (look) for a better post but so far he (not find) anything. 49. He (lose) his job last
month and since then he (be) out of work. — Why he (lose) his job? — He (be) rude to Mr Pitt. 50. Her
phone (ring) for ten minutes. I wonder why she doesn't answer it. 51.1 just (be) to the film "War and
Peace". You (see) it? — No, I.... Is it like the book? — I (not read) the book. — I (read) it when I (be) at
school. — When Tolstoy (write) it? — He (write) it in 1868. — He (write) anything else? 52. I (bathe).
That's why my hair is wet. 53. You (book) your hotel room yet? — Well, I ( write) to the hotel last week but
they (not answer) yet. 54. Mary (cry)? — No, she (not cry), she (peel) onions. 55. He walked very
unsteadily up the stairs and his wife said, "You (drink)!" 56. Peter: You (see) any good films lately? Ann:
Yes, I (go) to the National Film Theatre last week and (see) a Japanese film. Peter: You (like) it? — Ann:
Yes, I (love) it, but of course I (not understand) a word. 57. Father: Tom (not come) back yet? Mother:
Yes, he (come) in an hour ago. He (go) straight to bed. Father: Funny. I (not hear) him. 58. You (be) to
Cornwall? —Yes, I (be) there last Easter. — You (go) by train? — No, I (hitch-hike). 59. When 1 (be)
seventeen I (start) my university course. — When you (get) your degree? — Oh, 1 (not get) my degree
yet; I'm still at the university. I only (be) there for two years. 60. You look exhausted! — Yes, I (play) tennis
and I (not play) for years, so I'm not used to it. 61. The man (stand) at the bus stop for half an hour Shall I
tell him that the last bus already (go)? 62. I wonder if anything (happen) to Tom. I (wait) an hour now. He
often (keep! me waiting but he never (be) quite so late as this. 63. I hope you're enjoying your visit to
England. You (meet) an\ Englishmen yet? — Yes, I (meet) a man called Smith at a party last night. —
What you (talk) about? — We (talk) about tht weather.
64
64. Ann: Hello, Jack! I (not see) you for ages! Where you (be)? Jack: I (be) in Switzerland. I (mean) to
send you a postcard
but I (not have) your address with me. Ann: Never mind. You (have) a good time in Switzerland?
How long you (stay) there? Jack: I just (get) back. Yes, I (enjoy) it thoroughly. I (ski)
all day and (dance) all night. Ann: I (ski) when I (be) at the university, but I (break) a
leg five years ago and since then I (not do) any.
65. Kate: You (be) to Hampton Court?
Jane: Yes, I (go) there last week. The tulips (be) wonderful. Kate: You (go) by car?
Jane: No, I (go) with my English class. We (hire) a coach. Kate: Where else you (be) since you (come) to
England? Jane: Oh, I (be) to Stratford and Coventry and Oxford. Kate: You (see) a lot. When you (go) to
Stratford? Jane: I (go) last week. The people I work for (take) me. Kate: You (see) a play at the Royal
Shakespeare Theatre
when you (be) at Stratford? Jane: Yes, we (see) Macbeth. We were very lucky. We just
(walk) in and (ask) if they (have) any returned tickets,
and the girl at the box office (say), "Yes, a man just
(return) three stalls." Kate: You (be) to Wales? Jane: No, I (be) to Scotland but I (not be) to Wales. I'd like
to go.
66. There (be) a very good programme on TV last night. You (see) it? — No, I (take) my set back to the
shop last week because there (be) so much distortion; and they (say) it (need) a new part. They (not be
able) to get the new part so far, so I (not watch) television for about ten days.
67. A: Do you do much travelling? B: Yes, I like to travel.
A: What countries (visit, you)? '
B: Well, I (be) in India, Turkey, Afganistan, and Nepal,
among others. A: I (be, never) in any of those countries. When (be,
you) in India? B: Two years ago. I (visit, also) many of the countries
in Central America. I (take) a tour of Central America
about six years ago. A: Which countries (visit, you)? B: Guatemala, El Salvador, Honduras, and
Nicaragua. A: I (want, always) to travel to other countries, but I (have not) the opportunity to travel
extensively. I (go) to.England six years ago, but I (go not) anywhere since then. 68. Rachel: Hello,
Bob.
Bob: Hello. I (not see) you for a long time. Rachel: I (see) you in town two or three weeks ago, but
you (not see) me. I (be) on a bus. Bob: Well, how are things? Are you still living over
the shop?
Rachel: No, I (move) now. I (find) a super flat just before I went on holiday. I (be) there three months.
Bob: ...you (pass) your driving test yet? Rachel: Yes, I have. I (pass) in October. I (not buy) a car
yet, though. But what about you, Bob? ... anything exciting (happen) to you lately? Bob: No, not
really. My mother (not be) very well
for a few months now. Rachel: Oh, dear. I'm sorry to hear that. Bob: And my brother's out of work.
Rachel: ... he (leave) school in the summer, then? Bob: Yes. He (not do) very well in his exams
and he
(not find) a job yet.
Rachel: Are you still working at Scott's? Bob: Yes. They ... just (give) me a pay rise. Rachel:
Well, that's one piece of good news. 69. Jill phones Pam at the office.
Jill: How long you (work) for Barnett & Company? Pam: For three weeks, since the beginning of
August.
Jeff (know) Graham Barnett since their college
hours.
Jill: Do you like the work? Pam: Yes, but it's very hectic here. I (type) letters —
three hours and I (not finish) yet. I (not have) a
cup of tea since breakfast at 7, and I (not smoke) a
cigarette since after breakfast.
66
Jill: Cigarettes? But you don't smoke! (you, start) smoking again?
Pam : Yes, unfortunately. Jill: And how long you (smoke) again? Pam: For three weeks, since I
(start) work in this hectic
office.
70. Carol: Do you want a magazine? Tom: No thanks I (read) them all. Carol: Oh, how long
(you/wait)? Tom: I feel as if I (wait) for hours but I suppose I (only/
be) here for fifteen minutes. Carol: What time is your appointment? Tom: I (not/make) an
appointment. I (just/drop in)
on the off-chance of seeing someone. Carol: Have you got bad toothache then? Tom: Yes, it (give)
me trouble for over a week now. Carol: (you/be) to the dentist before? Tom: No, it's the first time I
(ever/be) here. Carol: Well, I (come) here for about five years. They're
very good.
Tom: (you/just/come in) for a check-up? Carol: No, I (lose) a filling so it needs replacing. Woman: Mr
Hill, the dentist will see you now. (you/fill in)
the card yet?
Tom: Yes, I (already/give) it to the receptionist. Woman:Thank you. Perhaps you could go to Surgery 2.
Mr Sharp is ready for you. Carol: Good luck.
71. Ann Jones is one of the most interesting people I (meet): she is only twenty-five, but she (travel) to
over fifty different countries. Five years ago, she (be) a typist in Birmingham, but she (decide) to give up
her job and see the world. Since then her life (change) completely
The first time she (go) abroad was seven years ago, when she (be) just eighteen. She (take) a boat to
France and then (hitchhike) around Europe for five weeks. She (visit) Europe many times since that first
trip, of course, but this holiday (be) the one which (make) her start travelling. She (never forget) the
excitement of those five w ^eks — although it was not all enjoyable. When she (be) in Munich, somebody
(steal) her purse;
67
she (lose) all her money, and (have) to work in a restaurant for a fortnight. She (make) some good friends
there, however, and (return) several times since then.
How did she find the money for her travels? After her first trip abroad, she (go) home and (work) for two
years, saving all the time. Now she travels continually, finding work when her money gets low. She (make)
a lot of friends, she says, and (learn) quite a few languages. Although she (have) occasional difficulties
and (often/be) sick, she (never/think) about giving up her travels. "The first time I (go) abroad (change) my
life," she says, "and I (want) to travel ever since."
III. Translate from Russian into English.
1. Тебе не придется идти в кассу. Я уже заказал билеты по телефону. 2. Где ваш брат? Я давно не
вижу его. — Он сейчас живет во Франции. Они эмигрировали три года назад. 3. Я давно видела эту
пьесу. Я уже забыла ее. 4. Ты уже перевел текст? — Нет еще. В нем слишком много незнакомых
слов. 5. Вы хорошо знаете город. Как долго вы живете в Лондоне? — С 1985 года. 6. Могу я
поговорить с мистером Смитом? — Он только что вышел. 7. Я звоню ей с трех часов, но ее нет
дома. 8. Я никогда не бьш в Риме и с нетерпением жду поездки туда в мае. 9. Почему вы
пропустили занятия по английскому языку в четверг? — Я уезжал в командировку. 10. Поезд из
Варшавы уже пришел? — Нет, он прибывает через полчаса. 11. Сколько лет ты уже живешь в
общежитии? — Два года. 12. Целый вечер моя жена пишет письма. Она написала уже пять писем.
13. Вы когда-либо бывали в Вашингтоне? — Да, я ездил в Вашингтон пять лет назад. Там
проходила конференция по правам человека, и я делал доклад. 14. Где Анна? — Она вышла
погулять час назад и еще не вернулась. 15. В библиотеке было много народу, и я решил пойти туда
вечером. 16. Она выглядит очень усталой. — Ничего удивительного. Последнее время она очень
много работает. 17. Я хотел посмотреть этот фильм на прошлой неделе, но смог посмотреть его
юлько вчера. 18. Как долго ты здесь находишься? — С пяти часов. 19. Я не вижу Лену последнее
время. — Я тоже. 20. Что ты читаешь? — "Унесенные ветром." Это очень интересная книга. Ты
читал ее? —
68
Нет еще. 21. Где Николай? Я жду его уже целый час. — Я видел его в библиотеке минут десять
назад. 22. Мы не виделись с Виктором с тех пор, как были в театре в последний раз. 23. Когда дети
вернулись из школы? — Часа три назад. — Они уже сделали уроки? — Нет еще. Сейчас они
отдыхают. 24. Я потерял ключи. Вы их не видели? — Посмотрите на том письменном столе. Там
лежат два ключа. Возможно, они ваши. 25. Пойдем погуляем. — К сожалению, не могу. Я еще не
написал сочинение. 26. Нина чем-то огорчена.—Да, она готовилась к экзамену целую неделю, но
получила тройку. 27. Где ты был вчера вечером? — Я ходил навестить своего друга. Он уже две
недели болеет. 28. Раз или два раза в месяц я получаю письма от родителей. Но в прошлом
месяце я не получал письма от них и очень волнуюсь. 29. Мы уезжаем рано утром. Я заказал
такси, чтобы не опоздать на поезд. 30. Наконец, я нашел справочник. Я искал его везде. 31. Ты уже
уложила вещи? Мы выезжаем через час. 32. Мы выполняем лабораторную работу уже полчаса.
Некоторые студенты уже закончили ее. 33. Вы уже переехали на новую квартиру? — Нет, мы
переезжаем на следующей неделе. 34. Кого ты ждешь? —Марию. — Ты давно здесь стоишь? —
Около двадцати минут. 35. Пока мисс Грин печатала письмо, мистер Уэст просматривал
документы. 36. Когда ты уезжаешь в Рим? — Через неделю. Я уже заказал билет на 15 мая. 37. Я
никогда не был в Китае, но я был в Японии. В прошлом году я ездил туда в командировку. 38. Я
печатаю документы уже час, но еще не закончила печатать их. 39. Вы давно живете в Минске? —
Нет, мы переехали в Минск два года назад. 40. Что ты делаешь? — Выполняю домашнее задание.
41. Когда они вернулись из Москвы? — Вчера вечером. — Они принимали участие в выставке, не
так ли? — Да, и выставка им очень понравилась. 42. Вы бывали здесь раньше? — Да, я провел
здесь свой отпуск в прошлом году. — Вы хорошо провели время? — Да, погода была хорошая,
было весело. 43. Извини, что я опоздал. Ты давно ждешь? 44. Виктора сегодня нет на работе. Он
уже две недели болеет. 45. Ты не знаешь, они Уже заказали номер в гостинице? — Думаю, что да.
46. Что ты делала все утро? — Работала в саду. Я только что при-Шла. 47. Ты видел сегодня
Роберта? — Да, он недавно при-Ходил сюда и вскоре ушел. 48. Ты купил продукты, о кото-
69
рых я просила? — Да, я ходил за покупками после обеда. 49. Экзаменаторы уже пришли; три
студента уже готовятся отвечать. 50. Я никогда не забуду вашу добро гу. Вы всегда были так
внимательны ко мне. 51 Я знаю его много лет, он всегда был мне хорошим другом. 52. Где вы
купили этот чудесный ковер? — Он у меня с тех пор, как я переехал на эту квартиру. Я купил его
три года назад в Центральном универмаге.
Fluency Listen, read and practise.
Mrs Bell is out. Jenny and Nick are cooking dinner to surprise her.
Jenny: I've washed the lettuce and I've chopped the tomatoes. I can make the salad now.
Nick: No you can't. You haven't peeled the potatoes yet.
Jenny: Oh yes, I have. Look! Here they are. I've already cooked them. And what have you done? Have
you finished the washing up yet?
Nick: Yes, I've just finished the washing up.
A. Questions
\. What are the children doing at the moment? 2. What has Jenny done? 3. What has Nick done?
B. It V Saturday, and Judy and Paul Johnson are doing lots of things around the house. They are
checking the list of things they have to do today. On the list below, check the things they've already done.
— do the laundry
— wash the kitchen windows
— pay the bills
— clean the garage
— fix the bathroom sink
— vacuum the living room
70
C. Tell about your experience in the place where you live. What have you done''' What haven 'tyou done
yet?
D. Make a list of things you usually do at school, at work, or at home Check the things you 've already
done this week. Share your list with other students in your class. Tell about what you 've done and what
you haven't done.

Nick: Have you seen Ben?

Tom: Yes, I saw him about ten minutes ago.
Nick: Where did you see him?
Tom: In the park. He was arguing with Jason.
Nick: Jason? But he's twice as big as Ben. Have you ever
had an argument with him?
Tom: I once had a fight with him and two other boys. Nick: Did you win?
Tom: No, I lost. But it wasn't a fair fight. Later...
Nick: Ben! Are you all right? What's happened? You've torn your trousers, and you've lost all your buttons.
Ben: Well, I've only lost a few buttons, but Jason has lost the fight.
A. Study and practise the conversation.
B. Complete the letter with the Present Perfect Simple or the Past Simple of the verbs in brackets.
Dear Jenny,
I'm sorry I (not write) for a long time.
I (get) your last letter in July. A lot of things (happen) since then.
In August we (go) on holiday to Spain. It was great! I (never have) such a good time. I (even learn) a few
words of Spanish.
Only two bad things (happen) there. I (lose) my new camera, and my sister (fall) off our hotel balcony and
(land) in a palm tree. She almost (destroy) the poor tree. I (send) you a postcard from Grenada, (you get)
it?
In September I (start) at my new school. I (already make) a lot 3f new friends.
71
One more bit of news: I (paint) my room — bright orange! Mum and Dad aren't too happy, but my friends
think it's great. Please write soon. Much love. Sandra
Victor is talking to a cashier in the school bookstore.
Cashier: You aren't from here, are you?
Victor: No, I'm from Madrid.
Cashier: How long have you been in Dallas?
Victor: I've been here since Saturday. I've only been in the
States for a couple of months. Cashier: Really? You haven't been here for very long. How
long have you studied English? Your English is very
good. Victor: I've studied English for about ten years — since I
was thirteen. Cashier: Well, I've studied Spanish since I was in the eighth
grade, and I still can't speak it.
A. Say "That's right" or "That's wrong" and correct the statements that are wrong.
1. Victor is from Dallas. 2. Victor has been in Dallas for a month. 3. Victor has been in the States for a
couple of years. 4. Victor's English is good. 5. Victor has studied English for five years. 6. The cashier can
speak Spanish very well.
B. Roleplay the conversation.
C. Complete the sentences with the Present Perfect Simple or the Past Simple of the verbs in brackets.
1 . Victor (live) in the United States for two months. 2. He (not speak) Spanish since he (arrive) here. 3 ,
Victor's wife and daughter (write) him every day since he (leave) Spain. 4. They (not come) to the U.S.
with him. 5. Victor (not work) since June. 6. He (live) in the US since July. 7. He (be) in Dallas for three
days. 8. He (not start) his English class. 9. He (buy) his books. 10. He (not meet) his classmates. 1 1.
Victor's classmates (be) in Dallas longer
than Victor. 12. They (study) here before. 13. But they (not arrive) at school. 14. And they (not go) to the
bookstore.
Frank is from a small town near Dallas. He's giving Gina a tour.
Frank: The building on our right is City Hall. They've been working on it for two years, but they haven't
completed it yet.
Gina: What's that on the left?
Frank: That's the police station, and next to it is the post office. The post office is the oldest building in the
town.
Gina: And what's that little building over there?
Frank: Which one?
Gina: The building across the street.
Frank: Oh, that's the newspaper office. You've read the Bloomington Daily News, haven't you?
Gina: No, as a matter of fact, I haven't.
Frank: Well, it's not really a very good paper, but it's been improving lately. The reporters have been
writing better stories, and it has some new photographers.
Gina: Hey, there's your mother.
Frank: Yeah, she works in that office building next to the newspaper. She's been working there since
1987 for over ten years now.
Gina: Really? I didn't know that.
Frank: Yeah. Come on. Let's go and say hello.
A. Answer "True" or "False" and correct the false statements.
\. They have finished the new city hall building.
2. The police station is as old as the post office.
3. The Bloomington Daily News is an excellent newspaper.
4. The Bloomington Daily News is getting better.
5. Frank's mother has just started a new job.
B. Make sentences about the members of Frank's family. Follow the examples.
eg Frank's mother/work in the same office building since 1987

Frank's mother has been working in the same office building since 1987.
eg She/not work for the same person, however
She hasn't been working for the same person, however.
1. Frank's father/relax at home since he retired
2. He/not go out with his friends from the factory
3. Frank's elder sister/live in New York since she got married
4. She/not enjoy herself in that busy city
5. Frank's younger brothers/work full time during the day and part time at night for over two years
6. They/not try to save money to go to college
7. They/try to save enough money to start their own business
8. Frank/work for an insurance company in Dallas
C. Ask and answer questions about the people in exercise B.
eg — Has Frank's mother been working for the same person
since 1987? — No, she hasn't.
1. Frank's father/relax at home since he retired?
2. he/go out with his friends from the factory?
3. Frank's elder sister/live in New York since she got married?
4. she/enjoy herself in that busy city?
5. Frank's younger brothers/work hard for over two years?
6. they/spend all their money?
Now ask and answer these questions.
7. you/live in this city for a long time?
8. your father/do the same job for over ten years?
9. you/drive since you were sixteen?
10. your classmates/enjoy themselves in this class9
11. you/learn a lot since you started this class?
12. you/think about living or working in another country?
74

Alan: Hello, Charles — I haven't seen you all day. What

have you been doing?
Charles: Actually, I've been working on my first novel. Alan: Oh yes? How far have you got with it?
Charles: Well, I've thought of a good title, and I've made a
lot of characters, and I've designed the front cover.... Alan: Have you started writing it yet? Charles: Oh
yes, I've written two pages already. Alan: Only two? Charles: Well yes—I haven't quite decided yet
what happens
next.
A. Roleplay the conversation
B. Have you done any exciting or interesting things? Write down t\vo or three things. Find out what other
people in your class have done

A: What are you going to do tonight?

B: I'm not sure. I really want to see a good movie. I haven't
seen a good movie in a long time.
A: What movie are you going to see?
B: I don't know. Have you seen any good movies recently?
A: Yes, I have. I saw a very good movie just last week.
B: Really? What movie did you see?
A: I saw the Return of Superman.
B: And you liked it?
A: I loved it. I think it's one of the best movies I've ever seen.
A. Study and practise the conversation.
B. In pairs, discuss one of the latest films you 've seen.

Laura Scott has flown to a desert island to take photographs of Keith Rogers. Keith is alone on the island
as an experiment.
75
Laura: Hello. You're Keith, aren't you?
Keith: Yes, I am. Who are you?
Laura: I'm Laura Scott. I'm a photographer.
Keith: From England?
Laura: Yes. How long have you been here, Keith?
Keith: Since 30 th January. But what's the date today? You
see my watch has stopped. Laura: 29th June.
Keith: 29th June! That means I've been here for six months. Laura: Is there anything you miss, Keith?
Keith: Oh, yes! I haven't spoken to anyone for six months
and I haven't had a cup of tea since the end of February. Laura: But you like the island, don't you? Keith:
No, I don't! I hate it! I've hated the place ever since I
arrived. Take me back to civilization!
A. Ask and answer questions.
B. Roleplay the conversation.
A: Have you ever been to Britain on holiday?
B: Oh, yes, I've often been to Britain.
A: Where have you been?
B: Well, last year we went to the Lake District, but we've also
been to Scotland and Ireland. We always go in sum-
mer because the weather is better. A: Yes, but there are more tourists. B: Yes, that's right. But it's the
same in every country.

A: Where are you going on holiday this year?

B: I don't know yet. I'm thinking about Spain.
A: I'm going to Spain.
B: Are you? When?
A: In August. Let's go together. Spain's lovely, you'll like it
B: Oh, that's a nice idea. I've already been to Spain. I love the
food, and the beaches are superb! A: Have you ever been to Cresta?
76
B: No, I've heard about it, but I haven't been there yet. Actually, I wanted to go there last year, but I
couldn't. I was ill.
A: Oh, that's a shame. But let's go this year, we can visit Barcelona, too.
A: Oh yes! I've already been to Barcelona but I'd love to go again. It's very hot and crowded, of course,
but there are a lot of lovely shops and we can ...
A. Study and practise the conversations.
B. Situation: Your friend and you are making plans for your summer holidays. You'd like to spend your
holidays together.
(I=Interviewer; J=Jane)
I: Now what sort of things have you been doing over the last week?
J: Well, I've been to - er - a couple of parties with friends. And I've been to the theatre once - and I went to
see Dra-cula which is on at the West End of London. I've been shopping a few times. I: What have you
bought?
J: Oh, very basic things — food. I bought a lot of food the other day to stock up for a week and just things
I need for college. I've been out with friends quite a lot. I've been out for a drink in several pubs. I went to
visit a South American friend on Saturday and I'm helping him with his English. He's learning English and
he's also teaching me Spanish which is quite good.

Interviewer: And Christine, what about you? What have you

been doing this summer? Christine: Working, mostly. Interviewer: You mean you've been studying?
Christine: Oh no, I've been doing a job to earn money. Interviewer: And have you made your fortune
yet? Christine: Hardly! But I haven't done too badly. I've been
77
getting about£40 aweek, plus my meals and my accommodation, so I've earned over £500 and I've
managed to save most of it.
Interviewer: That sounds pretty good. What kind of work have you been doing exactly?
Christine: I've been working in a hotel.
Interviewer: What, as a waitress?
Christine: No, I've been helping in the kitchen most of the time — washing and peeling potatoes,
preparing breakfast trays, washing up — that sort of thing.
Interviewer: And have you been enjoying it? Or has it been rather boring?
Christine: No, it hasn't been too bad. I've found it quite interesting here, in fact. Not so much the work
itself, but the people I've got to know and the friends I've made, and I've managed to do lots of things in
my spare time too. It's a seaside town, so there's been quite a lot going on in the evenings — you know,
dancing, bowling, cinemas and so on— and on my afternoons off I've been doing quite a lot of sunbathing
and swimming.
Interviewer: Yes, I can see you've got quite brown. You've obviously been having some reasonable
weather here.
A. Study and practise the conversations.
B. Interview your partner on his/her recent activities.

A television team working on a programme about the Amazon have just discovered a young Oxford
undergraduate living with a primitive tribe of Indians. They interviewed him for their programme.
Interviewer: Of course we were very surprised to discover a white man living here. What exactly are you
doing?
Young man: I've been living in this village for about six months. I'm studying the lives and customs of
these people, and I'm going to write a book about it.
78
Interviewer: And have you learnt a lot?
Young man: Oh, yes. I've been sharing the daily lives of the inhabitants. I've been on their hunting expe-
ditions. I've taken part in their rituals and festivals. I've learnt to understand their language. I feel they
have really begun to trust me.
Interviewer: And how long do you plan to stay?
Young man: Well, that depends on various factors. I've been here since last September. I plan to stay until
next August at least, but possibly a bit longer. A. Study and practise the conversation.

Harry: Nora, you look a bit tired — what have you been
doing all day?
Nora: I've been cleaning the whole house. I said I was going to. Harry: But I wanted you to wait
until the weekend so that
I could help.
Nora: Oh well, I thought I might as well get on with it. It was about time: the furniture has been looking
shabby for months, so this morning I took all the covers off the armchairs and washed them. That bit of
sun early this afternoon helped to dry them. Harry: Well, I hope you had a rest this afternoon. Nora:
No, since lunchtime I've been turning out the rooms upstairs. I haven't quite finished them yet. I've done
our room and Robert's.
Harry: My goodness, you have been working hard! Nora: You know, Harry, you do make it hard for
me to keep the place looking nice when you leave your things about everywhere. For years I've been
asking you not to keep your books in the kitchen and not to leave gardening tools inside the house. Harry:
And for years I've been telling you that you are perfectly free to throw out anything that I leave about if it
gets in your way.
Nora: Harry, could you turn out your workroom? I've been meaning to ask you for days.
79
Harry: Yes, I will... Hullo, who has been playing with my
pipes? Three of them are missing. Nora: Yes, I gave three dirty old pipes to an old man at
the door. You haven't been smoking them lately. Harry: But Nora, you've thrown out my three oldest
and
best pipes!
A. Analyse the uses of the tense forms in the conversation.
B. Give a brief account of the conversation.
C. Roleplay the conversation.
Past Perfect and Past Perfect Continuous
a. When we are talking about the past, we sometimes want to refer back to an earlier past.
When I telephoned Sue, she had gone out.
We use the Past Perfect (eg she had gone out} to talk about something which had happened before the
past time we are thinking about (eg when I telephoned).
More examples:
We arrived at the cinema at 8.00, but the film had started at 7.30.
When I spoke to the woman I realized I had met her somewhere before.
b. The Past Perfect is the past form of the Present Perfect. Compare:
Present Perfect Past Perfect
I haven't eaten all day today, I hadn't eaten all day yesterday,
so I'm very hungry now, so I was very hungry when I got home.
c. Compare the uses of the Past Perfect and Past Simple:
We got to the station at 8.00, We got to the station at 7.20
but the tram had left at 7.30. and the train left at 7.30.
When Sue arrived, we had When Sue arrived, we had dinner,
had dinner (We had dinner, (Sue arrived, then we had dinner.) then Sue arrived.)
80
a. When we are talking about the past, we sometimes want to refer back to an earlier past.
Dave had been driving for an hour when his car broke down.
We use the Past Perfect Continuous (eg Dave had been driving for an hour) to talk about something
which had been in progress up to the past time we are talking about (eg when his car broke down).
More examples:
I'd been walking for about half an hour when it suddenly started to rain.
Mr Woods had been working for 50 years when he finally retired in 1985.
b. The Past Perfect Continuous is the past form of the Present Perfect Continuous.Compare:
Present Perfect Continuous Past Perfect Continuous
I've been working hard all I'd been working hard all day, so
day, so I'm very tired now. I was very tired last night.
c. Compare the uses of the Past Perfect Continuous and the Past Continuous.
When I looked out of the When I looked out of the window,
window, it had been raining. it was raining. (= Rain was falling
(= It wasn't raining when I at the time I looked out.) looked out; it had stopped.)
Self check
1. Complete the sentences using the correct tense forms.
1. Mr and Mrs Davis were in an airplane. They were very nervous as the plane took off because they
(never, fly) before.
2. "Why you (be) so angry when I (see) you yesterday?" "Oh, I (just, have) a big argument with my
parents." 3.1 (try) contacting my pen pal when I (be) in the United States, but she (change) her address
and no one (know) where she (move) to. 4.1 (stand) there for nearly half an hour when I (realize) I (be) at
the wrong bus-
81
stop. 5. He (be) very nervous when he first (drive) in Britain because he (not, drive) on the left before. 6.
When I (hear) his voice on the phone, I (know) I (speak) to him before. Then I (remember) I (already,
meet) him. I also (remember) that I (not, like) him very much. 7. I'm really sorry I (be) so late last night. —
That's OK. We (not, wait) long. 8. Robert (move) from Manchester to London in 1988. — How long he
(live) in Manchester? 9. We (just, start) lunch when the telephone (ring). 10. Andrew was late for school
yesterday. When he (get) to the classroom, the lesson (start). 11. They (wait) until everyone (be) ready
and then they (start) the meeting. 12. (you, catch) the train yesterday? — No, it (already, leave) when we
(get) to the station. 13. Andrew (do) the test before, so he (find) it very easy. 14.1 (not, laugh) at the joke
because I (hear) it before. 15. When I (find) my wallet I (discover) that somebody (take) the credit cards
out of it. 16.1 (feel) cold because I (stand) outside for over two hours. 17.1 (play) tennis so I (feel) hot and
sticky. 18. The children's hair was wet because they (swim) in the sea. 19.1 (not, feel) well for weeks
before I finally (go) to see the doctor. 20. They (not, eat) when I (go) to see them. The) (just, finish) their
dinner. 21.1 (invite) Ann to dinner last night bui she couldn't come. She (already, arrange) to do something
else 22.1 was very pleased to see Nora again after such a long time. I (not, see) her for five years. 23.
They (drive) for about half an hour when they (realize) they (be) lost. 24. The house (be) very quiet when I
got home. Everybody (go) to bed. 25. There (be) a car by the side of the road. It (break) down and the
driver (try) to repair it So we (stop) to see if we could help. 26. Jim was on his hands and knees on the
floor. He (look) for his cigarette lighter. 27. We (walk) along the road for about 20 minutes when a car
(stop) and the driver (offer) us a lift. 28. When I (arrive), everyone (sit) round the table with their mouths
full. They (eat). 29. When I (arrive) Ann (wait) for me. She was rather annoyed with me because I (be) late
and she (wait) for a long time. 30. Class (begin, already) by the time I (get) there, so I (take, quietly) a
seat in the back. 31.1 (see, never) any of Picasso's paintings before I (visit) the art museum. 32.
Yesterday at a restaurant, I (see) Pam Donnelly, an old friend of mine. I (see, not) her in years. At first, I
(recognize, not) her because she (lose) at least fifty pounds. 33. It is midnight. I (study) for five straight
hours. No wonder I'm getting tired. 34. It was midnight. I (study) for five straight hours. No wonder I was
getting
82
tired. 35. Wake up! You (sleep) long enough. It's time to get up. 36. At least two hundred people (wait) in
line to buy tickets to the game. Some of them (stand) in line for more than four hours. We (decide) not to
try to get tickets for ourselves. 37. He (be) a newspaper reporter before he (become) a businessman.
38.1 (feel) a little better after I (take) the medicine. 39. It (rain) hard, but by the time the class (be) over,
the rain (stop). 40. Ann (listen) to loud rock music when her friends (arrive) but (turn) it off so all of them
could study together. When they (finish), she (turn) it back on, and they (dance) and (sing) for two hours
now. 41. Oscar (train) for the Olympics for the last three years and wants to make the national team next
year. 42. Tom had a hard time finding a job. He (try) to get a new job for six months before he finally (find)
a position at a local community college. Now he has a two-year contract. He (teach) there for only a few
weeks, but he likes his job very much. 43. The marathon runner (run) for almost two hours when she
(collapse) to the pavement. She (receive) immediate medical attention. 44. We (wait) for Nancy for the
last two hours, but she still (arrive, not). 45. He (give) me back the book, (thank) me for lending it to him
and (say) that he (enjoy) it very much; but I (know) that he (not read) it because most of the pages (be)
still uncut. 46. When he (see) his wife off at the station, he (return) home as he (not have) to be at the
airport till 9.30. He (not have) to pack, for his wife already (do) that for him and his case (be) ready in the
hall. He (not have) to check the doors and windows either, for his wife always (do) that before she (leave)
the house. All he (have) to do (be) to decide whether or not to take his overcoat with him. In the end he
(decide) not to. At 8.30 he (pick) up his case, (go) out of the house and (slam) the door behind him. Then
he (feel) in his pockets for the key, for his wife (remind) him to double-lock the front door. When he
(search) all his pockets and (find) no key he (remember) where it (be). He (leave) it in his overcoat
pocket. Then he (remember) something else; his passport and ticket (be) in his overcoat as well. 47.
When the old lady (return) to her flat she (see) at once that burglars (break) in during her absence,
because the front door (be) open and everything in the flat (be) upside down. The burglars themselves
(be) no longer there, but they probably Just (leave) because a cigarette still (burn) on the table. Probably
'hey (hear) the lift coming up and (run) down the fire escape. They (help) themselves to her whisky too
but there (be) a little left, so
83
she (pour) herself out a drink. She (wonder) if they (find) her jewellery and rather (hope) they had. The
jewellery (be given) her by her husband, who (die) some years before. Since his death she (not have) the
heart to wear it, yet she (not like) to sell it. Now it (seem) that fate (take) the matter out of her hands; and
certainly the insurance money would come in handy. 48.1 (put) the £5 note into one of my books; but next
day it (take) me ages to find it because I (forget) which book I (put) it into. 49. A woman (come) in with a
baby, who she (say) just (swallow) a safety pin. 50. I (think) my train (leave) at 14.33, and (be) very
disappointed when I (arrive) at 14.30 and (learn) that it just (leave). I (find) later that I (use) an out-of-date
timetable. 51. He (park) his car under a No Parking sign and (rush) into the shop. When he (come) out of
the shop ten minutes later the car (be) no longer there. He (wonder) if someone (steal) it or the police
(drive) it away. 52. When I (open) the door I (see) a man on his knees. He clearly (listen) to our
conversation and I (wonder) how much he (hear). When I (ask) him what he (do), he (say) that he (drop)
a 50p piece outside the door and (look) for it.
II. Translate from Russian into English.
1. Когда я вернулся домой, дети уже спали. Мать сказала, что они спят с 9 часов. 2. Позови детей
обедать. Они играют во дворе с самого утра. 3. В прошлом году мы отдыхали в Ялте. К концу июня
я сдал все экзамены и был свободен. Мои родители заказали билеты заранее, и в начале июля мы
отправились в Крым. 4. Он спросил, что мы сделали с тех пор, как начали работать над этой
проблемой. 5. Пока мы шли со станции, он успел рассказать мне обо всем, что произошло со
времени моего отъезда. 6. Виктор приехал? — Да, он здесь уже два дня. Он приехал еще в
пятницу. 7. Обед уже был готов; все давно проголодались, но двоих гостей еще не было. 8. Девочка
плакала. Она заблудилась. 9. Автобус запаздывал, и я пожалел, что не взял такси. 10. Как только я
заказал номер в гостинице, я поехал на завод. 11. Она дала мне письмо только после того, как я
назвал свое имя. 12. Преподаватель сказал, что его произношение улучшилось после того, как он
поработал в лингафонном кабинете. 13. Солнце еще не взошло, когда мы тронулись в путь. 14. Он
не мог
84
принять участия в экспедиции, так как он еще не совсем оправился после болезни. 15. Целый день
мы осматривали город. Вечером мы вернулись в гостиницу, усталые, но довольные. 16. Когда я
проснулся, уже стемнело. Я посмотрел на часы. Я спал три часа. 17. Преподаватель сказал, что я
пропустил много занятий и мне придется много работать. 18. Он отправил телеграмму до того, как
мы ему позвонили. 19. Когда я пришел, он сидел у камина, перелистывая журнал. 20. Студенты
пишут контрольную работу уже почти два часа. Пока только двое из студентов сдали работы. 21. Я
вернулся домой в 5 часов вечера. К этому времени моя жена уже уложила вещи и ждала меня. Мы
вызвали такси по телефону, и через полчаса были в аэропорту. Не успели мы приехать, как
объявили наш рейс. 22. Художники работали с утра, так как мы хотим повесить стенную газету еще
сегодня вечером. 23. Утро было солнечное, но с одиннадцати часов погода изменилась, и теперь
идет дождь. 24. Она выглядит усталой. Я думаю, что она опять читает книги по ночам.
Fluency
Listen, read and practise.
Did you hear what happened to me last week? It's typical of me, I suppose. I was going to Tunisia on
businees with a colleague of mine. We were going to use my car to go to the airport and leave it in the
long term car park. I had allowed plenty of time, which was fortunate, because when we got to the airport
and I took the bags out of the car I realised that I had forgotten my passport! I couldn't think what to do at
first. Then I thought, well, maybe my wife, Sue, could bring my passport to the airport. So I found a phone
and telephoned home in the hope that she hadn't yet left for work. The phone rang six or seven times and
I thought, "That's it. She's already left. There's no way I'm going to get my passport now." I was just about
to put the phone down when my colleague Persuaded me to hang on for a few moments more. He said
Sue might be in the bathroom or something. So I did, and then a second
85
or two later Sue answered the phone. She had, in fact, already left the house but by mistake she'd left a
window open so she could hear the phone ringing from the street and rushed back in. Luckily, we live
quite near the airport so she was able to jump in a taxi and bring me my passport. She got to the airport
just in time and we caught the flight by the skin of our teeth! (Мы еле-еле (чудом) успели на самолет).
A. Questions
1. Where was the writer going to fly? Why? 2. What did he discover at the airport? 3. What did he decide
to do? 4. Was his wife in or out? 5. Did the writer manage to get his passport?
B. Have you ever had an experience of this sort? Tell about it.

This incident ranks as one of the more embarrassing moments in my life. It happened about five years
ago. I had invited my girlfriend, Emma, and her parents to dinner. I hadn't met her parents before and I
wanted to impress them. I had planned soup first, then fresh salmon and a chocolate mousse for dessert.
In fact, I was quite looking forward to it.
On the day of the dinner, I got home from work early and started to prepare the meal. Everything went
fine. Emma and her parents arrived and, after giving them a drink in the sitting-room, I went into the
kitchen to do the last minute preparations for the meal. I removed the fish, which was now ready, from the
oven and decided to leave it in the kitchen while we were having the soup.
When I went into the kitchen to bring in the fish, to my horror I found my cat looking very pleased with
himself in the middle of the kitchen. He had, of course, eaten the entire salmon and there were bits of
bone all over the floor! Needless to say, Emma's parents were very understanding. In the end, we all went
to a Chinese restaurant and I suppose it wasn't such a bad evening, all in all. However, I don't think I'll let
the cat anywhere near the kitchen in future.
A. Ask and answer questions on the text.
B. If you think you 've got a good story about an embarrassing moment in your life, tell us about it.
86
C. Complete this newspaper story about an unlucky man. Put each verb in brackets into the correct tense
form.
David Williams of Michester (have) such a terrible time this year that he ought to be in the Guiness Book
of Records. The trouble (start) one morning last January when David (find) that his car (go) from outside
his house. He (not see) it since.
In February David's joy at winning £200,000 on the football pools (not last) long — he (forget) to post the
letter. In March he (buy) a new car, but he (not have) it more than a week when someone (crash) into the
back of it. These disasters (continue) right up to the present time. Two days ago David (sit) on a seat that
someone (finish) painting only minutes before. He (have) on a new suit that he (buy) only the previous
week.
August (be) the worst month so far this year. David (spend) three days of his holiday at airports because
of strikes. When he (arrive) home, he (discover) that someone (break) into his house. His video-recorder
and television (disappear).
David doesn't know what he (do) to deserve all this bad luck. He just hopes his luck will change soon.

Friend: You've just been on holiday, Gordon? Gordon: That's right. Friend: Did you have a good time?
Gordon: No, it was awful! The town was all right, but quite boring. The brochure described it as busy,
exciting, full of nightlife. In fact, there were a few shops,
one museum, one disco and one very expensive restaurant. And the beach was really crowded!
On the first day, after I'd been there about half an hour, there were hundreds of people; and there was no
sand, just stones. The water was filthy. It's always dirty there! After I'd been swimming I needed a bath!
Friend: What about your hotel? That was all right, wasn't it? Gordon: No, it wasn't! The service was
dreadful. We only got coffee in our room after we'd telephoned reception five times. And the rooms! Well,
look. I've just written a letter... .
87
A. Ask and answer questions on the text.
B. Roleplay the conversation.
C. Speak about a holiday you didn 't enjoy.
D. Complete the text with the Past Simple or Past Perfect Simple, then retell the text.
On Friday, February 8th, I (have) a meeting in Leeds. I (go) to bed early the night before. I (be) tired
because I (spend) the day shopping in London. I (know) that I (prepare) everything for the meeting and I
(sleep) well.
On Friday morning I (leave) home at 6 a.m. I (get) to the station early — in fact the train (not arrive). I (not
have) breakfast at home, so I (have) a cup of tea at the station before my train (come).
Later, on the train, I (take) out the letter about the meeting which I (put) in my briefcase. I (look) at the
date of the meeting. I (cannot) believe it! I (make) a mistake. — I (be) a month too early!

James Stoker was fifteen years old when he became the youngest fully qualified doctor in the United
States. James was a genius. By the age of three he had learnt to read and write. Before his sixth birthday
his father had taught him to speak three languages fluently and he could play the violin perfectly. James
spent all his time reading and studying. After he had passed his school-leaving exams at the age of nine,
he went to college. A year and a half later, he had finished college and started at a medical school. At the
age of twelve, he didn't know what football was, because nobody had taught him how to play. There
hadn't been time.
At fifteen, he was ready to take the final examination. On the morning of the exam, although he had been
studying for 48 hours, he wasn't tired. After the exam he walked through the park, but he didn't arrive
home until seven o'clock in the evening, very tired and very dirty. What had he been doing? his mother
wondered. He had met some eight-year-olds in the park. They had been teaching him how to play
football.
A. Ask and answer questions on the text Retell the text.
B. Invent a story about another amazing child genius Write the story of his/her life in a short paragraph.
Use the Past Perfect and phrases, such as by the time, at the age of, before, as soon as.
Bad J2uck
Tom: Did you enjoy the film yesterday?
Nick: Well, it's a long story. I got on the bus but I had forgotten my bus fare.
Tom: So what d'd you do?
Nick: I got off the bus and ran home, but everybody had gone out. I couldn't get in, because I hadn't taken
my key. So I went to Paul's house to borrow some money...
Tom: Wait, let me guess: he'd spent all his money that afternoon.
Nick: No. He hadn't come home yet. When he finally arrived, I had been waiting for twenty minutes. After
he had lent me some money, I caught the next bus. But when I got to the cinema, the film had almost
finished.
A. Ask and answer questions on the text.
B. Roleplay the conversation.
C. Use the words from the box in the Past Perfect Continuous to complete the sentences.
ear repair try rewise
tight run wait swim
read sit watch
eg Jenny's eyes were tired.
She had been reading all evening.
1. Amanda was hot and sore. She ... in the sun. 2. Jane had oil on her hands. She... a friend's motor bike.
3. Tom was hot and out of breath. He... in the park. 4. Ben's clothes were dirty. He ... with Jason. 5. She
was angry. She... for Mike for twenty minutes. 6. Jane was nervous. She... a TV programme about crime.
7. Jenny had a stomach ache. She ... sour grapes. 8. Sue was tired. She ... for exams all night. 9. Mike
was cold. He ... in an unheated pool. 10. Bob fell asleep. He ... to learn the Past Perfect Continuous.
89
D. Talk about the last time a) you felt very tired b) your feet ached c) you were very wet.
What had you been doing? How long had you been doing it?

Not long ago I was invited out to dinner by a girl called Sally. I had only met Sally twice, and she was very,
very beautiful. I was flattered. "She likes me," I thought. But I was in for a disappointment.
"I'm so sorry we asked you at such short notice," she said when I arrived, "but we suddenly realised there
were going to be thirteen people at the table, so we just had to find somebody else."
A superstition. Thirteen. The unlucky number. Recently I came upon a little group of worried people,
gathered round a man lying on the pavement beside a busy London road. They were waiting for an
ambulance, because the man had been knocked down by a passing taxi. Apparently he had stepped off
the pavement and into the street, to avoid walking under a ladder.
They say this superstition goes back to the days when the gallows (виселица) were built on a platform.
To get up to the platform you had to climb a ladder. To pass under the shadow of that ladder was very
unlucky...
Note: In modern English realize = realise, apologize = apologise
A. Questions
1. What happened to the writer? 2. How many times had he met Sally? 3. What was Sally like? 4. Why
did she apologise when he arrived? 5. What had Sally realised? 6. What did the writer come across
recently? 7. What had happened to the man lying on the pavement? 8. Why had he stepped off the
pavement?
B. Read and retell the text.
Future forms Simple Future (Will)
1. Will (as an auxiliary of the future) is used to predict the future or to say what we think will happen:
90
Tomorrow will be another cold day in all parts of the country.
In the future, machines will do many of the jobs that people do today.
Tom won't pass his examination. He hasn't done any work for it.
Who do you think will win the match on Sunday?
We won't arrive home before midnight tonight. When we predict the future, we often use will with the
following verbs and expressions: think, expect, believe, be sure, be afraid.
I'm sure you'll enjoy the film if you decide to go.
I don't think I'll go out tonight. I'm too tired.
I believe that inflation will fall to 3 per cent next year.
I expect they'll be here at around 10 o'clock tomorrow
morning.
We also use will in this way with adverbs of probability, eg probably, perhaps, certainly.
Martin will probably phone us this evening. Perhaps I'll see you tomorrow.
Willis also common when there is another clause withif, when, until, as soon as, unless, before and after.
If you hurry you'll catch the 4 o'clock train.
He will come home as soon as the meeting is over.
She will stay here until Jack returns.
2. Will (as a modal auxiliary) is used to express decision or intention often made at the moment of
speaking, that is, not planned or premeditated.
"Would you like something to drink?" "Oh, thank you. I'll have some orange juice."
"There's someone at the door." "Is there? Oh, I'll see who it is."
"I'm going shopping." "Oh, are you? I'll come with you, then."
According to the context, this use of will can express willingness, intention, promise, offer, request.
91
I'll help you if I can. (willingness, intention) = I'm willing
to help you.
"I need some money." "Don't worry. I'll lend you some."
(offer).
Thank you for lending me the money. I'll pay you back on
Friday, (promise)
I won't tell Tom what you said. I promise.
Will you shut the door, please? (request)
Will you please be quiet? I'm trying to concentrate.
3. Shall (as a modal auxiliary) is used to ask for advice eg What shall Idol and to make offers eg Shall I
help you? and suggestions eg Shall we go out this evening!
4. Will is also used to make statements of fact about the future.
I'll be forty next month.
5. In formal English, will can be used to speak about definite future plans:
Prime Minister: The government will lower all taxes, and I will ensure that every family in this country will
benefit.
In everyday English we do not normally announce future arrangements about ourselves with will. The
Present Continuous sounds more natural:
I will leave England in June. — formal
I'm leaving England in June. — more natural
However, in announcement of timetables, schedules and other programmes will can be used:
The wedding will take place at St Andrew's on June 27th.
Present Continuous and Simple Present with a future meaning
a) Present Continuous with a future meaning Study this example situation:
This is Tom s diary for next week. 92
He is playing tennis on Monday afternoon. He is going to the dentist on Tuesday morning. He is having
dinner with Ann on Friday.
In all these examples, Tom has already decided and arranged to do these things.
When you are talking about what you have already arranged to do, use the Present Continuous (/ am
doing).
— A: What are you doing tomorrow evening? B: I'm going to the theatre.
— A: Are you playing football tomorrow?
B: Yes, but Tom isn't playing. He has hurt his leg.
— A: Ann is coming tomorrow.
B: Oh, is she? What time is she arriving?
A: At 10.15.
B: Are you meeting her at the station?
A: I can't. I'm working tomorrow morning.
When we use the Present Continuous in this way, we often give the future time, (eg on Saturday evening,
on Monday, this afternoon, next weekend)
The Present Continuous cannot be used to express an event that has not been arranged by human
beings. We cannot say: It is snowing tomorrow. The sun is rising at 5.00 tomorrow morning.
The verbs found in this tense are for the kind of events you would put in your diary, that is, verbs of
activity and motion.
b) Simple Present with a future meaning
We use the Simple Present when we are talking about timetables, programmes, etc. (for example: for
public transport, cinemas)
— What time does the film begin?
— The train leaves Plymouth at 10.30 and arrives in London at 13.45.
— The football match starts at 8 o'clock.
— Tomorrow is Wednesday.
— The Cup Final takes place on April 13.
93
We do not normally use the Simple Present for present arrangements.
What time are you meeting Ann? (not "do you meet")
Self check
1. Put the verbs in brackets into the Simple Future, the Present Continuous or the Simple Present.
1.1 am sure that I (recognize) him. 2. Look! I've broken the teapot. What Mrs Pitt (say)? — She (not
mind); she never liked that one. 3. There (be) a big meeting here tomorrow. 4. We (have) a party next
Saturday. Would you like to come? 5. The concert this evening (start) at 7.30. 6. I (not go) away for my
holidays next month because I haven't got enough money. You (go) away? 7. He has cut my hair too
short. — Don't worry; it (grow) again very quickly. 8. Ann, we (go) to town. You (come) with us? 9. What
time the next train (leave)? 10. Where you (meet) them? — I (meet) them at midnight in the middle of the
wood. 11. He (not forget) to come. 12. The art exhibition (open) on 3 May and (finish) on 15 July. 13.
George, is it true that you (get) married next week? 14.1 wonder if he (succeed). 15.1 (know) the result in
a week. 16. Perhaps he (arrive) in time for lunch. 17.1 wonder how many of us still (be) here next year.
18. Newspaper announcement- The President (drive) along the High Street in an open carriage. 19. You
(do) anything tonight? — Yes, I (go) to my carpentry class. 20. Announcement: Mr Pitt (present) the
prizes. 21. The Queen (give) a garden party next week. You (go)? 22. Notice: The management (not be)
responsible for articles left on the seats. 23. What we (do) now?—Wait. 24. My grandparents (celebrate)
their golden wedding next week. 25. We (go) to the cinema? — Let's. 26. What we (do) with all the food
that's left over? 27. When you (hear) the result? — I (not hear) for another week. 28.1 (not have) to do
any cooking for a month. I'm going to a hotel. 29.1 (put) more salt in the stew? — Please do. 30. I (go) to
the dentist tomorrow. Mr Pitt (take) my class. 31. There's someone at the door. — Is there? Oh, I (see)
who it is. 32. I'm a bit cold. I think I (put on) a sweater. 33.1 (catch) the 6.30 plane tomorrow. — Where
you (leave) your car? —I (not take) the car.
34. You (turn) off the TV, please? No one is watching it. 35. Where you (go) for your next holiday? — I
don't know yet but we probably (go) to Spain. 36. We (have) a drink with Peter tonight. It's his last night;
he (leave) tomorrow. 37. I (see) my bank manager tomorrow. I'm going to ask him for a loan but I expect
he (refuse). 38. I probably (come) to London some time next month. I (give) you a ring nearer the time
and tell you when I (come). 39. We'd better leave a message for Jack. Otherwise he (not know) where
we've gone. — All right. I (leave) a note on his table. 40. Where you (meet) Tom? — We (meet) at Covent
Garden. He (take) me to see the Magic Flute. 41. I (wait) for you? — No, don't bother. This (take) a long
time, I'm sure, and I don't want you to miss your train. 42. I (fly) to New York next week. — You (take) your
wife with you? 43.1 (ring) Peter tonight. (We have arranged this.) I (ask) him to ring you? — No, don't
bother. I (be) away most of the week. I (write) to him. 44. Mary: Jack and I (go) out tonight. We (have)
dinner at the Festival Hall and (go) to a concert afterwards. Ann: And what about the children? I (come)
and babysit if you like. Mary: Oh, my neighbour (come) in to sit with them. But thank you for offering, Ann.
I (ask) you next time.
Going to (/ am going to do)
1. We use going to (do) when we say what we have already decided to do, what we intend to do in the
future, it expresses a premeditated intention. The going to future shows that we have a clear plan in our
mind.
I'm going to have a party next weekend. (I have a plan to have a party.)
He's going to buy a second-hand car. (He intends to buy a second-hand car.)
— A: There's a film on television tonight. Are you going
to watch it? B: No, I'm too tired. I'm going to have an early night.
— A: I hear Ann has won a lot of money. What is she going
to do with it? B: I've heard she's going to travel round the world.
— A: Have you made the coffee yet?
B: No, but I'm just going to make it. (just = just at this moment)
2. Going to can also express a prediction, especially when it is based on a present fact. There is
evidence now that something is certain to happen.
She's going to have a baby. (We can see she's pregnant.) Liverpool are going to win the match. (It's four
nil, and there's only five minutes left.) It isn't going to rain. (Look at that lovely blue sky.) Watch out! Those
boxes are going to fall over! Oh dear. Too late.
3. We use was/were going to to say what someone intended to do in the past (but didn't do):
— We were going to travel by tram but then we decided to go by car.
— A: Did Tom do the examination?
В: No, he was going to do it but in the end he changed his mind.
— I was just going to cross the road when someone shouted "Stop!"
Will or Going to
1. We use both will and going to in predictions about the future, but there is a difference:
We use will to talk about what We use going to (not will) when
we think or believe will happen there is something m the present
m the future situation that shows what will
happen in the future The speaker feels sure about what will happen because of the situation now
I think Tom will get the job Look at those black clouds It's
We'll be there by Monday night. going to ram (the clouds are there now)
I feel terrible I think I'm going to be sick (I feel terrible now )
96
2. We use both will and going to to express intention, to talk what we intend to do but there is a difference
here:
Will is used to express a Going to is used to express a
decision or intention made future plan, decision or intention
at the moment of speaking made before the moment of speaking.
"Oh dear' I've spilt some wine "Why have you moved all the
on my jacket " "Don't worry furniture out of the room?" "I'm
I'll clean it for you " going to clean the carpet."
What shall I do tomorrow? «Why are you putting on these
I know I'll paint the kitchen old clothes'?" "I'm going to paint
the kitchen "
Self check
I. Complete the sentences using will or going to and the verbs-in brackets
1. What can I do this evening? I know! I (go) and see Sue.2. "Would you like to come to my house this
evening?" "Yes, all right. I (come) at 9 o'clock." 3. I don't feel very well. I think I (faint). 4. "It's Simon's
birthday soon. I've decided to buy him the new Blues Brothers record." "Oh, he doesn't like the Blues
Brothers any more." "Oh, really? Well, I (get) him something to wear." 5. Oh, no! Look at those cars! They
(crash)! 6. "I could lend you some money if you like." "Could you? I (pay) you back on Friday." 7. "Why did
you buy this flour?" "I (make) some bread." 8. "Could you get me a glass of water?" "Certainly. I (get) you
one. Would you like some ice in it?" 9. I arranged to borrow some money because I (buy) a motorcycle
tomorrow. 10. "Could someone please open the window?" "I (do) it." 11. "I (wear) a dark suit to the
wedding reception. How about you?" "I'm not sure." 12. "What are your vacation plans?" "I (spend) two
weeks on a Greek island." 13. "Hi, Josh. I hear that you (move) into a new apartment." " That's right. Sara
and I found a great apartment on 45th Street." "I (help) you on moving day if you like." 14. "So you (get)
married." "That's right. On September 22nd." "My congratulations." 15. "If you can wait just a few minutes,
I (walk) to the meeting with you." "Okay. I (meet) you by the elevator." 16. "Can you give Ed a message
for me?" "Sure.

97
I probably (see) him at the meeting this evening." 17. "What do you want to be when you grow up?" "I (be)
an astronaut." 18. "What's all this paint for? You (paint) your house?" "No, we (paint) my mother's house."
19. "Let's make something easy for dinner. Got any ideas?" "I (make) some hamburgers. Why don't you
make a salad?" "Sounds good." 20. "Excuse me, waiter! This isn't what I ordered. I ordered a chicken
sandwich." "Sorry, sir, I (take) this back and get your sandwich." 21. "Did you remember to book seats?"
"Oh no, I forgot. I (telephone) for them now." 22. "You (buy) meat?" "No, I (not eat) meat any more. I (eat)
vegetables." 23. "Look what I've just bought at an auction!" "What an extraordinary thing! Where you (put)
it?" 24. "You (open) the door for me, please?" "Yes, certainly." 25. "You (do) the washing-up tonight?" "No,
I think it can wait till tomorrow." 26. "You (lend) me your season ticket?" "No, I (not lend) it to you. It is
against the law." 27. I haven't bought any cigarettes because I (give) up smoking. 28. "There's the phone
again. Take no notice." "You (not answer) it?" 29. That boat's full of water. It (sink)! 30. You aren't wearing
your climbing boots. You (not climb) the mountain with the others? 31. "You (lend) me your fishing rod?"
"Yes, of course. Where you (fish)?" 32. "You (eat) any more of this, or I (tell) the waiter to take it away?"
33. "You (bath) your dog?" "Yes, you (help) me?" 34. Five French sailors (sail) round the world on a
catamaran. They hope that they (complete) their trip in only 79 days. If they succeed, they (set) a new
world record. Jean Dubois told our reporter, "It (be) an easy journey. Our worst problem probably (be)
seasickness." 35. John has to go to the airport to catch a plane. He hasn't got a car:
John: Alan, can you take me to the airport this evening?
Alan: Of course I (take) you. I'd be delighted. Later that day Eric offers to take John to the airport.
Eric: John, do you want me to take you to the airport?
John: No, thanks, Eric. Alan (take) me. 36. He: Where we (spend) the night?
She: Cardiff. I've booked us in at the Angel Hotel. Why do you ask?
He: That's another thirty miles away. We (run) out of petrol before we get there. I (stop) at the next
filling-station. Half an hour later.
She: The road goes on forever.
He: We (get) stuck. The car's stopping. We (have) to
walk.
She: Come on then. Perhaps someone (give) us a lift. He: Not a filling-station in sight and look at
those black
clouds. It (rain).
She: Look! A car's coming. I (wave) to the driver. He: Oh good! He's slowing down. He (stop).
37. Janet: Someone told me-you and the family (go) and live
in Alaska. Is it true?
Graham: Yes, it is. I (work) for a building company. Janet: That (be) interesting.
Graham: I hope so. It (be) something different. It certainly ' (be) a bit colder than London.
Janet: When you (leave)? Graham: On the tenth of next month. We (be) there in three
weeks. Janet: Oh, so it (not be) long now. Jerry and I (be) sad to
see you go. Graham: Oh, we (be) back some time. We (not be) there
for ever. And you can always come to Alaska and
see us. Janet: Well, that isn't a bad idea. We (visit) my sister in
Vancouver next summer. Graham: Oh, that's great. We (see) you next summer then.
38. A: Why is Carlos wearing a suit and tie? He usually
wears jeans to class.
B: He (give) a speech at the faculty lunch today.
A: Really? What he (speak) about?
B: About university study in his country.
Present Continuous (7 am doing) or Going to?
1. Present Continuous is more natural when you are talking about planned arrangements, going to is
preferable when you are talking about planned intentions.
Notice the difference in meaning between:
Present Continuous
I'm buying a new car on Saturday. (It is arranged, already organized.)
Going to
I am going to buy a new car.
(I intend to buy one, but I have no particular car in mind.)
There is often little difference between a future intention and a future arrangement, and often going to and
the Present Continuous are interchangeable.
We're going to see
Hamlet at the Royal Theatre tonight. We're seeing
2. When we make predictions about the future, we can use going to (or will), but not the Present
Continuous.
It's going to rain tomorrow. (It's raining tomorrow is not possible.)
Self check
I. Use the Present Continuous or going to.
1. It's 6.30. We (miss) our train. 2. You (eat) all that? 3. This airplane (crash). 4. I've lent you my car once.
I (not do) it again. 5.1 (play) bridge tonight with Tom and Ann. 6. What you (tell) the police? — I (tell) them
the truth. 7. What you (do) with the money? 8. I (read) you his answer to my letter of complaint. 9. There
was very little blossom this spring. Apples (be) scarce. 10.1 don't like this macaroni. I (not finish) it. 11. Mr
Pitt has just phoned to say that he (not come) back till Wednesday night 12. Her parents (give) a party for
her next month. They (invite) sixty guests. 13. The inspector (ask) you a few questions. 14. He (wash) the
car? 15. She (sing) in her first big concert next month. 16. He (go) to Spain for his holidays. — He (fly)?
— No, he (go) by boat. 17. Where you (go) this evening? — I (not go) anywhere. I (stay) at home. I (write)
some letters. 18. You (do) anything next weekend? — Yes, my nephews (come) and I (show) them
100
round London. — You (take) them to the theatre? — No, they're too young for that. I (take) them to the
zoo. 19. Where you (go) for your holidays? — I (go) to Norway. — What you (do) there? -— I (fish). 20.
We (start) early tomorrow. We (go) to Ben Nevis. — You (climb) Ben Nevis? — Not me. Tom (climb) it. I
(sit) at the bottom and do some sketching. 21.1 hear you (go) to the regatta tomorrow. You (sail) in it? —
No, but we (take) our cameras. We (try) to photograph the winning yachts. 22. You (not ask) your boss for
a rise? — It isn't worth while. I (leave) at the end of the week.—Really? And what you (do) then? You
(have) a holiday? — No, I (start) another job the following Monday. 23. Mrs Jones (go) to hospital. She
(have) her appendix out. — Who (look) after the children? — Her sister (come) down from Scotland. 24.
He isn't happy at his boarding school. I (send) him to a day school. — Have you decided on the other
school? — No, but I (see) the headmaster of the Park School this afternoon. I'll probably send him there.
25.1 (buy) a new coat. The weather report says that it (be) very cold. 26. I hear you've bought a new
house. — Yes. I (move) in next week. — You (have) a house warming party? — Not just yet. I (paint) the
house first. 27. That rider (fall) off.
28. Ann has won a car in a competition but she can't drive. Tom asks her, "What you (do) with the car?
You (sell) it?" Ann answers, "No, I (learn) to drive. I (have) my first lesson next Monday."
29. Be careful! You (break) that glass. 30. He (not come) next Saturday. 31. Look out! You (hurt) yourself
with that knife. 32. It (snow) later tonight.
Future Continuous
*
1. We use the Future Continuous (will be doing) to talk about something which will be in progress at a
time in the future.
I'll be having dinner at 7.00.
Don't phone me at 8.00. I'll be doing my homework then.
What will you be doing this time next week?
I'll be waiting at the station when your train arrives.
2. We also use the Future Continuous for planned actions.
I'll be going to the city centre later. Can I get you anything?
With this meaning will be doing is similar to am doing.
I'm going to the city centre later.
"Would you like me to give Peter a message for you?" "Oh, I don't want to trouble you." "It's no trouble,
really. I'll be seeing Peter tomorrow anyway."
We often use will (you) be-mg? to ask about people's plans, especially when we want something or want
someone to do something.
"Will you be using your bicycle this evening?" "No, you can take it."
"Will you be passing the post office when you go out?" "Yes, why?"
When we use will be doing form in this way, it often suggests that we do not want to change the other
person's plans.
3. The Future Continuous also expresses an action that will occur in the natural course of events,
independently of the will or intention of anyone directly concerned.
In a few minutes we will be landing at Heathrow Airport. Hurry up! The bus will be leaving any minute.
Self check
I. Put the verbs in brackets into the Future Continuous or the Simple Future.
1. I'll call for her at 7. — No, don't; she still (have) bteakfast then. 2. You've just missed the last train! —
Never mind. I (walk). 3. You ask him. It's no good my asking him. He (not do) anything I say. 4. He says
he (meet) us at the bus stop, but I'm sure he (forget) to do it. 5. Don't ring now; she (watch) her favourite
TV programme. — All right. I (ring) at 8.30.6. Mother: I'm so grateful for the help you've given Jack; I hope
you (be) able to go on helping him. Teacher: I'm afraid I (not teach) him next term because I only teach
the fifth form and he (be) in the sixth. 7. Schoolboy (in school dining hall): The last week of our last term' I
wonder what we (do) this time next year. Friend: Well, we (not
eat) school dinners anyway. That's one comfort. 8. I'd like to double-glaze the bedroom windows. — All
right. I (get) the materials at once and we (do) it this weekend. 9. You (have) lunch with me on the 24th?
— I'd love to, but I'm afraid I (do) my exam then. 10. We (meet) him at the station? — Oh, he (not come)
by train. He never comes by train. 11. Wait a bit. Don't drink your tea. The milkman (come) in a minute.
12. I (work) for Mr Pitt next week as his own secretary (be) away. 13. You (have) something to drink, won't
you? 14. Why did you take his razor? He (look) for it everywhere tomorrow. 15. I've fished that river every
year for the last fifteen years. — Well, nobody (fish) it next year. The water's been polluted. All the fish are
dead. 16.1 don't feel well enough to go to the station to meet him. — I (meet) him for you. But how I
(recognize) him? — He's small and fair, and he (wear) a black and white school cap. 17.1 hope you (do)
well in the race tomorrow. I (think) of you. 18. You've left the light on. — Oh, so I have. I (go) and turn it
off. 19. I've just been appointed assistant at the local library. — Then you (work) under my sister. She is
head librarian there. 20.1 want to post this letter but I don't want to go out in the rain. — I (post) it for you.
I (go) out anyway as I have to take the dog for a walk. 21. The prima ballerina is ill so I expect her
understudy (dance) instead. 22. This time next Monday I (sit) in a Paris cafe reading Le Figaro. — You
(not read). You (look) at all the pretty girls. 23.1 (cook) any fish you catch, but I (not clean) them. You'll
have to do that yourself. 24. It is nearly autumn; soon the leaves (change) colour. 25. Mother (on phone):
My son has just burnt his hand very badly. Doctor: I (come) at once. 26. My son will be in the sixth form
next year. — That means that old Adder (teach) him mathematics. 27.1 (not show) you any films this time.
The projector's broken down. 28. Housewife: This time next week I (not wash) up the breakfast things. I
(have) breakfast in bed in a luxury hotel. 29. Customer in restaurant: Waiter, this plate is dirty. Waiter: I'm
sorry, sir. I (bring) you another. 30.1 (not wear) glasses when you see me next. I (wear) contact lenses.
You probably (not recognize) me. 31. You (use) your typewriter tomorrow evening? — No, you can take it.
32. Guest: May I use your phone to ring for a taxi? Hostess: Oh, there's no need for that; my son (drive)
you home. 33. Come on deck; we (enter) harbour in a few minutes. 34. Are you nearly ready? Our guests
(arrive) any minute. 35. She
103
says that she (not lend) me the book, because I never give books back. 36. James (leave) for Australia
quite soon. He has got a job there. 37.1 (get) you some aspirins if you like. The chemist's still (be) open.
— No, don't bother. The office boy (go) out in a minute to post the letters; I (ask) him to buy me some. 38.
I (write) postcards every week, I promise, and I (try) to make them legible. If necessary I (type) them. 39.
I'm going to Switzerland next week. — You're lucky. The wild flowers just (come) out. 40. You (see) Tom
this afternoon. I'd like you to give him a message. 41.1 (tell) her what you say but she (not believe) it. 42.
This time tomorrow everyone (read) of your success and all sorts of people (ring) up to congratulate you.
43. You (use) your dictionary this morning? — No, you can borrow it if you like. 44. We've just got to the
top in time. The sun (rise) in a minute.
Future Perfect and Future Perfect Continuous
1. We use the Future Perfect (will have done) to talk about something that will be completed by (not later
than) a certain time in the future.
When we use this structure, we think of a future time and look back from that future time to say that
something will be complete.
I'll have finished dinner by 8.00.
"I'll phone you at 11.00." "No, I'll have gone to bed by
then. Can you phone earlier?"
I'll have worked here for a year next September.
Next year is Ted and Amy's 25th wedding anniversary.
They will have been married for 25 years. I
We're late. I expect the film will have already started by
the time we get to the cinema.
2. The Future Perfect Continuous (will have been doing) describes a continuous action (very often one
which is already in progress) which will finish by a certain point in the future:
In ten minutes we'll have been waiting for this bus for exactly an hour!
Amer will have been studying English for ten months by the time he goes back to Syria in October.
Self check
I. Use either the Future Perfect or the Future Perfect Continuous.
1. By the time I get up tomorrow morning, the sun already (rise). 2. He's never going to stop talking. In 15
more minutes, we (listen) to his lecture for three solid hours. I don't even know what he's saying anymore.
3. This is a long trip! By the time we get to Miami, we (ride) on this bus for over 15 hours. 4. What? You're
smoking another cigarette? At this rate you (smoke) a whole pack before lunchtime. Don't you think you
should cut down a little? 5. This is the longest flight I have ever taken. By the time we get to New Zealand,
we (fly) for 13 hours. I'm going to be exhausted. 6. Douglas has been putting some money away every
month to prepare for his trip to South America next year. By the end of this year, he (save) enough. It
looks like he's going to make it. 7. Can you believe? According to our grammar teacher, by the end of this
semester she (teach) more than 3,000 students from 42 different countries. She has been teaching for
nearly 20 years — and she still loves it! 8. This traffic is terrible. We're going to be late. By the time we
(get) to the airport, Bob's plane already (arrive), and he'll be wondering where we are. 9. This morning I
came to class at 9.00. Right now it is 10.00, and I am still in class. I have been sitting at this desk for an
hour. By 11.00,1 (sit) here for two hours. 10.1 don't understand how these marathon runners do it! The
race began over an hour ago. By the time they reach the finish line, they (run) steadily for more than two
hours. I don't think I can run more than two minutes! 11. What? He got married again? At this rate, he
(have) a dozen wives by the time he dies. 12. We have been married for a long time. By our next
anniversary, we (be) married for 43 years. 13. I hope they (repair) this road by the time we come back
next summer. 14. By the end of next week my wife (do) her spring cleaning and we'll be able to relax
again. 15. By this time tomorrow we (have) our injections. 16. By the end of next year I (work) for him for
45 years. 17. He's only 35 but he's started losing his hair already. He (lose) all by the time he's 50. 18. In
two months' time he
105
(finish) his preliminary training and will be starting work. 19. I'll be back again at the end of next month. —
I hope I (pass) my driving test by then. If I have, I'll meet your train. 20. When Professor Jones retires next
month, he (teach) for 45 years. 21.1 will go to bed at 10 p.m. He will get home at midnight. I (sleep) for
two hours by the time he gets home.
When and If sentences (When I dо../if I do...)
1 .We use the present tense (usually the simple present) to refer to the future in clauses of time and
condition after when, while, as soon as, after, before, until/till, if, unless, provided/providing (that).
I'll buy a newspaper when I go out.
We won't go out until it stops raining.
We'll go to the beach if the weather is nice.
I'll go to the party provided you go too.
Before you leave you must visit the museum.
Can you look after the children while I am out?
I'll buy a new car as soon as I have enough money.
The door will not open unless you push it hard.
I'll lend you the money providing that you pay me back
tomorrow.
If he is sleeping when I come, I won't wake him up.
2. You can also use the Present Perfect (I have done) after when/ after/until etc. to show that the first
action will be finished before the second.
When I've read this book, you can have it.
Don't say anything while Tom is here. Wait here until he
has gone.
It is often possible to use the Simple Present or Present Perfect.
Self check
I, Put the verbs into the correct tense forms.
1. If you drop that bottle, it (break) 2. He (not write) to you unless you (write) to him. 3. You (understand)
when you (be) older. 4.1 (believe) it when I (see) it. 5. You (be) able to drive after you (have) another five
lessons. 6. Unless he (run), he (not catch) the train. 7. He (lend) it to you if you (ask) him. 8. If petrol
pump attendants (go) on strike we (not have) any petrol. 9. He (be) offended if you (not invite) him. 10.
She (have) $ 6000 a year when she (be) twenty. 11. If you (leave) your roller skates on the path someone
(fall) over them. If they (fall) over them and hurt themselves they (sue) you. 12. What your father (say)
when he (hear) about this accident? — He (not say) much but he (not lend) me the car again. 13. You've
been a good child, and when we (get) home I (give) you a sweet. 14. My father (be) furious when he (see)
what you have done. 15. As soon as I (hear) from him, I (let) you know. 16. The lift (not start) until you
(press) that button. 17.1 (stay) in bed till the clock (strike) seven. 18. As soon as the holidays (begin) this
beach (become) very crowded. 19. Don't count on a salary increase before you actually (get) it. 20.1 (pay)
you when I (get) my cheque. 21. If it (rain) this evening I (not go) out. 22. Before Tom (go) to bed, he
always (brush) his teeth. 23. Before Tom (go) to bed later tonight, he (write) a letter to his girlfriend. 24.
After I (get) home from school every afternoon, I (drink) a cup of tea. 25. Janet (meet) me at the airport
when my train (arrive) tomorrow. 26. When I (be) in New York next week, I (stay) at the Park Plaza Hotel.
27. Cindy and I (go) to the beach tomorrow if the weather (be) warm and sunny. 28. Jack (watch) a
football game on TV right now. As soon as the game (be) over, he (cut) the grass in the back yard. 29. As
soon as I (get) home every day, my children always (run) to the door to meet me. 30.1 (go) to New York
often. When I (be) in New York, I usually (see) a Broadway play. 31. If I (not study) tonight, I (not pass) my
chemistry exam. 32.1 think he (get) the job. I (be) surprised if he (not get) it. 33.1 hope to be there by
10.30. But if I (not be) there, don't wait for me. 34. We (not start) dinner until Jack (arrive). 35. Please
don't touch anything before the police (come). 36. You (be) lonely without me while I (be) away? 37.
Before you
107
(leave), don't forget to shut the windows. 38. Everyone (be) surprised if he (pass) the examination. 39. If I
(need) any help, I (ask) you. 40. Come on! Hurry up! Ann (be) annoyed if we (be) late. 41. After I (do) the
shopping, I (come) straight back home. 42. I'm going to watch a TV program at nine. Before I (watch) that
program, I (write) a letter to my parents. 43. I'm going to eat lunch at 12.30. After I (eat), I probably (take)
a nap. 44. I'm sure it will stop raining soon. As soon as the rain (stop), I (walk) to the drugstore to get
some film. 45. Tomorrow I'm going to leave for home. When I (arrive) at the airport, my whole family (wait)
for me. 46. When I (get) up tomorrow morning, the sun (shine), the birds (sing), and my roommate still
(lie) in bed fast asleep. 47. How can I get in touch with you while you (be) out of town? — I (stay) at the
Pilgrim Hotel. You can reach me there. 48. After Ali (return) to his country next month, he (start) working
at the Ministry of Agriculture. 49. Relax. The plumber is on his way. He (be) here before there (be) a flood
in the kitchen. Let's jusi keep mopping up the water the best we can.
50. A: How long you (stay) in this country?
B: I (plan) to be here for about one more year. I (hope) to
graduate a year from this June. A: What you (do) after you (leave)? B: I (return) home and (get) a job.
How about you? A: I (be) here for at least two more years before I (return)
home and (get) a job.
51. Heat the oil till it (begin) to smoke. 52. You drive first, and when you (be) tired, I (take) over. 53. We
(send) you the goods as soon as we (receive) your cheque. 54 .The plane (not take off) til! the fog (lift).
55. When you (do) the bedrooms, remember to sweep under the beds. 56. He (save) £500 a year. By the
time he (retire) he (save) £20,000. 57. When you (read) the book, leave it in the hospital for someone else
to read.
II. Translate from Russian into English.
1. Как только я приеду в Лондон, я напишу тебе письмо. 2. Если погода будет хорошая, мы сможем
сходить в лес за грибами. 3. Если ты поедешь на юг, то закажи билет туда и обратно. 4. Если он
будет спать, когда я приду, я разбужу его. 5. Я пойду прогуляться прежде, чем лягу спать. 6. Я про-
108
смотрю газеты после того, как мы поужинаем. 7. Пока я буду убирать квартиру, ты будешь готовить
обед. 8. Я приду, если не заболею. 9. Я не знаю, придет ли Нина. 10. Он будет наказан, если не
сдержит свое обещание. 11. Как только ты сдашь экзамены, мы поедем на юг. 12. Интересно,
примет ли он участие в экспедиции. 13. Что ты будешь делать, если никто тебя не встретит? — Я
оставлю вещи в камере хранения и поеду на автобусе. 14. Мы обсудим этот вопрос после того, как
вернется директор. 15. Присмотри за моим сыном, пока я не вернусь. 16. Мы поедем на рыбалку в
субботу, если не будет дождя. 17. Я зайду за тобой, как только освобожусь. 18. Она не знает, когда
приедет ее брат. 19. Давай зайдем в кафе после того, как закончится собрание. 20. Если он по-
звонит мне сегодня, я попрошу его заказать билеты на самолет. 21. Прежде чем я уеду, я поговорю
с управляющим. 22. Я останусь здесь, пока не улажу все дела. 23. Если Петр опоздает, нам
придется его подождать. 24. Когда вы увидите г-на Смита, попросите его позвонить мне. 25. Если
ты останешься еще на три дня, я смогу показать тебе достопримечательности города. 26. До того
как я уеду, мне нужно купить подарки для друзей. 27. Если я не успею на поезд, то я проведу ночь в
гостинице. 28. Я приду, как только сделаю домашнее задание. 29. Ты не знаешь, когда он
вернется? —Когда он вернется, я скажу тебе. 30. Я куплю ему подарок, если не потрачу все деньги
на книги. 31. Когда у тебя следующее занятие по немецкому языку? — В среду. — Ты собираешься
на нем присутствовать? — Нет, в среду утром я уезжаю в командировку в Лондон. — Сколько
времени ты там пробудешь? — Около двух недель. Я очень сожалею, что мне придется пропустить
занятия по немецкому языку. 32. Давай пойдем завтра в кино. В "Октябре" идет хороший детектив.
— Ты сможешь купить билеты? — Да, конечно. Мы пойдем в кино днем или вечером?—Я бы
предпочел вечерний сеанс. — Тогда я куплю билеты на восьмичасовой сеанс. Я позвоню тебе,
когда куплю билеты. — Спасибо. — А что ты делаешь сегодня вечером? — Сегодня вечером я буду
писать письма своим родственникам. А ты? — А я весь вечер буду смотреть телевизор. 33. Аня, ты
не хочешь поиграть в теннис в субботу утром? — Извини, я иду в парикмахерскую в субботу утром.
— А как насчет воскресенья? Почему бы нам не пока-
109
таться на велосипеде? — В воскресенье я буду готовиться к экзамену по физике. 34. Я завтра
устраиваю вечернику. —-Сколько человек придет на вечеринку? — Около десяти. — Мне остаться
и помочь тебе? — О, да, пожалуйста. Это очень любезно с твоей стороны. 35. Сколько времени вы
женаты? — В будущем году исполнится десять лет, как я женат. 36. Сколько времени вы работаете
на этом заводе? — В мае исполнится пять лет, как я здесь работаю. 37. Сколько времени вы знаете
Смита? — В конце года исполнится пять лет, как мы знаем друг друга. 38. Сколько времени вы
изучаете английский язык? — В июле исполнится два года, как я его изучаю. 39. В котором часу
отправляется самолет? — В 8 утра. — Сколько времени длится полет? — Около двух часов. — Ко-
гда мы прибываем в Москву? — В 10 утра. 40. Куда ты едешь в отпуск? — Я еду в Брайтон. —Когда
ты едешь? — 10 августа. — Ты едешь поездом? — Да. —Как долго ты там пробудешь? — Две
недели. — Где ты остановишься? — В гостинице. — Желаю тебе хорошего отдыха. 41. Ты
собираешься остаться в школе в будущем году? — Нет, мне надоела школа. — Что ты
собираешься делать? — Я намерен поискать работу. — Какого рода работу? — Я собираюсь
работать в банке. — Мне кажется, это скучная работа. — Я не согласен с тобой. 42. Что ты
делаешь завтра утром? — Я буду делать уроки. — А что ты делаешь завтра днем? — Завтра днем
я играю в футбол. Это очень важный матч. — Какая жалость! — Почему? — Завтра мы идем на
ярмарку. Я хотел пригласить тебя пойти со мной. — К сожалению, я не смогу пойти. Спасибо за
приглашение.
Fluency
Listen, read and practise.
Fred is a bachelor and his life is carefully organized. Brenda, one of the young secretaries in the office
where Fred works, think ^ he is rather nice. She suggests that they might go to a film together one
evening.
110
"What about Monday evening?" she asks. "Oh!" says Fred, "on Monday evening I'm taking my washing to
the launderette."
A. Now you play the part of Fred. Answer Brenda s questions using the ideas below.
1. What about Tuesday evening? have/supper/sister
2. What about Wednesday evening? go/my evening class
3. What about Thursday evening? play/badminton
4. What about Friday evening? meet/Harry/drink
5. What about Saturday evening? watch/football/ television
6. What about Sunday evening? go/church
B. I'm going to the football match with Jim.
Use the notes below to make up similar sentences, using the Present Continuous as a future.
1. I/see/Mr Allen/tomorrow
2. I/go/pictures/this evening
3. The President/come/London/next week
4. I/buy/some new shoes/at the weekend
5. He/change/his job/after Christmas
6. They/move/to the seaside/in the spring
7. We/go/to Spain/next month
8. They/open/a new/store/on twentieth July
9. I/ask for a rise/at the end of the week 10. I/get that record/Saturday
С What are you doing today?
Use the notes below to make up questions you might ask your friend.
1. Where/go/this afternoon
2. Why/go/into the city
3. Who/go/party with
4. What/do/tomorrow
5. Where/buy shoes
111
6. When/go/dentist
7. When/get/tickets for the concert
8. Where/meet/Paul/this evening
9. What time/come/tomorrow 10. Why/come/so late
D. Look at these ideas:
When are you going to Germany? I'm going on Friday. John isn't coming.
Use the notes below to make up similar sentences:
1. What time/you/come/Saturday?
2. Who/come/party?
3. Tom and Sue/not/come
4. Is it tme/Peter/change/job?
5. George/get/new car
6. Where/buy/it?
7. You/watch/horror movie/tonight?
8. Which channel/they/show/it on?
9. Mike/go/abroad 10. When/he/leave?
E. Composition
You are the personal assistant to a very important man, who works at your embassy in London. It's
Monday and you are going through his programme for the week with him. Here is an example of the
entries you have made in his diary.
Monday 3.00 p.m. Mr Steffen from
German Embassy
You say: "At 3.00 p.m. you're seeing Mr Steffen from the German Embassy."
Below are the complete notes for one week. Look at them carefully, then write the conversation between
you and your boss'
Monday 3.00 p.m. Mr Steffen from
German Embassy 8.00 p.m. Dinner ar Claridges Hotel. Turkish Ambassador
112
Tuesday 10.00 a.m. Meeting with
our Ambassador 1.00 p.m. Lunch, Post Office Tower. British Post Office officials
Wednesday 10.00 a.m. Appointment at
Board of Trade. Discuss new import duties.
1.00 p.m. Guest speaker at Rotary Club lunch. Subject. "Links between our two countries." Thursday
11.00 a.m. Visit to University
of Kent. 6.00 p.m. Attend cocktail
party at German Embassy Friday 9.35 a.m. Heathrow. Fly to Paris
to visit Trade Fair. F. Idea for discussion
I'm getting married next May.
Note: The ring has been bought, the arrangements have been made, the invitations have been printed.

This time last week Roy Woods, a bus conductor from Streatham, in South London, was worried about
money. He owed £20 to his landlady in rent. Today he is rich, for last Saturday he won £120,000 on the
football pools.
Last night he was interviewed on television by reporter Stan Edwards.
Edwards: Well Mr Woods, what are you going to do now? Are you going to give up your job on the buses?
Woods: Yes, I'm going to finish at the end of the week. Edwards: And what other plans have you got?
Woods: Well, I'm going to buy a house.
113
Edwards: Have you got a house of your own now?
Woods: No, no, we live in a furnished flat.
Edwards: Have you got a car?
Woods: Yes, I've got an old Ford, but I'm going to buy a
new car... and my wife says she's going to have
driving lessons!
A. Questions
1. What is Roy's job? 2.When is he going to finish working on the buses? 3.Why was Roy worried about
money last week? 4. How did he suddenly become rich? 5. Where do Roy and his family live at present?
6. Is he going to buy a new flat? 7. What sort of car has he got? 8. Is he going to buy a new one? 9. What
is his wife going to do? 10. Then what do you think she is going to want?
B. Here are the answers to some questions on the text. You ask the questions:
1. Streatham. Where...?
2. £20. How much ... landlady?
3. Stan Edwards. Who ... television?
4. Yes, he is. Is ...job?
5. Yes, he is. Is ... a house?
6. No, he doesn't.... own a house now? 7.Yes, he is.... a new car?
8. Yes, she is.... have driving lessons?
C. We often use the Simple Past and the going to future together like this:
I went to Canterbury last week, and I'm going to go again tomorrow.
Make similar sentences.
1.1 asked for a pay rise last week, and ... again tomorrow.
2.1 had a bath this morning,... this evening.
3.1 went to the pictures last night,... this evening.
4.1 saw the doctor yesterday,... tomorrow.
5. He won a gold medal at the last Olympics, and I'm sure ... this time.
6. It rained yesterday, and I think ... today.
7. You had trouble at Customs last time we went on holiday, ... again this time.
8. They searched us when we arrived at the airport, and ... again now.
9. We ran out of milk yesterday, and ... again today. 10. You grumbled about it yesterday, and ... again.
D. We often use going to in questions like this:
Where are you going to go for your holiday this year? Now you make questions:
1. Find out what your friend is going to buy his/her mother for her birthday.
2. It is late at night. You and your friend are at a party. Find out how he/she is going to get home.
3. A girl friend is planning to buy a new party dress. Find out where she is going to buy it.
4. A friend is going to buy a new car. Find out what sort he/she is going to buy.
5. A friend of yours has a boat. He surprises you by saying that he is going to sell it. Find out why.
6. A friend is giving up his job. Find out what he is going to do instead.
7. Your friend announces that he/she is going to get married, but doesn't say who to. Find out the answer.
8. Your friend announces that he/she is going to get married to someone who lives in another town or
country. Find out where the couple are going to live.
9. Your friend has a bottle of wine, but no corkscrew. Find out how he/she is going to open the bottle.
10. Your friend has just surprised you by putting a revolver on the table. Find out what he/she is going to
do with it. E. Problems
What does George say?
1. You and George arrange to meet Sarah and Emma at 7.30 to go to the pictures. It is 8.00. There is no
sign of the girls. George has Sarah's telephone number...
2. You and George have been waiting forty-five minutes
115
for a bus. It has just begun to rain. George knows there are taxis waiting round the corner...
3. You and George are reading. It is getting dark...
4. It is very, very hot. You and George have been playing tennis.George knows there is some beer in the
refrigerator...
5. George likes Dundee cake very much. He knows there is some in the cake tin...
F. Sometimes we use I'm not going to to express an argument very forcibly.
Look at this example:
You are at a political meeting with a friend. You disagree strongly with what the speaker is saying. You
say: "I'm not going to listen to any more of this rubbish!"
Study the situations below and make similar remarks.
1. You think the programme on the television is awful. I'm not... rubbish.
2. The last time your friend borrowed your camera he broke it. You're not... again.
3. Last time you let your friend pick the apples from your tree, he dropped half of them and bruised them.
You're not... my tree!
4. Yesterday evening your friend refused to let you watch a TV programme at his house. Now he wants to
watch a programme in yours.
You're not... my television.
5. Last time you lent your watch to your friend, he dropped it. I'm not...
6. You and your friend are going out with the same boy/girl. Your friend wants to ring that person up.
You're not ... my phone!
7. Your friend arrives at your house with a record you hate in his hand.
You're not... my record player.
G. Idea for discussion
Ask the person next to you what he or she is going to do:
116
this afternoon; this evening; tomorrow; on Saturday; next Sunday.
Answer the questions Then talk about some more things you are going to do in the next few days.
H. Composition
This is what the fortune-teller told your friend Mary: "You are generally happy, but you're a bit restless.
You're never going to be rich, but you're not going to be terribly poor either. You're going to travel. You're
going to go somewhere very hot. You're going to have an illness and you're going to spend some weeks
in hospital. Be careful about the water you drink. Very soon you're going to meet somebody who's going
to be very important in your life."
Now imagine you are the fortune teller. Use the notes below to tell your friend's fortune.
Change job; money; journey; new friends; accident; a lucky year; marry; children; achieve a secret
ambition; live to a very old age.
Paul was having a drink with some of his colleagues from the office, when suddenly he looked at his
watch.
Paul: Good Heavens! Is that the time?
Terry: It's just ten to seven — why?
Paul: I've got an appointment — I'm meeting a friend in London at eight o'clock. I'll never make it.
Terry: I'm going into London. I'll give you a lift if you like.
Paul: Could you really? That would be kind.
Terry: Where are you meeting your friend?
Paul: Near Piccadilly — but if you can drop me at an underground station, that'll be fine.
Terry: No, it's all right, Piccadilly's not far out of my way, I'll take you there.
Paul: That's very kind of you.
A. Questions
117
1. Who was Paul having a drink with? 2. What did he look at? 3. What time was Paul's appointment? 4.
What did Terry offer to do? 5. Where did Paul plan to meet his friend? 6. Where does he say Terry can
drop him off? 7. What does Terry say he'll do?
B. Note this idea:
I'm going into London. I'll give you a lift.
Use this form to offer help to your friend in the following circumstances:
1. You are seeing Mr Smith this evening. Your friend would like a message given to him.
2. You are going to the record shop. Your friend hears a certain record on the radio and says, "I must get
a copy of this record."
3. You have an appointment with the dentist this morning. Your friend has a problem with his teeth.
4. You have to go to a big store this afternoon. Your friend would like to know if they have any cheap
tennis racquets.
5. You intend to write to Alice this evening. Your friend would like you to send her his best wishes.
6. You have to visit the baker's shop. You know that your friend needs a loaf of bread.
7. You plan to ring Joan this evening. Your friend hopes that she and her sister will come to the party on
Saturday evening.
8. You are going out. You know you will pass a letter box. Your friend has just written a letter and put the
stamps on it
9. You are going to the Plaza cinema this evening. Your friend would like to know which film is showing
next week.
10. You have to go to London. You intend to go by train. Your friend has to go to Coventry the next day.
He would like to know what time the train leaves.
C. There are occasions when we are forced into a defensive position. In these situations Don't worry, I'll...
can be a useful defence.
Study this conversation.
She: You haven't cleaned the car.
He: I know, I'm sorry, I've been busy.
She: We're going to Jenny's party tomorrow.
He: I know.
She: I hate arriving at their house with the car all dirty. You know what Jenny's like...
He: All right. Don't worry. I'll clean it tomorrow morning!
Now defend yourself in the same way from the following accusations.
Begin: Don't worry, I'll...
1. You promised to take those photos in to be developed!
2. You haven't rung your brother yet!
3. You didn't write that letter yesterday!
4. You forgot to get any milk!
5. You haven't found out when that film is on!
6. You didn't get those tickets today, did you?
7. You haven't got your suit back from the cleaner's yet!
8. You didn't get a film for the camera, did you?
9. You didn't take your shoes to be repaired!
10. You didn't get any batteries for the radio, did you? D. Giving the bad news. Here are some situations
where your friend is hoping something is possible. You know it isn't. Give him the bad news, using won't.
Example:
You are sitting in a train with your friend. You hoped to get home early as you had been invited to a party.
But the train has been held up and you don't expect to get home till nearly midnight.
We won't get home in time for the party.
i 1. Your friend wants tickets for a pop concert. You know
> the tickets were sold out ages ago.
2. Your friend hopes he might get a train direct from Oxford to Cheltenham. You are sure he will have to
change trains.
3. Your friend thinks Sushee might go out with him. You know she is engaged to a very nice Indian boy.
4. Your friend wants a pair of rather expensive brown lea-
119
ther shoes. He thinks he might get them at the local shoe shop. You know they only stock cheap shoes. 5.
Dennis is only twenty-two. He has applied for a position of great responsibility. You and your friend are
sure he is too inexperienced to get the job.
E. We often express a similar idea by using: You 'II never...
You and your friend know another student who is not very intelligent and doesn't work hard either. You
might say: He'll never pass the exam!
Go back to exercise D and use these ideas to produce remarks beginning: You'll never... He'll never...
etc.
F. People often make indirect requests. Sometimes we ignore them, but at other times we offer to do
what the other person wishes, using: Shall I... ? like this,
Boss: My goodness, it's hot in here. Secretary: Shall I open the window?
Reply to the following remarks. Begin with: Shall I...?
1. We've run out of aspirins.
2. A cup of coffee would be nice.
3. Oh, dear, I don't feel at all well.
4.1 wish I knew Mr Fox's telephone number. 5.1 wonder what the fare to Edinburgh is.
6. This typewriter doesn't seem to be working properly.
7. Oh, look, melons. I love melons.
8.1 want a nice photograph of myself, to send my mother 9. Gracious, it's cold in here.
10. My goodness, it's pouring with rain. How am I going to get to the station?
G. Idea for discussion.
Imagine that you are going to have a class party one evening next week. Everybody must volunteer to do
something, bring something, or organise something so that the party will be a success. Explain what you
will do to help. (Use the I'll form.)
120
Jim: I fancy going to the cinema this evening for a change,
What do you think? Shall we go? Robert: We could. What's on? Jim: There's James Bond film on.
Robert: O.K. Shall I call for you? We could go by car. Shall
I pick you up at about 6 o'clock? Jim: Thanks very much. That'd be great.
A. Shall we go? = Let's go. Shall expresses suggestion. Shall I call for you? = Would you like me to call
for you? Shall I pick you up at about 6 o'clock? = Would you like me to pick you up at about 6 o'clock?
Shall expresses offer.
B. Invention exercise.
Situation: You have an idea about what you and another person (or people) can do together.
Example: Shall we...?
this point tomorrow = Shall we discuss this point tomorrow?
1. the cinema this evening?
2. a drink somewhere?
3. another television programme (this one is terrible).
4. in the new French restaurant?
5. a game of tennis?
6. at the table over there?
7. the bus to school?
8. a taxi?
9. this question some other time?
10. a walk in the park?
11. lunch now?
12. the dance on Friday? С Progressive situation
Situation: You want to help a person in some way. You ask if that person wants your help.
Model: Shall I carry that bag?
121
1. that box 9. turn on
2. open lO.the radio
3. the door 11. the light
4. close 12. turn off
5. the windows 13. the engine
6. your suitcase 14. look at
7. take 15, the tyres
8. the gramophone 16. put some air

Gina: Lynn, can you keep a secret?

Lynn: Sure. What is it?
Gina: Promise you won't tell anyone.
Lynn: I promise. What is it?
Gina: Frank asked me to marry him!
Lynn: You're kidding! What did you say?
Gina: I didn't say anything. I don't know what to do.
Lynne: Why don't you talk to Madam Suzanne?
Gina: Who's that?
Lynn: She's a fortune-teller. She'll tell you about your future.
Gina: Oh, I don't believe in fortune-tellers.
Lynn: A lot of people don't, but sometimes the information
is interesting.
Gina: Hmmm. Will she tell me about my life with Frank?
Lynn: I'm sure she will. She's very good.
A. Answer "That's right", "That's wrong", or "It doesn't say"
1. Frank wants to marry Gina.
2. Gina wants to marry Frank.
3. Madame Suzanne tells people about their fortune.
4. Lynn likes Madam Suzanne.
5. Gina likes Madam Suzanne.
6. Lynn won't tell Gina's secret.
B. What does Frank promise Gina? Complete the sentences with '11 (will) or won't (will not).
I'll be a good husband. I won't disappoint you.
122
1. We ... have a wonderful life.
2. You ... never be unhappy.
3.1... bring you flowers every day. 4.1... fix things around the house. 5. We ... visit your mother every
month. 6.1... leave my dirty clothes on the floor. 7.1... complain about your cooking. 8.1... forget your
birthday.
C. What does Madam Suzanne tell Gina? Complete the sentences with the future tense of the verbs in
parentheses.
1. Your husband (be) a tall man with blond hair.
2. Your parents (not) like your husband.
3. You (live) in a big house.
4. Your husband (not) be neat.
5. You (have) six children.
6. You (meet) a lot of interesting people.
7. You (travel).
8. Your husband (not remember) your birthday.
9. Your husband (love) you. 10. That (be) five dollars.
D. Gina's parents are talking. What are Mr Poggi's questions? Look at the example.
Gina/marry Frank
Mr Poggi: Will Gina marry Frank? Mrs Poggi: Yes, I think she will.
1. they/be happy Mr Poggi: ...?
Mrs/ Poggi: Yes, they will.
2. he/buy a house for her Mr Poggi: ...?
Mrs Poggi: Yes, he will.
3. they/live near us Mr Poggi: ...?
Mrs Poggi: No, they won't.
4. Gina/quit her job Mr Poggi: ...?
Mrs Poggi: No, I don't think she will.
123
5. Frank /be a good father Mr Poggi: ...? Mrs Poggi: Yes, I think he will.
E. Frank is talking to his father. Complete Frank's promises. Mr Russo: Make Gina happy. Mr Russo:
Don't be messy. . Frank: Don't worry. I will. Frank: I promise I won't.
1. Mr Russo: Help around the house. Frank: Don't worry...
2. Mr Russo: Be nice to her parents. Frank: OK...
3. Mr Russo: Don't forget her birthday. Frank: I promise that...
4. Mr Russo: Don't complain. Frank: All right...
5. Mr Russo: Don't watch TV all the time. Frank: Don't worry...
6. A: Tell your partner to do something. B: I promise (that)...
All right/OK/Don't worry... F. Complete Gina's thoughts about marrying Frank.
Madam Suzanne said we'll have six children. If we have six children, I won't be very happy.
or I won't be very happy if we have six children.
1. Madam Suzanne said my parents won't like my husband. I (not be) happy if they (not like) him.
2. She said we'll live in a big house. If we (live) in a big house, I (have to) clean all the time.
3. She said we'll travel. If we (travel), I (be) very happy.
4. She said we'll meet a lot of interesting people. We (have) a good time if we (meet) a lot of interesting
people.
5. She said I'll marry a tall man with blond hair. If I (marry) a tall man with blond hair, it (not be) Frank.
6. Madam Suzanne can't be right! If I (not marry) Frank. I (not marry) anybody!
G. Frank is talking to his mother. Complete the questions with the words from the list. Roleplay the
conversation.
124
What • when • how long • why • how • what time • what kind of wedding • where
Mrs Russo: ... will you do if Gina says no?
Frank: I don't know.
Mrs Russo: ... will she give you an answer?
Frank: I'm sure she'll give me an answer soon.
Mrs Russo: ... will you wait?
Frank: I'm very patient. I'll wait a long time.
Mrs Russo: ... will you live if you get married?
Frank: We'll probably buy a house near school.
Mrs Russo: ... will you live there?
Frank: Because Gina has class at night and we don't have
a car.
Mrs Russo: ... will you pay for a house? Frank: Well, I have a good job, and Gina works, too.
Mrs Russo: ... will you have?
Frank: A small one. We'll invite our families and a few
friends.
Mrs Russo: ... will you get married? Frank: I don't know yet. Gina wants to get married at 2
o'clock, but I want a morning wedding.
John: Well, tomorrow is quite a busy day for me. I'll get up at quarter past six and have breakfast about
half an hour later. I'll start my journey to work at quarter past seven, which usually takes me about three
quarters of an hour. For the first two hours at work, from eight till about ten, I'll do the routine things: look
at my letters, make phone calls and so on, then at 10.30 I've got a meeting, which will continue till 12.30,
when I'll take my client to lunch. I'll get back to the office at about two, and will spend the next three to
four hours writing a report, which I hope to finish by 5.30.1 want to leave the office by six at the latest,
because I've got guests coming for dinner at half past eight. A. Questions
Will John be busy tomorrow? What will he do? What will your work day tomorrow be like?
125
В. Study and practise the dialogues.
1. A: I'm going to hitchhike round the world.
B: Oh, that's very dangerous.
A: No, it isn't. I'll be all right.
B: Where will you sleep?
A: Oh, I don't know. In youth hostels. Cheap hotels.
B: You'll get lost.
A: No, I won't.
B: You won't get lifts.
A: Yes, I will.
B: What will you do for money?
A: I'll take money with me.
B: You haven't got enough.
A: I'll find jobs,
B: Well... are you sure you'll be all right?
A: Of course I'll be all right.
2. Salesman: I'd like to see you for a minute, sir, if you have ti-
me. I've got a bit of a problem.
Manager: Certainly. I won't be a moment, I'll just ask my secretary to take the incoming letters and then I'll
help you if I can.
3. Mrs Jones is visiting Mrs Smith at home.
Mrs Smith: It's nice to see you, Mrs Jones. Will you take a seat while I fetch the tea-tray?
Mrs Jones: Thank you. What a lovely room!
Mrs Smith: First of all, Mrs Jones, will you have a piece of chocolate cake?
Mrs Jones: That's a wonderful idea. I won't refuse today but I will go on a diet next week.
4. A: Will the car be ready by five? B: Yes, it will.
A: Really? Can I depend on that?
B: Absolutely! I promise it'll be ready by five.
A: Okay. Now remember. I'm counting on you.
B: Don't worry! I won't let you down.
5. Paul: What are you doing this afternoon, Joanne? Are
you going to a conference?
126
Joanne: No, I'm not. But Vince is going. I'm going
shopping. What about you? Paul: I don't know. Diana's in Cambridge. She's seeing
some people about a film. Joanne: Oh. How long is she staying there? Paul: Just for the day. She's
coming back this evening. 6. Teacher: OK... that's the end of today's class. Thank you.
See you all on Monday. Paul: Phew, that was hard work. I'm never going to
be an actor.
Friend: Why not? You were very good today. Paul: Thanks.
Friend: Anyway, what are you going to do this weekend? Paul: I'm going to see that new play at
the Majestic
Theatre tomorrow evening. Friend: With Jackie?
Paul: Oh no! Anna's going to come with me. Friend: Anna? Who's Anna?
Paul: A television reporter from Puerto Rico. On Saturday we're going to have lunch together. Friend:
But Paul! What about your girlfriend Jackie? Paul: Jackie isn't my girlfriend any more. Anna is.

Andy: Hi, Sue. Where are you going?

Sue: To Gatwick Airport. We're meeting a girl from
Grenada.
Andy: Grenada? Where's that?
Paul: It's an island in the Caribbean.
Andy: Who's the girl?
Sue: Her name is Natalie. She's going to live with
us and go to our school.
Andy: How long is she staying?
Sue: For three months.
Mrs Wilson: Come and get your jacket, Sue. We're leaving in five minutes.
Andy: Poor kid! Three months at Castle Hill School. I
hope she's tough!
A. In pairs, interview Natalie before her trip to Britain Imagine one of you is Natalie. Use the notes below
to help you make questions.
You: Where are you going?
Natalie: I'm going to Britain.
You: How are you travelling?
Natalie: I'm travelling by plane to Gatwick Airport.
Where/go?
How/travel?
When/leave?
How long/stay?
Where/stay?
Go to school?
Which school/go to?
B. In pairs, ask and answer about your plans. Talk about what you are doing and where you are going.
A: What are you doing after school?
B: I'm meeting my mother and going shopping.
Ask about: after school, in the summer, at the weekend.
1. John is looking forward to this weekend. He isn't going to think about work. He's going to read a few
magazines, fix his car, and relax at home with his family.
2. Alice is looking forward to her birthday. Her sister is going to have a party for her, and all her friends are
going to be there.
3. Mr and Mrs Williams are looking forward to their summer vacation. They're going to go camping in the
mountains. They're going to hike several miles every day, take a lot of pictures, and forget about all their
problems at home.
4. George is looking forward to his retirement. He's going to get up late every morning, visit friends every
afternoon and enjoy quiet evenings at home with his wife.
A. What are you looking forward to? A birthday? A holiday? A day off?
Talk about it with other students in your class.
— What are you looking forward to?
— When is it going to happen?
— What are you going to do? etc.
Tom: Hello, Jack. It's Tom.
Jack: Tom, hello. What's wrong?
Tom: Nothing's wrong. Jean and I want you to come to dinner
with us.
Jack: Well... I er... Tom: What about tomorrow night? Jack: I'm sorry, Tom. I can't. I'm meeting the Sales
Director
tomorrow evening. Tom: Well, what about Saturday?
Jack: Just a minute... I'll get my diary... Erm... No, I can't make it Saturday. I'm flying to Brussels for the
weekend — big sales conference. Tom: Okay. Well, when can you make it? Jack: Let's see...erm... I'm
finishing off my report on Friday. I'm flying back from Brussels on Monday...erm... What about Tuesday?
Tom: Yes, Tuesday sounds ...
Jack: Oh no. Sorry! I'm having dinner with an important customer on Tuesday. And on Wednesday I'm
playing golf with the boss.
Tom: Okay, Jack. Forget it! You're obviously too busy... But I'mtelling you, you're working too hard. You're
going to make yourself ill or something. Jack: Tom, listen... Tom: Bye, Jack. See you around.
A. Read the conversation and speak about Jack's plans for the week.
B. Roleplay the conversation.
C. In pairs, make up similar telephone conversations.
Julie, a student, is talking to her friend Dan about her plans to go on the dig.
Dan: Just think. This time next week we'll be doing our
exams. Julie: I know. Won't it be great when they're over? Are you
going away in the summer? Dan: No. No such luck. What about you? Julie: Well actually, I'm going on an
archaeological dig to
Egypt. I'm quite excited about it. Dan: Egypt! Won't that be terribly hot? Julie: I don't think so. I mean, we
won't be working in the
heat of the day.
Dan: Where are you going? To the Valley of the Kings? Julie: Yes, but not all the time. Apparently we'll be
going to
other places as well. It should be really interesting. Dan: You're not going to catch malaria, are you? Julie:
I hope not. I've got special tablets to take. Dan: Well, think of me while you're digging. I'll be filling
shelves in our local supermarket, worse luck!
A. Now answer "True " or "False " to these statements.
1. Dan and Julie have just finished their exams.
2. Julie is looking forward to the summer.
3. She is going on a touring holiday to Egypt.
4. She knows she won't catch malaria.
5. Dan is going to do a holiday job during the summer.
6. He is looking forward to it.
B. Provide a suitable question in the Future Continuous using one of the verbs in the box.
Julie: I'm really pleased. I've been accepted to go on an
archaeological dig.
Student: (leave)?
Julie: At the beginning of July. On the fourth, actually.
Student: (go)?
Julie: To Luxor in Egypt.
Student: (do)?
130
Julie: Digging and drawing and labelling. All that sort of
thing. Student: (work)?
Julie: About six hours, from dawn until about two in the
afternoon. Student: (sleep)?
Julie: In tents, I think. We have to take sleeping bags. Student: (earn)?
Julie: Nothing. It's voluntary work. Student: (come back)? Julie: In time for college, I expect.
C. Speak about Julie s plans for the summer.
D. Roleplay the conversation.
E. Use the cues to ask your partner about some future activities.
Example:
I. What will you be doing for Christmas?
1. What/do/for Christmas?
2. Where/spend/summer holiday?
3. When/take/next important exams?
4. What/think/do/this time next week?
5. Where/think/work or study/in a year's time?
F. Imagine you are going to Egypt with Julie s group. Write a short letter to the organizer, Mr Taylor, who
is going to meet you at Cairo airport. Give your travel details and say how he will recognize you.
G. Complete the sentences using the correct form of the Future Continuous tense.
1. Where (you/stay) while you're working in Barcelona?
2. Do you think you (do) anything interesting in five years' time?
3. How (your parents/travel) when they cross the USA ?
4. She hopes she (earn) a lot of money in a year's time.
5. Please note that we (hold) today's meeting in Room 5 and not in Room 9.
6. (you/see) either John or Jean tomorrow, by any chance?
7. We (not/use) the tennis court for very long. Come back in about half an hour.
131

8. The UN (watch) the new political situation in the Gulf very closely.
Jenny and Jane have come to watch the Merton Marathon.
Jane: What time is it?
Jenny: It's nine o'clock.
Jane: By ten thirty the runners will have finished.
Jenny: No. They won't have finished by then.
The women will not even have started by then. Jane: What time do they start? Jenny: The men's
race starts at nine thirty and the women's
race starts at eleven thirty. Jane: By the time they arrive, we will have been waiting
for hours. Jenny: Yes, and they will have been running for hours.
A. Write these sentences in full using the Future Perfect tense.
1. What (you/achieve) by the year 2000?
2. In two years' time, my parents (be/married) for twenty-five years.
3. John (not/finish) medical training until he is twenty-six.
4. You can have the book on Monday. I (read) it by then.
5. They (not/complete) the motorway before 1998.
6. Unless we leave now, the film (start) when we get there.
B. Make responses to the statements or questions, using the cues and the Future Perfect.
1. A: Is it all right if I get to the cinema at 7.30?
В : No, I'm afraid that's too late. The film (start) by then.
2. A: I hear Sue and John are moving to Paris next month. В : Sue/have the baby/by then?
3. A: I'll be at your house at eight o'clock. OK?
В : Actually, could you make it a little later? I don't expect (we/finish/eating) by then.
4. A: Only one more week's holiday!
B: It's just as well. We (run out of money) by next week.
132
I'd better sign that letter before I go off to lunch. I'm afraid 1 (not type) it by lunch time. It'll be nice to see
Malcolm again. Shall I come round in half an hour?
He (not arrive) by then, I'm afraid. I've got to give that book back to the library next Monday. That's rather
soon. You (read) it by Monday?
C. Write a, b, с in the gap and read the completed sentences.
1. By the end of the week they — the next issue of their newspaper.
a. will have been completing
b. have completed
c. will have completed
2. By Wednesday afternoon, Tom____four people.
a. will have interviewed
b. will interview
c. will be interviewed
3. By tomorrow night Jenny____four articles.
a. will be written ш b. will have written
с. won't have been writing
4. When the newspaper comes out, they____on it for six weeks.
a. will work
b. will have been working
c. won't have been working
5. They hope that by the end of next week they____2000 copies.
a. will be sold
b. will have sold
c. won't have sold
6. Nick hopes that by the end of the year they____rich and
famous.
a. won't become
b. became
c. will have become
7. By next month, Amanda____seven articles.
a. will have written
b. will have been writing
c. will write
133
D. Answer the questions.
1. How long will you have been learning English by the end
of this school year?
2. How long will you have been living in your town by next summer?
3. How long will you have been living in your house or flat by next year?
4. How long will you have known your English teacher by the end of this school year?
5. How long will you have known your best friend by next summer*?
6. How long will you have been watching your favourite TV programme by the end of this year?
7. How long will you have been attending your present school by the end of the school year?

Pam and Ted Gibbs are about to go on an unusual holiday. They are going to travel from Alaska to Tierra
del Fuego, a distance of 25,665 kilometers — on motorbikes.
Pam: We fly to Anchorage at ten o'clock tomorrow morning
and this time next week we'll be travelling down the
Canadian coast. We're taking the shortest route along
the west coast. Ted: I expect we'll have problems with bad weather and bad
roads. We'll break down, of course, so we're taking spare
parts with us. Pam: The weather forecast for Alaska is fine at the moment,
so we're going to have a good start. Ted: We will be travelling up to 250 kilometers a day on good
roads, but on bad roads we won't be able to get very
far. We know that it won't be an easy trip. We'd like to
spend Christmas at home, but we won't have arrived in
England by then. Pam: When we get back, we will have been travelling for over
a year. That's a long time, but we will have made a dream
come true. Ted: That's right. But we'll probably never want to ride a
motorbike again!
134
Note- kilometer (амер.) = kilometre
A. Say whether the statements are right or wrong. Correct the wrong statements.
eg Ted and Pam are going to travel from Alaska to New York. Wrong. They are going to travel from Alaska
to Tierra del Fuego.
1. They are flying to Vancouver.
2. Their flight leaves at eight o'clock tomorrow.
3. They will be travelling by bicycle.
4. The weather in Alaska is going to be bad.
5. They are taking spare parts for the motorbikes.
6. They will be travelling over 200 kilometers a day.
7. They will be away for over a year.
8. They will have arrived home by Christmas.
9. By the end of their trip, they will have driven 10,000 kilometers.
10. They are planning to go on another trip.
B. Read the text and comment on the uses of future tense forms.
C. Ask and answer questions on the text.
D. Roleplay the conversation.
E. Work with a partner. You are going to cross your country on foot, by bicycle, on camels etc. Plan your
route, then write a paragraph about your plans. What will you be doing and when? What will you be
taking with you?
We will be leaving from ... by bicycle on I July. We won't be taking much luggage with us. My friend will be
carrying the food and I...
I Interviewer: Now you're going on holiday shortly . Where
are you going to go? ' Elizabeth: To Winnipeg, Manitoba in Canada.
Interviewer: And how are you going to travel there?
Elizabeth: We'll take a car to the airport, and then fly Air
135
Canada to Winnipeg, and then we have a 500 mile drive across to Banff in the Rockies.
Interviewer: And how long are you going to spend there?
Elizabeth: Just under three weeks, from the 15th of December to the 2nd of January.
Interviewer: And where are you going to stay in Banff?
Elizabeth: When we first get there we'll be staying with a family—friends that stayed with us in the sum-
mer in this country.
Interviewer: And what are you going to do whilst you're there, then?
Elizabeth: Um, well, when we're in Winnipeg, we'll just be visiting friends and relatives but when we're in
Banff, we'll be skiing. There are some hot water springs, so we'll go swimming and we're going to go
across to America as well for a week.
A. Questions
1. Where is Elizabeth going for her holidays? 2. How are they going to get there? 3. How long are they
going to stay in Canada? 4. Where are they going to stay in Banff? 5. What are they going to do during
their holidays?
B. Read and roleplay the conversation.
C. Discuss your holiday plans.

Bob: So, Tom, are you going to get married or not?

Tom: Yeah, yeah, but Rosa's afraid. She's not sure she wants
to get married right now. She can't decide. Bob: Why not? Tom: Well, we're both young, and she likes her
job. And, of
course, if we have children, she'll have to quit her job. Bob: Why? A lot of women have kids but don't quit
their jobs. Tom: True, but I don't want Rosa to work. Bob: Oh. So when will she give you an answer? Tom:
I'm going to her house for dinner Saturday night. She'll
tell me then. Bob: Well, good luck.
136
Tom: Thanks. What are you going to do this weekend, Bob? Bob: I'm going fishing with my dad. We'll
probably leave
early Saturday morning and come back Saturday night. Tom: What time will you get home? Bob: Around 7
o'clock. I have a date with my girlfriend at
8.00.
Tom: Will I see you on Sunday? Bob: Yeah. In fact, why don't we all do something? Tom: OK. What?
Bob: Oh, I don't know. We can go to a movie or something. Tom: Fine.
I. Choose the best answers.
1. Tom
a. wants to get married.
b. isn't sure he wants to get married.
2. Tom's fiancee Rosa
a. wants to get married.
b. isn't sure she wants to get married.
3. Rosa will give Tom an answer
a. on Saturday
b. on Sunday
4. If they have children,
a. Tom wants Rosa to quit her job.
b. Tom doesn't want Rosa to quit her job.
5. Bob is going fishing
a. with his father on Saturday.
b. with his girlfriend on Sunday.
6. Bob will get home
a. around 7 o'clock.
b. around 8 o'clock.
7. On Sunday, Bob and his girlfriend
a. will probably go to a movie alone.
b. will probably go to a movie with Tom and Rosa.
B. Read the text. Ask and answer questions on the text.
C. Give a brief account of the conversation.
D. Roleplay the conversation.
E. Read Rosa's note.
137
Linda,
I won't be in class tomorrow. I'm going to go fishing with Tom. He has a day off so I'm going to take a day
off, too. Will you please call me tomorrow night and tell me the homework assignment. I'll probably be
home around 6.00. I'll talk to you then.
Thanks. Rosa
F. Now write your own note.
1. Tell your classmate you are going to take a day off.
2. Say what you are going to do.
3. Ask your classmate to call with the homework assignment.
4. Say when you'll return.

Woman: You're going to take the next English course, aren't

you?
Man: Yes, I think so.
Woman: What are you doing during school break? Man: I'm going to Miami. I'm leaving on Saturday.
Woman: What are you going to do there? Man: I'm going to visit friends. We'll probably just go to
the beach and relax.
Woman: That sounds good. When will you be back? Man: In a week. Woman: Will you send me a
postcard? Man: Sure.
Woman: You won't forget, will you? Man: Of course not.
A. Reproduce the woman's questions used in the conversation.
B. Speak about the man's plans.
C. Roleplay the conversation.
D. Complete the conversation using the verbs in brackets and the correct form o/will, going to or the
Present Continuous. The cues will help you. Roleplay the conversation.
138
John: What (you/do) this weekend, Mike? (arrangement)
Mike: I (not/do) anything special. What about you? (arrangement)
John: Well, I've promised a friend of mine, Alison, move a new piano into her flat some time tomorrow.
Mike: I (give) you a hand if you like, (offer)
John: I rather hoped you'd say that!
Mike: What time (you/meet) her? (arrangement)
John: I'm not sure yet. I (give/her/a ring) this afternoon to find out. (intention)
Mike: OK.
John: I (let/you/know) as soon as I can. (promise)
Mike: OK. I (be) in all evening, (prediction)
John: What? On a Friday evening?
Mike: Yes, I (watch) the U2 concert on TV. (intention)
John: OK. I (call) you later, (decision)
E. Complete the conversation with the correct future tense forms. Roleplay the conversation
Jack: (You/do) anything this evening? I wondered if you'd like to come out for a meal?
Hannah: I'm afraid I can't. I've got a photography class.
Jack: Oh, yeah. I forgot. What about tomorrow, then? (We/ meet) in town and have lunch together?
Hannah: No, tomorrow's no good, either. (I/go) to Brighton to see my sister. (I/leave) on the ten o'clock
train.
Jack: How long (you/stay)?
Hannah: Just for the weekend. (I/be) back on Sunday afternoon.
Jack: OK. (I/give) you a ring then. Maybe we can do something in the evening. Perhaps go to the cinema
or something?
Hannah: Yes, Sunday evening sounds fine. Anyway, what are your plans for the weekend?
Jack: (I/do) some studying tomorrow and then I think (I/ sleep) all Sunday morning! By the way, (I/give)
you a lift to the station tomorrow if you like.
Hannah: Oh, thanks. That's really kind.
A. Write a letter making an excuse for not doing something your friend wants you to do.
139
UNIT 2 TOPIC: APPEARANCE. CHARACTER
Listen, read and practise.
"How old are you?" It's a simple question, and there is usually a simple answer: "sixteen years old,"
"twenty years old," "fifty-five," etc. But if someone is described as young or middle-aged or old, then how
old is that person? It's difficult to know because these are words that have different meanings for different
people. Except for the word teenager, which describes someone whose age ends in the syllable "teen"
(such as fourteen, fifteen or sixteen), words which describe age are not exact. When, for example, does a
baby stop being called a baby and become a young child? When does a boy become a young man and a
little girl become a young woman? At what age does middle age begin? When do you call someone
elderly and not simply old? At what age does someone become an adult? In some countries, it is when
the government says a person is old enough to vote. Is that really the difference between a child and an
adult? The answers to these questions partly depend on how old you are. There is a saying that old age
is always ten years older than yourself. If you are fifteen, then you think someone of twenty-five is old. At
thirty, forty seems old. If you are seventy, then you probably think someone of eighty is old. A recent
survey showed that there was some truth in the old saying. People were asked. "What is middle age?"
Those in their early twenties usually answered, "Between thirty-five and fifty," and people in their thirties
answered, "Between forty-five and sixty."
A. Decide -whether these statements are true (T) or false (F) according to the passage
1. When people are asked their age, they usually answer with a number.
2. If someone tells you that he or she is middle-aged, you know the exact age of that person.
140
3. It is possible to call someone who is twelve a teenager.
4. There is an exact age when a baby becomes a young child.
5. "Elderly" is similar in meaning to "old".
6. Some governments say that an adult is a person who can vote.
7. According to the saying, if you are twenty-nine, then you think someone of thirty is old.
8. As you get older, your ideas change about when middle age begins.
B. Think about.
1. What are some of the joys and problems of each age?
2. Are you happy with your present age?
3. How do you feel about growing older?
4. How important is age? in marriage? in work?
Beauty
How important is your appearance? Although everyone wants to be good-looking, are beautiful people
always happier people? For example, it must be a problem to be a really beautiful woman, because some
men may be more interested in looking at you than talking to you. They think of you as a picture rather
than a person. There are also some people who think that women who are exceptionally pretty and men
who are particularly handsome must be stupid. They believe that only unattractive people can be
intelligent.
On the other hand, no one wants to be really ugly, and have a face that even your mother doesn't want to
look at; and no one wants to be plain either — that is, to be neither attractive nor unattractive, and have a
face that is easily forgotten.
Being attractive is like being rich — it can help you find happiness, but it doesn't always make you happy.
So maybe the best thing is not to worry too much about how you look, but simply try to be an interesting
person. For interesting people have interesting faces, and interesting faces are almost always attractive.
A. Decide whether these statements are true (T), false (F), or impossible to know (IK) according to the
passage.
141
1. Everyone wants to be attractive.
2. Most beautiful people are unhappy.
3. No one likes to talk to a very pretty woman.
4. Some people think that handsome men are unintelligent.
5. Attractive men and women are usually intelligent.
6. Ugly people are not happy people.
7. A plain face is easily forgotten.
8. Not many interesting people are also attractive.
B. Look at these common English expressions and then decide whether you agree with them
a) Your face is your fortune.
b)-Beauty is in the eye of the beholder (i.e., the person who is looking).

Mr and Mrs Smith were a very average couple. His name was John. Her name was Mary. They lived in an
average-sized house and had two average children — one boy and one girl.
Were they tall? Mr and Mrs Smith were neither tall nor short. They were both average height. He was
average height for a man and she was average height for a woman.
Were they fat? Mr Smith was certainly not weak or skinny, but he was not strong or well-built either. He
was just medium build and his shoulders and chest were neither very broad nor very narrow. His wife,
too, could never be described as thin or slim, but then again, she was not overweight or fat either. Her
waist was neither too big nor too narrow. It was just... average size.
It was very easy for Mr and Mrs Smith to buy clothes because part of their bodies was average size too.
Their feet were neither very big nor very small. Their hips were not too wide. And their legs were neither
too short nor too long.
Yes, the Smiths were a very average couple. Except for one thing. They were the only couple in the
country who were average in so many ways at the same time. The Smiths were in fact... unique.
A. Decide whether the following statements are true (T) or false (F) according to the passage.
142
1. Mr and Mrs Smith had two children named John and Mary.
2. Mr Smith was very tall.
3. Mrs Smith was average height.
4. Mr Smith was a skinny man.
5. Mrs Smith probably weighed about 160 pounds.
6. Mrs Smith had a very small waist.
7. Mr Smith had average-sized feet.
8. The Smiths were completely average.
B. Think about
1. What is the average height for men and women in your country? Is it changing?
2. What are the advantages and disadvantages of being either very tall or very short?
3. Can you think of some good ways of keeping these parts of the body in good condition: heart, lungs,
skin, bone, muscle?
4. Describe some ways of losing weight.

1. He saw a tall, handsome woman dressed with careful and expensive informality in a black cashmere
sweater with a silk scarf at the throat and fawn trousers... It was a distinguished face with deep-set eyes
beneath straight brows, a well-Shaped, rather secretive mouth and strong, greying hair swept upwards
and curled into a chignon.
Note: chignon — a type of hairstyle popular with older women. The hair is twisted into a kind of knot at the
back of the head.
2. She wore a pale blue sweater and a gray flannel skirt, schoolgirl's clothes, which made her seem
younger than her age. She was about twenty-five. Her face was framed by thick hair, in a colour midway
between blonde and brown, and held back by a black velvet band. The skin was fine and she had large,
rather beautiful dark blue eyes, with long colourless lashes.
3. Temple was a small stocky man in his early forties. His jaw line had long ago disappeared into one of
his chins. His pepper and salt hair was cut short with a parting in the middle and he had
143
a dark bushy drooping moustache that grew well over his top lip. His nose was small, almost snub, and
his eyes were pale.
Note: pepper and salt hair — hair which has both black and gray mixed in it.
A. Write a paragraph giving a detailed description of a friend, a relative or a film or TV star.
Here is a newspaper article: "Sports personality of the year".
I would like to name Gary Lineker as Sports Personality of the Year. I think he is not only a good
footballer, he is also a very nice person and very different from other football stars. First of all, in spite of
being intelligent, talented and good-looking, he is actually very modest. He never boasts about what he's
done or pretends to be somebody he isn't. Even though he obviously earns a lot of money and lives in a
nice house in London, he doesn't throw his money around like others do.
Secondly, he is much more open-minded than other football stars. Many footballers work and live abroad
but not many try to become part of the culture of the country. When Lineker lived in Barcelona, he made
Spanish friends, lived a Spanish way of life and made a point of learning to speak Spanish.
Another thing that makes him different from other footballers is his sense of fair play on the field. Since he
started his career, he has never been reported in the newspapers for bad behaviour and he has never
been sent off for fouling or swearing.
Finally, you get the impression that Lineker is a human being with human emotions like anybody else.
When his baby developed a life-threatening illness, he and his wife went through a very difficult time. He
showed that he is not only capable of strong emotion, he is also prepared to show it in public.
For all these reasons, I think he deserves the title of "Sports Personality of the Year".
A. Questions
1. What aspects of Gary Lineker's personality are mentioned?
2. What details, if any, do you learn about:
144
— his football career?
— his family?
— his lifestyle?
B. Write in 250 words about the person who you think deserves the title of "Personality of the Year ".
They can be from the world of politics, entertainment, sport, the arts or business — or they may be
somebody completely unknown.

1. She's absolutely adorable. I think she's very pretty, she makes me laugh a lot, um... she tells terrible
jokes but I like the way she tells them. She's a bit naughty sometimes and I curse her when she gets me
up at six o'clock in the morning, but when I hear her singing in the morning, well, all is forgiven. She can
twist me round her little finger, of course.
2. He was very boring and predictable. The kind of person who remembered birthdays and anniversaries,
but who made you angry because there was absolutely nothing spontaneous about him. His ideas of fun
were so unadventurous. Well, the first few years were OK, but after that I'd just had enough. Reliable,
stable, dependable, and boring.
3. Well, he's quite well-dressed and punctual. Sometimes he's cheerful and tells us jokes, but other times
we have to do a lot of work. We don't really know him very well. Oh, I know he's married, but I've never
met him socially or anything like that. He seems very professional.
A. Write a description of a person that you know.
Some doctors believe there are two main types of personalities: "Type A" and "Type B". Type A people are
ambitious, aggressive, hard-working, and competitive; they are sometimes impatient and are often in a
hurry. Type В people are more relaxed and don't get bothered easily. Doctors say that because they are
so hard driving, Type A personalities often suffer from stress and high blood pressure.
145
Pair work. Take turns asking your partner these questions. Is your partner a Type A or Type В
personality? How about you?
Yes No
a) Are you always in a hurry to finish things?
b) Are you ambitious and always looking for new challenges?
c) Are you often impatient with other people?
d) Do you get upset when people are late for appointments?
e) Do you often do two things at once, such as watching TV while eating?
f) Do you get upset easily when things go wrong1?
g) Do you sometimes stop listening when people are talking to you?
h) Do you expect to be the best at everything
you do? i) Do you often interrupt people while they are
speaking? j) Do you think the best way to get a job
done is to do it yourself?
To score: Six or more Yes answers = Type A; six or more No answers = type B.

This is a letter from Dave. Dave is an American exchange student in Great Britain, who is living in Frank's
home, while Frank is staying in the U.S. with Dave's family.
Dear Frank,
Hi! How are you getting along in the States? I'm having a wonderful time here in England with your family
and friends. Everyone is so friendly, and hospitable. They all welcome me into their homes and treat me
as one of the family.
I've been very surprised by English people. I thought they would all be very conservative and traditional.
Instead I've found them very open to new ideas. I also thought English people would be
146
rather shy. But most people seem very outgoing and self-confident, almost as much as Americans. I find
the English very tolerant too. Nobody here seems to mind very much how you dress or what you say. Of
course, there are some narrow-minded people too. But I don't think there are as many as there are back
home in the States. I often think of you in my home and what you must be thinking about Americans. I
imagine you think we're too hard-working and too materialistic. I never realised how much Americans talk
about money, until I came to Britain. And you probably also think that Americans are very rude compared
with the British. I don't think \ we're really so rude, it's just that we sometimes forget to use all ; those
polite phrases like "do you mind" and "could I" and "may I". One difference I have noticed is that the
British don't seem as optimistic as Americans. In America we always think we can i change things and
make them better. But I get the feeling that the i British have a rather pessimistic view of life.
I'm feeling lazy, so that's all I'm going to write now. I look forward to hearing your impressions of the US.
Yours, Dave
' A. According to Dave, do these words best describe British people (B) or American people (A)?
1. rude______ 2. materialistic_____ 3. hard-working_____
4. tolerant_____5. self-confident_____ 6 optimistic_____
B. Think about
1. What characteristics do people from other countries think people from your country have?
2. Do you sometimes feel shy? In what situations?
3. In what ways do you think your parents' generation is different from your generation?
4. Are you optimistic or pessimistic about the future? Why?
5. Have you ever been to a foreign country? What do you think of the people in that country?
Howard Watson has applied for a job at International Business Equipment, Inc. The personnel director
there has contacted
147
Barbara Long, one of Mr Watson's colleagues, and asked for a letter of reference. Here is Mrs Long's
letter.
February 19, 19____
Ms Erica Garcia, Director of Personnel
IBE, Inc.
390 Fifth Avenue
New York, NY 10018
Dear Ms Garcia,
Regarding your request, I am pleased to write this letter of recommendation for Howard Watson. I have
known Mr Watson for almost six years. After meeting at the University of Chicago, where we were both
studying economics, we became very close friends. I have always been impressed by Mr Watson's
remarkable success at school and by his subsequent success in his career.
Mr Watson is sincere and reliable, and has a true facility for getting things done. Although he can be
impatient with others, he is never deliberately unkind or thoughtless.
Even though Mr Watson is a serious and dedicated worker, he is also involved in many outside activities.
He enjoys swimming, gardening and cooking. Regarding your request, he entertains and travels often. He
is well liked by his colleagues at work, and he has many friends.
I hope you will consider Mr Watson seriously for the position with your company when making your final
decision. I feel certain that he will be an asset to your staff.
Sincerely, Barbara Long
A. Read the letter. Then choose the best meaning for each oftht words below.
1. Regarding means
a. referring to
b. looking at
2. A letter of recommendation gives
a. positive facts and information.
b. negative facts and information.
3. Close friends
a. live near each other.
b. like each other very much.
148
4. Remarkable means
a. very noticeable
b. not very noticeable.
5. Subsequent means
a. coming before something else.
b. coming after something else.
6. Facility means
a. ability to do things easily.
b. inability to do things easily.
7. Deliberately means
a. on purpose.
b. by accident.
8. Be involved in means
a. dislike.
b. participate in.
9. Outside activities are
a. things you do in a garden or park.
b. things you do besides work.
10. An asset is
a. something that is valuable.
b. something that isn't valuable.
B. What is, according to Barbara Ling, Mr Watson like?
C. Imagine that someone you know has applied for a job and has asked you to write a letter of reference.
Using some of the words in the list below or in the letter above, give reasons why you think the person
would or would not be good for the job.
Notice the use of the prefixes im-, in-, un-, ir-, anti-, and dis-. When you add these prefixes to a word,
you add the meaning of | "not".
He is not very sincere. = He is very insincere.
aggressive/easygoing (un)kind (anti)social
(im)patient (un)selfish (in)sensitive
 (in)dependent (in)sincere optimistic/pessimistic
serious/not serious confident/insecure (dis)honest
(un)reliable argumentative thoughtful/thoughtless
(irresponsible
149

Mr Simms never smiled. He lived in a small town where everyone was always in a good mood —
everyone except him. He always seemed to be miserable and liked to make other people miserable too.
One day, while Mr Simms was on his way to the bank, he met Mrs Toogood. It was a beautiful sunny day
and Mrs Toogood felt great.
"Well, good morning Mr Simms. What's the matter? You look so depressed. Did you get some bad
news?" she asked him. "No, I'm fine, thank you, Mrs Toogood," he said. "Well, you shouldn't look so
miserable, Mr Simms, on such a lovely sunny day."
"It's sunny now," said Mr Simms, "but it will probably rain later." "Nonsense," said Mrs Toogood and she
walked on.
Next Mr Simms walked past the flower shop where Miss Lightheart was putting out some lovely fresh
flowers. "Good morning, Mr Simms. Is everything all right? You look so sad. No deaths in the family, I
hope."
"No. Everything's fine, thank you, Miss Lightheart." "Well then, you shouldn't be looking so unhappy on
such a beautiful day, Mr Simms."
"It could rain later, you know," said Mr Simms. "It could rain." "I don't think so Mr Simms. Goodbye, sir." Mr
Simms went to the bank where the bank manager, Mr Free-body, gave him a large friendly smile. "Did
you lose some money. Mr Simms? You look so upset."
"There's nothing wrong with me," said Mr Simms, "but tell me, why are you in such a good mood? You
look very cheerful and pleased with life."
"Look outside," said Mr Freebody. "It's such a nice day today." "Hm. I wouldn't be surprised if it rained
later," said Mr Simms. "I wouldn't be surprised at all."
"Not today, Mr Simms. Not today. And how much money would you like?"
Mr Simms took his money and went home. As usual, he didn't look at all happy. He took his newspaper,
sat down, and started to read. He read for about an hour, when suddenly he noticed that the room was a
little dark. There was a noise at
150
the window and Mr Simms looked out. He couldn't believe it. He was absolutely delighted and a big smile
appeared on his face.
A. Questions
1. Where was Mr Simms going? 2. Why was Mrs Toogood in such a good mood? 3. Why did Mrs
Toogood ask Mr Simms if he had gotten bad news? 4. Where did Miss Lightheart work? 5. What sort of
weather did Mr Simms expect later in the day? 6. Why did Mr Freebody think Mr Simms was upset? 7.
Why did Mr Simms finally smile?
B. Think about
\. What puts you in a good mood? 2. What makes you cry? 3, What makes people laugh? 4.Can you tell a
joke in English? 5. Do you sometimes feel depressed? 6. What do you do to make yourself feel better?
C. Special difficulties
Possibility: may, might, could
We use may, might and could to talk about present or future possibility.
"There's someone at the door." "It may be Sarah." (= Perhaps it is Sarah.)
We aren't sure what we are going to do tomorrow. We might go to the beach. (= Perhaps we will go to the
beach.) "Where's Simon?" "He could be in the living room." (= Perhaps he is in the living room.)
Mightis normally a little less sure thanmoy. Couldis normally less sure than may or might.
+++ may ++ might + could
I. Rephrase these sentences using the modal verbs in brackets. eg Perhaps she is ill. (may) She may be
ill.
1. Perhaps you're right, (could) 2. Perhaps she'll win the race. (might) 3. Perhaps they're asleep, (may) 4.
Perhaps he knows the address, (could) 5. Perhaps I'll see you tomorrow.
151
(may) 6. Perhaps she will come. (might) 7. Perhaps it will snow today, (could)
II. You are giving advice to a friend. Use should or shouldn't.
eg Your friend is always coughing because he smokes too much. Advise him to stop smoking.
You should stop smoking.
1. Your friend has a bad toothache. Advise him to go to the dentist. You... 2. Your friend rides his bicycle
at night without lights. You think this is dangerous. Advise him not to do it. 3. Your friend is going to visit
Greece. Advise him to learn a few words of Greek before he goes. 4. Your friend has a bad cold. Advise
him to stay at home this evening. 5. Your friend eats too many sweets. Advise her not to do it. 6. Your
friend works too hard. Advise him not to do it. 7. Your friend misses too many classes. Advise him not to
do it.
III. Complete the sentences using so or such.
It was such a good film. I really enjoyed it.
1. She's ... shy. She always gets very nervous when she meets people. 2. You shouldn't eat... quickly;
you'll give yourself indigestion. 3. It's ... an interesting town; there really is ... much to do there. 4.1 was ...
disappointed when I failed my driving test. 5. He felt... tired that he decided not to go out. 6. It was ... a hot
day that they had to open all the windows. 7. I've made ... many mistakes in this letter. I think I'll type it
again. 8. He had... much luggage that we couldn't get it all into the car. 9. It was ... a boring film that I fell
asleep during the show. 10.1 was... excited that I could hardly speak.
Conversation Practice Listen, read and practise.
Describing People
a) Woman: What do you think of the new French teacher? Man: Well, she's kind of strange
and she seems to
be pretty moody.
152
b) First man: Everyone says Kathy is hardworking and
always very careful in her job.
Second man: Yes, and she's very enthusiastic about her work, too.
c) First man: Hey! Look at what the teacher said about
me on my report: I'm "creative, reliable, and intelligent." Second man: Oh, that's great!
d) Man: Hey, what's wrong?
Woman: I'm fed up with my brother! He's so hot-tempered. He always gets angry with me.
Man: Really?
Woman: Yeah. He gets upset so easily. I don't know what's the matter with him.
e) Man: Look what Mary gave me! Isn't this a nice
book?
Woman: Yes. It's great! That's Mary, she's so generous — she always likes to treat people and give
presents to her friends.
f) Woman: How do you like your new boss? Man: Oh, she's too serious. Woman:
Really? Why?
Man: Oh, she never enjoys a joke. She never laughs.
It's hard to even get a smile out of her.
g) First woman: How's your new secretary?
Second woman: Well, he's OK, but he's pretty slow. He can't type very fast. And the mistakes...! I have to
send everything back at least twice for retyping.
h) First man: What is Paul's wife like? Second man: I can't stand her. She's everything I don't like in a
woman. She's bossy, she's superior, and she thinks she can do everything better than other people.
0 First man: What does Mike's sister look like? Second man: Very plain. Long straight hair, high
forehead and prominent cheek bones.
153
j) Man: What's George like?
Woman: A bit like you, actually. Same build, same height, and similar colour eyes.
k) First man: What is Mary like?
Second man: She's quite good-looking. The kind of girl you go for. But she's a bit too serious for me. You
know, politics, literature, human rights, things like that.
1) Paul: Anna, what was your first boyfriend like?
Anna: Goodness! Why do you want to know that?
Paul: I'm just interested.
Anna: Well, he was very good-looking, with dark
hair and big, brown eyes. He was very romantic. He was always buying me flowers and presents. Of
course, he wasn't as nice as you.
m) Old lady: Help me somebody please! Oh policeman, stop that man!
Policeman: I...
Old lady: He stole my handbag!
Policeman: I think it's too late, madam.
Old lady: But...
Policeman: He's escaped. Now tell me...
Old lady: Yes...
Policeman: What did he look like?
Old lady: Ah well... He... He was medium height and
err... quite well built and he had short dark hair. Oh I know he looked like that actor man, that David Starr,
but he was taller than that.
Police officer: Police Department. May I help you ?
Woman: I'd like to report a missing person—my grand-
mother.
Police Officer: Your grandmother? OK.
Woman: Yes, she went out at three o'clock this
afternoon. It's already past midnight and she hasn't come back.
154
Police officer: Uh-huh. What's her name, please?
Woman: Mrs Rose Baker.
Police officer: And... how old is she?
Woman: She's seventy-eight.
Police officer: OK. Now can you describe her?
Woman: Yes, she's about five feet tall.
Police officer: Five feet, uh-huh.
Woman: She has curly gray hair and she wears glasses.
Police officer: And what is she wearing?
Woman: Let me see. A red dress and a white jacket.
Police officer: A red dress and a white jacket.
Woman: Oh, and a little hat with flowers on it.
Police officer: All right. Now, just a few more questions...
A. Questions
1. Who is missing? 2. What does the person look like? 3. What is the person wearing? 4. What do you
think has happened to the missing person?
B. Now listen to the rest of the conversation.
Woman: (Clock strikes three) Oh, Grandma, it's you! I was so worried about you. It's three o'clock in the
morning.
Grandma: Why were you worried? I was out on a date.
Woman: A date? With who?
Grandma: Mr Franklin — my new boyfriend. He's only eighty-three!
C. Think of someone in the class. Give a clue like this:
I'm thinking of a woman. Now your classmates try to guess who it is.
How old is she? What is she wearing?
How tall is she? Is she wearing a red
sweater? What kind of hair does she have? Is it... (name)?
D. Cut out pictures of people from magazines. Two people write their own descriptions of the same
picture. For example:
155
The man is in his early 20 s. He's tall, and he has brown hair. He's wearing a red sweater and dark blue
pants, and he's carrying a black jacket. He's also wearing a watch.
Now compare your description with the other person 's. E. Situation:
You lose your child at the supermarket. You are very worried. You go to the man in charge and ask him to
help you find your child.
A: Have you met the new sales manager?
B: Yes, I have.
A: What do you think of him?
B: Well, he seems very nice. He's very friendly, and he's
always helpful. A: Oh, do you think so? В : Yes, but I think he's kind of forgetful. He never remembers
my name.
A: Yeah, you're right. He's very forgetful. B: Oh, do you know him? A: Yes, he's my husband!
A. Match these adjectives with definitions. Then compare with a partner.
a) easygoing is very intelligent
b) forgetful has good manners
c) funny always keeps a promise
d) generous thinks deeply about things a) polite doesn't worry about things
f) reliable likes giving things to people
g) serious doesn't remember things h) shy likes to be around people i) smart
likes making people laugh
j) sociable doesn't say much in front of other people
B. Can you give definitions for these words!
bad-tempered • creative • patient • moody • talkative
C. Use the words in parentheses to complete the sentences.
1. My boss is pretty... and he's... generous, (very, easygoing)
2. My next-door neighbour is not a very ... person. He's kind of... and ... very sociable, (not, friendly, shy)
3. My sister is ... smart and she's very... But she's sometimes ... (creative, really, forgetful)
4. My best friend is a ... sociable person, and she's ... too. But she is very ... (funny, impatient, pretty)
D. Describe three of your classmates. Does your partner agree?
Did you go to the athletics club last night, Karen?
Yes I did. It was great!
Oh yes? Why?
Well, I met a boy called Steven.
Ooh! What about Rod Smith?
Oh, I'm not really interested in him.
Really? I quite like Rod.
But Steven is much nicer.
What's he like?
He's very good-looking.
Is he?
He's tall and slim, and he's got short brown hair.
Where does he live?
In Willesden.
Where does he go to school?
Cricklewood College.
So he's older than you.
Yes, he's seventeen.
A. Show a picture of someone for about 5 seconds to the class and then ask "What's he/she like? "

(A = Annie; G = Grandmother) A: Grannie? G: Yes, my dear?

A: How many brothers and sisters did you have?
G: I had... now let me see... there was... me, Alice, James, then Henry — that's four, isn't it? Then
Robert and Emily, the twins — so that makes two sisters and three brothers.
A: What were they all like? Did they look like you?
G: Well, some did and some didn't. My sister Alice and I were very similar. People used to think we were
the twins, but she was two years older than me. We both had fair hair, and when we were young, we used
to have lovely ribbons in it. People said I was the pretty one — my sister Alice was so moody, she always
looked miserable.
A: Who were you closest to?
G: Ah, my brother James. He was such a kind boy, always smiling, and so gentle. We were inseparable,
we went everywhere together.
A: What did he look like?
G: Well, people said James had my mother's features; same nose, same mouth, while Henry, who was
older, was more like Father. Henry had thick, dark hair, but James had fair hair like me, and he used to
have a parting down the middle. Henry was quite a plump boy, not fat but he was always well-built, like
Father.
A: What about the twins?
G: They were very plain, I seem to remember. When they were babies, no one could tell them apart, they
were so similar. They both had long faces with high foreheads... Robert was very severe and serious — I
was quite afraid of him -— but then he was so much older than me, we didn't have much to do with each
other. Robert looked middle-aged before he was twenty.
A: What about your Mummy and Daddy?
G: Mother was a darling. She used to have her hair in a tight bun, and she looked quite fierce, but she
wasn't really. She had smiling eyes and a heart of gold. Father was a very quiet man, he always looked
distant as though he were lost in his own thoughts.
A: What were their names?
G: Daniel and Clare.
A. Read the conversation. Ask and answer questions.
B. Speak about the family described in the conversation.
C. Roleplay the conversation.
D. Describe the members, of your family. How similar or different are they?
Exchange papers and compare у our families.
E. Match each word with a definition.
a) easygoing people who don't do what they say they will
b) emotional apersonwhodoesn'toftenaskforotherpeople'shelporadvice
c) generous a person who waits calmly for things and doesn 't worry if things
are not on time
d) independent someone who likes giving things to other people
e) moody a person who doesn't usually worry or get angry
f) patient someone who is often gloomy or depressed
g) proud a person who enjoys being with other people
h) sociable people who have a high opinion of their own importance i) unreliable people who
show their feelings easily
Now give definitions for these words: ambitious, punctual, selfish, confident, outgoing, careful, careless,
impatient
Sue: Who's your best friend, Tom? Tom: Well, I guess Harry Taylor is my best friend. We've been
going to baseball games together for the past ten years. Sue: Oh? And how did you meet? Tom: Well, it
was really funny. See, Harry's a police officer.
And one day I was late getting to a baseball game, and,
well, I was in a real hurry... and he stopped me for
speeding. Sue: Uh-oh!
Tom: Yeah! Well, I explained why I was in such a hurry, and I
found out he was a big baseball fan, too. Sue: Uh! You're kidding? Tom: No, no... so we arranged to go to
a game together the
next weekend. But I still had to pay for the speeding
ticket.
158
159
Sue: Well, what's Han у like?
Tom: Well, you know, he's a ... he's a really interesting guy. You know, he's got this great sense of humour
and he loves meeting people. He's very sociable. Sue: Oh?
Tom: Hey, what about you, Sue? Who's your best friend? Sue: Oh, my best friend is Ann Thomas. We met
in France
one summer about five years ago... Tom: Really?
Sue: We were both studying French at the same school and then we travelled together in Europe for
about a month when classes finished. Tom: What's Ann like? Sue: What's she like? Well, she's really a
creative person.
She writes short stories. Tom: No kidding? Sue: And she's very generous. She's always helping people
out.
Tom: Huh! You know, I'd like to meet her sometime. Sue: You would? Well, I'm planning to see her next
Saturday. Maybe you could bring your friend Harry and we could go on a double date. How about that?
Tom: Yeah, it sounds great!
A. Questions
1. Who is Tom's best friend? 2. How did they meet? 3. What does Harry do? 4. What is Harry like? 4.
Who is Sue's best friend? 5. How did they meet? 6. What is Ann like?
B. Give a brief account of the conversation.
C. Roleplay the conversation. Make up a similar conversation.
D. What qualities should a friend have? Think of five adjectives.
E. Speak about your best friend. What do you like most about him/her? How is your friend similar to or
different from you?
F. What sort of person are you?
Put [Y] for Yes, [NJfor No, and [S] for Sometimes.
a. Are you generally aware of other people's feelings?
b. Do you find it difficult to meet new people?
160
c. Do you frequently make people laugh?
d. Does your mood change often and suddenly?
e. When decisions have to be made, do you think first of yourself?
f. Can your friends trust you and depend on you?
g. Do you generally like other people's company?
h. Are there lots of things you want to do in your professional life?
i. Can you usually understand other people's point of view?
j. Do you worry and think too much about detail?
k. Are you usually quite a happy, smiling person?
1. Are you interested in other people and their business?
m. Do you sometimes not tell the truth because you don't want to hurt someone's feelings?
Match these adjectives with the questions above. Example [b] shy
tolerant witty
sociable selfish 4
reliable ambitious
sensitive moody
tactful inquisitive
fussy cheerful
Scott and Ashley Moreton are at Scott's office party.
Ashley: Scott, who's the man who's talking so loudly?
Scott: Which one? Everybody's talking loudly.
Ashley: The bald man with the moustache.
Scott: Oh, him! That's Harrison. He's the company's president.
Ashley: And that woman who's standing next to him? Is she his wife?
Scott: The one with the grey hair? Why do you think she's his wife?
Ashley: She's the only one who isn't laughing at his jokes!
Scott: But everyone else has to! Same again, honey?
161
Ashley: No, thanks. I'll just have a mineral water.
Man: Hello, I haven't seen you before.
Ashley: That's because I don't work here. My husband does
Man: Oh, what's his name?
Ashley: Scott. Scott Moreton. Do you know him?
Man: No, I don't work here either — my girlfriend does. I
suppose she knows him. Ashley: Where is she? Man: She's over there. That attractive, blonde girl
who's
talking to that funny-looking man with the beard and
glasses. I wonder who he is. Ashley: That "funny-looking man" is my husband.
A. Study and practise the conversation. Make up a similar conversation.
B. Here are some English proverbs. Learn and comment on them
Appearances are deceitful. The face is the index of the mind. A fair face may hide a foul heart. Beauty lies
in lover's eyes. Handsome is as handsome does.
C. Sum up the specific vocabulary on the topic "Appearance. Personality ".
1. Name the parts of the body using as many nouns as you know; eg mouth, tongue, etc.
2. Name as many adjectives as you know to describe appearance and personality. Do it in alphabetical
order. Make a list of the specific vocabulary on the topic.
Reading
This is an extract from Somerset Maugham's story "The Lotus Eater". The writer describes his first
impressions of a man called Thomas Wilson.
"Though his teeth were not very good his smile was attractive. It was gentle and kindly. He was dressed
in a blue cotton shirt and a pair of grey trousers, much creased and none too clean, of
162
thin canvas, and on his feet he wore a pair of very old espadrilles. The get-up was picturesque, and very
suitable to the place and the weather but it did not at all go with his face. It was a lined, Jong face deeply
sunburned, thin-lipped, with small grey eyes rather close together and tight, neat features. The grey hair
was carefully brushed. It was not a plain face, indeed in his youth Wilson might have been good-looking.
He wore the blue shirt, open at the neck, and the grey canvas trousers, not as though they belonged to
him, but as though, shipwrecked in his pyjamas, he had been fitted out with odd garments by
compassionate strangers. Notwithstanding this careless attire he looked like the manager of a branch
office in an insurance company, who should by rights be wearing a black coat with pepper-and-salt
trousers, a white collar and an unobjectionable tie.
When in the evening Mr Towers Chandler appeared in the streets of New York people took him for a rich
young man. He was handsome, well dressed and sure of himself. In a word, he looked like a typical
clubman going out to have a good time. No one knew that he was not rich. He was in fact quite poor.
Chandler was twenty-two years old. He worked in the office of an architect and got eighteen dollars a
week. At the end of each week he put aside one dollar out of his salary. At the end of each ten weeks he
ironed his evening suit and went out to have a good time. He usually dined at' a fashionable restaurant
where there was wine and music. It took him ten weeks to accumulate his capital of ten dollars and it took
him only a few hours to spend it, playing the role of a rich idler.
One night he went out, dressed in his evening clothes, and started for the restaurant where he dined one
evening out of seventy.
He was just going to turn round the corner when a young girl м front of him slipped on the snow and fell
down. Chandler ran UP and helped her to her feet.
"Thank you," said the girl. "I think I have twisted my ankle." "Does it hurt very much?" asked Chandler.
"Yes, it does," she answered, "but I think I shall be able to Walk in a few minutes."
163
Chandler looked at the girl. She was very young. Her face was both beautiful and kind. She was dressed
in a cheap black dress that looked like a uniform that sales-girls wear. A cheap black hat was on her
shining dark-brown hair. She looked like a working girl of the best type.
A sudden idea came to his mind. He decided to ask the girl to dine with him. He was sure she was a nice
girl. Her speech and manners showed it. And in spite of her simple clothes he felt he would be happy to
sit at table with her. He thought: This poor girl has never been to a fashionable restaurant. She will
remember the pleasure for a long time.
"I think," he said to her, "that your foot must rest for some time. Now, I am going to tell you something. I
am on my way to dine. Come with me. We'll have a nice dinner and a pleasant talk together. And when
our dinner is over your foot will be better, I am sure."
The girl looked up into Chandler's clear, blue eyes. Then she smiled. "We don't know each other. I'm
afraid it is not right."
she said.
' "Why not?" asked the young man. "I'll introduce myself. My name is Towers Chandler. I will try to make
our dinner as pleasant as possible. And after dinner I will say good-bye to you, or will take you to your
door as you wish."
"But how can I go to the restaurant in this old dress and hat?" said the girl looking at Chandler's evening
suit.
"Never mind that," said Chandler. "I'm sure you will look better in them than any one we shall see there in
the richest evening dress."
"I think I will go with you, Mr Chandler," said the girl, "because my ankle still hurts me. You may call me...
Miss Marian."
"All right, Miss Marian," said the young architect, "you will not have to walk far. There is a very good
restaurant a little way from here."
The two young people came to the restaurant and sat down at a table. Chandler ordered a good dinner.
He felt quite happy.
The restaurant was full of richly-dressed people. There was a good orchestra playing beautiful music. The
food was excellent. His companion, even in her cheap hat and dress, looked more beautiful than some
ladies in evening dresses.
164
And then... some kind of madness came upon Chandler. He began to play the role of a rich idler before
the girl. He spoke of clubs and teas, of playing golf and riding horses and tours in Europe. He could see
that the girl was listening to him with attention, so he told her more and more lies. The longer he talked
the more lies he told her about his life.
At last she said, "Do you like living such an idle life? Have you no work to do? Have you no other
interests?"
"My dear Miss Marian," he explained, "work! I am too busy to work. It takes so much time to dress every
day for dinner, to make a dozen visits in an afternoon... I have no time for work."
The dinner was over. The two young people walked out to the corner where they had met. Miss Marian
walked very well now, her ankle was much better.
"Thank you for a nice time," she said to Chandler. "I must run home now. I liked the dinner very much, Mr
Chandler."
He shook hands with her, smiling, and said that he also had to hurry. He was going to his club to play
bridge.
In his cheap cold room Chandler put away his evening suit to rest for sixty nine days.
"That was a fine girl," he said to himself. "I should like to meet her again. I have made a mistake in
playing the role of a rich idler before a poor working girl. Why did I lie to her? All because of my evening
suit, I think... I'm sorry it's all over!"
After she had left Chandler the girl came to a rich and handsome house facing a beautiful avenue. She
entered a room where a young lady was looking out of the window.
"Oh, Marian!" she exclaimed when the other entered. "When will you stop frightening us? Two hours ago
you ran out in this old dress and Helen's hat. Mother is so worried. She sent the chauffeur in the
automobile to look for you. You are a bad, bad girl, Marian!"
Then she pressed a button. A servant came in and she said, "Helen, tell Mother that Miss Marian has
returned."
"Don't be angry with me, Sister," said Marian. "I only ran down to my dressmaker to tell her to use blue
buttons instead of white for my new dress. My old dress and Helen's hat were just what I needed. Every
one thought I was a sales-girl, I am sure."
"Dinner is over, dear, you were away so long," said Marian's sister.
"I know," said Marian. "I slipped in the street and twisted my
165
ankle. So I walked to a restaurant with great difficulty and sat there until my ankle was better. That's why I
was so long."
The two girls sat down at the window, looking out. Then Marian said, "We shall have to marry one day,
both of us. Shall I tell you the kind of man I can love?"
"Go on, dear," said her sister smiling.
"The man I can love must have clear blue eyes, he must be handsome and good and he mustn't try to
flirt. But I shall love a. man like that only if he is not lazy; if he has some work to do in the world. No matter
how poor he is I shall love him. But, Sister, dear, what kind of men do we meet every day? They live an
idle life between visits to their friends and visits to their clubs. No, I can't love a man like that, even if his
eyes are blue and he is handsome; even if he is kind to poor girls whom he meets in the street."
Self check
1. Translate from Russian into English.
А. Сара: У нас гостит моя двоюродная сестра Мария, и она скучает. Я сегодня должна была пойти с
ней в кино, но мой начальник просит меня поработать сверхурочно. Мы договорились с Марией
встретиться около "Одеона" в 8 часов. Фильм начинается в 8.30. Ты не мог бы сводить ее в кино?
Ник: Я не уверен. А сколько ей лет?
Сара: 14. Пожалуйста, Ник. Она очень милая.
Ник: Но как я ее узнаю?
Сара: Она высокая, у нее длинные каштановые волосы.
Ник: Понятно. А как она одета?
Сара: На ней темно-голубой плащ.
Ник: На ней сапоги или туфли?
Сара: Извини, я не помню.
Ник: Неважно. Я думаю, что узнаю ее.
Б.Джейн: Мой брат недавно женился. Виктор: Что представляет собой его жена? Джейн: Она
миловидная, стройная девушка со светлыми волосами и большими голубыми глазами.
166
Унее правильные черты лица, а также хороший цвет лица. Кроме того, она умна и добра. Мне она
очень нравится.
Виктор: Я никогда не встречал твоего брата. Как выглядит он?
Джейн: Он хорош собой, среднего роста, хорошо сложен. У него каштановые волосы и черные
глаза. У него хороший характер. Он открытый и добродушный. Кроме того, он очень трудолюбив и
всегда готов помочь, на него можно положиться.
В. — Что вы думаете о новом инженере?
— Я считаю, что он умен и талантлив.
— Я согласен с вами. Кроме того, он очень тактичен и вежлив.
Г. — Что представляет собой жена Рона?
— Она довольно простенькая, низкого роста и несколько застенчива.
Д. — Мама, посмотри на ту девушку вон там. Это новая девушка Ника.
— Которая девушка? Как она выглядит?
— Вон та девушка с черными вьющимися волосами.
— Черные вьющиеся волосы... А как она одета?
— Девушка в красном пиджаке и голубом платье.
— Это Рита Смит, не так ли?
Е. — Как вам понравилась сестра Дика?
— Она очень привлекательная девушка. Она приветлива, у нее хорошее чувство юмора.
— Да, согласен с вами. Она не похожа на своего брата. Он несколько грубоват и скучноват.
Ж. У моей сестры трое детей: два мальчика и одна девочка. Ее старшего сына зовут Робертом.
Ему 18 лет. Это высокий молодой человек с серыми глазами и светлыми волосами. Роберт очень
приветлив. Он веселый, общительный человек, но несколько рассеян. Ее младшего сына зовут
Виктором. Ему 10 лет. Он учится в начальной школе. Он способный мальчик, но несколько ленив.
Виктор, в отличие от Роберта, не очень общи-
167
телен. Он спокойный ребенок и любит проводить время дома. Дочь сестры зовут Катей. Кате 16
лет. Она студентка. Катя очень миленькая, стройная девушка. Она честная и открытая. Катя очень
трудолюбива и серьезна.
— Как вам нравится ваш зять?
— Он совсем мне не нравится. У него плохой характер, он эгоистичен и честолюбив.
UNIT 3 GRAMMAR: CONDITIONAL SENTENCES
English tense usage can be divided into two categories: tenses used to refer to fact, and those used to
refer to non-fact. Fact is what is considered to be real or quite possible; non-fact is what is supposed or
wished for, which is either unreal or improbable.
Fact: I work in a restaurant, but I don't earn much. If I find a better job, I'll take it.
Non-fact: I wish I had a lot of money.
If I had a lot of money, I would open my own restaurant.
Tenses used to refer to fact are related to real time. For example, a past verb form refers to the past.
I had a lovely holiday in Spain last year.
Tenses used to refer to non-fact are not related to real time. Generally speaking, this unreality is
expressed by shifting the verb form "backwards" (for example, from present to past).
If I had a car, I could visit my parents.
Here the past verb form does not refer to the real past, but to the "wished for" present and future. It has
the effect of distancing the meaning from reality. It is important to understand this difference between fact
and non-fact when discussing conditional sentences.
There are three types of conditional sentences.
Type I
(If + present tense; simple future simple present)
Type I conditional sentences are based on fact in real time. They are used to:
— talk about certain or probable situations, eg: If you go now, you'll catch the train. If you don't go now,
you'll miss the train.
169
— talk about general truths or habitual activities
If you mix yellow and blue, you get green.(= Whenever you mix yellow and blue...) If I have a big lunch, it
makes me sleepy.
Type 2
(If + simple past;... would + simple form) Type 2 conditional sentences are not based on fact. They are
used to talk about unreal present or future situations.
If I had a lot of money, I'd travel round the world. (But I do not have a lot of money.)
If I didn't feel so tired, I'd come out with you. (But I feel very tired.)
If the weather was nice, I'd go to the beach. (But the weather is not nice.)
We also use this structure to talk about unlikely present or future situations.
If she really loved you, she wouldn't be so horrible to you If I won a lot of money, I'd take a long holiday.
The past form eg had, loved does not have a past meaning in sentences like these; it has a hypothetical
present or future meaning. We often use were instead of was after if, especially in a more formal style.
If the weather were nice, I'd go to the beach.
I'd come out for a walk with you if I weren't so busy.
That watch wouldn't be so cheap if it were really made of gold
We often use if I were you to give advice andifyou were me to ask for advice.
If I were you, I'd apply for the job. What would you do if you were me?
We can use the modal verbs might or could instead of would in the main clause to imply a possible rather
than a definite consequence.
If I won a lot of money, I might stop working. (= I would perhaps stop working.)
170
I could repair the car, if I had the right tools. (= I would be able to repair the car...)
ТуреЗ
(If + past perfect; ... would have + past participle) Type 3 conditional sentences are not based on fact.
They are used to talk about unreal past situations.
If the weather had been nice yesterday, I would have gone
to the beach. (But the weather was not nice.)
If I'd studied hard, I would have passed the exam. (But I
did not study hard.)
If you hadn't missed your bus, you wouldn't have been
late for school. (But you missed your bus.)
We can use the modal verbs might and could instead of would in the main clause.
If you had taken the exam, you might have passed it. (= ... you would perhaps have passed it.) I could
have repaired the car, if I'd had the right tools. (= I would have been able to repair the car...)
Type 2 and Type 3 mixed
It is possible for each of the two clauses in a conditional sentence to have a different time reference, and
the result is a mixed conditional.
If I had eaten breakfast several hours ago, I would not be
hungry now. (= I did not eat breakfast several hours ago,
so I am hungry now.)
If he were a good student, he would have studied for the j». test. (He is not a good student. He did not
study for the test t yesterday.)
Practice Conditional sentences: type I
- Put the verbs т brackets into the correct forms, (self check) 1. If I see him I (give) him a lift. 2. The table
will collapse if
171
you (stand) on it. 3. If he (eat) all that he will be ill. 4. If I find your passport I (telephone) you at once. 5.
The police (arrest) him if they catch him. 6. If he (read) in bad light he will ruin his eyes. 7. Someone
(steal) your car if you leave it unlocked. 8. What will happen if my parachute (not open)? 9. If he (wash)
my car I'll give him £10. 10. If she (need) a radio she can borrow mine. 11. If you (not go) away I'll send
for the police. 12. I'll be very angry if he (make) any more mistakes. 13. If he (be) late we'll go without him.
14. She will be absolutely furious if she (hear) about this. 15. If you put on the kettle I (make) the tea. 16.
If you give my dog a bone he (bury) it at once. 17. If we leave the car here it (not be) in anybody's way.
18. He'll be late for the train if he (not start) at once. 19. It you come late they (not let) you in. 20. If he (go)
on telling lies nobody will believe a word he says. 21. Unless he (sell) more he won't get much
commission. 22. If I lend you $20 when you (repay) me? 23. We'll have to move upstairs if the river (rise)
any higher. 24. If he (work) hard today can he have a holiday tomorrow? 25. Ice (turn) into water if you
heat it. 26. If the house (burn) down we can claim compensation. 27. If you (not like) this one I'll bring you
another. 28. Unless you are more careful you (have) an accident. 29. Tell him to ring me up if you (see)
him. 30. If I tell you a secret, you (promise) not to tell it to anyone else? 31. If you (not believe) what I say,
ask your mother. 32. If he (like) the house will he buy it? 33. Unless I have a quiet room I (not be able) to
do any work. 34. She won't open the door unless she (know) who it is. 35. I'll look for your notebook and if
I (find) it I (give) you a ring. 36. The lift wasn't working when I was here last. If it still (not work) we (have)
to use the stairs. 37. He's only sixteen but he wants to leave school at the end of the term. — If he (leave)
now he (be sorry) afterwards. 38.1 expect it will freeze tonight. — If it (freeze) tonight the roads (be) very
slippery tomorrow. 39. That book is overdue. If you (not take) it back to the library tomorrow you (have) to
pay a fine. 40. Unless Tom (take) his library book back tomorrow he (have) to pay a fine. 41. You'd better
take the day off if you (not feel) well tomorrow. 42. You can use my phone if yours (not work). 43. If I have
enough time I (write) to my parents every week. 44. If I have enough time tomorrow, I (write) to my
parents. 45. If I (not eat) breakfast I always get hungry during class. 46. If I don't eat breakfast tomorrow
morning, I (get) hungry during class. 47. If
you (not know) the meaning of a word you may use a dictionary. 48. If Jack (refuse) to help we'll have to
manage without him. 49. If Jack (not help) we'll have to manage without him. 50.1 hate my job. — If you
(hate) it why you (not change) it? 51. If you (hear) from Tom could you please let me know? 52. I'm not
expecting any messages, but if someone (ring) while I am out could you say that I'll be back by 6.00?
Conditional sentences: type 2
I. Put the verbs in brackets into the correct forms, (self check)
1. If I had a typewriter I (type) it myself. 2. If I (know) his address I'd give it to you. 3. He (look) a lot better
if he shaved more often. 4. If he worked more slowly he (not make) so many mistakes. 5. I shouldn't drink
that wine if I (be) you. 6. More tourists would come to this country if it (have) a better climate. 7. If I were
sent to prison you (visit) me? 8. If someone (give) you a helicopter what would you do with it? 9.1 (buy)
shares in that company if I had some money. 10. If you drove your car into the river you (be able) to get
out? 11. If I (win) a big prize in a lottery I'd give up my job. 12. What you (do) if you found a burglar in your
house? 13.1 could tell you what this means if I (know) Greek. 14, If everybody (give) £1 we would have
enough. 15. He might get fat if he (stop) smoking. 16. If he knew that it was dangerous he (not come). 17.
If you (see) someone drowning what would you do? 18. I could get a job easily if I (have) a degree. 19. If
she (do) her hair differently she might look quite nice. 20. If we had more rain our crops (grow) faster. 21.1
(keep) a horse if I could afford it. 22. I'd go and see him more often if he (live) on a bus route. 23.1 (offer)
to help if I thought I'd be any use. 24. What would you do if the lift (get) stuck between two floors? 25. If
you (paint) the walls white the room would be much brighter. 26. If you (change) your job would it affect
your pension? 27. I'd climb over the wall if there (not be) so much broken glass on top of it. 28. Of course
I'm not going to give her a diamond ring. If I (give) her a diamond ring she (sell) it. 29. Husband: But I'm
not going on a diet. Why should I go on a diet? Wife: If you (go) on a diet you (lose) weight. 30. If we
(work) all night we (finish) in time; but we have no intention of working all night.
173
31. If I (see) a tiger walking across Hyde Park I (climb) a tree. -— That (not be) any use. The tiger (climb)
after you. 32. If someone (ring) my door at 3 a.m. I (be) very unwilling to open the door. 33. Why don't you
buy a season ticket? — Because I lose everything. If I (buy) a season ticket I (lose) it. 34. Why don't you
bring your car to work? If I (have) a car I (bring) it to work.
35. Ann: George is fourteen. Tom: He must be older than that. He's in full-time job. If he (be) only
fourteen he still (be) at school.
36. He is staying at the Savoy in London. — Is he very rich? — I suppose he is. If he (be) a poor man he
(not stay) at the Savoy.
37. Why don't you get a cat? If you (keep) a cat the mice (not run) about everywhere. 38. A university
degree is a useful thing. If I (have) a university degree I now (sit) in a comfortable office instead of
standing at a street corner selling newspapers. 39.1 am not an astronaut. If I (be) an astronaut, I (take)
my camera with me on the rocket ship next month. 40. If there (be) no oxygen on earth, life as we know it
(exist, not) 41. If I (be) a bird, I (want, not) to live in a cage. 42. Sea water is salty. If the ocean (consist) of
fresh water, there (be) plenty of water to irrigate all of the deserts in the world to provide an abundant food
supply for the entire population of the earth. 43. It is expensive to call across the ocean. However, if
transoceanic telephone calls (be) cheap, I (call) my family every day and (talk) for hours. 44. Jim doesn't
study hard: If he (study) harder, he (get) better grades. 45. The weather isn't nice. I (take) a walk if the
weather (be) nice. 46. If money (grow) on trees, all of us (be) rich. 47. Life (be) boring if everyone (have)
the same opinions about everything. 48. If I (be) you, I (tell) Brian the truth. 49. The student cafeteria is
relatively inexpensive, but the food isn't very good. I (eat) there all the time if the food (be) better. 50. I'm
very tired tonight. If I (be, not) tired, I (go) to the movie with you. 51.1 won't have enough time today. But if
I (have) enough time, I (write) a letter to my cousin. 52. I'm not going to buy a car. But if I (buy) a car, I
(drive) to Springfield next month to visit my friend. 53. It is cold today. If it (be, not) cold today, I (go)
swimming. 54. What noi^y neighbours you've got! If mine (be) as bad as yours, I (go) cra/y. 55. The style
of that dress is lovely, but I'm not so keen on the colour. If the blue (be) a bit lighter, it (look) better. 56.
Mmm! This meal's delicious! If I (can) cook as well as this, I (open) a restaurant. 57.1 have to work about
80 hours a week. If I (have)
174
more time, I (take up) a sport like tennis. 58. If he (be) taller, he (can) be a policeman, but he's too short.
II. Rephrase these sentences using an if construction.
eg He smokes too much; perhaps that's why he can't get rid of his cough.
If he didn't smoke so much he might get rid of his 8ough. or
If he smoked less he might (be able to) get rid of his cough.
1. She is very shy; that's why she doesn't enjoy parties. 2. He
doesn't take any exercise; that's why he is so unhealthy. 3.1 haven't
the right change so we can't get tickets from the machine. 4. They
speak French to her, not English, so her English doesn't improve.
5. He doesn't work overtime, so he doesn't earn as much as I do.
6. My number isn't in the directory so people don't ring me up.
7. The shops don't deliver now, which makes life difficult. 8. He's very thin that's why he feels the cold so
much. 9. We haven't any matches so we can't light a fire. 10. I'm fat; that's why I can't get through the
bathroom window. 11. He doesn't help me, possibly because I never ask him for help. 12. I can't drive so
we can't take the car. 13. We have no ladder so we can't get over the wall. 14. My friend advised me to
sell it. (My friend said, "If I... you I...") 15.1 haven't much time so I read very little. 16. They don't clean the
windows so the rooms look rather dark. 17. He never polishes his shoes, so he never looks smart. 18. He
doesn't pay his staff properly; perhaps that's why they don't work well.
19. We haven't got central heating, so the house is rather cold.
20. He spends hours watching television; that's why he never has time to do odd jobs in the house. 21. I
haven't got a vacuum cleaner; that's why I'm so slow. 22.1 don't know his address, so I can't write to him.
23. He never shaves; that's the only reason he looks unattractive. 24. You work too fast; that's why you
make so many mistakes. 25. I can't park near my office; that's why I don't come by car. 26. I live a long
way from the centre; that's why I am always late for work. 27. I haven't a map so I can't direct you. 28.
People drive very fast. That's why there are so many accidents. 29. English people speak very quickly.
Perhaps that's why I can't understand them. 30. The flats are not clearly numbered, so it is very difficult to
find anyone. 31. You don't wipe
175
your feet, so you make muddy marks all over the floor. 32.1 live near my office, so I don't spend much
time travelling to work.
Conditional sentences: type 3
I. Put the verbs in brackets into the correct forms, (self check)
1. If I had known that you were in hospital I (visit) you. 2. If you (arrive) ten minutes earlier you would
have got a seat. 3. You would have seen my garden at its best if you (be) here last week. 4.1 shouldn't
have believed it if I (not see) it with my own eyes. 5. If he had slipped he (fall) 500 metres. 6. If he had
asked you, you (accept)? 7. If I (have) a map I would have been all right. 8. If I (know) that you were
coming I'd have baked a cake. 9.1 (offer) to help him if I had realized that he was ill. 10. If you had told
me that he never paid his debts I (not lend) him the money. 11. If you (put) some mustard in the
sandwiches they would have tasted better. 12. If he had known that the river was dangerous he (not try)
to swim across it. 13. If you (speak) more slowly he might have understood you. 14. If he had known the
whole story he (not be) so angry. 15. If I (try) again I think that I would have succeeded. 16. You (not get)
into trouble if you had obeyed my instructions. 17. If you hadn't been in such a hurry you (not put) sugar
into the sauce instead of salt. 18. If I (be) ready when he called he would have taken me with him. 19. If
she had listened to my directions she (not turn) down the wrong street. 20. If you (look) at the engine for a
moment you would have seen what was missing. 21. He would have been arrested if he (try) to leave the
country. 22.1 (take) a taxi if I had realized that it was such a long way. 23. You (save) me a lot of trouble if
you had told me where you were going. 24. She was sent to prison only because she refused to pay the
fine; if she (pay) the fine she (not be) sent to prison. 25. He didn't tell me that he was a vegetarian till
halfway through the meal. If he (tell) me earlier I (cook) something more suitable. 26.1 had no map; that's
why I got lost. If I (have) a map I (be) all right. 27. Why didn't you say that you were short of money? If I
(know) I (lend) you some. 28. It's lucky he had his torch with him. If he (not have) it he (fall) down the
cellar steps. 29. The job is much worse than I expected. If I (realise) how awful it was going to be I (not
accept) it. 30. The paraffin heater was perfectly safe. There (not be) a fire if the children (not knock)
176
it over. 31. The accident was mainly Tom's fault. He was driving much too close to the car in front. If he
(be) further away he (be able) to stop in time. 32. Why did you throw away those newspapers? I hadn't
finished with them. —I'm sorry. If I (know) you were still reading them I (not throw) them away. 33. He
says he refused the job, but that this had nothing to do with the salary. He (refuse) even if they (offer) him
twice as much. 34. If you had been there what you (do)? 35. It rained, which spoiled our picnic; but if it
(not rain) it (be) a great success. 36. I didn't recognize him at first because he was wearing dark glasses;
if he (not wear) them I (recognize) him immediately. 37. Why didn't you phone from the village? —
Because there was no phone in the village. If there (be) of course we (phone) from there. 38. He was not
very happy at school because he was a bookish boy, not at all interested in games. If he (play) games like
the other boys he (have) a much better time. 39. We had to stand almost all the way. It was all Tom's fault.
If he (book) seats, as I told him to, we (have) quite a comfortable journey. 40. We were travelling with
false passports. That was the trouble. If our passports (be) all right we (not be) arrested. 41. When the
director asked her to play the lead she agreed though she didn't know anything about the play. I think that
if she (read) the play she (refuse) the part. 42.The club secretary is useless. He never tells anybody
anything. We (not know) about the meeting if the chairman (not tell) us. 43. The passengers at the front of
the plane were all killed, but Alice, who was sitting at the back, survived. If she (sit) nearer the front, she
(kill). 44. A: We're penniless. Did you know that? B: It's because our holiday cost so much. If we (go)
where I wanted to go, it (be) a lot cheaper. 45. She was badly hurt when the car in which she was a
passenger hit another car. If she (wear) her seat belt, she (not hurt) so badly. 46. My wife and I met on a
cruise. I was on it because I was recovering from an illness, and she was the ship's doctor. Just think! If I
(not be) ill, and if she (not be) the doctor, we (not meet), we (not get) married, and our children (not be)
born! What a thought! 47. I'm sorry you had to take a cab to the airport. I didn't know you needed a ride. If
you (tell) nie, I (give) you a ride gladly. 48. You made a lot of unnecessary mistakes in your composition. If
you (use) a dictionary to check your spelling, you (receive) a better grade. 49. A: Shh! Your father 18 taking
a nap. Oh-oh. You woke him up. B: Gee, I'm sorry,
177
Mom. If I (realize) he was sleeping, I (make, not) so much noise when I came in. But how was I supposed
to know? 50. Many people were not satisfied with the leader after he took office. If they (know) more
about his planned economic programs, they (vote, not) for him. 51. Last night Alex ruined his sweater
when he washed it. If he (read) the label, he (wash, not) it in hot water. 52. A: Ever since I broke my foot, I
haven't been able to get down to the basement to wash my clothes. B: Why didn't you say something? I
(come) over and (wash) them for you if you (ask) me. A: I know you (come) right away if I (call) you. I
guess I just didn't want to bother you. B: Nonsense! What are good neighbours for? 53.1 didn't know the
Newtons were going to bring two other people to dinner last night. If anyone else (bring) extra guests, we
(have, not) enough seats at the table. 54. If television (invent) in the eighteenth century, George
Washington (interview) regularly on the evening news.
II. Rephrase these sentences using an if construction.
eg You didn't tell me we had run out of bread, so I didn't buy any. If you had told me we had run out of
bread I'd have bought
some.
1.1 didn't see the signal, so I didn't stop. 2.1 didn't know your number, so I didn't ring. 3. She didn't know
you were in hospital, so she didn't visit you. 4. We came by bus because there were no
taxis. 5. She didn't speak to him, possibly because she was so shy. 6. We didn't visit the museum
because we hadn't time. 7. We didn't listen carefully; perhaps that's why we made this mistake.
8. We got a lift, so we reached the station in time. 9. We missed the train because we were using an out-
of-date timetable. 10. They were driving very quickly. That's why the accident was so terrible.
11. It was raining. That's the only reason I didn't take the children to the beach. 12. He wasn't looking
where he was going. That's why he was run over. 13.1 don't like country life, perhaps because
I wasn't brought up in the country. 14.1 didn't know he was so quarrelsome. I'm sorry now that I invited
him. 15. It rained all the time. Perhaps that's why he didn't enjoy his visit. 16.1 didn't
work hard at school so I didn't get a good job when I left. 17. They asked him to leave the dining-room
because he wasn't
178
wearing a shirt. 18. It took us a long time to find his house because the streets were not clearly marked.
19. We didn't go by air only because we hadn't enough money. 20. The bus didn't stop because you didn't
put your hand up. 21.1 didn't know how thin the ice was, so I was walking on it quite confidently. 22. The
champion didn't take the fight seriously at first; perhaps that's why he didn't win it. 23. The examiner read
the passage very quickly, so the candidates didn't understand it. 24. He didn't get to the top of his
profession, perhaps because his wife didn't encourage him. 25. The exit doors were blocked so people
couldn't escape from the burning hall.
Conditional sentences: Type 2 and Type 3 mixed
I. Put the verbs in brackets into the correct forms, (self check)
1. It was the drug, not the disease, that killed him. He still (be) alive today if he (not take) that drug. 2. This
room's freezing because the fire has only just been lit. — If it (be lit) this morning, as I suggested, the
room (be) warm enough to sit in now. 3. I overslept; that's why I'm half an hour late; and if my phone (not
ring) at nine o'clock I might still be in bed. 4. Why are you in such a bad temper? — Because I've been
waiting for 40 minutes in an icy wind. If you (wait) 40 minutes in an icy wind you (be) bad-tempered, too.
5. When the weather got bad the climbing party turned back, all except Tom and his brothers, who
decided to go on. If only they (turn) back with the others they (be) alive today. 6. You are not practical. If
you (be) practical you (not buy) such a useless thing. 7. She is not careful. If she (be) careful she (not get)
into trouble. 8. She looks tired. If she (not work) all the time she (not look) so tired now.
П. Change the following statements into conditional sentences.
*M»
eg I'm hungry now because I didn't eat dinner. But if I'd eaten dinner, I wouldn't be hungry now.
1. The room is full of flies because you left the door open. 2. You are tired this morning because you didn't
go to bed at a reasonable hour last night. 3. I didn't finish my report yesterday, so I can't begin a new
project today. 4. Helen is sick because she didn't
179
follow the doctor's orders. 5. I'm not you, so I didn't tell him the truth. 6.1 don't know anything about
plumbing, so I didn't fix the leak in the sink myself. 7.1 received a good job offer from the oil company, so I
won't seriously consider taking the job with the electronics firm. 8. I'm careless, that's why I made so
many mistakes. 9. She doesn't know English well enough, so she didn't help him to translate the article.
Conditional sentences: mixed types
I. Put the verbs in brackets into the correct forms, (self check)
1. If you pass your examination we (have) a celebration. 2. What (happen) if I press this button? 3. You
would play better bridge if you (not talk) so much. 4. If I had known that you couldn't eat meat I (not buy)
it. 5. If you go to Paris where you (stay)? 6. If someone offered to buy you one of those rings, which you
(choose)? 7. The flight may be cancelled if the fog (get) thick. 8. If you (read) the instructions carefully you
wouldn't have answered the wrong question. 9. If the milkman (come), tell him to leave two pints. 10. If
you were made redundant what you (do)? 11. Someone (sit) on your glasses if you leave them there. 12.
You (not have) so many accidents if you drove more slowly. 13. If you (wear) a false beard nobody would
have recognized you. 14 I could repair the roof myself if I (have) a long ladder. 15. Г11 probably get lost
unless he (come) with me. 16. If she (leave) the fish there the car will get it. 17. You'll get pneumonia if
you (not change) your wet clothes. 18. She (be able) to walk faster if her shoes hadn't such high heels.
19.1 (bring) you some beer if I had known that you were thirsty. 20. If the story hadn't been true the
newspaper (not print) it. 21.1 (not buy) things on the instalment system if I were you. 22. Dial 999 if you
(want) Police, Ambulance, or Fire Brigade. 23. If anyone attacked me my dog (jump) at his throat. 24. If
he were in he (answer) the phone. 25. The ship would have run aground if the pilot (make) one mistake.
26 I shouldn't have taken your umbrella if I (know) that it was 'he only one you had. 27. If I have enough
apples, I (bake) an apple pie this afternoon. 28. If I had enough apples, I (bake) an apple pie this
afternoon. 29. If I had had enough apples yesterday I (bake) an apple pie. 30. If the weather is nice
tomorrow, we (go)
180
to'the zoo. 31. If the weather were nice today, we (go) to the zoo.
32. If the weather had been nice yesterday, we (go) to the zoo.
33. It's too bad Helen isn't here. If she (be) here, she (know) what to do. 34. Fred failed the test because
he didn't study. However, if he (study) for the test, he (pass) it. 35. You should tell your father exactly what
happened. If I (be) you, I (tell) him the truth as soon as possible. 36. If I (have) my camera with me
yesterday, I (take) a picture of Alex standing on his head. 37. I'm almost ready to plant my garden. I have
a lot of seeds. Maybe I have more than I need. If I (have) more seeds than I need, I (give) some to Nellie.
38.1 got wet because I didn't take my umbrella. However, I (get, not) wet if I (remember) to take my
umbrella yesterday. 39.1 (change) the present economic policy if I (be) the President of the United States.
40. If the teacher (be) absent tomorrow, class will be cancelled. 41. That sounds like a good job offer. If I
(be) you, I (accept) it. 42. I've hung out the clothes. It's lovely and sunny; if it (stay) like this they (be) dry
in two hours. 43. French is essential in this job. All the telephonists speak it. If they (not know) French
they (not understand) half the callers. 44. This flat would be all right if the people above us (not be) so
noisy. 45. If you aren't going to live in the house why you (not sell) it? If I (have) a house I couldn't use I
(sell) it at once. 46. Tell him to bring his bicycle inside. If he (leave) it outside someone (steal) it. 47. She
must have loved him very much because she waited for him for fifteen years. If she (not love) him she
(not wait) so long. 48. If you are catching an early train tomorrow you (like) to have breakfast at 7.00? 49.
When he left school he became
a fisherman. His family didn't like it at all. They (be) much happier if he (become) a greengrocer like his
father. 50. But he says that if he (have) his life again he (make) the same choice. 51. Look at poor Tom
trying to start his car by hand again! If I (be) Tom I (get) a new battery. 52.1 hope you'll see Jack at the
lecture tonight. If you (do), please (remind) him about tomorrow's meeting. 53. The only thing I haven't got
is a balcony. If I (have) a balcony I (grow) plants in pots. Then my flat (be) perfect! 54. Be careful about
the time. If you (spend) too long on the first question you (not have) enough time to do the others
properly. 55. We had a lot of trouble putting the tent up. If it (not be) so windy perhaps it (not be) quite so
difficult.
181
II. Complete these sentences taking care to use the correct tenses
1. If he had taken my advice... 2. If you ate less... 3. We'll send for the doctor if... 4. If she practised
more... 5. If there isn't enough wine in that bottle... 6. Try on the blue one if... 7. If we leave before
breakfast... 8. Her life might have been saved if... 9. Unless it is a nice day... 10. He would lend it to you
if... 11. If the storm becomes worse... 12. If your uncle sees you... 13. If you tried to climb it without a
guide... 14. If I'd brought my coat... 15. If you had asked his permission... 16. If you had any sense... 17.
You would have been angry if... 18. I should have ordered more coal if... 19. If you leave the gate open...
20. He would have been drowned if... 21. If I'd had a car... 22. If Tom rings while I'm out... 23. If I lived in
the country... 24. If you want to get to the station in time to catch the 8.10 tram... 25. If you took a course
in computer programming... 26.1 could have walked more quickly if my suitcase... 27. My room would be
all right if it... 28. We'll test your voice and if it is good enough... 29. Your job sounds awful. If I were you...
30. They would have paid you more if. . 31. If you don't boil the water before you drink it... 32. He
expected absolute punctuality. He was furious if... 33. We could have got seats... 34. Mother to little boy:
If you don't eat up your rice pudding... 35. Tom (looking at his watch): We'll have to go without Peter if...
36. She is simply terrified of rats. If she hears the rats running round your attics she... 37. He would have
given her his typewriter if... 38.1 might understand your problem better if... 39.1 couldn't have fixed the
bicycle if... 40. You could have gotten the job if... 41.1 might have... if I had... 42. If I could... I would... 43.
If I could have... I would have... 44. She wouldn't be so tired today if... 45.1 might have helped if...
III. Using the given ideas, make conditional sentences.
eg rain last Saturday/go (somewhere)
If it hadn't been raining last Saturday, we could have gone
on a picnic.
be a magician/make all the people happy
If I were a magician, I would make all the people happy.
eat properly/run out of energy
If I don't eat properly during the day, I always run out of
energy late in the afternoon.
182
1. know the answer/tell you
2. come to my house/cook dinner
3. be a teacher/teach
4. be no fresh water/live
5. panic/die
6. listen/understand
7. make reservations/request a table for four
8. bus drivers be on strike/take a taxi
9. live in the city/raise horses
10. ten years old again/not have to (do something)
11. be a famous author/write about (something)
IV. Make sentences with if. Follow the patterns in the examples. eg If I have enough money,...
Student A: If I have enough money, I'll buy (can buy) a car. Student B: If I buy a car, I'll drive (can drive) to
Florida. Student C: If I drive to Florida, I'll go (can go) to Miami. Student D: If I go to Miami, I...
eg If I had enough money,...
Student A: If I had enough money, I would buy (could buy)
a car.
Student B: If I bought a car, I would drive (could drive) to
Florida.
Student C: If I drove to Florida, I would go (could go) to Miami. Student D: If I went to Miami, I...
eg If I had had enough money...
Student A: If I had had enough money, I would have bought
(could have bought) a car. Student В: If I had bought a car, I would have driven (could
have driven) to Florida. Student C: If I had driven to Florida, I would have gone
(could have gone) to Miami. Student D: If I had gone to Miami, I...
1. If I have enough money,...
2. If I had enough money,...
3. If I had had enough money,...
4. If I have enough time,...
183
5. If I had enough time,...
6. If I had had enough time,...
7. If the weather is hot/cold tomorrow,...
8. If the weather were hot/cold,...
9. If the weather had been hot/cold yesterday,... 10. If I had a million dollars,...
V. Supply the appropriate auxiliary verb.
1.1 don't have a pen, but if I..., I would lend it to you.
I don't have a pen, but if I did, I would lend it to you. 2. He is busy right now, but if he ..., he would help us.
He is busy right now, but if he weren't, he would help us. 3.1 didn't vote in the last election, but if I..., I
would
have voted for Senator Anderson. 4.1 didn't vote in the last election, but if I had, I would
have voted for Senator Anderson. 5.1 don't have enough money, but if I..., I would buy that
book.
6. The weather is cold today, but if it..., I would go swimming.
7. She didn't come, but if she ..., she would have met my brother.
8. I'm not a good cook, but if I..., I would make all of my
own meals.
9.1 have to go to class this afternoon, but if I..., I would go downtown with you.
10. He didn't go to a doctor, but if he ..., the cut on his hand wouldn't have gotten infected.
11. I always pay my bills. If I ... I would get in a lot of trouble.
12. Helium is lighter than air. If it..., a helium-filled balloon wouldn't float upward.
13.1 called my husband to tell him I would be late. If I..-, he would have gotten worried about me.
VI. Answer each question. Begin with "No, but..."
eg — Do you have a dollar?
— No, but if I did (No, but if I had a dollar), I would lend it to you.
1. Are you rich? 2. Do you have a car? 3. Are you a bird? 4. Are you in (country eg Sweden, India)? 5. Do
you live in an apartment? Dormitory? Hotel? 6. Are you the teacher of this class? 7. Do you have your
own airplane? 8. Are you (the President of the United States)? 9. Are you tired? 10. Are you at home right
now? 11. Are you married? Single? 12. Do you speak (another language)? 13. Is the weather hot/cold
today? 14. Are you hungry? 15. Do you live in (New York City)?
VII. Make an "if clause" from the given information and then supply a "result clause " using your own
words
eg I wasn't late to work yesterday.
If I had been late to work yesterday, I would have missed the regular morning meeting.
Tom asked my permission before he took my bicycle. If Tom hadn't asked my permission before he took
my bicycle, I would have been angry.
1.1 wasn't absent from class yesterday. 2.1 don't have enough energy today. 3. Ocean water is salty. 4.
Our teacher likes his/her job. 5.1 don't know how to swim. 6. You didn't ask for my opinion. 7. It was
raining yesterday. 8. He's got bad manners. 9. The coat is too expensive. 10. Mike wasn't invited to the
party. 11. She is very tired. 12. He feels bad. 13. He works too hard. 14. We didn't book seats in advance.
15. This book isn't on sale. 16. She has caught a bad cold. 17. I've already seen this film. 18. She is shy.
VIII. Make a true statement about the given topic. Then make a contrary-to-fact conditional sentence
about that statement.
eg yourself •=> I am twenty years old. If I were seventy
years old, I would already have lived
most of my life, ice «=> Ice doesn't sink. If the polar ice caps
sank, the level of the oceans would rise
and flood coastal cities. Topics:
1. yourself 2. a member of your family 3. a famous person 4- a member of this class 5. vegetables 6.
space travel 7. your activities right now 8. your activities last night
184
185
IX. What would you do if you were...? Practise using verb forms in contrary-to-fact sentences with if.
eg — What would you do if you were a house painter? — If I were a house painter, I would (paint houses,
paint your house, etc.)
1. a bird 2. a mountain climber 3. an artist 4. a secretary 5. a good cook 6. a teacher 7. a police officer 8.
a parent 9. hungry 10. sleepy 11. at home 12. (name of a famous person) 13. a professional athlete 14. a
photographer 15. (name of a world leader) 16. the leader of your country 17. a magician 18. an astronaut
19. ninety years old. 20. at/in (a particular place) 21. a billionaire 22. the captain of a ship 23. ambitious
X. Answer the questions in complete sentences.
1. Where would you be right now if you weren't in class? 2. What would you have done yesterday if you
hadn't come to class? 3. What would you do today if you had enough time? 4. What would you have done
yesterday if you had had enough time? 5. What would you buy if you had enough money? 6- What would
you have bought yesterday if you had had enough money? 7. What would you do if there were a fire in
this building? 8. If you had your own private plane, where would you go for dinner tonight? 9. (...) is tired
today. Give him/her some advice. What would you do if you were (...)? 10. (...) wants to learn English as
quickly as possible. What would you do if you were (...)?
11. Could ships sail around the world if the earth were flat?
12. What would happen if there were a nuclear war? 13. What would you do if you were the teacher of
this class? 14. Tell me one thing that you did yesterday. What would have happened if you had not (done
that)? 15. What would you do tonight if you didn't have to study? 16. If you could have free service for the
rest of your life from a chauffeur, cook, housekeeper, or gardener, which would you choose? Why? 17. If
you had to leave your country and build a new life elsewhere, where would you go? Why? 18. If you could
stay one particular age for a span of 50 years, what age would you choose? Why? 19. You have
promised to spend an evening with your best friend. Then you discover you have the chance to spend the
evening with.....(supply the name
186
of a famous person). Your friend is not invited. What would you do? Why? 20. Assume that you have a
good job. If your boss told you to do something that you think is wrong, would you do it? Why or why not?
You understand that if you don't do it, you will lose your job. 21. If you had to choose among good health,
a loving family, and wealth (and you could have only one of the three during the rest of your life), which
would you choose? Why? 22. Under what conditions, if any, would you...
a) exceed the speed limit while driving?
b) lie to your best friend?
c) disobey an order from your boss?
d) steal food?
e) carry a friend on your back for a long distance?
f) not pay your rent?
g) (make up other conditions-for your classmates to discuss)
XI. Discuss
What would you do with two million pounds?
a) What... buy? e) ... go on a spending spree?
b) How much...give away? f) How much ... invest? Who ... give it to?
c)... go on holiday? Where... to? g) ... be happier than you
d) What about your job? ... carry are now? on working or ... give up your job?
XII. Translate from Russian into English, (self check) Type I conditionals
1. Если завтра будет сильный мороз, мы не пойдем на лыжах.
2. Интересно, придет ли он. Если он придет, он будет очень Удивлен. 3. Она будет волноваться,
если ты не позвонишь ей. 4. Если я найду ее адрес, я напишу ей. 5. Они получат письмо в
понедельник, если оно будет отослано сегодня. 6. Он с удовольствием придет, если его пригласят
7. Если я буду свободен завтра вечером, я навещу своих родителей. 8. Если он бу-Дет работать,
когда вы вернетесь, посоветуйте ему лечь спать. 9- Если он не приедет завтра, пошлите ему
телеграмму. 10. Она Рассердится, если ты сделаешь это. 11. Если у тебя есть вре-
187
мя, позвони Ане. 12. Я думаю, что если ей предложат эту работу, она согласится. 13. Если вы
будете усердно работать, то к концу дня закончите работу. 14. Ты не станешь хорошим
спортсменом, если не будешь много тренироваться. 15. Его родители будут рады, если он женится
на ней. 16. Если я завтра получу зарплату, то я куплю себе этот костюм. 17. Если у меня есть
время, я хожу на рыбалку каждую неделю. 18. Если я куплю билеты сегодня, я позвоню тебе. 19.
Что ты будешь делать, если не получишь документы? 20. Если погода не изменится, то мы завтра
поедем кататься на лодке. 21. Если автобус будет переполнен, они пойдут на станцию пешком. 22.
Ты попадешь в беду, если не последуешь его совету. 23. Если я много работаю, то очень устаю в
конце дня. 24. Я зайду к вам сегодня вечером, если вы не возражаете. 25. Если хотите, я могу
спросить ее об этом. 26. Если он придет, скажите ему, что я в парикмахерской. 27. Если она не
найдет номера в гостинице, она остановится у своих друзей. 28. Я напишу ей письмо, если вы
пришлете мне ее адрес. 29. Что мы завтра будем делать, если будет хорошая погода ? 30. Если вы
не успеете на поезд в 10.30, то есть поезд в 10.50. 31. Если у него хорошее настроение, то он
всегда шутит.
Туре 2 conditionals
1. Если бы вы знали грамматику лучше, вы бы не делали столько ошибок в ваших упражнениях. 3.
Если бы он сейчас был здесь, он, конечно, помог бы нам. 3. Если бы не было так поздно, я бы
позвонил ей сейчас. 4. Если бы она была более терпеливой, с ней легче было бы иметь дело. 5. Я
бы зашел к тебе на следующей неделе, если бы у меня было время. 6. На вашем месте я бы
провел отпуск на юге. Я уверен, это пошло бы вам на пользу. 7. Вы бы чувствовали себя лучше,
если бы проводили больше времени на свежем воздухе. 8. Если бы ты действительно любил
читать, ты бы всегда нашел время для чтения. 9. Если бы у него сейчас были занятия, нам
пришлось бы долго ждать. 10. Вы бы не опаздывали на занятия, если бы выходили из дому на
десять минут раньше. 11. Не будь он таким ленивым, он был бы одним из первых учеников класса.
12. Если бы у нас было меньше багажа, мы могли бы пойти пешком на вокзал, так как у нас
188
достаточно времени, чтобы успеть на поезд. 13. Она бы не теряла вещи так часто, если бы не
была такой рассеянной. 14. На твоем месте я бы приняла это предложение. 15. Если бы вы знали
его лучше, вы бы не думали о нем так плохо. 16. На вашем месте я бы отказался от этой идеи. Ее
трудно осуществить. 17. Что бы вы сказали, если бы он обратился к вам за советом? 18. Если бы
она сейчас же пошла в читальню, она бы еще застала там библиотекаря. 19. Если бы фильм был
цветной, он бы производил большее впечатление. 20. Мне очень нравятся эти часы. Если бы они
были дешевле, я бы купил их. 21. В этом тексте слишком много незнакомых слов. Если бы у меня
был словарь, я бы смогла перевести его. 22. Если бы женщины не занимались домашним
хозяйством, они бы сэкономили массу времени. 23. Вы бы чувствовали себя лучше, если бы не
ложились спать так поздно. 24. Слишком холодно. Мы бы могли пойти на каток, если бы не было
так холодно. 25. Если бы не дождь, мы могли бы сейчас поехать за город. 26. На твоем месте я бы
обратился к врачу. 27. Ей не было бы так одиноко, если бы дети были с ней сейчас.
Туре 3 conditionals
1. Если бы ты мне оставил записку, я бы зашел к тебе вчера.
2. Мы бы не опоздали на поезд, если бы взяли такси. 3. Если бы я не был так занят на прошлой
неделе, я бы тоже присоединился к вашей экскурсии. 4. Если бы он не отказался помочь нам, мы
бы уже закончили работу. 5. Если бы ее попросили, она давно прислала бы эти книги. 6. Если бы
вчера не было так холодно, мы, возможно, пошли бы на каток. 7. Мы, возможно, не заблудились
бы, если бы ночь не была такой темной. 8. Если бы ты пришел вчера на собрание, ты бы услышал
интересный доклад. 9. Если бы я знал, что тебе нужна эта книга, я бы захватил ее с собой, 10. Я
бы не сделал эту ошибку, если бы был более внимателен, когда писал диктант. П. Даже если бы ты
позвонил мне вчера, я бы не смог придти. 12. Я бы не упал, если бы не было так скользко. 13. Он
бы не пришел, если бы ты его не пригласил. 14. Мне потребовалось много времени, чтобы
перевести эту статью. Если бы вы дали мне хороший словарь, я бы потратил меньше времени. 15.
Я был бы очень рад, если бы вы зашли к нам
189
вчера. 16. Этого бы не случилось, если бы вы были там. 17. Если бы мне сообщили об этом
раньше, я бы сделал все возможное, чтобы помочь вам. 18. Если бы вы пришли сюда между двумя
и тремя часами, вы бы застали его. 19. Почему вы не позвали его? Я уверен, что он пришел бы,
если бы вы его позвали. 20. Если бы я так не волновалась, я бы ответила лучше. 21. Если бы он
завел будильник, он бы не проспал и успел на самолет 22. Если бы я вчера не искупалась, то я бы,
возможно, не простудилась. 23. Если бы я не пропустил столько занятий, я бы написал тест лучше.
24. Я бы навестила тебя вчера, если бы у меня было больше времени. 25. Если бы мы заказали
билеты заранее, мы смогли бы увидеть этот захватывающий матч. 26. Я бы помог тебе, если бы ты
обратился ко мне за помощью. 27. Если бы я не был так занят вчера, я бы поехал на вокзал
проводить его. 28. Даже если бы ты предупредил меня заранее, я бы не смог придти, так как был
очень занят.
Туре 2 and type 3 conditionals mixed
1. Если бы он занимался регулярно весь семестр, он бы сейчас не боялся экзаменов. 2. Если бы
мы знали его адрес, мы бы сообщили ему о результатах экзаменов вчера. 3. Он бы не делал
столько ошибок сейчас, если бы не пропустил столько ^ занятий. 4. Ты бы себя хорошо сегодня
чувствовал, если бы принял вчера лекарство. 5. Вы бы лучше знали язык, если бы прочитали
летом несколько английских книг. 6. Если бы мы работали вчера больше, наша работа была бы
сейчас готова. 7. Не будь он таким рассеянным, он бы не забыл свой чемодан в поезде. Он без
конца теряет вещи. 8. Если бы мы послали письмо вчера, они бы получили его завтра утром. 9. Ес-
ли бы мы не'шли так быстро, мы не были бы такими усталыми сейчас и могли бы продолжить наш
путь. 10. Если бы я принес словарь с собой, я мог бы перевести этот документ сейчас. 11. Если бы
я не пошел к ним вчера, мы бы ничего не знали об этом даже теперь. 12. Будь у него чувство
юмора, он бы не обиделся. 13. Если бы поезд вышел вовремя, он прибыл бы в конечный пункт
завтра рано утром. 14. Если бы вы выполнили все предписания врача, вы давно бы выздоровели и
работали сейчас вместе с нами. 15. Если бы они любили друг друга, они бы давно поженились.
190
Mixed conditionals
1. Если бы вы были вчера на стадионе, вы бы увидели луч-щих спортсменов. 2. Если ночи будут
теплые, мы будем спать на открытом воздухе. 3. Ты бы получил большое удовольствие, если бы
принял участие в нашей экскурсии. 4. Если бы я был на твоем месте, я бы поторопился. Если ты не
поторопишься, ты опоздаешь на поезд. 5. Если бы его сразу отправили в больницу, он бы не
потерял так много крови. 6. На твоем месте я бы купил себе магнитофон. 7. Если бы вы напомнили
мне об этом вчера, я бы сегодня принес вам эти книги. 8. Если бы у меня сейчас был отпуск, я бы
совершила путехиествие по Кавказу. 9. Вы бы могли съездить за город на пару дней, если бы
вовремя закончили работу. Все зависит от вас. 10. Если бы у тебя был телефон, я бы предупредил
тебя заранее. 11. Если завтра не будет дождя, то мы пойдем в ботанический сад. 12. На вашем
месте я бы извинилась перед ней. 13. Если фильм тебе понравится, я тоже схожу посмотреть его.
14. Почему ты не обратилась ко мне? Я бы присмотрела за твоими детьми, если бы ты меня
попросила. 15. Я бы не опоздал на поезд, если бы упаковал вещи вечером. 16. Будь он
повнимательнее, он бы написал диктант лучше. 17. Вы бы лучше говорили по-английски, если бы
регулярно занимались в лингафонном кабинете. 18. Если кофе не совсем сладкий, добавьте
сахару. 19. Если бы они так много не тренировались, они бы не выиграли. 20. Я бы охотно по-
казала вам город, если бы не была сейчас так занята. 21. Я подожду его, если его не будет дома,
когда я приду. 22. Я буду очень огорчен, если они не придут. 23. Если я буду там и увижу его, я
скажу ему об этом. 24. Если мне не станет лучше, я пойду завтра к врачу. 25. Если бы он был
честным человеком, он бы не сделал этого. 26. На твоем месте я бы уговорил ее поехать на юг.
Это принесло бы ей большую поль-3У- 27. Если бы я знал его адрес, я бы немедленно написал ему.
28. Если бы он не был способным, он бы не справился с этой работой. 29. Если бы документы
были подписаны, мы бы отослали их сегодня же. 30. Если у меня неприятности, я Всегда делюсь с
сестрой. 31. Если бы ты пришел ко мне на прошлой неделе, ты бы мог повидать моего брата. Он
приедет в Минск в командировку. 32. На вашем месте я бы по-
191
слала ему телеграмму. 33. Куда бы ты поехал, если бы был сейчас свободен? 34. Я бы навестил
родителей в деревне, если бы не был сейчас так занят. 35. Если ты поторопишься, то ты успеешь
на семичасовой поезд. 36. На моем месте вы бы сделали то же самое. 37. Если бы я знала, что
приедут мои родители, я бы испекла пирог. 38. Что бы ты делал, если бы потерял деньги в
незнакомом городе?
Fluency Listen, read and practise.

June: Are you doing the football pools, Brian?

Brian:Yes, I've nearly finished, June. I'm sure we shall win
something this week. June: You always say that, but we never win anything! What
will you do if you win a lot of money? Brian:If I win a lot of money I shall buy you a mink coat. June: I don't
want a mink coat! I want to see the world. Brian: All right. If we win a lot of money we shall travel round
the world and we shall stay at the best hotels. Then we
shall return home and buy a big house in the country.
We shall have a beautiful garden and... June: But if we spend all that money we shall be poor again.
What shall we do then? Brian: If we spend all the money we shall try and win the
football pools again. June: It's a pleasant dream but everything depends on "if!
A. Questions
1. What is Brian doing? 2. Has Brian ever won anything on the football pools? 3. What will Brian buy his
wife if he wins a lot of money? 4. She doesn't want a mink coat, does she? 5. What does June want
instead of a mink coat? 6. What will Brian do if he spends all the money? 7. It's only a dream, isn't it? 8.
What does it all depend on?
B. What will you do if you win a lot of money?
192
jim and his friend Anthony are going to fly to Istanbul. Jim's mother is very worried.
Mum: Oh, dear! I hope everything will be all right. You've
never been abroad before. Jim: Don't worry, Mum. I'll be OK. I can look after myself.
Anyway, I'll be with Anthony. We won't do anything
stupid.
Mum: But what will you do if you ran out of money? Jim: We'll get a job of course! Mum: Oh. What about
if you get lost? Jim: Mum! If we get lost, we'll ask someone the way, but we won't get lost because we
know where we're going! Mum: But how will I know that you're all right? Jim: When we get to a big city,
I'll send you a postcard. Mum:Oh. But Jim, it's such a long flight to Istanbul! Jim: Mum! As soon as we
arrive in Turkey, I'll give you a ring. Mum:I'll be worried until I hear from you. Jim: I'll be OK, Mum.
Honest!
A. Questions
1. Where are Jim and his friend flying? 2. Have they ever been abroad before? 3. Is Jim's mother
worried? 4. What will the boys do if they run out of money? 5. What will they do if they get
lost? 6. What will Jim do as soon as he arrives in Turkey?
-*,
B. Roleplay the conversation and make up a similar conversation.
C. Complete the following conversation. Putif, when, or as soon
as into each gap. Put the verbs into the correct tenses.
Joe is saying goodbye to his wife Sue, who is going for a job interview.
Joe: Goodbye, darling! Good luck with the interview! Sue: Thanks. I'll need it. I hope the trains are
running on
time._______the trains (be) delayed, I (get) a taxi.
______I (be) late for the interview, I (be) furious with
myself!
Joe: Just keep calm! Phone me when you can.
7
3ак ню 193
Sue: I will.______I (come) out of the interview, I (give)
you a ring.
Joe: When you (know)______you've got the job?
Sue: They (send) me a letter in the next few days._____
they (offer) me the job, I (accept) it, and ^~f
accept it, we (have to) move house. You know that, don't
you?
Joe: Sure. But we'll worry about that later. Sue: OK. What are you doing today? Joe: I can't
remember._______I (get) to the office, I (look)
in my diary. I don't think I'm doing much today. Sue: Don't forget to pick up the children________you
(get)
back from work. Joe: I won't. You'd better go now.______you (not hurry),
you (miss) the train. Sue: OK. I (see) you this evening. Bye. Joe: Bye, my love. Take care, and good
luck!
In pairs, ask and answer questions about Joe and Sue's conversation.
eg What/Sue/do/if/trains/ delayed?
— What will Sue do if the trains are delayed?
— She'll get a taxi.
a. How/she/feel/if/late for the interview?
b. When/Sue/phone/Joe?
c. When/know/if/she's got the job? 0
d. What/she/do/if/they/offer her the job?
e. What/they/have to do/if/she/accept/job?
f. What/Joe/do/when/get/office?
g. What/happen/if/Sue/not hurry?
Good evening. This is London Radio. Welcome to "Man in the Street."
Our programme tonight is about North Sea oil. Oil was first discovered beneath the North Sea in the late
1960s. Since then more and more oil has been found off the coasts of Britain and is being brought
ashore. We aren't going to become very rich, but
194
we must decide how to spend the oil revenues. Our interviewer went into the streets to ask people their
opinion. He asked: "If you were the Prime Minister what would you do with the money?" "Well of course.
I'm not the Prime Minister, but if I were I'd spend the money on more hospitals and schools. We need
more doctors, nurses and teachers. Classes are too big. If classes were smaller, children would learn
more. And there aren't enough nurses either, because salaries are too low. If the salaries were higher
more people would become nurses. Money which is spent on education and health is an investment for
the future."
" I think the answer is quite simple. Taxes are too high in this country, aren't they? I would reduce them. If
we reduced taxis, people would have more money. If they had more money, they'd spend more. Industry
would have to produce more, so it would need more workers. There would be more jobs, and we would all
be richer."
"I'm very worried about inflation. I'd try to control prices. If I were the Prime Minister I'd reduce the price of
gas, coal and electricity. If we did that, everybody would benefit, wouldn't they? Food is much too
expensive. I'd encourage the farmers to produce more food, more cheaply. However there are some
things that I certainly wouldn't do: I certainly wouldn't build more roads, and I wouldn't spend money on
guns and tanks and warplanes."
"There's too much crime and violence nowadays. There aren't enough policemen on the streets. I'd
increase the size of the police force, and I'd increase their salaries. If we had more policemen, we'd all
feel safer. I'd also increase old age pensions. I've worked hard all my life and I should have a reasonable
standard of living." A. Questions
1. What radio programme is this? 2. What is tonight's programme about? 3.When was oil discovered
beneath the North Sea? 4. What question did the interviewer ask the people in the streets? 5. What did
the first/second/third/fourth speaker say? "• Now advise these people using the second conditional. eg —
I've got a headache.
— If I were you, I'd take an aspirin, see a doctor, have a rest, go for a walk, etc.
195
1 . 1 can't sleep at night. 2. I've been bitten by a snake. 3. I've lost my passport. 4. 1 want to win an
Olympic medal. 5. I've cut myself. 6. I've just seen an accident. 7. 1 need some money and the banks are
shut. 8. I want to stop smoking. 9. I want to be a millionaire. 10. I've been robbed. 11. 1 want to buy a pet.
12. I want to buy a car.

Mikis: I think the theatres here are excellent. If I lived in London, I'd probably go to the theatre every
week.
AH: Yes, I agree. I've already seen four or five plays. On Saturday I'm going to see "When We Are
Married" at the National Theatre.
Mikis: Oh, are you? Have you booked a seat?
AH: No, not yet.
Mikis: Well, if I were you, I'd book immediately. It's a very popular play. What a pity I won't be here! I've
already arranged to* go to Bristol. If I were staying in London, I'd go with you.
A. Questions
1 . What does Mikis think of the London theatres? 2. How often would he go to the theatre if he lived in
London? 3. How many plays has AH seen? 4. What play is he going to see on Saturday? 5. Has he
booked a seat? 6. What does Mikis advise him to do? What are his exact words? 7. Why can't Mikis go to
the theatre together with AH?
B. What would you do if you were free tomorrow?

Barbara: If I had three weeks' holiday in August, I'd fly to Los Angeles. I've never been to America.
Steve: Why Los Angeles, and why August? You'd see more if you flew to New York and went on the bus.
And you'd save money if you travelled in the low season, say, May or September. October is even
cheaper. If you went then, you would save even more. The return
196
fare to New York on British Airways or Pan Am is less than £200 in October. Barbara: Oh, really? Perhaps
I can go then instead!
A. Questions
1 . Where would Barbara like to go if she had a holiday in August? 2. What does Steve advise her to do?
What are his exact words? 3.What is the return fare to New York in October?
B. What would you do in the following situations?
Suppose someone steals your wallet. If someone stole my wallet, I'd report it to the police. Suppose
1 . someone steals your travellers cheques, (bank/police )
2. you lose your passport, (consulate/police)
3. you find a wallet full of money on a bus. (bus company/ bus conductor)
4. you lose your air ticket, (air company)
5. someone steals your luggage at the airport, (airport police)
6. you leave your handbag/briefcase in a taxi, (taxi company)
C. If, beginning tomorrow, you had a two-week holiday and unlimited funds, what would you do? Why?

Radio Reporter: Good morning! I'm Jane Taylor with WELT radio. I'm interviewing people on the street
this morning, asking the question: "What would you do if you won ten million dollars in the lottery?" Let's
start with this person here. Excuse me, what's your name?
Linda: Linda.
Reporter: Linda, what would you do if you won ten million dollars?
Linda: Ten million dollars? Well, first I'd pay for my brother's college education, and then I'd buy a nice
house for my parents, and I'd probably give the rest to charity.
197
Reporter: OK. Thank you. And you, sir, what's your name 9
Robert: My name's Robert.
Reporter: Well, Robert, what would you do if you won ten million dollars?
Robert: Hmmm..., I think I'd use the money to start my own business. I've always wanted to do that.
Reporter: Oh? What kind of business?
Robert: I'd start my own recording company.
Reporter: That sounds interesting, thanks! And you, sir, could I have your name please?
Scott: Scott.
Reporter: Scott, what would you do if you won ten million dollars?
Scott: Well, first I'd pay off all my credit cards. Then I'd buy a very cool wardrobe, and then... I'd buy ajet...
and learn to fly it.
A. Questions
1. What question does the radio reporter ask? 2. What would Linda do if she won ten million dollars? 3.
What would Robert do with the money? 4. And what about Scott?
B. What would you do if you won a lot of money? Why?
Brian: You know I really should give up smoking. I'm up to
two packs a day. Peter: Yeah. If I gave up smoking, I could save about $100 a
month. Brian: The trouble is, though, if I stop smoking, I'll probably
gain weight. Peter: Uh-huh. And if I stop, I might start chewing my nails
again. Brian: Mmm. Well, I guess I'd only stop smoking if they
passed a law banning cigarettes. Peter: Me too. Got a match?
A. Complete the clauses in column A with information in column B. Then compare with a partner and
practise them.
198
a)If they banned smoking ... the streets will be a lot on all planes, cleaner.
b) If people used their cars ... some people would travel only on weekends, by train.
c) If they build a good ... they would probably be a subway system, lot healthier.
d) If people ate less meat, ... there would be less pollu-
tion in cities.
e) If the city passes a law ... more people might get rid against keeping dogs as pets, of their cars.
Pair work. Now take turns and complete the clauses in column A with your own information.
Jane: I just got a postcard from a friend who lost all her money
on vacation in Europe. Isn't that terrible? Burt: Yeah, that's horrible! Kate: Jane, what would you do if you
were on vacation
overseas and lost all your money and credit cards? Jane: Well, I'd probably phone my parents and ask
them
to send some money right away. How about you, Burt? Burt: Yeah, I'd probably do the same thing...
although maybe
I'd try going to the American Express Office to see if I
could get a loan or something. What about you, Kate? Kate: Well, I guess I'd probably sell my watch and
camera...
or I might get a job as a waitress somewhere till I made
enough money to buy a plane ticket.
A. Group work.
What would you do in the situations below?
A: What would you do if...?
B: I think I'd...
C: I'm not sure, but I might...
— you found a valuable piece of jewelry on a park bench
— you won a lot of money in a lottery
— a friend borrowed money from you and didn't re- turn it
— you were on vacation overseas and lost all your mo-
ney and credit cards
— you saw two people fighting on the street
— you discovered your friend had a drinking problem
— someone stole your clothes on the beach while you were swimming
Lynn: What are you going to do during class break?
Tony: I hope to go camping with Pierre. We want to go to the
Grand Canyon. How about you? Lynn: I plan to buy a car and drive to Los Angeles. Tony: What's in Los
Angeles? Lynn: I have a friend there. Tony: L. A. is a long way. If I were you, I'd fly. You can fly
safely and cheaply these days. And you can always rent
a car in L. A. Lynn: No. I want to drive. Say, would you come with me ifl
paid for the gas and everything? You could go camping
some other time.
Tony: No. I really want to see the Grand Canyon, and I've already bought a new backpack. Besides, what
would I tell Pierre if I went with you? Lynn: What do you mean?
Tony: Well, going camping was his idea, and he lent me the money for the backpack.
A. Match the two parts of each sentence.
1. Tony hopes to a. buy a car.
2. Tony wants to b. visit a friend in Los
Angeles.
3. Lynn plans to c. go camping with Pierre.
4. Lynn doesn't want to d. fly to Los Angeles.
5. She wants to e. see the Grand Canyon.
6. She plans to f. drive.
B. Tony is reading a letter from his sister.
Dear Tony,
Mom told me you are planning to go to the Grand Canyon with
your friend Pierre. The Grand Canyon is an incredible place. It's
really beautiful. I went there when I was in the U.S. However, if I were you, I'd go in the summer. I
wouldn't go in the winter. The Grand Canyon is very cold in the winter, and I don't think you'd enjoy
yourself if you went then Also, if it snowed, you wouldn't be able to walk around and see things very well.
Ifl were you, I'd go someplace warm. In fact, I'd think about going to California. Maybe one of the other
students would drive if you offered to pay for the gas. Maybe Pierre would go too if you asked him. I
mean, if you told him you'd go to the Grand Canyon next summer, he'd probably go to California with you
during your class break. Wouldn't you like all of that sunny weather and the beaches? I know I would!
Let me know what you decide.
Love, Paula
C. Questions
1. Would Paula go to the Grand Canyon if she were Tony? 2. Would Tony enjoy himself if he went to the
Grand Canyon in winter? 3. Would he be able to walk around easily and see things well if it snowed?
D. Ask for and give advice. Complete the conversations with should and would ('d) or would not
(wouldn't).
eg A: Should I fly or drive?
B: Well, if I were you, I'd fly. I wouldn't drive. Besides, you can fly quickly and cheaply.
1. A:______I buy a new car or fix my old one?
В:____.___. Besides, your old one is in pretty good condition.
2. A:______I study or go to the movies?
B:_____._____. Besides, you want to pass the test,
don't you?
3. A:______I rent or buy?
B:______._______. Besides, you don't have a lot of
money right now.
4. A:_____I take bookkeeping or learn how to use a
computer? f B:_____._____. Besides, there are a lot of jobs for
200
201
people with computer experience.
5. A:____I make a cake or buy a pie?
B:____.____. Besides, it's easier to buy a pie than to make a cake.

Arthur's secretary has told him she would like to see him about something personal. She has just come
into his office.
Arthur: Sit down, Miss Bradley. It's something personal, you say? Miss Bradley: Yes. You see, I'm
going to get married next
month and...
Arthur: Get married? I didn't know that. Congratulations!
Miss Bradley: Thank you, but I'm afraid it means I've got to give in my notice. I'd like to leave at the end of
the month. Arthur: Really? I'm very sorry to hear that. Do you
intend to stop working altogether, then? Miss Bradley: Oh, no! My fiance and I want to save up
enough for a house and we wouldn't be able to do that if I stopped working right away. And it isn't that I
don't like my job here, either. I'd stay if Terry, that's my fiance, weren't a Canadian. Arthur: A
Canadian? I'm sorry, I don't understand.
What's that got to do with it? Miss Bradley: Well, we're both going to live in Canada as
soon as we get married. Arthur: Oh, I see. What does your fiance do for a
living, by the way?
Miss Bradley: He's an engineer. He often says he'd earn far more if he were back in Canada. That's why
he wants to go back.
Arthur: But engineers are quite well paid here in England.
How much does he earn here, then, if I may ask? Miss Bradley: £120 a week. Arthur: Is that all?
That's very poor for a qualified
202
engineer. You ought to tell him he'd get far more if he came and worked for us.
Miss Bradley: Well .er... you see...
Arthur: I mean. I'm sure that if I were a young engineer
and if my salary were low, I'd want to go to Canada, too. Where does he work, by the way?
Miss Bradley: Er... as a matter of fact, he works here in your factory, Mr Tigers. He's in your motor-design
department.
д. Questions
1. Why did Miss Bradley decide to give in her notice? 2. Is she going to stop working altogether? 3.
Where does her fiance come from? 4. How much does he earn? 5. Why does he want to go back to
Canada? 6. What does Arthur say Miss Bradley ought to tell her fiance? 7. Where does he work?
B. Complete the sentences from the conversation.
1. We wouldn't be able to do that if I... 2. He often says... 3. You ought to tell him... 4. I'm sure that if I
were a young man and my salary...
C. Without looking at the text, see if you can remember how these phrases were used. Then try to make
other sentences of your own with the same words.
a) I'm afraid it means d) for a living
b) my notice e) by the way
c) It isn't that I... f) as a matter of fact
D. Give advice to the following people. Use: "IfI were you, I'd..."
eg A student who doesn't work very hard. Advice: If I were you, I'd work a bit harder.
1. A woman who always goes to bed very late. 2. A friend who smokes more than 50 cigarettes a day. 3. A
man who is very thin and unhealthy. 4. A friend with a bicycle that often goes Wrong. 5. A man who is very
unhappy in his job. 6. Someone with very bad toothache. 7. A friend who has just bought a new Car and
the car has just broken down. 8. A man who wants a job to Sweden, but can't speak Swedish.
203

E. Situation:
A friend of yours has written to you recently to ask your advice about a problem. The problem is that the
friend wants to brush up his (or her) English, but doesn't know whether to go to a school in England for an
intensive course or to go to evening classes in his (or her) home town. Write a letter advising the friend
what you would do.
David Renton was forty-nine years old. He had worked at the bank for thirty years, and as he stood
behind the counter, serving a queue of impatient customers, he thought to himself, "Surely there must be
a better way of spending one's time than this."
Outside it was a beautiful spring day. The sky was blue, the birds were singing, the trees were in bud.
That evening David surprised his wife by bringing her a big bunch of daffodils.
"My goodness," she said, "what are these for?"
"How would you like to live in the country?" he asked.
"In the country?"
"How would you feel if I gave up my job?"
"But your pension... you'd lose your pension."
"No, there's an early retirement scheme — I could draw a reduced pension," he said.
"But we couldn't live on that. You'd have to get another job. What could you do?"
"A smallholding," he said, "I'd get a smallholding and grow vegetables."
A. Questions
1. What was David doing, when the idea came into his head? 2. What state were the trees in? 3. How did
David surprise his wife? 4. Why do you think he did this? 5. What was his wife's immediate reaction to his
suggestion that he should give up his job? 6. How did he reply to this objection? 7. What does David
intend to do?
B. David Renton put this question to his wife:
How would you feel, if I gave up my job at the bank?
204
He could have asked her similar questions. What were they? The notes will help you.
1 .How/you/feel/leave/bank
2. What/you/say/change/job
3. How/you/feel/buy/smallholding
4. How/the children/feel/we/go/to live/country
Similarly his wife might have said to him:
1. How/we/live/give up/your job
2. How/you/find/job/we/leave/city
3. Where/we/live/sell/house
4. What/children/do/we/go/away
C. David and his wife were discussing his plan to buy a smallholding. What were the questions she
asked? His replies will help you.
l.What...?
I'd concentrate on lettuces, cauliflowers and beans. 2. What animals ... keep?
Pigs, probably. 3.... fruit?
Yes, soft fruits like strawberries, raspberries and gooseberries. 4. How ... produce to market?
I'd get myself a small van. 5.... the bank lend...?
Yes, I'm sure I could borrow a little money from the bank,
if I wanted to. 6.... have to work...?
Yes, I would at first, but later 1 could get some help. 7. Where ... buy the smallholding?
Near some nice little village, in the country.
Why Don't У-ои Statt Smoking?
Harry: You know, Nora, that's the second time breakfast has been late this week. If I don't get my
breakfast on time I arrive at work late.
Nora: You're awfully bad-tempered these days, Harry. It must be because you've given up smoking.
205
Harry: Nonsense. Anyhow, who says I'm bad-tempered? Nora: You're never really happy unless you
have a cigarette
or a pipe in your mouth. Why don't you start smoking?
I would if I were you. Harry: Certainly not. If I say I'm going to give something
up, I give it up. Nora: Oh, Harry, if only you would smoke again, I'm sure
we should have fewer black looks about the house. Harry: No, Nora. If I start smoking, I shall start that
silly
irritating cough again. Good heavens, if that fellow
Smith can give it up, I hope I can. Nora: I see. You just want to show how strong-minded
you are. Well, I guarantee that if you had a packet
of cigarettes in your pocket now you would very
soon find yourself lighting one. Harry: Not at all. Even if I had a hundred cigarettes in every
pocket I still shouldn't give way to temptation. Now,
Nora, if I don't go I shall miss my bus. Nora: Shall I see you at six? Harry: Yes, if I'm not kept at
work. Nora: If you pass a stationer's, buy me some envelopes,
will you? Harry: Right. Goodbye, Nora.
(Sound of a match being struck) Nora: Er — Harry, what's that in your mouth? Harry: Good
heavens, it's a cigarette. I must have lit it
without thinking. Why, Nora, you put that cigarette on the table in front of me. Nora (laughing): Yes, Harry,
I can't have you being too
strong-minded.
Note: We do not normally use wouldn’t the /part of the sentence:
eg — Ann wouldn't give me any money if I asked her.
— If I found $100 in the street I would keep it.
Sometimes it is possible to say if... would, especially when you ask someone to do something in a formal
way:
— I would be very grateful if you would send me your brochure and price list as soon as possible, (from a
formal letter)
— "Shall I close the door?" "Yes, please, if you would."
— Oh, Harry, if only you would smoke again, I'm sure we should have fewer black looks about the house.
Д. Questions
1. Why is Harry so bad-tempered these days? 2. Harry is determined to give up smoking, isn't he? 3. Why
doesn't Nora approve of Harry's giving up smoking? 4. How does she tempt him to start smoking again?
B. Put the verbs into the correct forms.
1. Now, Nora, if I (not go) I (miss) my bus. 2. Why don't you start smoking? I... if I (be) you. 3. Well, I
guarantee that if you (have) a packet of cigarettes in your pocket now you very soon (find) yourself
lighting one. 4. If I (not get) my breakfast on time I (arrive) at work late. 5. If you (pass) a stationer's, buy
me some envelopes. 6. If I (say) I'm going to give something up, I (give up) it. 7. Even if I (have) a
hundred cigarettes in every pocket I still (not give) way to temptation. 8. Shall I see you at six? — Yes, if I
(not keep) at work.
9. You (be) never really happy unless you (have) a cigarette or a pipe in your mouth. 10. Oh, Harry, if only
you (smoke) again, I'm sure we (have) fewer black looks about the house. 11. If I (start) smoking, I (start)
that silly irritating cough again.
C. Give the appropriate English phrases for the following.
1. Если я начну курить, у меня опять начнется этот ужасный кашель. 2. Ты просто хочешь показать
свою решительность. 3. Почему ты не начнешь опять курить? На твоем месте я бы сделала это. 4.
У тебя скверное настроение в эти дни. 5. Второй раз на этой неделе завтрак запоздал. 6. Я, должно
быть, зажег ее, не подумав. 7. Если будешь проходить мимо магазина канцелярских
принадлежностей, пожалуйста, купи мне несколько конвертов. 8. Увидимся в шесть? — Да, если
меня не задержат на работе. 9. Если я сейчас не уйду, я опоздаю на автобус.
10. Наверно, это потому что ты бросил курить. 11. Чепуха! 12. Конечно нет 13. Даже если бы у меня
была сотня сигарет в каждом кармане, я бы устоял против искушения. 14. Боже мой! О. Give a brief
account of the conversation.
E. Roleplay the conversation.
Jenny: Nick, catch the ball! Oh no, look what you've done.
You've broken the lamp. Nick: If you hadn't thrown the ball so high, I wouldn't
have knocked it off the table. It wasn't really my
fault. Jenny: Well, whose fault was it? If you had looked, you
would have seen. Nick: It's too late now. We may be able to stick it together.
Then Mum might not notice. Jenny: It's too risky. She might want to use it. Why don't
we just tell her what happened? Nick: And get my pocket money stopped again? Not likely!
Where's the glue?
A. Complete the sentences with the words in brackets.
Ben: Will you lend me your bike? I have to get to basketball training in five minutes.
Nick: The last time I lent it to you, you got a flat tyre and didn't repair it.
Ben: Well, I (not get) a flat tyre if you (put) enough air in it.
Nick: That's not true. You rode straight over some broken glass.
Ben: Well, I (not ride) over the glass if someone (not leave) it all over the road. Besides, I (go) round
the glass, if a car (not come) from the other direction.
Nick: Well, you could have stopped.
Ben: I (stop) if the brakes (not fail).
Nick: Well, you should have checked the brakes before you started. I (not lend) you my bike if I (know)
that the brakes weren't working.
Bob: What was wrong with you this morning? Debbie: Wrong with me? Sorry, Bob, I don't know what
you
mean. Bob: You walked straight past me. You didn't say a word 1
208
Debbie: Really? Where?
Bob: It was just outside the newsagent's in the High Street.
Debbie: I'm terribly sorry, Bob. I just didn't see you.
Bob: Come on, Debbie. You must have done! I was waving!
Debbie: No, honestly. I didn't see you. If I had seen you, I
would have said "Hello".
Exercise 1
She didn't see him. She didn't say "Hello". If she had seen him, she would have 'said "Hello". Do the
same.
1. She didn't notice him. She didn't stop. 2. She didn't recognize him. She didn't speak to him. 3. She
didn't see him waving. She didn't wave back.
Mrs Lewis: Debbie, have you sent that telex to Geneva?
Debbie: No, I haven't.
Mrs Lewis: Why haven't you done it? It's urgent.
Debbie: Because you didn't ask me to do it.
Mrs Lewis: Didn't I?
Debbie: No, you didn't. If you'd asked me, I'd've sent it!
Exercise 2
Have you sent the telex? If you'd asked me, I would have sent it. Do the same.
1. Have you posted the letters? 2. Have you photo-copied the report? 3. Have you typed the contract?
Gordon: Did you see a letter from Brazil on this desk?
Debbie: Yes, it's here.
Gordon: Oh, good. Where's the envelope?
Debbie: I threw it away. Why?
Gordon: It had some nice stamps on it. I wanted them for my
son. He collects stamps, bebbie: Oh, Gordon! If only I'd known! Gordon: It doesn't matter. Debbie: No,
I'd have kept it if I'd known.
209
Exercise 3
I didn't keep it.
I'd have kept it if I'd known.
Do the same.
I.I didn't do it. 2.1 didn't give it to you. 3.1 didn't put it in the drawer.
Debbie: What's the matter, Jefi? You don't look very well. Jeff: No. I've had a terrible cold. I've been in
bed all weekend, but it's better today. Debbie: Mm... I had a bad cold last week. Jeff: I know, and you
gave itto everyone in the office. I wouldn't have come to work if I'd had a cold like that.
Exercise 4
She had a bad cold, but she came to work.
I wouldn't have come to work if I'd had a cold.
Do the same.
1. She had a headache. She stayed at work.
2. He had a sore throat. He worked all day.
3. She had toothache. She didn't go to the dentist.
Mrs Lewis: Debbie.
Debbie: Yes?
Mrs Lewis: Did you type this letter?
Debbie: Yes. Why? Is there something wrong with it?
Mrs Lewis: Have a look. This should be £400.000. You've
typed £40.000.
Debbie: Oh, yes. I'm ever so sorry. Mrs Lewis: And you've also misspelt the customer's
name. It should be "Swelling" not "Smelling".
Debbie: Hee-hee!
Mrs Lewis: It's not funny, Debbie. If I hadn't noticed it, we could have lost the order.
Exercise 5
She noticed the error. They didn't lose the order.
If she hadn't noticed the error, they could have lost the order. Do the same.
1. She noticed the spelling mistake. They didn't upset the customer.
2. She saw it in time. They didn't send the letter.
3. She checked the letter. They didn't post it.
Ruth: Hi, Debbie. Did you have a good day, today? Debbie: No, I didn't. I'm glad today's over!
Everything went
wrong!
Ruth: Really? Debbie: Yes, I made a lot of typing errors, then I forgot to send
a telex and I offended Bob because I ignored him in
the street. Ruth: Why was that? Debbie: It was that party last night. If I hadn't gone to bed
late, it wouldn't have been such an awful day. I'm
having an early night tonight! Exercise 6
I went to a party./1 went to bed late./1 forgot to set the alarm./ I got up late./1 missed the bus./1 was late
for work./ I've had a bad day./1 forgot to send a telex./1 made a typing error.
If I hadn't gone to a party, I wouldn't have gone to bed late.
Make eight sentences.
Jenny has asked people if they are influenced by advertising. Here are some of the answers.
Bill: No, I don't think so. I bought this watch last week. I had seen a commercial for it on TV, but it's a
good, reliable watch, I would have bought it even if I hadn't seen the commercial.
Rob: Yes, I'm sure that I am. Yesterday I bought these trainers. If I hadn't read about them, I would have
chosen a cheaper pair. I wouldn't have paid so much money if the ad hadn't influenced me.
Pat: I think everybody is influenced by advertising. Last week
211
I bought a new shampoo. If I hadn't seen a magazine ad for the product I wouldn't have tried it. Ann: No. I
buy whatever is the cheapest. But it's not always a good idea. Last week I bought a cheap red jumper and
the colour came out. If I had bought a better jumper, it would have kept its colour.
A. What did they say? Read the sentences and say if they are true or false. Correct the false statements.
eg Bill wouldn't have bought the watch if he hadn't seen a commercial on TV. False. He would have
bought the watch anyway.
1. Rob would have bought a cheaper pair of trainers if he hadn't read an ad for the expensive pair.
2. Pat would have tried the new shampoo, even if she hadn't read about it.
3. Ann's juniper would have lost its colour, even if she had paid more.
4. Rob would have bought the expensive trainers anyway.
5. Bill would have bought the watch even if he hadn't seen the commercial.
6. Rob would have paid more money if he hadn't seen the ad.
B. Think of the commercials you have seen and the things you have bought recently. Think of something
you bought because you had seen a commercial on TV or an advertisement т а magazine.
If you hadn't seen the products advertised, would you have bought them anyway?

Readers' Letters
Last week we invited readers to write and tell us about things that had happened to them, or things that
they had heard about We wanted stories where people just didn't know what to do next Here are the
stories that interested us most!
212

I was in a small country pub. I had just sat down with a pint of beer. Suddenly this huge man — he looked
like a boxer — came over, picked up my beer, drank it, banged the glass down on the table, stared at me,
and then walked away without saying anything. I suppose I should have said something, but I was scared
stiff! I didn't know what to do! What would you have done?
Mr Watney
I was on a touring holiday in France. It was a very hot day and I stopped at a small deserted beach. I
hadn't got my swimming-costume with me, but it was early in the morning and there were no people or
houses in sight. So I took off all my clothes and swam out to sea. I'm a very strong swimmer. I lay on my
back, closed my eyes, and relaxed in the water. When I looked back at the beach, a coach had arrived
and there were thirty or forty people sitting on the sand having a picnic! What would you have done? Mr
Horniman
'
I was told a lovely story about the Bishop of Fleetwood. He'd gone to New York for a church conference.
Anyway, when he stepped off the plane there were a lot of journalists and cameramen. The first question
one of the journalists asked was "Do you intend to visit any nightclubs in New York?" Well, the Bishop
was 85 years old. "Are there any nightclubs in New York?" he answered innocently. The next morning the
headline in one of the New York papers was "Bishop's first question on arrival in New York — Are there
any nightclubs?" How would you have felt?
Mr Lee
. Say what you would have done if these things had happened to you.
eg Claire saw a man steal something in a shop. She told a shop assistant what she had seen.
213
If I had seen someone steal something, I would have done the same thing.
or
If I had seen someone steal something, I would not have said anything.
1. Jim saw a car accident. He didn't help immediately, but ran into a shop to telephone an ambulance.
2. Mike heard a friend tell a lie. He didn't say anything. Later he asked the friend why he had lied.
3. Susan found a purse in the street. There was only a little money in it and no important papers or cards.
There was no one in the street. She kept the money.
4. A stranger asked Pat for some money in the street. The stranger said he had to go somewhere urgently
by taxi and had forgotten his wallet. Pat gave him the money and her telephone number.
5. A TV reporter was asking passers-by their opinion about TV programmes. David wanted to be on
television, so he combed his hair and went up to the reporter.
B. What would you say in these situations using the third conditional?
1. You have made some soup for supper. Your brother comes back with three friends. He didn't tell you he
was going to do this and you don't have enough soup for everyone. What do you say to your brother?
2. You were in the shower when the telephone rang so you didn't answer it. Your mother told you later that
it was her on the phone and wondered why you hadn't answered it. What do you say to her?
3. A friend has just reminded you that there is a party on Saturday night. You nearly forgot about it. What
do you say to your friend?
4. A friend is upset because when you visited his home town last week you didn't visit him. Unfortunately,
you didn t have time. What do you say to him?
5. Your younger sister took a photo of her best friend but unfor tunately she stood too close so the photo
wasn't very good What do you say to her?
214
6. A company offered you a job but the salary was very low. You didn't take the job. Your father wonders
why. What do you say to him?

James wrote a play for television about an immigrant family who came to England from Pakistan, and the
problems they had settling down in England. The play was surprisingly successful, and it was bought by
an American TV company.
James was invited to go to New York to help with the production. He lived in Dulwich, which is an hour's
journey away from Heathrow. The plane was due to leave at 8.30 a.m., so he had to be at the airport
about 7.30 in the morning. He ordered a mini-cab for 6.30, set his alarm for 5.45, and went to sleep.
Unfortunately he forgot to wind the clock, and it stopped shortly after midnight. Also the driver of the mini-
cab had to work very late that night and overslept.
James woke with that awful feeling that something was wrong. He looked at his alarm clock. It stood there
silently, with the hands pointing to ten past twelve. He turned on the radio and discovered that it was, in
fact, ten to nine. He swore quietly and switched on the electric kettle.
He was just pouring the boiling water into the teapot when the nine o'clock pips sounded on the radio.
The announcer began to read the news... "reports are coming in of a crash near Heathrow Airport. A
Boeing 707 bound for New York crashed shortly after taking off this morning. Flight number 2234..."
James turned pale. "My flight," he said out loud. "If I hadn't overslept, I'd have been on that plane."
A. Questions
1. What was James's play about? 2. Did everyone expect it to be terribly successful? 3. Who bought it? 4.
So what did they invite him to do? 5. Why didn't he wake up at 5.45? 6. Why did his alarm clock stop? 7.
How did he discover what the time was? 8- What did he do when he found it was ten to nine? 9. What
was the first item on the news? 10. Why did James turn pale?
*•• Look carefully at these third conditional situations arising from he story. Fill in the gaps with would
have or wouldn't have.
215
1. If James hadn't written the play, the Americans... bought it
2. If the Americans hadn't bought it, they... invited him to go to New York.
3. If they hadn't invited him to go to New York, he... booked a flight.
4. If he hadn't booked such an early flight, he...had to get up so early.
5. If he hadn't had to get up so early, he... needed to set the
alarm.
6. If he hadn't forgotten to set the alarm, it... gone off.
7. If the mini-cab driver hadn't overslept, he... taken James to the airport.
8. If the mini-cab had taken James to the airport, he... checked in on time.
9. If he'd checked in on time, he... been on that plane. 10. If he'd been on the plane, he ... been killed.
C. Look at this conversation:
"I wouldn't have made it like that." How...? "How would you have made it?"
Reply to the following remarks with a third conditional question.
1.1 wouldn't have typed it like that. How...?
2. You shouldn't have bought it there. Where...?
3. That was a silly thing to do. What...?
4.1 wouldn't have paid as much as that.
How much...? 5.1 wouldn't have told her about it.
Why...? 6. That was a stupid thing to say.
What...? 7.1 wouldn't have gone there.
Where...? 8.1 think you were silly to go by train.
How...? 9.1 wouldn't have gone there on a Sunday.
216
When...? 10. I'd have bought it at Harrods.
Why...?
Tom: I was in love with a girl called Gloria. Eventually I asked her to marry me, but she refused. I was
very upset and felt I needed a change so I decided to go abroad for a short holiday. I chose Luzern as I
had friends there.
One day I went for a trip on the lake in a little pleasure boat. I was sitting on the deck, when a dark, pretty
girl took the seat next to mine. I got into conversation with her, and she told me that she was Spanish,
and that she was visiting Switzerland as the companion to an elderly lady from Argentina. She told me
that she intended to come to England to learn English, so we exchanged addresses. Her name was
Isabel.
When I got home, I wrote to Isabel. She replied, and I found her an au pair job with an English family, not
far from where I live, in Surrey. After I'd asked her several times, she agreed to go out with me. Three
weeks ago we got married.
A. Note this pat tern:
I was in love with Gloria/I asked her to marry me
If I hadn't been in love with Gloria, I wouldn't have asked
her to marry me.
Use the ideas below to make more sentences:
1. Gloria refused to marry теЯ was upset
2.1 was upset/I decided to go abroad for a holiday
3.1 have friends in Luzern/I chose to go there
4.1 was in Luzern/I decided to go for a trip on the laloe
5.1 decided to go for a trip on the lake/I met Isabel
6. The old lady from Argentina wanted to go to Switzerland/ Isabel went there
7. We met on the boat/She gave me her address
8. She gave me her address/I wrote to her
9. She wrote to теЯ found her the au pair job
10.1 found her the au pair job/She came to England
217
11.1 asked her several times to come out with me/She carne
out with me 12. She came out with me/We got married
B. Situation'
A month ago, you went out without an umbrella, got wet caught a cold, fell ill and lost your job. A week
later you found a much better job. How many sentences can you make from this story beginning, "If I
hadn't..., ..."? Can you think of a similar story yourself?

Harry: We shall be awfully late home if that No 12 bus doesn't come soon...
Let's stand in this doorway out of the wind. Nora: All right, but we must be careful not to miss the
bus... How did you enjoy the film? Harry: I'd never have gone if I had known it was going to
be so silly.
Nora: Why, what was silly about it? Harry: Well, no sane man would have married that other girl so
soon after he had murdered his wife. It was sure to make people suspicious.
Nora: If he had been sane he wouldn't have murdered her! Besides, the girl wouldn't have waited for
him if he hadn't asked her immediately. Harry: All the better for him if she hadn't! Nora: Yes, but then
he wouldn't have paid for his crime Anyhow, I'd have enjoyed the film much more it Elsa Hollywood had
been in it instead of Linda Spangle.
Harry: And I'd have enjoyed it more if we hadn't gone at all Nora (sharply): And I'd have enjoyed it more
if you hadn't
been so rude to that woman in front. Harry: Well, I shouldn't have been rude to her if she had
stopped chattering when I asked her. Nora: I wish you'd behave better in public places. Harry: I
behave better! I like that! Why, if that woman had. (Sound of a bus starting up)
218
But look, isn't that a No 12 bus just going? Nora: Yes, it is, and we've missed it after all. We should
have seen that bus, Harry, if you hadn't been so busy quarrelling.
Harry (in injured tones): Really, Nora, I think it would have been much better if I had stayed at home
tonight and let you go to the cinema alone. д. Questions
1. Where have Nora and Harry just been? 2. What are they doing at the moment? 3. What are they
talking about? 4. What does Harry think of the film? Why? 5. Did Nora enjoy the film? 6. Why did they
miss the bus ?
B. Put the verbs in brackets into the correct forms.
1. We (see) that bus, Harry, if you (not be) so busy quarrelling. 2.1 wish you (behave) better in public
places. 3. And I (enjoy) it more if we (not go) at all. 3. Yes, but then he (not pay) for his crime. 4. We (be)
awfully late home if that No 12 bus (not come) soon. 5. I never (go) if I (know) it was going to be so silly.
6. I (not be) rude to her if she (stop) chattering when I asked her. 7. If he (be) sane he (not murder) her.
8.1 (enjoy) the film much more if Elsa Hollywood (be) in it instead of Linda Spangle. 9. No sane man
(marry) that other girl so soon after he (murder) his wife. 10. Besides, the girl (not wait) for him if he (not
ask) her immediately. 11. And I (enjoy) it more if you (not be) so rude to that woman in front. 12.1 think it
(be) much better if I (stay) at home tonight and (let) you go to the cinema alone.
C. Give the appropriate English phrases for the following.
1. Мне бы хотелось, чтобы ты вел себя приличнее в общественных местах. 2. В конце концов мы
его пропустили. 3. Это должно было наверняка вызвать у людей подозрение. 4. Давай постоим в
дверях, чтобы не быть на ветру. 5. Мне бы понравилось больше, если бы мы не пошли в кино
вообще. 6. Мы поздно попадем домой, если 12-ый автобус ско-Р° не придет. 7. Нам нужно быть
внимательными, чтобы не Пропустить автобус. 8. Я бы никогда не пошел, если бы знал, Что фильм
окажется таким глупым. 9. Что в нем глупого? "• Я бы не нагрубил ей, если бы она перестала
болтать,
219
когда я попросил ее об этом, 11. Мы бы увидели тот автобус, если бы ты не был так поглощен
ссорой. 12. Я думаю, что было бы гораздо лучше, если бы я остался сегодня дома и позволил тебе
пойти в кино одной. 13. А мне бы фильм понравился больше, если бы ты не нагрубил той
женщине, которая сидела впереди нас.
D. Give a brief summary of the conversation.
E. Roleplay the conversation.
Wish and If only
1. Wish and if only + past tense
We can use wish and if only with a past tense to express regret about the present (to say that we would
like something to be different).
I wish I had a car. (I do not have a car.)
I wish he wasn't so horrible to me. (He is horrible to me.)
She wishes she could play the guitar. (She cannot play the
guitar.)
If only we knew Maria's address. (We do not know Maria's
address.)
If only is more emphatic than wish.
We often use were instead of was after wish and if only, especially m a more formal style.
I wish he weren't so horrible to me. If only I were better-looking.
2. Wish and if only + would
I wish you would stop making that noise.
We use would after wish and if only when we want something to stop happening, or we want something
different to happen
I wish you wouldn't slam the door when you come in It makes me angry.
I wish he wouldn't leave his clothes lying all over the bathroom floor.
If only you would stop complaining! 3. Wish and if only + past perfect
To express regret that something happened or did not happen in the past, we can use wish and if only
with the past perfect (had + past participle).
Oh, I'm tired. I wish I'd gone to bed earlier last night. (I did
not go to bed very early last night.)
I wish I hadn't stayed out so late. (I stayed out late.)
If only you had explained the situation to me. (You did not
explain the situation to me.)
As if
a. We use as if before a subject+verb to say how someone or something seems.
You look as if you're cold.
It looks as if it's going to stop raining.
We sometimes use as if+ a past tense to talk about the present. My brother sometimes behaves as if he
was my father.
The sentence does not refer to the past here: we use the past (he was my father) because the idea is
"unreal" (in fact he is not my father).
We often use were instead of was after as if to express "unreal" ideas, especially in a more formal style.
My brother sometimes behaves as if he were my father. b. We can use as though instead of as if. You
look as though you're tired.
My brother sometimes behaves as though he were my father.
c
- In an informal style, like is sometimes used instead of as if/ 'hough.
It looks like it's going to stop raining.
220
221
Practice
I. Rewrite the following using a wish construction (phrases in brackets should be omitted).
1. I'm sorry I haven't got a washing machine. 2. I'm sorry \ don't live near my work. 3. I'm sorry our garden
doesn't get any sun. 4. I'm sorry I called him a liar. 5. I'm sorry I don't know Finnish. 6. I'm sorry I didn't
book a seat. 7. I'm sorry I haven't got a car. 8. I'm sorry I can't drive. 9. I'd like Tom to drive more slowly,
(but I haven't any great hopes of this). 10. I'd like you to keep quiet. (You're making so much noise that I
can't think.) 11. I'm sorry we accepted the invitation. 12. I'm sorry that theatre tickets cost so much. 13. It's
a pity that shops here shut on Saturday afternoon. 14. It's a pity he didn't work harder during the term. 15.
I'm sorry you didn't see it. 16. It's a pity you are going tonight 17. It's a pity I haven't got a car. 18.1 would
like it to stop raining (but I'm not very hopeful). 19. I'd like you to wait for me (even though you are ready
to start now). 20. I'm sorry I didn't bring a map. 21. I'm sorry I ever came to this country. 22. I'm sorry I left
my last job. 23. I'm sorry I didn't stay in my last job. 24. I'd like him to cut his hair (but I don't suppose he
will). 25. I'd like him to stop smoking in bed (but I haven't any great hopes). 26. I'm sorry he goes to bed
so late. 27. Motorist in fog: It's a pity we don't know where we are. 28. It's a pity we haven't a torch. 29.
I'm sorry I didn't know you were coming. 30. I'm sorry you told Jack. 31. I'm sorry I didn't ask 'led to bring
his records. 32. I'm sorry I can't swim 33. I'm sorry you aren't coming with us. 34. I'm sorry you aren't
going to a job where you could use your English. 35. It's a pity you didn't ask him how to get there. 36.1
would like every country to stop killing whales (but have no real hope of this). 37. I'm sorry I didn't go
shopping. 38. I'm sorry I don't know how to dance. 39. It's a pity I don't have enough money to buy this
book. 40. I'm sorry I can't go with you. 41. It's a pity Jack didn't come to the party.
II. Supply an appropriate auxiliary in the following.
\. I'm not at home, but I wish I w£is. 2.1 don't know her, but I wish I did. 3.1 can't sing well, but I wish I
could. 4.1 didn't go, but I wish I had.
222
5. He won't talk about it, but I wish he would.
6.1 didn't read that book, but I wish_________.
7.1 want to go, but I can't. I wish I________.
8.1 don't have a bicycle, but I wish I_________.
9. He didn't buy a ticket to the game, but he wishes he
10. She can't speak English, but she wishes she________.
11. It probably won't happen, but I wish it________.
12. He isn't old enough to drive a car, but he wishes he______.
13. They didn't go to the movie, but they wish they______.
14.1 don't have a driver's license, but I wish I________.
15. I'm not living in an apartment, but I wish I_______.
16. Bobby didn't tell me the truth, but I wish he______.
17. Dick doesn't live close to school, but he wishes he______.
18.1 didn't study English before I came here, but I wish I
19.1 didn't finish my homework last night, but I wish I
20.1 can't move into a new apartment, but I wish I________.
21. Jane won't come, but I wish she_________.
22. Nick won't join us, but I wish he_________.
II. Complete the following conversations. Use auxiliary verbs in he completions.
1. A: Did you go to the party last night?
B: Yes, I did, but I wish Lhadnlt. It was boring.
2. A: Did you eat breakfast this morning?
В: No,________, but I wish_________. I'm hungry. My
stomach is growling.
3. A: Do you exercise regularly?
B: No,_______, but I wish____________. I always feel
better when I exercise regularly. •. A: Did you study for the test?
B: No,______, but I wish____________. I got an "F"
on it. 5. A: Are you a good artist?
B: No,__________, but I wish________. I'd like to be
able to draw. 6- A: Did you go to the movie last night?
I 223
В: Yes,________, but I wish__________. It was a waste
of time and money.
7. A: Do you have to eat at the student cafeteria?
B: Yes,________, but I wish__________. The food is
bad.
8. A: Can you speak Chinese?
B: No,____, but I wish_______.
9. A: Is it hard to learn a second language? B: Yes,________, but I wish_________.
IV. Answer no. Use wish.
A: Can you speak Arabic?
B: No, I can't, but I wish I could.
1. Did you study last night? 2. Did you go to bed early last night? 3. Do you have a car? 4. Are you (a
movie star)? 5. Can you speak (language)? 6. Did you eat breakfast? 7. Is (...) here today? 8. Do you
know how to dance? 9. Did (...) call you last night? 10. Can you play (a musical instrument)? 11. Are you
full of energy today? 12. Do you live in an apartment? 13. Is the weather nice today? 14. Did (...) help you
with your homework? 15. Is your family here? 16. Do you have to go to class tomorrow? 17. Can you buy
(a Rolls Royce)? 18. Do you know how to type?
V. Make wishes based on the given situations. Try to think of as many possible wishes as you can for
each situation.
Example: You're hungry. What do you wish? Response: I wish I'd eaten breakfast.
I wish I had a candy bar.
I wish I could go to (name of a place) and get a
hamburger.
I wish I weren't in class right now.
I wish I didn't have to go to another class after this
one.
I wish the classroom were a restaurant and I had a
steak in front of me instead of my grammar book
1. You're tired. 2. The weather is... today. 3. You live ir (kind of residence). 4. You don't have many talents.
5. This isa
224
nice classroom but ... 6. You're very busy. You have a lot of thing8 to do today. 7. Things about yourself
and your life that you would like to change. 8. There are many problems in today's world.
VI. Complete the sentences with words in parentheses.
\. True situation: I don't have enough time.
a) I wish I (have) enough time.
b) If I (have) enough time, I (go) to the park.
2. True situation: I don't have enough money.
a) I wish I (have) enough money.
b) If I (have) enough money, I (fly) home this weekend.
3. True situation: It's cold today.
a) I wish it (be, not) cold today.
b) If it (be, not) cold today, I (go) swimming.
4. True situation: I don't know how to swim.
a) I wish I (know) how to swim.
b) If I (know) how to swim, I (go) to the beach with you.
5. True situation: I don't understand that sentence.
a) I wish I (understand) that sentence.
b) If I (understand) that sentence, I (explain) it to you.
6. True situation: I have to go to class today.
a) I wish I (have to go, not) to class today.
b) If I (have to go, not) to class today, I (go) shopping, or I (visit) my friends.
7. True situation: It isn't Saturday.
a) I wish it (be) Saturday.
b) If it (be) Saturday, I (go) to the beach.
8. True situation: I'm not rich.
a) I wish I (be) rich.
b) If I (be) rich, I (live) on a farm and (raise) horses.
VII. Mention something that is not perfect in your life and then Make a wish.
Example: Not everything in your life is perfect. Tell me something that makes you unhappy about your
life. Response: My classes begin at 8 o'clock in the morning. Teacher: What do you wish? Response:
I wish my classes didn't begin at eight.
8
3ак ц IQ 225
I wish my classes began at ten.
I wish I didn't have to get up so early. (To the teacher: You may wish to expand the exercise to include an
introduction to conditional sentences with if).
Teacher: What would you do if your classes didn' t begm
at eight? Response: If my classes didn't begin at eight, I would sleep
until the middle of the morning.
VIII. Complete the sentences with the words in parentheses.
1. True situation: I didn't have enough time yesterday.
a) I wish I (have) enough time yesterday.
b) If I (have) enough time yesterday, I (go) to the park
2. True situation: I didn't have enough money last night.
a) I wish I (have) enough money last night.
b) If I (have) enough money last night, I (go) to a show.
3. True situation: Mary didn't come to my party last week.
a) I wish she (come) to my party.
b) If she (come) to my party, she (meet) my fiance.
4. True situation: It was cold yesterday.
a) I wish it (be, not) cold yesterday.
b) If it (be, not) cold yesterday, I (go) swimming.
5. True situation: Jack didn't study for the test.
a) Jack wishes he (study) for the test.
b) If he (study) for the test, he (pass) it.
IX. Make sentences with wish and if. Follow the patterns in the examples.
Example: I don't have enough time.
Response: I wish I had enough time. If I had enough time, I
(would/could go shopping this afternoon, etc.) Example: I didn't have enough time. Response: I wish I
had had enough time. If I'd had enough
time I (would have/could have gone shopping
yesterday afternoon, etc.).
1.1 don't have enough money. 2.1 didn't have enough money. 3.1 don't have enough time. 4.1 didn't have
enough time. 5. The weather isn't nice. 6. The weather wasn't nice. 7. I'm in class
right now. 8.1 came to class yesterday. 9. My friend isn't at home. 10. My friend wasn't at home. 11.1 don't
know how to play the guitar. 12.1 didn't know that my uncle was ill.
%. Using the information т parentheses, complete the sentences With as if/as though
1. (I wasn't run over by a ten-ton truck.)
I feel terrible. I feel as if (as though) Т had been run over hy a ten-ton truck.
2. (English is not her native tongue.) She speaks English____.
3. (His animals aren't people.)
I know a farmer who talks to his animals____.
4. (You didn't see a ghost.) What's the matter? You look____.
5. (His father is not a general in the army.) Sometimes his father gives orders____.
6. (I didn't climb Mt. Everest.)
When I reached the fourth floor, I was winded. I felt ____ instead of just three flights of stairs.
7. (He does have a brain in his head.) Sometimes he acts____.
8. (We haven't known each other all of our lives.)
We became good friends immediately. After talking to each other for only a short time, we felt____.
9. (A giant bulldozer didn't drive down Main Street.) After the tornado, the town looked____.
10. (I don't have wings and I can't fly.) I was so happy that I felt____.
11. (Tim isn't the boss.) Tim acts____.
12. (The dog isn't a child.) They treat their dog____.
13. (You have many friends.)
You look so depressed. You look____a friend in the world.
14. (The earth didn't stop.)
It was so quiet that it seemed____.
15. (Something happened.)
Craig bumped the other car and then continued
226
227
XI. Complete the sentences with your own words. Examples:
When I walked into the room, I felt as though... When I walked into the room, I felt as though everyone
were staring at me.
I got angry at Mary. She talked to me as if... I were a small child who needed discipline.
1. Are you tired? You look as if... 2. George only recently started piano lessons, but he plays as if... 3.
He's not very knowledgeable on the subject, but he speaks as though... 4. Ri-chard is very confident. He
walks around as though... 5. This meat is terrible. It tastes as if... 6. You're looking at me as if... 7. Bob is
extremely pale. He looks as if... 8. After he got knocked over, he got up as if... 9. The child innocently
whistled and looked around as though... 10. She's 50 years old, but she looks as if... 11. He's only a
receptionist, but he acts... 12. They're quite rich, but they behave as though... 13. He's only got a cold, but
he acts as if.. 14. It's my car, but he treats it as if...
XII. Put the verbs in brackets into the correct forms, (self check)
1. Are you sure you won't be able to come with us? I wish you (change) your mind. 2. If only we (have) a
phone! I'm tired of queuing outside the public phone box. 3. He walks as if he (have) a wooden leg. 4. He
talks as if he (do) all the work himself, but in fact Tom and I did most of it. 5.1 wish I (know) what is wrong
with my car. 6.1 wish I (ask) the fishmonger to clean these fish. 7. Bob's mother doesn't like his beard.
She wishes he (shave) it off. 8. He always talks as if he (address) a public meeting. 9 He treats us as if
we (be) idiots. 10. He needs some money. He wishes his parents (send) him some. 11. The newspaper
strike has been going on for two weeks. I wish it (end). 12. If you (tie) the boat up it wouldn't have drifted
away. 13.1 wish you (not give) him my phone number. (I'm sorry you gave it to him.) 14. If only he (know)
then that the disease was curable! 15. You talk as though it (be) a small thing to leave your country for
ever. 16. If only I (be) insured! (But I wasn't insured.) 17.1 wish transistor radios never (be) invented. 18. If
only I (keep) my mouth shut! (I sai" something which made matters much worse.) 19. I said "Sunday". — I
wish you (not say) Sunday. We'll never be ready by then. 20. But I told you what to do. — I know you did.
If only I (take) your advice! 21. That man has brought us nothing but trouble. I wish I never (set) eyes on
him. 22.1 wish I (not try) to repair it. I only made it worse. 23. He looks as though he never (get) a good
meal, but in fact his wife feeds him very well. 24. My roommate is very messy. I wish she (pick) up after
herself more often. 25. We need some help. I wish Alfred (be) here now. If he (be), we could finish this
work very quickly. 26. We had a good time in Houston over vacation. I wish you (come) with us. If you
(come) with us, you (have) a good time. 27.1 wish it (be, not) so cold today. If it (be, not) so cold, I (go)
swimming. 28.1 missed part of the lecture because I was daydreaming, and now my notes are
incomplete. I wish I (pay) more attention to the lecturer . 29. A: Do you have enough money to buy that
antique lamp? B:
No, but I certainly wish I____. 30. A: Did you study for the
test? B: No, but now I wish I____because I flunked it. 31. A: I
wish we (have, not) to go to class today. B: So do I. I wish it (be) a holiday. 32. A: How long have you
been sick? B: For over a week. A: I wish you (go) to see a doctor today. You should find out what's wrong
with you. B: Maybe I'll go tomorrow. 33. This evening the surface of the lake is completely still. It looks as
if it (make) of glass. 34 Sue says she can't come on the picnic with us. I wish she (change) her mind and
(decide) to come with us.
XIII. Translate from Russian into English, (self check)
Wish, if only
1. Жаль, что она так легкомысленна. 2. Жаль, что вы не пришли пораньше. Вы бы встретились с
моей сестрой. 3. Я теперь жалею, что не последовал его совету. 4. Мне бы хотелось посмотреть
этот фильм еще раз. 5. Жаль, что ее нет с нами. 6. Как бы я хотел, чтобы у меня был телефон. 7.
Как бы я хотел, чтобы он не тратил столько времени на спорт. 8. Как хорошо было бы, если бы
сейчас была весна. 9. Как жаль, что я не рассказал ему об этом вчера. 10. Как жаль, что вы не
зашли к нам вчера. 11. Она жалеет, что не знала об этом раньше- 12. Я жалел, что спросил его об
этом. 13. Мне бы хоте-
229
лось, чтобы вы еще раз продумали мое предложение, прежде чем отвергнуть его окончательно. 14.
Я бы хотел, чтобы вы все-таки прочли эту книгу. 15. Если бы только мои родители жили в Минске!
16. Жаль, что я не могу прочесть эту книгу в оригинале. 17. Я очень сожалею, что не смогу пойти
завтра на вашу лекцию. 18. Досадно, что у нее вспыльчивый характер. 19. Хорошо бы нам
обосноваться здесь навсегда. 20. Ей хотелось бы говорить по-английски. 21. Жаль, что у нее нет
чувства долга. 22. Жаль, что я не смогу присоединиться к вам. 23. Он сожалел, что вышел из себя
и накричал на них. 24. Жаль, что я не занял тогда денег и не купил словарь, теперь его нет в
продаже. 25. Если бы ты его видела в тот момент! 26. Как жаль, что идет дождь. Я бы хотел, чтобы
была хорошая погода, тогда мы могли бы поехать за город. 27 Если бы сейчас было лето! 28. Я
слышал, что вы очень хорошо играете на рояле. Я бы хотел, чтобы вы поиграли мне. 29. Погода
была такая плохая, что я пожалел, что вышел из дому. 30. Хотелось бы мне, чтобы вы не были
таким рассеянным и не задавали один и тот же вопрос несколько раз. 31. Хотелось бы мне, чтобы
вы не перебивали меня каждую минуту. 32. Я бы хотел, чтобы вы побыли со мной. 33. Как жаль,
что я не принял участия в этой экскурсии; говорят, она была очень интересной. 34. Я бы хотел,
чтобы вы держали свои вещи в порядке. 35. Хотелось бы воспользоваться твоим советом, но это
невозможно. 36. Они пожалели, что не полетели в Москву самолетом, они бы сэкономили много
времени.
As if/ as though
37. У него всегда такой вид, как будто он спешит куда-то.
38. Она вела себя так, как будто ей все было безразлично. 39. У нее такой вид, как будто она
болела. 40. Ты обращаешься со мной как с ребенком. 41. Казалось, что письмо было написано
ребенком. 42. У нее было чувство, как будто она знала его всю жизнь. 43. Казалось, что они были
братом и сестрой, а не мужем и женой, так они были похожи. 44. Он представил ее своему брату,
как будто они никогда раньше не встречались. 45. Он смотрел на нас, как будто был удивлен тем,
что увидел нас там. 46. Дождь шел несколько дней и казалось,
230
что ему не будет конца. 47. Она держала себя так, словно она была хозяйкой дома. 48. Вы так
загорели, как будто провели все лето на юге. 49. Он выглядит усталым, как будто давно не
отдыхал, 50. Он так говорил по-немецки, словно всю жизнь прожил в Германии. 51. Казалось, будто
ничего и не произошло. 52. Он говорил по-французски, как настоящий француз. 53. Девушка
смотрела на меня с таким удивлением, как будто видела меня впервые. 54. У него такой вид, как
будто он никогда об этом не слышал.
Fluency
Listen, read and practise.

1. Secretary: Your call from New York's on line one, sir.

Paris has just come through on line two and
I've got a call from Tokyo on line four. Mr Menning: Ask them to ring back tomorrow, Judy.
Tell them... tell them I'm not here. It's far
too late. I wish I wasn't here. I've had
enough today.
Secretary: But sir, they're urgent, all of them. Mr Menning: Do you know something, Judy? I wish I
was at home now, in front of the television
with a cup of cocoa!
2. Paula: Look at that! It's pouring with rain again, and
I've got to walk to the station. Diane: Typical British weather! Paula: It's all right for old Menning. His
Rolls-Royce is
downstairs waiting to take him home. Diane: Mmm. I wish I had a chauffeur-driven Rolls. Paula: I
wish I had a car, any car. I'm going to get soaked
tonight!
3. Tony: Hello, James, still here?
James: Yes, I'm waiting to see Mr Menning. Tony: You don't usually work in the evenings.
231
James: I wish I wasn't working this evening. There's a
good concert on.
Tony: Oh well. Perhaps he'll call you soon. James: I hope he does!
4. Alan: Haven't you finished yet?
Lorraine: No, I wish I had. I can't go until I've completed
this report.
Alan: Can't you do it tomorrow? Lorraine: I wish I could, but Mr Menning wants it tonight
5. Shirley: Evening, Joan.
Joan: Evening, Shirley. I don't feel like working tonight
Shirley: Neither do 1.1 hate this kind of work.
Joan: Why do you do it then?
Shirley: I wish I didn't have to! But we need the money
My husband's out of work again. Joan: I know what you mean. I wish I'd learnt to type,
or something like that. Shirley: We can all wish! I left school at fourteen. I wish I
hadn't but there was no choice in those days.
Youngsters have so many opportunities nowadays
I wish we'd had the chances. I'd never have ended
up as a cleaner. Joan: Come on Shirley, let's have a cup of tea.
A. Exercise I
1. I wish I was on holiday. I wish I was in Hawaii.
Where do you wish you were now?
Do you wish you were in bed?/ at home?/ on the beach'
2. I'm a student.
I wish I was an actor.
What do you wish you were?
Exercise 2
I haven't got a car. I wish I had a car. Make Jive sentences.
232
Exercise 3
— It's raining.
I wish it wasn't raining.
— He's working.
He wishes he wasn't working. Continue,
1. The phones are ringing.
2. It's snowing.
3. She's sitting in an office.
4. He's waiting.
Exercise 4
He hasn't finished yet. He wishes he had finished. I didn't learn to type. I wish I had learnt to type!
Continue.
1. They haven't done their homework.
2. She left school at fourteen. 3.1 haven't seen that film.
4. He lost his wallet.
1. My brother thought I was crazy when I bought this car. He told me that if I bought this car, I'd probably
have lots of problems with it.
I didn't follow his advice... and I'm really sorry I didn't. Since I bought this car two months ago, I've had to
take it to the garage for repairs seven times.
I wish I had listened to my brother. If I had listened to him, I never would have bought such a "lemon"!
2. My ski instructor insisted that I was ready to try skiing down the mountain. I told him that I was really
scared and that I thought I needed much more practice. He told me I was worrying too much, and that
skiing down the mountain wasn't very dangerous.
I decided to take his advice. I began to ski down the mountain, but after a few seconds, I lost my balance
and crashed into a tree.
233
I wish I hadn't listened to my ski instructor. If I hadn't listened to him, I wouldn't be lying here in the
hospital with my leg in a cast.
A. Do you remember a time when you had to make an important decision and people gave you lots of
advice7
Talk with other students about the advice people gave you and the decision you made:
What did people tell you?
Why did they tell you that?
Did you follow their advice?
What happened? Did you make the right decision? Why
or why not?
B. Have you ever done something and then regretted it? Tell about something you wish you had done
differently, and why.
The Anderson family lives in the suburbs, but they wish they li\ ed in the city. If they lived in the city, Mr
Anderson wouldn't have to spend all his spare time mowing the lawn and working around the house. Mrs
Anderson wouldn't have to spend two hours commuting to work every day. Their son Michael would be
able to take the bus to the baseball stadium. Their daughter, Jennifer, would be living close to all of her
favourite book stores. And their other son, Steven, could visit the zoo more often. It would be very difficult
for the Anderson family to move to the city now, but perhaps some day they'll be able to. They certainly
hope so.
A. Fill in the missing words.
The Burton family lives in the city, but they wish they____in
the suburbs. If they____in the suburbs, Mrs Burton____be
able to plant a garden and grow vegetables. Mr Burton____have
to listen to the noisy city traffic all the time. Their son, Ken,
_____a backyard to play in. Their daughters, Betsy and Kathy,
____to share a room. And their cat, Tiger,_____to go outside
and roam around and play with the other cats. It_____very
difficult for the Burton family to move to the suburbs now, but perhaps some day_____. They certainly
hope so.
B. Do you wish you lived someplace else? Where? Why?
234
UNIT 4
TOPIC: FAMILY MATTERS. LOVE AND MARRIAGE
Listen, read and practise.
(after Somerset Maugham)
George Meadows, the master of a prosperous farm, was now a man of fifty, and his wife was a year or
two younger. Their three daughters were lovely and their two sons were handsome and strong. They were
merry, industrious and kindly. They were happy and deserved their happiness. But the real master of the
house was not George, it was his mother. She was about 70, tall, with grey hair and though her face was
wrinkled, her eyes were dark, bright and shrewd.
I knew the story of George's mother and his uncle, whose name was also George. About fifty years ago
uncle George and his younger brother Tom had courted Mrs Meadows when she was Emily Green.
George was a good-looking fellow, but not so steady as his brother, that's why Emily chose Tom. George
had gone away to sea. For twenty years now and then he sent them presents. Then there was no news of
him. When Tom died Mrs Meadows wrote George about it but they never got an answer and decided that
he must be dead...
Some days ago to their greatest surprise they got a letter, which informed them that George Meadows,
who was ill and felt that he had not much longer to live wanted to see the house in which he had been
born. I was invited to come and see him. It goes without saying that I accepted the invitation. I found the
whole family in the kitchen. I was amused to see that Mrs Meadows wore her best silk dress. I was
introduced to the old captain. He was very thin and his skin hung on his bones like an old suit that was
too large for him. He had lost nearly all his teeth. It was strange to see those two old people and to think
that half a century ago he had loved her and she had loved another.
235
"Have you ever been married, Captain Meadows?" I asked.__
"Not me," he said and added, "I said I would never marry anyone but you, Emily, and I never have." There
was some satisfaction in his voice.
"Well, you might have regretted if you had," Mrs Meadows said smiling. I talked a little with the old man
about China.
"There's not a port in China that I don't know better than you know your coat pocket. Where a ship can go
I've been. I could keep you sitting here all day for six months and not tell you half the things I've seen in
my day."
"Well, there's one thing you've not done, George," said Mrs Meadows, the smile still in her blue eyes,
"and that's to make a fortune."
"I'm not the man to save money. But one thing I can say for myself: if I had a chance to go through my life
again I'd take it. And not many men can say that."
"No, indeed," I said.
I looked at him with admiration and respect. He was a toothless, penniless old man, but he had made a
success of his life, for he had enjoyed it.
When I came to see him the next day I learned that Captain Meadows had died in his sleep. Mrs
Meadows told me that he had talked about all the things that had happened to him in his long life. He was
happy to be back and boasted he would live another twenty years. But death had put the full stop in the
right place.
"Well I'm glad he came back," said Mrs Meadows with a faint smile, "after I married Tom and George went
to sea I was never sure that I had married the right man."
A. Questions
1. How old were George Meadows and his wife? 2. How many children did they have? 3. What were they
like? 4. Was the farm prosperous? 5. Who was the real master of the farm? 6. What did Mrs Meadows
look like? 7. What was the story of George's mother and his uncle? 8. Why did Emily choose Tom? 9.
What did George do? 10. When and why did he come back? 11. Did the writer see George Meadows? 12.
What was he like? 13. Had he ever been married? 14. Was the Captain satisfied with his life? 15. Why
was Mrs Meadows glad that George had come back?
236
g. Retell the text.
C. Special Difficulties
I. Join each pair of sentences using who for people and that for things.
eg That's the woman. She works in the post office. That's the woman who works in the post office.
1. He is the man. He painted my house. 2. What is the name of the boy? He telephoned you. 3. What's
happened to the money? It was on my desk. 4. They're the people. They offered Sue a job. 5. The car
has now been found. It was stolen. 6. She's the person. She gives me a lift to work every day. 7. The lock
has now been repaired. It was broken. 8. Most of the people are very nice. They work in Peter's office.
П. Complete the sentences using who for people and that for things; if it is possible to leave out who or
that, write (who) or (that) — in brackets.
Note: We often leave out who, that or which when they are the objects in defining relative clauses.
I can't find the envelopes (that) I bought this morning. Have you seen the film that is on TV tonight?
1. John Murray is the man ... owns the Grand hotel. 2. The man ... we spoke to wasn't very nice. 3. This is
the sweater ... I bought on Saturday. 4. What is the name of the company ... you work for? 5. A bi-lingual
person is someone ... can speak two languages equally well. 6. Who's that boy ... Sally is dancing with?
7. Are these all the letters ... came in this morning's post? 8. Have you found the money ... you lost? 9.
The people ... used to live in that house have moved. 10.1 don't like films ... are very violent.
III. Join each pair of sentences using whose.
eg I know someone. His mother is an opera singer. I know someone whose mother is an opera singer.
1. She's the woman. Her husband teaches at Annie's school.
237
2. He's the man. His flat was broken into. 3. They're the couple. Their children were injured in the
accident. 4. That's the girl. Her friend lent me the money. 5. I'm the person. My credit cards were stolen.
6. Are you the one? Your mother phoned the police.
IV. Complete the sentences using where, when or why. eg This is the church where Ken and Kate were
married.
1. Did they tell you the reason... they wanted you to do that? 2.What's the name of the restaurant... you
had lunch? 3. I can remember a time... there was no television. 4. Is that the hospital... you had your
operation? 5. I don't understand the reason... he was late. 6. Do you remember the time... your car broke
down on the motorway?
V. Complete the sentences using who, that or which, but only where-necessary — leave a blank if
possible.
1. Is that the song... we heard yesterday? 2. Maria,... has only been in Britain for a few weeks, speaks
excellent English. 3. Who was the girl ... you were speaking to just now? 4. My sister, ... wasn't feeling
very hungry, didn't want to go to the restaurant. 5. I've lost all the money... you gave me. 6. This is the
letter ... came in today's post. 7. Mr and Mrs Woods,... live next door to us, have gone on holiday. 8.
Brighton,... is a tourist centre on the south coast of England, is about 85 kilometres from London.
VI. Join each pair of sentences without using who, whom or which.
eg The restaurant was in West Street. We went to it. The restaurant we went to was in West Street.
1. The woman is a good friend of mine. I borrowed the money from her. 2. The man is Sue's husband. I
introduced you to him. 3. The hotel overlooked the sea. We stayed at it. 4. The shop is closed. I bought
the shoes from it. 5. The people like him very much. He works with them.
VII. Join each pair of sentences using (i) who or which, and (u) a preposition + whom or which, as in
the example.
238
Mr Jones is a teacher at Annie's school. I was talking to him a moment ago.
(i) Mr Jones, who I was talking to a moment ago, is a teacher at Annie's school.
(ii) Mr Jones, to whom I was talking a moment ago, is a teacher at Annie's school.
1. Peter's party is next Saturday evening. We are all invited to it. 2. Mr Mason apologized for the mistake.
We complained to him. 3. The film "Family Life" is showing next week. I've heard good reports about it.
VIII. Complete the following sentences using must expressing deduction.
eg "Is he British?" "Yes, he..." "Yes, he must be British."
1 ."Are they married?" "Yes, they..." 2. "Were they in a hurry?" "Yes, they..." 3. "Does Ann know a lot of
people?" "Yes, she..." 4. "Did Tom know about the plan?" "Yes, he..." 5. "Are they waiting for somebody?"
"Yes, they..." 6."Have they been waiting long?" "Yes, they..." 7. "Have they seen Mary?" "Yes, they..." 8."Is
Mary still working?" "Yes, she..." 9."Has Brian come?" "Yes, he..."
IX. Express unreal present or future condition. Put the verbs into the correct forms.
eg Sarah would like to write to her friend, Alan, but she has lost Alan's address. She says, "If I knew his
address, I would write to him."
1. Simon would like to buy some new clothes, but he hasn't got much money. He says, "If I (have) more
money, I (buy) some new clothes." 2. You would like to buy some shoes, but you think they are too
expensive. You say, "I (buy) them if they (not be) so expensive." 3. Peter is thinking of buying a new
record. Sally thinks the record isn't very good. She says, "I (not buy) it if I (be) you." 4. Andrew's elder
brother, Simon, still lives at home. Andrew says, "If I (be) Simon's age, I (not live) at home." 5. Mike lives
in London, but he doesn't like living there. You ask him, "Where (you/live) if you (can) live anywhere?"
239

X Read the situation. Then make a sentence with if. Express unreal past condition.
eg I was tired. I didn't go to the party.
If I hadn't been tired, I would have gone to the party.
1 . She was ill. She didn't go to work. 2. It rained all morning We didn't go out. 3. She didn't have enough
money. She couldn't buy the shoes. 4. 1 wasn't hungry. I didn't have breakfast. 5. The accident happened
because the driver in front stopped so suddenly. 6. 1 didn't wake George up because I didn't know he
wanted to get up early. 7. 1 was able to buy the car because Jim lent me the money. 8. She wasn't injured
in the crash because she was wearing a seat-belt. 9. You're hungry now because you didn't have
breakfast. 10. She didn't come because nobody had told her.
XL Complete the sentences with said, told or talked.
1. Jack ... me that he was enjoying his new job. 2. Tom ... that it was a nice restaurant but I didn't like it
much. 3. The doctor ... that I would have to rest for at least a week. 4. Mrs Taylor ... us she wouldn't be
able to come to the next meeting. 5. Ann ... Tom that she was going away. 6. George couldn't help me. He
... to ask Jack. 7. At the meeting the chairman ... about the problems facing the company. 8. Jill ... us all
about her holiday in Australia. 9. When we last met he ... a lot about his son.
XII. Make up sentences using
a) the conjunction "for"
eg We rarely stay at hotels for we can't afford it.
b) the word combination "that's why"
eg We were tired, that's why we didn't go out.
c) the word combination " It goes without saying".
eg She asked me to help her move to her new house. It goes without saying that I agreed (to).

In the Far, Middle and Near East and in parts of Africa, South America and Europe, the first thing most
Western people notice is the respect everyone has for the old. Older men and women
240
live with their married children and are important members of the family. They look after the children, help
with the cooking, give advice and often rule family life. Living in an extended family has advantages for
everyone. A small child, for example, knows many people from the very beginning, not just his mother and
father. When his mother goes out, it doesn't matter. He'll stay with someone who loves him — an aunt or
sister or grandmother. For a young mother and father there are also advantages. They can go out to work
and grandmother will look after the house and the children.
This is especially important in farming communities, where both men and women work in the fields.
And the older woman, for example, has something important to do. She sees her children and
grandchildren grow up. She is needed and loved. The nuclear family is the product of the West. The
typical family consists of mother, father and two children. If the mother goes out to work, she must leave
them with a stranger — someone who looks after them as a job, for money. If there is a divorce or
separation the child's life will change completely.
As for the old, too many older people live alone — in special flats or homes. They hardly ever see their
children and grandchildren. They have nothing important to do. They are often poor and lonely. In the
winter many old people die of cold or from falls in the house — because there is no one to look after
them. Nobody cares.
In the USA many old people go to Florida when they retire and live in large parks. Often these parks are
for old people only. Neither children nor pets can live there.
A. Ask and answer questions on the text.
B. Speak on nuclear and extended families.
In the nineteenth century in the United States, it was not unusual for extended families of uncles, aunts,
cousins, and grandparents to live together in the same home. Then, in this century, nuclear families
became popular. Only the parents and their children lived together. Recently, in the United States, many
parents and children have begun living with grandparents again. Often, parents and
241
children don't want to send their parents and grandparents to a special nursing home for older people.
They think it is better to take care of the elderly person at home.
Of course, there can be problems when people of three generations live in the same house.
Grandparents are often more permissive than parents, and they let children do what they want. But most
American parents feel that it is better to be strict; they feel that children should follow rules. Parents think
that grandparents who don't make children mind (=obey) will spoil them. Then the children won't obey
anyone as they are growing up.
But having grandparents in the home can also be fun. For example, everyone enjoys the stories the older
people tell and the interesting things that they can teach the other family members. Americans are
learning that having elderly people in the home can be a wonderful experience.
A. Ask and answer questions on the text.
B. Speak on the changes in the American family.
C. Speak on the advantages and disadvantages of living with parents and grandparents.
D. Do you think these statements about family life are true or false? Decide in pairs, then compare your
answers with other pairs.
1. Old people should live with their children.
2. Old people should live in special places (nursing homes) with other old people.
3. Everyone can learn a lot from older people.
4. Young couples must live away from their parents.

Many single people in the United States have trouble finding a marriage partner. In the past, sometimes
friends would help by becoming matchmakers. They would introduce a man and woman, and sometimes
the man and woman would fall in love and get married. But today, many people pay companies called
dating services to help them find partners. And even if the dating service does
242
not always find them someone to marry, it at least finds them someone to date.
Getting married has changed in some ways. In the past, the man proposed to the woman. But now
sometimes the woman asks the man to many her. After the couple decides to marry, the man gives the
woman a ring. She wears it on her left hand to show that they are engaged. Sometimes the man and
woman elope. When they run away and get married privately, their parents are often disappointed
because they wanted their children to have a big wedding.
When they are married, both newlyweds often work because they need two paychecks to pay their bills.
But sometimes they still have money problems. And sometimes the parents find that they just aren't
compatible. So, for many people, marriage ends in divorce. Yet, some people stay together long enough
to celebrate their fiftieth or seventy-fifth wedding anniversary.
A. Ask and answer questions on the text.
B. Speak about marriage in the United States.
C. 1 . Do people become engaged in your country? 2. Do you give rings in your country? 3. Have you got
dating services in your country? 4. Do many marriages end in divorce in your country? 5. Do many
women work after marriage?

Young people in Britain may have several girlfriends or boyfriends from their teens onwards. They go to
the cinema, go dancing, play sports or eat out together and do not necessarily intend to get married.
However, each year about 350,000 British couples become husband and wife. Marriage is legal from the
age of sixteen but most people wait until their mid to late twenties. Of those who get married, about
seventy per cent prefer a traditional church wedding to a registry office wedding. However, by the age of
forty, one Woman in twenty and one man in eleven will still be single.
One in four children are born outside of marriage but these are not all in single-parent families; sixty per
cent of unmarried parents have stable relationships. Thirty-seven per cent of marriages end
243
in divorce and cost the country more than £1.4 billion a year. Although over thirty per cent of women
depend financially on their husbands, women ask for seventy per cent of all divorces. Three out often
divorced women married as teenagers.
Marriage does seem to be more popular now than could be imagined thirty years ago. Is it since research
has shown that married people generally live longer than the single?
A. Ask and answer questions on the text.
B. Speak about marriage in Britain.
C. 1. What do you think is the best age to get married? 2. Children should have married parents. Discuss.
D. Did you use to fight with your brothers and sisters when you were young? How do you get on with
them now?
Discuss which THREE of the following are the most harmful to children.
— having a favourite child
— wanting children to do well at school
— wanting them to be attractive/or popular
— not giving enough discipline
— not spending enough time with them
— being too protective
Now write three paragraphs giving у our opinion. The phrases below may be useful.
I think/don't think having a favourite child is ...
I think it's quite natural for parents to ...
To give you an example, when I was a little child...

When Adrian Hutton and Carla Leene get married they will move into a new house that they have bought.
But what sort of life will they have? What can they expect in modern Britain? Every year the British
government publishes statistics about social trends. Their findings show definite patterns in the British
way of life. In most marriages there are some marked differences between husbands and wives. Working
wives, for example, sleep (on
average) one hour more a day than working husbands. Housewives, on the other hand, sleep only about
three hours more every week than their working husbands. And what about housework? The government
survey showed that only 1% of men do the household chores — like cleaning and ironing. But they do
usually keep household accounts and it is always men who do repairs or improvements in the house.
30% of all marriages end in divorce. The government survey also looked at leisure activities. They found
that the two most popular leisure activities in Britain are watching television (the average family spends
20 hours a week in front of the TV set) and going for walks. Swimming is an especially popular activity
among British women.
Carla and Adrian's life, though, will probably be different from the average marriage. In the first place
Carla has always kept her own accounts and Adrian has always done his own housework. Neither of
them like watching television very much and they both like swimming.
A. Ask and answer questions on the text.
B. Speak on social trends in the British way of life.
Men are lazy in the home, according to an official survey published today.
They have about six hours'a week more free time than wives, but play very little part in cooking, cleaning,
washing, and ironing, according to the Social Trends Survey by the Central Statistical Office.
Nearly three quarters of married women claimed to do all or most of the housework, and among married
men the proportion who admitted that their wives did all or most of the housework was only slightly lower.
The survey showed that washing and ironing was the least popular task among men, with only one per
cent performing this duty, compared with 89 per cent of women, and 10 per cent sharing equally. Only 5
per cent of men prepare the evening meal, 3 per cent carry out household cleaning duties, 5 per cent
household shopping, and 17 per cent wash the evening dishes.
But when household gadgets break down, repairs are carried out by 82 per cent of husbands.
The survey says that, despite economic problems, the majority of Britons are substantially better than a
decade ago. We're healthier, too — eating healthier foods and smoking less.
The average Briton, not surprisingly, is more widely travelled than a decade ago. Most people are going
abroad for holidays, with Spain the favourite destination.
A. Ask and answer questions on the text.
B. Speak on the Social Trends Survey by the Central Statistical Office.
C. Do you agree with these statements?
1. Fathers should feed children and change their nappies.
2. Men should do more work about the house.
3. Mothers with young children should not work.
D. What are the results of the Social Trends Survey in your country? Perhaps you 've got some
information on this problem. Tell your friends what you 've read or heard.
Conversation Practice Listen, read and practise. -.

Jim and Karen are relaxing in Jim's room. They have been telling each other about their lives.
Karen: Did you live with both parents when you were little?
Jim: No, my father died when I was very young, so I grew up in a single-parent family.
Karen: Did your mother work?
Jim: Yes, she worked in an office to support my brother and me.
Karen: It must have been difficult for her.
Jim: It was. After a long day at her job, she came home and cooked our dinner and helped us with our
homework. And taking care of us wasn't easy.
246
Karen: Didn't your mother have anyone to help her with
the cooking and cleaning? Jim: No, she did it all by herself. She must have been
tired a lot, but she never neglected us. In fact, she
spent almost all her free time with us. Karen: You didn't have any grandparents or aunts or uncles
who could have helped? Jim: We had relatives, but they lived in other states, so
our mother had to do everything alone.
A. Questions
1. Did Jim grow up in a two-parent or a single-parent family? 2. Did his mother work? 3. Did Jim's mother
have to work hard?
4. Did anyone help her to look after the house and the family?
5. Why didn't Jim's relatives help her?
B. Special difficulties
I. Join these simple sentences to make compound sentences. Use the words in brackets.
1. The taxi stopped at the station. Two men got out of it. (and) The taxi stopped at the station and two
men got out of it.
2. We got ready to get on the train. It didn't stop, (but)
3. No one was in when we called. We left a message, (so)
4. We didn't want to get home after the film. We went straight back, (so)
5. The old lady was nervous. She wasn't used to strangers calling late at night, (for)
6. I've always wanted to live in the country. My parents prefer to live in town, (but)
7. The letter has been lost. The postman has delivered it to the wrong address, (or)
8. For a moment the top of the mountain was visible. A cloud covered it. (and then)
9. Jane was a successful career woman. Her mother wanted her to be a housewife, (yet)
10. Tom phoned. He left a message, (and)
11. Your mother phoned this morning. She didn't leave a message, (but)
12. Go at once. You will miss your train, (or)
247
13. She seldom visits us. She lives in the country, (for)
14. There was little time left. I took a taxi, (so)
II. Rephrase the following sentences. Use must instead of modal words.
eg Surely they have left already. They must have left already.
1. Her shoes evidently pinch her, she can hardly walk. 2. Surely the boy recognized you at once. 3. It was
undoubtedly raining when you left. 4. She is probably good at chemistry. 5. They were probably having
dinner when I phoned them. 6. Surely she has finished typing by this time. 7. Surely he is looking for his
glasses again. 8. No doubt you are run down, you look pale. 9. Surely she is still typing. 10. She is
probably in her office now.
III. Supply the correct reflexive pronouns in the following.
eg I enjoyed... very much at the party. I enjoyed myself very much at the party.
1.1 see you've cut... again. Won't you ever learn how to shave9 2. How did Tom dry...? — He used your
towel. 3. She has no reason to blame... for what has happened. 4.1 think that poor dog has hurt... 5. "One
prides ... on one's patience," the boss said, in his usual pompous manner. 6. We amused ... playing
football on the beach. 7. Our new neighbours knocked at our door and introduced ... 8. Sheila prides ... on
her ability to judge people's characters. 9. Bill had to absent... from work when his baby was bom. 10.
Strictly between..., she's wrong. 11. She's very certain of... 12. Granddad doesn't like living by... (= without
help, alone) 13. Jimmy tied his shoelaces all by... (= without help, alone) 14. She -made the dress by ... (=
without help, alone) 15. Harry knows how to take care of... 16. I've cut... with the bread knife. 17. Take
care of...! 18. You saw what happened... 19. They ... saw what happened. 20. Just among ..., he is stupid.
IV. Supply gerund forms for the words in brackets.
eg ... is fun. (dance) Dancing is fun.
248
wmj?
** 1. ... tall is an advantage, (be) 2. ... tall is an advantage, (not be). 3 ... makes me tired, (drive) 4. ... able
to drive is a disadvantage, (not be) 5. ... keeps you fit. (jog) 6. ... is a difficult profession, (act) 7. ... about
other cultures is interesting, (learn) g.... a cold isn't much fun. (have) 9.... tennis is fun. (play) 10.... alone
at night in this part of the city is dangerous, (walk) 11. Is ... a motorcycle easy? (ride) 12. ... a soft-boiled
egg takes three minutes, (cook) 13. Is ... a second language difficult? (learn) 14.... good friends is
important, (have)
V. Respond using negative interrogative.
eg A: I talked to Tom.
B: Didn't you talk to Jack too?
1.1 helped Bill. 2.1 thanked George. 3.1 paid Peter. 4.1 congratulated Andrew. 5.1 fined Paul. 6.1 met
Arthur. 7.1 wrote to Bill. 6.1 saw Ann. 9.1 photographed Oliver. 10.1 sent a card to Hugh. 11.1 got a ticket
for Mary. 12.1 kept a seat for Bob. 13.1 asked George. 14.1 invited Margaret. 15.1 forgave Alec. 16.1
offered a lift to Bill. 17.1 stopped Peter. 18.1 warned Hugh.
C. Speak about Jim s life.
D. Roleplay the conversation.
E. Speak about your life. Was it hard?
Jan and Audrey, who are roommates, are sitting in a church. They are waiting for their friend Margo to be
married.
Jan: The music's starting to play! Audrey: Yeah, the wedding's about to begin. It's hard to believe that
Marge's getting married.
(A few minutes later) Jan: Doesn't Margo look beautiful? Audrey: Yes, she is a lovely bride. Jan:
Have you met the guy she's marrying? Audrey: No, I don't know the groom. But he looks like a nice
person. Jan: Well, we'll get a chance to meet him in an hour or so.
249
Audrey: You must be kidding. We won't have a chance to get acquainted with him at the reception. He'll
be too busy cutting the wedding cake and having his picture taken with Margo.
Jan: Yeah. You're right about that.
Audrey: I know what we could do, though. Why don't we take them out for dinner next week when they
get back from their honeymoon?
A. Questions
\. Who is getting married? 2. Do Jan and Audrey know the guy she's marrying? 3. Will they have a chance
to get acquainted with him at the wedding reception? 4. What are they going to do to get acquainted with
him?
B. Special Difficulties
I. Make up sentences with "be about to " to talk about things which are going to happen in the very near
future.
eg I'm about to leave for the station. The train leaves
in twenty minutes.
eg I think it's just about to start raining, eg Robert was about to pay for the vase when he noticed
a small crack in it.
II. Express surprise or admiration using negative interrogative.
eg Doesn't Margo look beautiful? eg Isn't she lovely?
III. Paraphrase the following sentences using could to express suggestion.
eg Why not go to the park? We could go to the park.
1. Let's go for a walk. 2. What about playing a game of cards? 3. Shall we go for a swim? 4. Why don't we
lie in the sun? 5. How about visiting Peter? 6. Why not go to the cinema? 7. What about going to a
restaurant? 8. Why not spend the weekend in Brighton? 9. Why don't we dine out? 10. How about buying
a garage?
250
IV. Make up sentences. Do it as in the examples.
eg She is busy packing.
eg When I came they were busy writing a composition.
V. Roleplay the conversation "A Lovely Bride. "
VI. Tell other students about your own wedding or the last wedding you went to.

A student wants to write an article about Alexander Cliff. She is calling Cliff at home.
Student: Mr Alexander Cliff, please.
Cliff: This is Alex Cliff.
Student: Mr Cliff, my name is Silvia Rios. I'm a student at the University of California. Mr Cliff, I wrote an
article about you recently for the school newspaper, but I wasn't able to include any details about you
personally — about your family... or your interests.
Cliff: Yes.
Student: Well, would you mind if I asked you a few questions? Cliff: I'd be happy to answer your
questions, Ms Rios.
Go ahead.
Student: Well, sir, ah, let's see, how many children do you have? Cliff: I have two daughters. Tricia,
my elder daughter, is a doctor. My younger daughter, Lana, is also a student at the University of
California. She's studying business. Perhaps you know her. She plays the piano in the university
orchestra. Student: No, sir, I don't think I do, buLthe university is a big
place.
Cliff: I guess it is.
Student: Ah, what does your wife do, Mr Cliff? Cliff: My wife works as a volunteer for Readers of Ame-
rica. She helps teach adults to read and write. Student: I understand you are a lawyer. Cliff: Yes, I've
been a lawyer for over twenty years. Student: Do you have any interests or hobbies that vou cnnlH
251
tell me about?
Cliff: Well, as you know, I write novels — mostly stories about crime and the law. I also play golf and I
jog every morning with my wife. And, of course, I read a lot. You have to read a lot in my profession. And I
play the piano... not well... but I enjoy it,
Student: Well, all that's very interesting, sir. I'm sure the other students at the university will be interested
in knowing a little more about you, too.
Cliff: Well, I'm glad I could answer your questions. Good luck with your article.
Student: Thank you very much. And good luck to you too, sir.
A. Questions
1 . Why is Silvia calling Mr Cliff? 2. How many children does Mr Cliff have? 3. What do they do? 4. What
does Mr Cliffs wife do? 5. What is Mr Cliff's job? 6. What are his interests and hobbies?
B. Speak about Mr Cliff and his family.
C. Interview a classmate. Ask him/her about his/her family.
(I = Interviewer; R = Raj)
I: How old were you when you met your husband, Raj?
R: Mm.... I was erm, sixteen.
Г. And what were you doing at the time?
R: Oh I was at home. I had left school, and I was having private tuition actually, at home, to prepare me
for my exams
I: And your father arranged your marriage, is that right?
R: Yes, that's right.
I: Could you tell me how he did that?
R: Yes. He looked around for a suitable husband. He asked friends and relatives if they knew anybody,
and found out about their education, their background, and most importantly, the family's background. He
got all the information about them, you know.
I: And did this take a long time?
252
R: In my case, no, but it depends you see, erm... sometimes a father can see up to a hundred men before
he chooses one. My elder sister... for my elder sister my father saw over a hundred men. You know,
sometimes it can be difficult to decide. But for my brother he saw only one girl. ll: And for you?
R: He saw only two, one in the morning and one in the evening, and er... he chose the second one.
I: My goodness! Tell me about that day.
R: Yes... well, in the morning the first man came. He was very wealthy, but er... not very well educated,
but he had a lot of money. And he was well-dressed, and he had very good manners.
I: And the other one?
R: He wasn't terribly wealthy, but he was well-educated, and he came from a good background. His family
owned a village, and were like princes. And all his relatives were suitable. He was twenty-two, and
studying law.
I: And your father chose him?
R: Yes.
I: Why, do you know?
R: I think he thought that money wasn't everything. He didn't want the... you know, he didn't want the
family money. Education was more important. If he's well-educated, he'll earn it later. Actually, Shyam,
that's my husband's name, didn't want to get married. He wanted to wait, but you know his father
persuaded him. You know when he came to my house to meet my father, he was very badly dressed
because he wanted my father to refuse him, so he could say to his father "Look, they didn't like me". But
luckily my father did like him and—erm — so he had to say "yes".
I: And did you meet him that day?
R: Yes. First my family spoke to him, and then they called me in, and we talked for four, four or five
minutes. My father decided immediately.
I: And did you agree?
R: Of course. My father had decided.
I: And what happened next?
R: Well, after a certain time, there was a special day when I went to see his family and he came to see my
family. It
253
was a sort of engagement party. But we — you know — we used to be on the phone every day, we'd see
each other regularly, but never without a chaperon. We were married ten months later.
I: And how long have you been married?
R: Oh for twenty-two years now.
Г. And ... it's been a successful marriage? Have you been pleased with your father's choice?
R: Oh ... yes, of course.
I: Do you think that the system of arranged marriages is a good one? How common is this system of
arranged marriages?
R: Well, most marriages in India are still arranged in this way, and generally it is a system that works. Of
course it depends a lot on the family choosing the right person, but one reason it works is that the couple
enter the marriage not expecting too much, if you see what I mean. Actually, there are many more
divorces between couples who thought that they were marrying for love and who then find that it isn't
there. Arranged marriages seem to last, and that is a good thing.
I: And is sixteen the age when girls get married?
R: It is usually sixteen or seventeen.
A. Ask and answer questions on the text.
B. What do you think of arranged marriages? At what age do young people usually get married in your
country?
Listening
Ann was a very romantic girl who often dreamed of love and marriage. She was especially attracted to a
young man called Michael, who worked in the same office as she did, and he was very keen on her too.
They became friendly and one day Michael asked her to go out with him. Their first date was a visit to the
cinema, and they both enjoyed the evening so much that they decided to go out together regularly.
Michael was a bit untidy and rather young, and Ann's parents didn't approve of him at first, but Ann was a
sensible, mature
254
girl and they had confidence in her. For a year or so everything went well, but then somehow they slowly
began to drift apart, until finally they decided to break off their relationship.
A. Questions
1 . What sort of 'girl was Ann? 2. Who did she become friendly with? 3. Did Ann's parents approve of
Michael? 4. Did Ann and Michael get married?

One evening, although he was nervous, Joe decided to propose to his girlfriend, Linda. She accepted his
proposal, they became engaged and he gave her a ring. After a year they had saved enough money to
get married (they were both over 1 8 so they did not need their parents' consent). Some people have a
religious ceremony with a priest, but Joe and Linda decided on a civil ceremony in a registry office. On the
day of the wedding Linda, the bride, was very calm, but Joe, the bridegroom, was nervous. Afterwards, at
the reception, speeches were made and the guests drank a toast to the happy couple, who finally left for
a honeymoon in Spain.
A. Questions
1 . Why was Joe nervous one evening? 2. Did Linda accept his proposal? 3. How old were the young
people when they got married? 4. Did they have a religious or a civil ceremony? 5. Where did the newly
married couple go after the wedding reception?
Win, 42, tells how she met her husband:
I remember I was about 19.1 went to a dance at the village hall. I went with my best friend, Marjorie.
Marjorie was very pretty and all the boys liked her. They all wanted to dance with her. I didn't enjoy
dances much. I was always very shy.
I sat at a table in the corner of the dance hall. No one asked me to dance. After about an hour, Marjorie
came up and said, "Go and ask one of the boys to dance! You can't just sit there!"
255
It was awful. I hated every minute of it. In the end she told one of her boyfriends to go and ask me for a
dance. I was so embarrassed! Anyway, the boy came up and we danced. His name was Mick and he was
very nice. He asked me to go to the cinema with him the next day. That was the start of it. I went out with
him for a year, and then he asked me to marry him. My parents were a bit surprised. They liked him, but
they said we were too young. They told us to wait. We waited nine months and then, on my 21st birthday,
we got married. We now have three children and we're very happy. I still see Marjorie quite often. She
always says, "You mustn't sit and wait for things to happen. You must go out and make them happen." I
think she is right.
A. Questions
1. Where did Win meet her husband, Mick? 2. How old was she then? 3. Who was she with? 4. What was
her friend like? 5. Why didn't Win enjoy dances? 6. Why wasn't she happy at first at this dance? 7. What
did Marjorie do? 8. Who asked Win to dance? 9. What happened later on? 10. What does Marjorie
always say?

Susan Brown and Tom Smith first met at a Christmas party at a friend's house. He was then a student at
a university and she had just left school. That was more than two years ago. During this time they have
become very close friends, and now they are engaged to be married. Tom is a very nice boy — and
Susan loves him very much. He is clever too. He did well at the University and now he has a good job at
a cycle factory near Bishopton, where he is making excellent progress. Learning to be a manager is
interesting work and Tom enjoys it. Although he is not earning a very large salary at the moment, he
hopes to be a manager himself soon. Susan's father and mother like Tom and are glad that their daughter
is going to marry him.
The young people have not made any arrangements for the wedding yet. Getting married is very
expensive and they will have to save some money first, so they do not mind if they have to put off the
wedding for a little while. They will want to find a house, too, and this is not easy. Many young married
people toda>
256
live with the boy's or with the girl's family, but it is better for them to have a house of their own. So Tom
and Susan will have to work hard, save as much money as they can and look for a house before they can
get married. But as Tom is only twenty-two and Susan is only twenty, this does not matter very much.
Susan is very proud of her engagement ring. Buying an engagement ring is a serious matter; it is
something that does not happen often, so they spent a day in London together for the event. They looked
in many jewellers' windows before Susan made up her mind. At last they saw what they wanted in a shop
in Regent Street. But they did not buy it at once; no woman ever does this! The assistant brought tray
after tray of rings, some of them very expensive. Susan enjoyed trying on rings costing many hundreds of
pounds and comparing one with another, even though she knew that she and Tom could not afford them.
At last she asked for the diamond ring in the window which she and Tom had liked and this was the ring
they bought.
When Susan got to the office the next morning, all the girls at once noticed the ring on the third finger of
her left hand, and said how pleased they were. But Mr Robinson, the manager, to whom Susan is
secretary, did not notice it for three days, and he only noticed it then because Susan waved it in front of
his eyes. Susan thought that her brother David would make fun of her when he saw the ring, but to her
surprise he kissed her and said, "Very nice too!" Susan was so pleased, she nearly cried.
When Mr Carter, the manager of Tom's factory, heard that Tom and Susan were engaged, he sent for him
and told him he was going to ask the directory to raise his salary. "You'll need it when you are married, as
you'll soon find out," he said.
A. Questions
1. Where did Susan and Tom first meet? 2. What were they doing at that time? 3. What is Tom like? 4. Are
Susan's parents for or against their daughter's marriage? 5. Why will the young people have to put off
their wedding? 6. What did the young people buy when they got engaged? 7. How did their colleagues
react to the news of their being engaged?
93ак 1110
257
The first time Michael saw Helen, he fell in love with her. It was love at first sight. The problem was how to
win her love for him. First he tried to impress her. He asked her to fly to Cannes with him for the Film
Festival. She refused. Then he asked her to come to Rome with him. But she said no. "Perhaps she likes
the simple life," he thoughfSo he asked her to spend a weekend with him in the country. She refused that
too. "Food. I'll try food," he thought and asked her to eat with him at Mason's, one of the best restaurants
in London.
"No, thank you," she said and lowered her lovely blue eyes. "She's so beautiful," he thought. "I will try one
last question." And he asked her to marry him.
"Yes," she said. "I will. Mason's, Rome, Cannes, the country — what an exciting life we will have."
A. Questions
1. What are the things Michael asked Helen to do? 2. What did Helen say?
(after O. Henry)
One dollar and eighty-seven cents. That was all. Three times Delia counted it. And tomorrow was
Christmas. She sat down on the sofa and burst into tears. She had saved every penny for months and
this was the result. Twenty dollars a week doesn't go far. Only $1.87 to buy a present for Jim. Her Jim.
She had spent hours planning to buy something nice for him.
She went to the mirror and let down her hair. She let it fall to its full length, below her knees. '
There were two possessions of which the Dillinghams were very proud. One was Jim's gold watch, which
had been his grandfather's. The other was Delia's hair.
She put her hair up again nervously and cried a little again. Then she put on her old brown jacket, her old
brown hat and went down the stairs to the street.
She stopped at a sign which read: "Madame Sofronie. Hair Goods of all Kinds." She ran up the stairs.
"Will you buy my hair?" asked Delia.
"Take your hat off," said Madame Sofronie, "and let me look
at it."
She let her hair down.
"Twenty dollars," said Madame.
"Give it to me quickly," said Delia and the woman began to cut off Delia's beautiful long hair.
For the next two hours Delia searched for a present for Jim. Then she found it. It was a platinum chain for
Jim's watch. As soon as she saw it, she knew it was right for Jim. It was just like him. Quiet and valuable.
It cost $21.
When Delia got home, she started to curl her hair. After half an hour, her head was covered in small curls.
At seven o'clock the front door opened and Jim came in. Delia whispered to herself, "Please God, make
him think I am still pretty." Jim looked thin and serious. Poor Jim! He was only twenty-two! His eyes fixed
upon Delia and there was an expression on his face which frightened her.
"Jim, darling, don't look at me like that. My hair will grow again. I cut it off and sold it because I wanted to
buy you a present. I've got a beautiful present for you."
"You've cut off your hair," said Jim slowly.
"Yes, but I'm still me without my hair, aren't I?"
"Your hair is gone," he said again, almost like an idiot. He took a package from his coat pocket and threw
it on the table. Delia tore at the string and paper. First, an ecstatic scream. Then, hysterical tears.
For there lay the combs—the set of beautiful hair combs which she had wanted for so long. She knew
they were expensive. She hugged them closely and said, "My hair grows very fast, Jim." Then she
jumped up and gave him her present. The platinum watchchain flashed in the light.
"Isn't it beautiful, Jim? Give me your watch. I want to see how it looks on it."
Jim sat down on the sofa and smiled. "Dell," he said, "let's put our Christmas presents away and keep
them for a while. They're too nice to use at present. I sold the watch to buy your combs. Now let's have
supper."'
A. Ask and answer questions on the text.
259
Reading

In Japan both men and women go to university and both men and women study arts subjects such as
English. But very few women study science, medicine or engineering. In engineering classes of thirty or
forty students, there may be only one or two women Men and women both go to university in order to get
good jobs, men want to work for a big company, be successful, earn a lot of money and support a family;
women, on the other hand, want to work for a big company because they have a better chance of
meeting a successful man and getting married. This is changing, however, and Japanese women are
beginning to think about themselves. They are beginning to look for a job because they like it rather than
because they hope to find a good husband.
Men have a job for the whole of their lives and usually stay with the same company. A woman may work
for up to ten years, but after that she usually marries. Most women are married by the age of 27, then
they stay at home and look after the children. A man might not mind if his wife goes to work, but she must
look after everything in the house as well. A man does not cook or look after the children. When he comes
home his meal must be ready The woman may go out in the afternoon, shopping with her friends or just
to have a chat, but she must be home by four o'clock to prepare the meal. Then she may have to wait for
a long time for hei man to come home. Often he has to go out for a drink after work; if he doesn't he may
not rise very high in the company. The man does not come home until eleven o'clock or later. After her
children are grown up, a woman can go back to work, but it is not easy. If her old company takes older
women back, she might be lucky. But most women find it difficult to get a good job when they are older.
A. Compare the situation with women s education and employment in your country and Japan.

In this extract from his novel "Sons and Lovers" (1913), the writer David Herbert Lawrence describes a
scene between Mr Morel, a
260
pit worker, and his wife and children, especially his young son, Paul.
He was shut out from all family affairs. No one told him anything. The children, alone with their mother,
told her all about the day's happenings, everything. Nothing had really taken place in them until it was told
to their mother. But as soon as the father came in, everything stopped. He was like the scotch in the
smooth, happy machinery of the home. And he was always aware of this fall of silence on his entry, the
shutting off of life, the unwelcome. But now it was gone too far to alter.
He would dearly have liked the children to talk to him, but they could not. Sometimes Mrs Morel would
say: "You ought to tell your father."
Paul won a prize competition in a child's paper. Everybody was highly jubilant.
"Now you'd better tell your father when he comes in," said Mrs Morel. "You know how he carries on and
says he's never told anything."
"All right," said Paul. But he would almost rather have forfeited the prize than have to tell his father.
"I've won a prize in a competition, Dad," he said. Morel turned round to him.
"Have you, my boy? What sort of a competition?" "Oh nothing — about famous women."
"And how much is the prize, then, as you've got?"
"It's a book."
"Oh, indeed!"
"About birds."
"Hm —hm!"
And that was all. Conversation was impossible between the father and any other member of the family.
He was an outsider.
The only time when he entered again into the life of his own people was when he worked, and was happy
at work. Sometimes, in the evening, he cobbled the boots or mended the kettle or his pit-bottle. Then he
always wanted several attendants, and the children enjoyed it. They united with him in the work, in the
actual doing of something, when he was real self again.
261
I always believed that if a woman made up her mind to marry a man, nothing but immediate escape could
save him.
Once a friend of mine, understanding this, decided to go on a journey for some time. So he got aboard
the ship, with only a tooth-brush as his luggage and spent a year travelling round the world. He thought
that the girl would forget him — out of sight, out of mind.
But when he landed at the port, the first person he saw, was the little lady from whom he had fled.
And only once I knew a man who managed to escape. His name was Roger Charing. He fell in love with
Ruth Barlow at first sight. She was a dark-eyed, fair-haired little lady. When Roger told me that he wanted
to marry her I wished him happiness.
"I hope you'll be good friends," he said. "You do like her, don't you?" "Yes," I said. I couldn't say less. I
considered her stupid but I couldn't tell Roger about it. Roger introduced her to his friends, he took her
everywhere. Their marriage was fixed for the near future. Then, all of a sudden, he fell out of love. I didn't
know why. Maybe he understood that Ruth had made up her mind to marry him for his money. But he
knew that she wouldn't release him if he simply asked her. So he thought of a plan. He didn't show Ruth
that his attitude towards her had changed. He sent her flowers, they dined together and went to the
theatre together. They had made up their minds that they would be married as soon as they found a
house that suited them. And they started looking for it. They visited house after house but always Roger
found a fault that made the house unsuitable. Sometimes they were too small or too large or too
expensive or too gloomy.
Ruth began to grow tired. They looked at hundreds of houses and Ruth felt worn-out. Once she said
angrily, "If you can't find a house soon I won't marry you." "Don't say that," answered Roger. "We are sure
to find a proper house and in less than no time we'll get married."
They had been looking for a house for two years. Finally Ruth was dead tired. "Do you want to marry me
or don't you?" she asked. "Oh, of course, I do," was the cheerful answer. But Ruth did not feel well
enough to look at any more houses. She didn't want to see Roger.
262
In a week he got a letter. "I don't think you really love me. So I have found a man who will take good care
of me and I'll be married to him today. Ruth."
Soon she got a letter from Roger, "I am very unhappy, but the most important thing for me is your
happiness. I am sending you several addresses and I am sure that you'll find among them a decent
house. Roger."
(after Stephen Leacock)
I think it's a very good idea to celebrate once a year "Mother's Day". So we decided to have a special
celebration of Mother's Day. We thought it a fine idea.
We decided to make it a great day, a holiday for all the family and a happy day for our Mother. Father
decided to take a holiday from his office, my sister Anne and I stayed home from college classes, and
Mary and my brother Will stayed home from High School.
Our plan was to make the day just like any big holiday. So we decided to decorate the house with flowers.
We asked Mother to arrange the decorations because she always does it on holidays. The two girls
wanted to dress in their very best for such a big occasion, and so they both got new hats. Mother trimmed
both the hats and they looked fine. Father had bought new ties for himself and us boys. We wanted to buy
a new hat for Mother too, but she said she liked her old grey hat better than a new one, and both the girls
said that it was awfully becoming to her.
Well, after breakfast we decided to hire a car and take Mother for a beautiful drive away into the country.
Mother is hardly ever able to go to the country because she is busy in the house nearly all the time.
But on the very morning of the day we changed the plan a little bit. Father decided to take mother fishing.
It turned out that he had just got a new rod the day before and he said that Mother could use it too.
Well, when the car came to the door, we saw that there was no room in it for us all. Father said he could
stay at home and work in the garden though he hadn't had a real holiday for three years. Of course we
didn't want to let Father stay at home. Then the two girls Anne and Mary said that they could stay at home
and
263
help the maid to cook. Only it was such a pity to stay at home on such a fine day. As to us boys, we
couldn't cook.
So in the end it was decided that Mother would stay home and just have a lovely restful day round the
house and get the dinner. It turned out anyway that Mother didn't care for fishing, and also it was just a
little bit cold and fresh out of doors, though it was lovely and sunny, and Father was afraid that Mother
might catch cold if she came. So we said good-bye to Mother and drove away.
Well, we had a very happy day up among the hills. Father caught a lot of fish. Will and I fished too but
were not so lucky. The two girls met a lot of people that they knew. So we all had a good time.
It was quite late when we came back, about seven o'clock in the evening. Mother had kept the dinner
ready and hot for us. The dinner was like on New Year's Day. Mother had to get up many times during the
meal fetching things back and forward.
The dinner lasted a long time, and it was great fun. When it was over all of us wanted to help Mother to
wash the dishes. But Mother said that she could do it herself, and so we let her because we wanted to
please her.
It was quite late when it was all over, and when we all kissed Mother before we went to bed she said it
had been the most wonderful day in her life, and I think there were tears in her eyes. So we all felt awfully
repaid for all that we had done.
Self check
I. Put the verbs into the correct tense forms.
Dear Mum,
It (not seem) like 6 months since I (arrive) here, but time (flow). I now (adjust) almost completely to the
way of life here, but I must say it (be) difficult to get used to things at the beginning. I (have to) work hard
here, and some evenings I (be) so tired out that I (go) straight to bed . But I (be) glad I (come). I (not
save) as much as I wanted to, but never mind, I at least (save) something. Next week I'm off for a
weekend's skiing, and I really (look forward) to going. I (be) a bit scared because I never (ski) before, but I
(get by) somehow — don't worry. Just think, this time next week I (ski).
By the way, when you (come) to visit me? I can put you up in my spare room. If you can't come next
month, at least try to come the month after. If you (come), could you bring me some marmalade? I (ran
out). Now, what other news is there? My French (be) quite good now, in fact I (pick up) a lot since I
(arrive). At the end of my stay here I (speak) French very well.
Oh, something I (forget) to tell you in my last letter, and that is that my firm might transfer me to their
branch in the Netherlands. If they (do), it (not be) for another six months. I (wonder) what Holland (be)
like? Anyway, if you can't visit me here, I (see) you in four months' time because I've got a week off then,
and I (come) home for the week. Well, give my regards to everyone.
Love, Mary
II. Put the verbs in brackets into the correct forms. Study and practise the text.
(A Fairy Tale)
One winter evening a poor peasant sitting near the fire was talking with his wife about one of their
neighbours who was a rich man.
"If only I (have) money, I (open) my own shop."
"I (not be) satisfied with that," answered his wife. "I (be) happy if I (live) in a big house, and then , if I (see)
people like ourselves, I (help) them and (make) them happy."
"But what's the use talking, we are no longer in the time of fairies," the man said.
"It (not be) bad if they (exist)," the woman said, "Then I (may) meet one of them and ask her to grant me
my wishes. If she (promise) to grant me something, I (know) what to ask her."
Hardly had she said these words when a young lovely woman appeared in their room and told them that
she was a fairy. She was willing to grant them the first three wishes and no more than three wishes. Then
the beautiful lady disappeared.
At first the two peasants were too surprised to speak. But then they began discussing the first wish that it
(be) best to have. They were arguing and quarrelling for a long time and finally decided to wish nothing for
a while and put it off till the next day.
264
265
Some time later the woman looking at the bright fire said without thinking. "Oh, I wish we (have) a
sausage for our supper." She had hardly finished these words when a thick sausage fell on their table
from above.
The husband got angry and began scolding his wife, "Isn't that a fine wish! A sausage! Now we have only
two wishes left. I'm so angry that I wish this sausage (stick) to your nose!"
This was hardly said when the sausage jumped and stuck to the poor woman's nose.
"What have you done?" cried the frightened woman.
The husband understood that he himself had been even more foolish than his wife. He tried to tear the
sausage off his wife's nose but he couldn't.
"It is your fault," said the husband. "It is yours," replied his wife and they continued quarrelling.
"If you (not, wish) to have this sausage, I (not, wish) it to stick to your nose," said the husband.
Finally they understood that they had only one wish left. What could they wish? They thought for a long
time and at last agreed to have their last wish. They wished the sausage (fall) on the table which it did.
The only good thing these poor people had got from the fairy was the sausage which they ate at dinner
with great appetite.
UNITS GRAMMAR: GERUND
Gerund as subject
James : In my book it says I have to ask my friends about
their hobbies so that I can make a graph. Matthew:
Collecting stamps is my favourite hobby and watching
television is my second. James : Watching television
sounds a bit boring. You must like something else! Matthew:
Eating sausages and chips is another of my favourite
activities, and you could mention ice-cream.

gerund verb other information

Swimming keeps is is you in good health,
Smoking Sitting getting looks dangerous very boring
here Parachuting sounds exciting an easy way to
Jogging keep m shape.

When we want to form a Gerund, in most cases we take an infinitive and put -ing on the end.
eat + ing Eating can be a wonderful experience, sleep + ing Sleeping makes you look younger,
work + ing Working too much can cause a nervous breakdown.
To make a negative gerund we use not before it:
Not understanding teenagers is the first sign of middle age. The gerund can be:
a) the subject of a sentence: Swimming is my favourite sport.
b) the complement of subject + BE: My favourite sport is swimming.
267
Verb + gerund
Jennifer: Do you fancy getting some food from a take-away this evening? I really can't stand cooking ano-
ther meal tonight. I'm too tired.
John: OK. I don't feel like cooking either. I suggest trying that Chinese take-away in the High Street. It
would make a change.
If these verbs are followed by another verb, the structure is usually verb + gerund:
1. admit He admitted stealing the money.
2. advise She advised waiting until tomorrow.
3. anticipate I anticipate having a good time on
vacation.
4. appreciate I appreciated hearing from them.
5. avoid He avoided answering my question.
6. complete I finally completed writing my term
paper.
7. consider I will consider going with you.
8. delay He delayed leaving for school.
9. deny She denied committing the crime.
10. discuss They discussed opening a new business.
11. dislike I dislike driving long distances.
12. enjoy We enjoyed visiting them.
13. excuse Excuse my interrupting you.
14. fancy I don't fancy going out this evening.
15. feel like(=want) I don't feel like eating anything
16. finish Have you finished doing your homework?
17. forget I'll never forget visiting Napoleon's tomb.
18. give up I gave up smoking a month ago.
19. go on(=continue) He had a short rest and then he went
on studying.
20. can't help I can't help worrying about it.
21 imagine I can't imagine George ndmg a motorbike.
22 involve My work involves looking after the
children.
23 keep or keep on I keep hoping he will come.
(=continue) She kept (on) interrupting me while I was speaking.
268
24. mind Would you mind helping me with this?
25. miss I miss being with my family.
26. postpone Let's postpone leaving until tomorrow.
27. practise The athlete practised throwing the ball. 28.put off(=postpone) Don't put
off visiting them.
29. quit He quit trying to solve the problem.
30. recall I don't recall meeting him before.
31. recollect I don't recollect meeting him before.
32. recommend She recommended seeing the show.
33. regret I regret telling him my secret.
34. remember I can remember meeting him when I was
a child.
35. resent I resent her interfering m my business.
36. resist I couldn't resist eating the dessert.
37. risk She risks losing all her money.
38. can't stand (=* bear) She can't stand (bear) watching detectives.
39. stop She stopped going to classes when she
got sick.
40. suggest She suggested going to a movie.
41. tolerate She won't tolerate cheating during an examination.
42. understand I don't understand his leaving school.
Note the passive form (being done/being seen/being told etc.): I don't mind being told what to do.
When you are talking about finished actions, you can also say having done/having stolen etc. But it is
not necessary to use this form. You can also use the simple -ing form for finished actions:
He admitted stealing (or having stolen) the money. They now regret getting (or having got) married.
With some of the verbs in this unit (especially admit, deny, regret and suggest) you can also use a that...
structure:
He denied that he had stolen the money, (or denied stealing)
He admitted (that) he'd broken the window. They suggested (that) we met at two o'clock.
269
Verb + preposition + -ing
a) Many verbs have the structure verb(V) + preposition(P) + object.
For example, talk about
We talked about the problem, (the problem is the object) If the object is another verb, it ends in -ing:
We talked about going to America. (V+P+ -ing)
Here are some more verbs which have the structure (V+P+ -ing):
succeed in Has Tom in finding a job?
think about/of succeeded Are of(about) buying a
dream of you thinking I've house? of being
approve/disapprov always dreamed rich, of gambling,
e of look forward She doesn't to meeting her. on
to approve I'm buying me a drink,
insist on looking forward against moving to
decide against He insisted We London, for
apologise for decided He keeping me waiting.
apologised
We say "apologise to someone for something":
He apologised to me for keeping me waiting, (not "he apologised me")
With some of these verbs you can also use the structure verb + preposition + someone + -ing. For
example:
We are all looking forward to Peter coming back, (informal) We are all looking forward to Peter's coming
back, (formal)
She doesn't approve of her son staying out late at night, (informal)
She doesn't approve of her son's staying out late at night, (formal)
They insisted on me staying with them, (informal) They insisted on my staying with them, (formal)
b) These verbs have the structure verb+object+preposition+ -ing
270
accuse They accused me of telling lies.

suspect Did they the man of being a spy?

suspect
congrat I congratulated Ann on passing the
u-
late exam.
prevent What him from coming to the
prevented wedding?
stop We stopped everyone from* leaving the
building.
thank I thanked her for being so helpful.
forgive Please forgive me for not writing to you.
warn They warned us against buying the car.
* Note: After stop you can leave out from. So you can say:
We stopped everyone leaving (отfrom leaving) the building. Some of these verbs are often used in the
passive:
I was accused of telling lies.
Was the man suspected of being a spy?
We were warned against buying it.
Adjective + preposition + -ing
The farmer had been sleeping in the field for about an hour. He was tired of working. In fact he had never
been keen on doing anything at all at midday when the sun was hottest. By resting a little at this time he
would be able to do more in the afternoon. Anyway, he wasn't used to working more than four hours at a
time. Suddenly he woke up. He looked over towards the trees. His heart began to beat in fear...
The Gerund is often used after these adjectives'.
afraid of He was afraid of catching cold.

busy in They were busy in packing their things.

capable of Do you think he's capable of doing that?
(incapable
)
disappoint at We were disappointed at having lost the
ed game.
engaged in He is engaged in writing a book.
excited about The children were excited about going on
holiday.
fond of Are you fond of playing chess?
good at She is good at dancing.
271

guilty of He was found guilty of stealing.

indignant at He was indignant at hearing that.
interested m Are you interested in working for us?
keen on He is keen on fishing
pleased at She was not pleased at my coming.
(displeased)
proud of She is proud of being so pretty.
responsible for You are responsible for losing the match.
tired of I'm tired of waiting.
sure of He is sure of winning the race.
surprised at We were surprised at seeing him.
After some adjectives both the Gerund and the Infinitive are used.
— I was disappointed at not finding them at home. I was disappointed not to find them at home.
— She is proud of being so pretty. She is proud to be so pretty.
— I was surprised at seeing her there. I was surprised to see her there.
— She was pleased at getting such an expensive present. She was pleased to get such an expensive
present.
Be afraid to do and be afraid of doing
I am afraid to do something = I don't want to do something because it is dangerous or the result could be
unpleasant:
-— The streets in this city are not safe at night. Many people are afraid to go out alone. (= they don't want
to go out because it is dangerous)
— She was afraid to tell her parents that she had broken the neighbour's window. ( = she didn't want to
tell her parents because she knew they would be angry)
I am afraid of something happening = there is a possibility that something bad will happen.
— We walked along the path very carefully because it was icy and we were afraid of falling, (not "afraid to
fall")
— I don't like dogs. I'm always afraid of being bitten.(ио/ "afraid to be bitten")
So, you are afraid to do something because you are afraid of something happening as a result.
Compare:
— The boys were afraid to play football in the garden because they were afraid of breaking a window.
— I was afraid to stay in the sun because I was afraid of getting burnt.
Be/get used to something (I'm used to...)
a) Study this example situation:
Jane is American but she has lived in Britain for three years. When she first drove a car in Britain, she
found it very difficult because she had to drive on the left instead of on the right. Driving on the left was
strange and difficult for her because:
She wasn't used to it.
She wasn't used to driving on the left.
But after a long practice, driving on the left became less strange:
She got used to driving on the left. Now after three years, driving on the left is no problem for
her.
— She is used to driving on the left.
I'm used to something = it is not new or strange for me:
— Frank lives alone. He doesn't mind this because he has lived alone for 15 years. So he is used to it. He
is used to living alone.
•— My new shoes felt a bit strange at first because I wasn't used to them.
— Our new flat is on a very busy street. I expect we'll get used to the noise but at the moment we find it
very disturbing.
— Fred has a new job. He has to get up much earlier — at 6.30. He finds this difficult at present because
he isn't used to getting up so early.
272
273
b) Notice that we say "She is used to driving on the left." (not "she is used to drive"). To in be/get used to
is a preposition, not part of the infinitive. So we say:
— Frank is used to living alone, (not "is used to live")
— Jane had to get used to driving on the left.(not "get used to drive")
c) Do not confuse / am used to doing (be/get used to) with/ used to do. They are different in structure and
in meaning.
I am used to (doing) something = something isn't strange for me:
— I'm used to the weather in this country. (I'm accustomed to it.)
— I'm used to driving on the left because I've lived in Britain for a long time. (I'm accustomed to driving on
the left now.)
We use used to+ infinitive to talk about past habits which are now finished.
— I used to drive a Mercedes, but now I drive a Citroen. (= I drove a Mercedes regularly in the past, but I
do not drive a Mercedes now.)
— These days I usually stay in bed until late. But when I had a job, I used to get up early.
Noun + preposition + -ing
The Gerund is also used after nouns followed by prepositions, most often the preposition of.
— There are different ways of solving this problem.
— They discussed different methods of teaching foreign languages.
— Have you any reason for being late?
— He has no intention of marrying her.
— He has no objection to being sent there.
— He expressed his surprise at hearing it.
After such nouns as astonishment, disappointment, surprise, intention, necessity, possibility, way both the
Gerund and the Infinitive are used.
274
— I have no intention of going there. = I have no intention to go there.
— There are different ways of doing it. = There are different ways to do it.
Chance and opportunity
a) Chance of-ing
We say: "someone has a (good) chance of doing something" (passing an examination, winning a match
etc.):
— Do you think I have a chance of passing the examination?
— We have a very good chance of winning the match.
You can also say any/no/little/much chance:
— I don't think I have much chance of finding a job.
— He has no chance of passing the examination.
You can also say "stand a chance of doing something":
— He doesn't stand a chance of passing the examination.
You can also say "What are the chances of something (happening)?":
— What are the chances of success?
— What are my chances of passing the examination?
You can also say "there is a chance of something happening" or "there is a chance that something will
happen":
— Is there any chance of you lending me some money until tomorrow?
— There is a chance that I'll be late home this evening.
b) Chance to do something
We use "chance to do something" when chance = time or opportunity to do something.
('Chance of-ing" is less usual with this meaning.)
— "Have you read the book I lent you?" "No, I haven't had a chance to look at it yet." (= I haven't had
time/an opportunity to look at it.)
275
•— We didn't have much chance to talk to each other when we last met. (= we didn't have much
time/opportunity to talk)
— These days I don't get much chance to watch television. I'm too busy.
c) Opportunity
We normally say "opportunity to do something" (opportunity of-ing is also possible):
— I have the opportunity to study in the United States for a year. Do you think I should go? (= the chance
to study)
— After the lecture there will be an opportunity to ask questions.
You can also say any/no/much/plenty of/more opportunity:
— Do you have much opportunity to speak English? (=much chance to speak)
—We live near the mountains, so we have plenty of opportunity to go skiing.
Do not say "possibility to do something":
— I had the opportunity to study in Canada, (not "possibility to study")
Preposition + -ing
a) You can use -ing with before, after, on, in, at to express time.
— Before going out I phoned Ann. You can also say: "Before I went out I..."
— What did you do after leaving school? You can also say "... after you left school."
— After working all evening, John felt tired. You can also say: "after he'd worked all evening..."
— On hearing the news, they left at once. (As soon as they heard the news...)
276
-— In reciting the poem she missed a line. (When she was reciting the poem...)
— Clare turned at hearing her footsteps. (... when she heard her footsteps.)
Using the-ing form to express time is a little formal. In speech vve often use a clause with a subject.
b) You can use by -ing to say how something happened.
— They got into the house by breaking a kitchen window and climbing in.
— You can improve your English by doing a lot of reading.
c) You can use -ing after without.
— Tom left without finishing his dinner.
— She ran five miles without stopping.
— He climbed through the window without anybody seeing him. (or "...without being seen.")
— She needs to work without people disturbing her. (or "...without being disturbed.")
— It's nice to go on holiday without having to worry about money.
d) You can use -ing after in spite of to express contrast.
— John went to work in spite of feeling ill.
— Arm can't find a job in spite of doing well at school.
e) You can use -ing after the preposition^cr to express purpose.
— This knife is only for cutting bread.
— Schools are for learning.
— The hall was used for dancing.
— A ruler is used for measuring things.
Need to do and need -ing
Ineed to do something = it is necessary for me to do something.
— He needs to work harder.
— We've got plenty of time. We don't need to hurry. need- ing- need to be done (so the meaning is
passive):
277
— The batteries in this radio need changing. (=need to be changed)
— This jacket is rather dirty. It needs cleaning. (= needs to
be cleaned)
— Do you think the grass needs cutting? (= needs to be
cut)
As you can see after need we can also use to be +past participle in the same passive meaning.
— My car needs to be serviced.
— These trousers need to be cleaned.
Expressions + -ing
When these expressions are followed by a verb, the verb ends in
-ing:
It's no use It's no good...
— It's no use worrying about it. There's nothing you can do.
— It's no good trying to persuade me. You won't succeed.
There's no point in ...
— There's no point in buying a car if you don't want to drive it.
— There was no point in waiting, so we went.
It's (not) worth...
— My house is only a short walk from here. It's not worth taking a taxi.
— It was so late when we got home, it wasn't worth going
to bed.
— Do you think this book is worth reading?
— You should go and see the film. It's really worth seeing.
(Have) difficulty...
— I had difficulty finding a place to live, (not "to find")
— Did you have any difficulty getting a visa?
— People often have great difficulty reading my writing.
Remember that we say "difficulty" (not "difficulties"):
2-78
— I'm sure you'll have no difficulty passing the examination.
You can also say "(have) difficulty in -ing":
— He's shy. He has difficulty in talking to people he doesn't know well.
A waste of money/time...
— It's a waste of time reading that book. It's rubbish.
— It's a waste of money buying things you don't need.
Go -ing
We use go -ing for a number of activities (especially sports):
go boating go hiking go shopping

go bowling go hunting go sightseeing

go camping go jogging go skating
go riding go mountain climbing go skiing
go dancing go running go swimming
go fishing go sailing go window shopping
— How often do you go swimming?
— I'm going skiing next week.
— I have to go shopping this morning.
— Let's go sightseeing tomorrow.
— We went camping at the weekend.
Infinitive or -ing?
After the verbs below, we can use the -ing form or the infinitive normally without much difference of
meaning.
begin can't bear like hate start
continue can't stand love prefer intend
— He began looking/to look for a job six months ago.
— I like smimming/to swim in the sea.
— She prefers working/to work at night.
Like
In British English, we often use like +-ing form to say that we "enjoy" something.
279
— I like going to the cinema. (= I enjoy it.)
— I don't like driving, (= I don't enjoy it.)
We use like+ to infinitive to say that we choose to do something because we think it is a good idea.
— I like to go to the dentist's for a check-up every 6 months. (= I think it is a good thing to do, although I
may not enjoy it.)
— I like to wash my hair twice a week. (This doesn't mean that I enjoy it; it means that I think it is a good
thing to do.)
— Tom likes to do the washing-up immediately after the meal.
After the verbs below we can use the -ing form or the infinitive with a different meaning.
remember forget try stop go on regret
1. Remember/forget doing and remember/forget to do
We use remember/forget + -ing form when we remember or forget something after we do it.
— I remember going to the 1972 Olympics. (I went there and now I remember this.)
— Have you forgotten giving me the money? (You gave me the money.)
We use remember/forget + to infinitive when we remember or forget something before we have to do it.
— Please remember to post the letter. (= don't forget to post it.)
— I remembered to go to the chemist's for you. Here's your medicine. (I remembered, then I went there.)
— Don't forget to give me the money.
2. Try doing and try to do
We use try + -ing form to mean "make an experiment" — do something and see what happens.
— "The car won't start." "Why don't we try pushing it?"
— "I can't find anywhere to live." "Why don't you try putting an advertisement in the newspaper?" (= do
this to see if it helps you to find a place to live)
We use try + to infinitive to mean "make an effort" — see if you can do something.
— I tried to push the car up the hill, but I couldn't move it.
— I was very tired. I tried to keep my eyes open but I couldn't.
3. Stop doing and stop to do.
We use stop + -ing form to say what we do before we stop.
— I'm a vegetarian. I stopped eating meat 5 years ago. (= I ate meat up to 5 years ago, then I stopped.)
We use stop + to infinitive to say why we stop.
—After I'd been working for 3 hours, I stopped to eat lunch. (= I stopped in order to eat lunch.)
4. Go on doing and go on to do
We use go on + -ing form to talk about something that continues.
— She went on talking about her holiday all evening. (= She continued talking...)
We use go on+ to infinitive to talk about a change to something different.
— She spoke about her son, then she went on to talk about her daughter.
5. Regret doing and regret to do
We use regret + -ing form to say we regret something that we have already done.
— I regret saying that he was an idiot. (I said that he was an idiot.)
We use regret + to infinitive to say we regret something that We have to do now.
280
281
— I regret to say that I won't be able to come to the meeting on Monday.
Note that regret + to infinitive is rather formal.
Illustrative situations Gerund or to + infinitive (same meaning)
John: How about coming for a picnic today? We could go to
the lake. Mary: I like having picnics but I'm afraid it will start to rain
as soon as we get there. Look at the clouds. John: Well, I really don't like staying in on Sundays. It's so
boring. Mary: I prefer to do something active at the weekend too but
I can't bear having picnics in the rain!
Gerund or to + infinitive (different meaning)
Mother: Terry, I'm just wondering. I don't remember locking the front door of the house. Did you remember
to do it?
Terry: Stop worrying about it now! It's too late! Anyway, there's nothing worth stealing.
Mother: I always forget to lock the door. I really must try to think about it next time.
The gerund and the verbal noun
In the English language besides the gerund which is half-verb, half-noun, there is a pure verbal noun
ending in -ing. Let's draw a parallel between these two forms:
1. The gerund is not used 1. The verbal noun may be used with an article.
with an article.
I want you to give my hair a good
brushing.
Who does the cooking in this house7
2. The gerund has no plural 2. The verbal noun may be used in the form.
plural.
282
There are three turnings to the right. Our likings are regulated by our circumstances.
3. The gerund of a transitive 3 A verbal noun cannot take a direct verb takes a direct object.
object; it takes a prepositional object. He received more and more The reading of the paper
made letters, so many that he had me very excited.
given up reading them.
4. The gerund may be modi- 4. The verbal noun may be modified fied by an adverb.
by an adjective.
I was tired of sitting still in the The early coming of spring
library through a whole long makes me feel happy,
morning.
•
Practice
и / 1. Make up short dialogues.
Requests: Would you mind + gerund
A: Have the windows been cleaned?
(a) B: No. Would you mind cfeaning them?
(b) B: No. I wonder if you'd mind cleaning them.
Have/has the...
1. beds been made? 9. shopping been done?
2. table been laid? 10. sheets been ironed ?
3. stairs been swept? 11. tea, been made?
4. onions been cut up? 12. laundry been collected?
5. washing-up been done? 13. letters been posted?
6. gas been paid? 14. sandwiches been cut?
7. furniture been polished? 15. potatoes been peeled?
8. dining-room been dusted? 16. chips been fried?
like/liked + gerund
(a) A (in tones of sympathy): You have to make beds, I suppose. В (cheerfully): Yes, but I like making
beds!
Twenty years later, Susan's children have left home, her
283
husband has retired and they can afford some help in house and garden. Her friend reminds her of her
former busy life, (b) A: You had to make beds, I suppose.
B: Yes, but I liked making beds!
This exercise could also be done with (c) don 't/didn 't mind or (d) enjoy/enjoyed.
(a) You have to...I suppose.
1. do housework,
2. live economically,
3. shop around,
4. look after the children,
5. mind their clothes,
6. take them to school,
7. help them with their homework,
8. read to them,
9. answer their questions,
10. attend their school concerts,
11. go swimming with them,
12. give children's parties,
13. meet your husband at the station, (Use my.)
14. listen to your husband's office stories, (Use my.)
15. entertain your husband's colleagues, (Use my.)
16. iron shirts,
17. knit pullovers,
18. look after the garden,
19. cut the grass.
(b) You had to ... I suppose.
1. do housework,
2. live economically, etc.

like/dislike/hate/don 't mind/don't care for/enjoy + gerund

The life of an au pair.
A: T have to cook and wash up. (a)B: So have 1.1 like cooking but (I) hate washing up. (b) B: So have 1.1
enjoy cooking but (I) don't care for washing up
284
(c) B: So have 1.1 don't mind cooking but (I) dislike washing up. This drill can also be done in the past
tense:
A: I had to cook and wash up.
B: So had 1.1 liked cooking but (I) hated washing up.
I have to:
1. vacuum carpets and dust furniture.
2. make beds and clean rooms.
3. answer the door and answer the phone.
4. do 'the flowers and polish the silver.
5. buy fruit at the market and carry it home.
6. take the children to school and hurry home afterwards.
7. collect the children from school and help them with their homework.
8. talk to the children and teach them French.
9. go to the beach with the children and play in the sand.
10. put the children to bed and tidy up after them.
11. look after the baby and share a room with him.
12. give the baby his bath and wash his clothes.
13. walk the dogs and brush them.
14. attend classes and do homework.
prefer... to + gerund
A: My brother plays tennis but hardly ever watches it. B: My brother prefers playing (tennis) to watching
(it) too. (slight stress on my)
My brother...
1. talks; he hardly ever listens.
2. spends money but hardly ever saves it.
3. phones; he hardly ever writes.
4. listens to the radio; he hardly ever watches TV.
5. paints pictures; he hardly ever takes photographs.
6. takes taxis; he hardly ever waits for a bus. (Use buses.) 1. drives; he hardly ever lets me drive.
8. cycles; he hardly ever walks.
9. eats out; he hardly ever cooks for himself.
10. stays at home (for his holidays); he hardly ever goes abroad.
285
•11. rushes about (during his holidays); he hardly ever relaxes 12. takes people to restaurants; he hardly
ever invites them to his house.
what about? + gerund, would rather + infinitive without to, would prefer + infinitive
In this drill the prompt only is given and students must form both the question (A) and the answer (B).
Students could work in pairs, one being A and the other B.
Prompt: walk on ... wait for a bus
A: What about walking on? Or would you rather wait for a bus?
(a) B: I'd rather walk on (than wait for a bus). (Words in brackets may be omitted.)
(b) B: I'd prefer to walk on.
This drill could also be done with I'm against/for or I'm in favour of+ gerunds:
(c) В: I'm against waiting for a bus.
(d) B: I'm for waiting for a bus.
(e) В: I'm in favour of waiting for a bus.
(The speaker in (d) and (e) does not agree with the speaker in (a), (b) and (c).
Prompts:
' 1. write ... phone
2. camp ... stay in a hotel
3. deliver it by hand ... post it
4. drive ... fly
5. mend the old one ... buy a new one
6. go as we are ... change into evening dress
7. get a job ... ask our parents to send us money
8. finish it tonight... leave it till tomorrow
9. try to fix it ourselves ... send for an electrician
10. wash the sheets at home ... take them to the launderette
11. tune the piano ourselves ... get a piano tuner
12. borrow a TV set... hire one
13. buy a cat... put down rat poison
14. ring the dentist today... put it off till tomorrow
15. start now ... wait for Bill
16. hitch-hike... cycle
17. stay at home next weekend... go away
18. keep some... eat it all now
avoid + gerund
Дп old man is talking to his doctor.
A: I travelled overnight and felt awful afterwards. B: Then try to avoid travelling overnight.
/... and felt awful afterwards.
1. got very angry 8. read in a bad light
2. overate 9. carried a heavy suitcase
(Use suitcases.)
3. drank too much 10. played cards all night
4. went to bed too late 11. took sleeping pills
5. rushed about 12. travelled by jet
6. stood for a long time 13. worked all weekend
7. made a long speech 14. quarrelled with my (Use speeches.) neighbours
enjoy + gerund
A: I had a lovely time yesterday. I wrote letters all day. B: Do you actually enjoy writing letters? (stress on
enjoy)
I had a lovely time yesterday. I... all day.
1. peeled potatoes 7. practised the piano
2. washed windows 8. worked in the garden
3. mended socks 9.cooked
4. cleaned shoes 10. baked
5. sewed on buttons 11. looked after the children
6. ironed shirts 12. baby-sat
fancy/imagine + gerund
A: She doesn't go to bed at all! B: Fancy not going to bed at all!
287
286
or В: Imagine not going to bed at all!
A: He lost all his savings!
B: Fancy losing one's/your savings!
or B: Imagine losing one's/your savings!
1. My sister doesn't enjoy her days off.
2. Tom doesn't know his own age.
3. Bill refused a rise in salary.
4. She was an au pair girl for ten years.
5. She never has a night out.
6. She baby-sits every night.
7. They paid £200 for a single meal.
8. They watch television for thirty hours a week.
9. The mother doesn't know where her baby is.
10. She got married at fourteen.
11. She waited twenty years for him. (Omit for him.}
12. He works a 70-hour week.
admit/deny/bе suspected/ be accused of+ gerund

A: Did he say he had stolen the documents?

(a) B: Yes, he admitted stealing them.
(b) B: No, he denied stealing them.
(c) В: No, but he is suspected of stealing them.
(d) B: No, but he has been accused of stealing them.
Did he say he had...
1. forged the signature?
2. taken part in the robbery?
3. fired at the policeman?
4. attacked the cashier?
5. shot the chauffeur?
6. received the stolen goods?
7. sold the secret information?
8. given false evidence?
9. bribed the officials?
288
mind/object to + him/his + gerund
Tom, who has a very relaxed attitude to work, has just joined the staff- A senior employee, shocked by his
behaviour, points out his "Crimes" to the manager. But the manager, who is about to retire, doesn't mind
much.
A (in shocked tones): He kisses your secretary!
(a) B: Oh, I don't mind him* kissing my secretary!
But when this manager resigns and a new man is appointed, things are going to be different.
A: He kisses your secretary!
(b) B: I object to him * kissing my secretary.
* HIS is technically the more correct form, but HIM is more usual in spoken English.
He...
1. spends two hours having lunch!
2. writes his own lectures during office hours!
3. gets your secretary to type his private letters!
4. arrives late!
5. goes home early!
6. wears jeans!
7. chews gum!
8. puts his feet on the desk!
9. sleeps at his desk !
10. phones his friends from the office!
11. argues with clients !
12. parks his motor cycle in the hall!
13. drops ash on the carpet!
14. leaves burning cigarettes about!
15. smokes your cigars!
prevent +object + (from) + gerund
Next to Tom's house is a nice open, grassy place, where people come for picnics. This annoys Tom, but
his friend explains that he can't do anything to stop it.

A (angrily): They park here! >

В : It's very difficult to prevent people (from) parking here.
They..
1. have picnics here! 6. lie about almost naked!
2. light fires! 7. use terrible language!
3. leave litter! 8. play their radios loudly!
4. bang their car doors! 9. fry sausages!
5. make a horrible noise!
couldn't help + gerund
A (accusingly): You got lost! B: I couldn't help getting lost.
1— 8 John wanted Bill to remain absolutely still. Bill, however, couldn't manage this.
You...
1. coughed! ' 5. smiled!
2. sneezed!- 6. moved!
3. laughed! 7. sighed!
4. shivered! -4 8. fell asleep!
9 — 16 Ann is just generally disapproving of Bill's actions.
You...
9. came in late. 13. got into debt.
10. made a noise. 14. saw what was in the letter.
11. woke the people in 15. bought that dog. the next flat. 16. wrote that letter.
12. caught a cold.
keep + gerund
The new secretary isn't a great success. A colleague tries to defend her but the boss is clearly very
dissatisfied.
A: It isn't very terrible to break a cup now and then. B: But she keeps breaking cups, (stress on keeps.)
290
it isn 't very terrible to . now and then.
1. come late 11. forget to switch the lights off
2. go home early
3. take time off 12. look out of the window
4. make mistakes
5. mix up appoint- 13. ring up one's friends (Use her.) ments
6. argue 14. ask for days off
7. answer back
8. lose documents 15. have headaches
9. interrupt 16. switch on one's radio (Use her.) 10. leave the safe 17. spell у our name
wrong (Use my.)
open
remember + gerund
Peter annoyed his host, but doesn't remember much about the
party.
A: He says you spoilt his party.
B: I don't remember spoiling his party.
He says you...
1. arrived drunk. 6. called him names.
2. brought two drunk 7. broke a vase, friends.
3. refused to leave. 8. started a fight.
4. shouted at him. 9. made an awful lot of noise.
5. swore at him.

remember + him/his etc. + gerund

Paul didn't enjoy his holiday. But Ann doesn't seem to remember various disasters.
A: Breakfast was late.
B: I don't remember it/its being late.
Use pronoun object: it, him, her, you, them, or possessive adjective: its, his, her,your, their
291
1. The receptionist was rude. (Use her)
2. The people opposite sang all night.
3. They forgot to bring our early morning tea.
4. They refused to clean my car.
5. The lift broke down.
6. The kitchen staff went on strike. 7.1 lost my camera. (Use you/your.)
8. The taxi drivers cheated us.
9. It rained nearly all the time. 10. The hall porter insulted me.
11.1 suffered from food poisoning.
12. The hotel overcharged us.
13. They mixed up our reservations.
stop + gerund
A disagreeable flat-mate.
A: He plays the radio all night.
(a) B: You should tell him to stop playing the radio all night.
(b) B: Why don't you tell him to stop playing the radio all
night?
He...
1. argues all the time.
2. chews tobacco.
3. sleepwalks.
4. talks to himself.
5. follows me about.
6. listens to my telephone conversations.
7. annoys the neighbours.
8. hangs his washing out of the window.
9. borrows my things.
10. uses bad language.
11. parks outside my garage.
12. steals my apples.
13. bums rubbish in the garden.
14. opens my letters.
15. is rude to my friends.
16. plays the radio all night.
292
stop + object + gerund
A: He played cards. His mother blamed me for it. (stress on me) B: But how could you stop him playing
cards? (stress on stop or you)
Це... His mother blamed me for it.
1. left home.
2. gave up shaving.
3. grew his hair.
4. threw away his suits.
5. went about barefoot.
6. wore dirty jeans.
7. tore up his passport.
8. gave up his job.
9. lived on National Assistance.
10. got married.
11. started a family.
12. played the guitar in the Underground.
try + gerund
A: Do you think it would help if we pressed the red button? B: Yes, let's try pressing the red button.
Do you think it would help if we...
1. put the cake back in the oven?
2. cut the sandwiches the day before?
3. ate less fat?
4. took more exercise?
5. opened the windows?
6. turned down the central heating?
7. moved the piano to another room? **
8. locked the doors at night?
9. painted the ceiling dark green?
10. paid the bills weekly?
11. filled the radiator with hot water?
12. cooked it in oil?
13. washed it in cold water?
293
suggest + gerund
Two boys lost some of their money during the holidays.
A: Why didn't you hitch-hike home?
B: Well, I suggested hitch-hiking but Tom didn't agree.
Why didn't you.
1. leave at once?
2. look for a cheaper hotel?
3. borrow a tent?
4. sleep on the beach?
5. get a job in a restaurant?
6. offer to work as guides?
7. sell your cameras? (Use out)
8. ring me?
9. tell your parents?
want/need + gerund
A: You should tidy the garden. B: Yes, it wants/needs tidying.
You should...
1. paint your windows.
2. sweep the steps.
3. clean the yard.
4. paint the fence.
5. cut the grass.
6. water the roses.
7. pick the peaches.
8. rebuild your wall.
9. mend the fence.
fr
be afraid of/risk + gerund
Alan and Bill are discussing certain actions by Tom. Alan suggests a reason for them and Bill agrees.
A: I expect he didn't want to get wet. (a)B: Yes, I suppose he was afraid of getting wet. (b)B: Yes, he
probably didn't want to risk getting wet.
294
I expect he didn 't want to...
1. miss his train.
2. overload the car.
3. get a parking ticket.
4. annoy the boss.
5. lose his job.
6. break his neck.
7. make things worse.
8. wake everyone up.
9. press the wrong button.
10. upset his wife.
11. catch cold.
12. spoil his new suit.
13. shock the neighbours.
14. attract attention.
be interested in + gerund
George wants Bill to co-operate with him and offers all sorts of inducements. But Bill is not ambitious.
A: You might make a lot of money!
B: But I'm not interested in making a lot of money.
You might...
1. become a celebrity!
2. be invited to marvellous parties!
3. meet important people!
4. appear on television!
5. take part in radio programmes!
6. influence public opinion!
7. travel first class all over the world!
8. see your name in lights!
9. live in luxury!
10. drive a Rolls Royce!
11. buy an island in the Pacific!
295
feel like + gerund
One member of the family feels energetic; the other doesn't.
(a) A: Let's go for a walk.
B: I don't feel like going for a walk, (slight stress on feel)
This could also be used as an indirect speech exercise:
(b) A: Let's go for a walk.
В (reporting A's suggestion): He suggests/suggested going for a walk.
Let's...
1. walk to the village.
2. take the dogs out.
3. climb the mountain.
4. run round the block.
5. carry the boxes upstairs.
6. play tennis.
7. swim across the river.
8. pick apples.
9. look for mushrooms.
10. move the piano.
11. tidy the cupboard.
12. sweep the stairs.
13. repaper the sitting-room.
14. paint the greenhouse.
15. rebuild the garage.
for + gerund (punish someone for/apologize for/ get into trouble for)
Tom is at a boarding school. His father has just received his half term report and is reading it out to his
wife.
A: Tom broke sixteen windows during his first week! (a)B: Well, I hope they punished him for breaking
sixteen windows.
(b)B: Well, I hope he apologized for breaking sixteen windows.
296
(с)В: Poor Tom. I expect he got into trouble for breaking sixteen windows.
Tom-
1. kicked a football through the greenhouse roof!
2. drove the headmaster's car into the village pond!
3. refused to wear uniform!
4. was rude to the teachers!
5. burnt down the gymnasium!
6. poured milk into the grand piano!
7. sold the school tape recorders!
8. cheated at exams!
9. wrote things on the walls!
10. woke everyone up when he came in!
have difficulty (in) + gerund
A: Did you find the house quite easily?
B: No, I had a lot of difficulty (in) finding the house.
Did you... quite easily?
1. fit everything into your case (Use my)
2. start the car
3. read the map
4. cross the river
5. find a place to park
6. put up the tent
7. light the fire
8. keep warm
9. understand him
10. make yourself understood
11. explain what you wanted
12. arrange a loan
it's no use/good + gerund it's no use/good me/ту + gerund
A: Why didn't you tell him? (a) B: It's no use telling him.
or
297

В: It's no good telling him. (b) В: It's no use me/my telling him.
Why didn't you...
1. talk to him?
2. remind him?
3. ask him?
4. complain?
5. ring him?
6. refuse?
7. threaten him?
8. offer a reward?
9. warn him?
10. go to the embassy?
11. demand compensation?
12. leave?
13. oppose him?
insist on + gerund, insist on me/ту + gerund
(a) A: Tom painted the ceiling black, didn't he?
B: Yes, he insisted on painting the ceiling black.
(b) A: You painted the ceiling black, didn't you?
B: Yes. Bill insisted on me/my painting the ceiling black.
(a) Tom... didn't he?
1. wore a tie,
2. changed trains,
3. started at midnight,
4. travelled in the guard's van,
5. sent for the Fire Brigade,
6. burnt the film,
7. took the dogs,
8. wrote to the papers,
9. slept in the attic,
10. consulted a fortune-teller,
11. fetched a doctor,
12. stopped the traffic,
13. searched the house,
298
14. rang the police,
15. waited till the end,
16. signed the petition,
You... didn't you'''
in spite of+ gerund
Prompt: He spends very little.
A: He is quite rich.
B: But in spite of being rich, he spend
1 Hft ant the inh HP knnw« nn ^пя
Is very little.
. He got the job. He knows no Spanish.
2. He got there first. He started last.
3. He doesn't make much progress. He practises a lot.
4. She didn't lose any weight. She dieted for six months.
5. He never made enough to live on. He worked hard.
6. He never mastered the subject. He studied for ten years.
7. He didn't take good photographs. He used very expensive cameras.
8. She never looked smart. She paid a lot for her clothes.
9. She is always late for work. She lives quite near the office.
10. He passed his exams. He did no work.
11. It didn't sell well. It was widely advertised.
12. He was always looked on as a foreigner. He spent his life in this country.
look forward to + gerund
A: When you get home you'll be able to ski, won't you? B: Yes, I'm looking forward to skiing.
ou get home you 'II be able... won 'tyou?
1. swim in the sea,
2. skate,
3. ride your horse again, (Use my.}
4. meet your friends,(Use my.)
5. speak your own language again,(Use my.}
6. fish in the river,
299
7. have a good holiday,
8. sunbathe,
9. take your dog for walks, (Use my.)
10. buy a lot of new clothes,
11. earn more money,
12. get a good job,
13. continue your university course, (Use my.)
14. start your training, (Use my.)
15. go out without an umbrella,
16. open a language school,
17. write a book about your experiences, (Use my.)
there's no point in + gerund, what's the point of+ gerund
A: The shops don't open till 9 but we'd better be there b> 8 (a)B: But if the shops don't open till 9 there's
no point in
being there by 8. (b)B: But if the shops don't open till 9 what's the point of
being there by 8?
1. The train doesn't leave till 9 but we'd better set out for the station at 7. 2. We aren't allowed to take
photos but I'll bring my camera. 3. We can't park near the theatre but we'll take the car.
4. The pills aren't any good but we may as well finish the bottle.
5. We haven't any money but let's read the menus outside restaurants. 6. It's a job for men only but I'll
advise Ann to apply for it. 7. None of the guests smoke but I'll provide them with ashtrays. 8. Tom hasn't
any chance of getting elected but I'll vote for him. 9. The plane doesn't land till 8 but we'd better be at the
airport by 7. 10. I'm sure it's not going to rain but I'll take an umbrella. 11. They don't drink alcohol but I'll
offer them gin. 12. It's too cold to swim but pack a swimsuit. 13.1 know he'll refuse but I'll ask all the
same. (Omit all the same.) 14.1 don't want to buy anything but we may as well look round the shop.
succeed in + gerund
A: He reached the top in the end.
В (surprised): Oh, he succeeded in reaching it, did he?
300
fie... in the end.
1. passed his driving test
2. finished the portrait
3. wrote his thesis
4. started the car
5. caught the plane
6. reached the finishing line
7. repaired the radio
8. got his visa
9. solved the problem
10. climbed the mountain
11. fixed the aerial
12. found a house (Use one.)
II. Read these situations and write three sentences with used to as in the example.
eg Jane is American. She came to Britain and found driving on the left difficult.
a) At first she wasn't used to driving on the left.
b) But soon she got used to driving on the left.
c) Now she has no problems. She is used to driving on the left.
1. Juan came to England from Spain. In Spain he always had dinner late in the evening. But in England
dinner was at 6 o'clock. Juan found this strange at first.
a) At first he wasn't...
b) But after some time he got...
я с) Now he finds it quite normal. He...
2. Diana is a nurse. She started working nights two years ago. At first she found it strange and didn't like
it.
a) At first she...
b) But after a while...
c) Now she doesn't mind it at all. She...
Ш. Respond to the comments.
eg That production of La Boheme is terrible.
301

Yes, I heard/not worth

Yes, I heard it's not worth seeing.
1. That new ballet has had great reviews. — Yes, I heard/ worth 2. Should we go for a walk? It'll be dark
soon. — No,/not worth/now 3. Shall we watch that new TV programme? It's supposed to be very funny. —
Yes, I heard/worth 4. What's the book like? Is it good? — Yes/worth 5. What do you think of that new
production of Macbeth? Is it good? — No, I didn't like it./ not worth 6. What is the car like? Is it good? —
Yes, I think/ worth 7. Did you like the exhibition? — Yes, /worth
IV. Here is some information about Tom when he was a child.
1. He was in hospital when he was four. 2. He went to Paris when he was eight. 3. He fell into the river. 4.
He cried on his first day at school. 5. He said he wanted to be a doctor. 6. He was bitten by a dog.
He can still remember 1, 2 and 4. But he can't remember 3, 5 and 6.
Make sentences beginning He can remember... or He can't remember...
1. He can remember being in hospital.
V. In this exercise you have to put the verb into the correct form -ing or to + infinitive.
1. Please remember (post) this letter. 2. A: You lent me some money a few months ago. B: Did I? That's
strange. I don't remember (lend) you any money. 3. When you see Tom, remember (give) him my regards,
won't you? 4. Someone must have taken my bag. I clearly remember (leave) it by the window and now it
has gone. 5. Did you remember (phone) Ann? — Oh no, 1 completely forgot. 6. I'll never forget (visit)
Istanbul in 1983. 7. Don't forget (post) the letter.
VI. Look at these sentences with the verb stop. Which one means "stop somewhere and eat something"?
Which one means "quit eating somewhere "?
302
Why don't we stop to eat at that restaurant? Why don't we stop eating at that restaurant?
complete the following sentences according to the context.
1 . Why don't we (stop/eat) at that restaurant. It has great food. 2. Why don't we (stop/eat) at that
restaurant. The food is awful. 3 . Why don't we (stop/drink) coffee? It isn't good for our health.
4. You should really (stop/smoke). It isn't good for you.
5. Would you like to (stop/have) lunch? I'm getting hungry.
6. It (stopped/rain) a few minutes ago.
7. He (stopped/talk) to his friend whom he hadn't seen for a long tune.
8. She (stopped/talk) when I entered the room. I guessed they had been talking about me.
VII. Paraphrase using without -ing.
eg She ran five miles. She didn't stop.
She ran five miles without stopping. eg He left the room. Nobody saw him.
He left the room without anyone seeing him.
1. He translated the article. He didn't use a dictionary. 2. Look right and left before you cross the road.
Don't cross... 3. She got married. Nobody knew about it. 4. They came to the wedding. They were not
invited. 5. He could tell the funniest joke. He didn't even smile.
VIII. In this exercise you have to read a sentence and then make a second sentence with the same
meaning using gerunds.
eg I phoned Ann and then I went out. After... After phoning Ann I went out.
1 . Tom went to bed but first he had a hot drink. Before... 2. The plane took off and soon afterwards it
crashed. Soon after... 3. We didn't eat at home. We went to a restaurant instead. Instead of... 4- When I
woke up I felt much better. On... 5. You put people's jives in danger if you drive dangerously. You put
people's lives to danger by... 5. He hurt his leg but he managed to win the race. to spite of... 6. George
took more exercise and so lost weight. %••• 7. She smiled when she saw him. At... 8. After I have a short
303
rest I'll have my dinner. After... 9. He was busy but he helped me. In spite of...
IX. Complete each sentence using gerunds.^
*
A. 1, Do you have any objections to. 2. Is there any way of... 3. There isn't much chance of... 4. This is the
most perfect instrument for... 5. She has a bad habit of. 6. What is the most effective method of... 7. He
has no hope of... 8. I've got no experience in... 9.1 don't like the idea of... 10. What is the reason for... 11.
You should have seen her surprise at... 12. It was very kind of you to have taken the trouble of... 13. The
idea of... was extremely exciting. 14. There was little hope of... 15. If you work hard at your job, you have
a good chance of... 16. At the party I had the pleasure of... 17. He displayed no interest in... 18. She hates
the idea of... 19.1 have no intention of... 20. He is well-known for his skill in... 21.1 think she doesn't
realise the importance of... 22. There is some risk of... 23. He is in the habit of... 24. He was born with the
gift of... 25. What are the advantages of...?
B. 1. At weekends I enjoy... 2. This evening I fancy... 3. I'm looking forward to... 4. I'm thinking of... 5. This
evening I feel like... 6.1 think people should stop... 7. I've always dreamed of... 8. He admitted... 9. Have
you finished...? 10. She suggested... 11. I really don't mind ... 12. I normally try to avoid... 13. I
anticipate... 14. We can't risk... 15. Would you mind ... so much noise? I'm trying to study. 16. You can use
scissors for... 17. A vacuum cleaner is used for ... 18. She is not used to ... 19. They are excited about...
20.... is a bad habit. 21. The only remedy for such a headache as mine is... 22. We were for... 23. He was
against... 24. I'm in favour of... 25. There is nothing like... 26. It's no use... 27.1 can see no sense in... 28.
His hobby was... 29. We were tired of... 30. The car wants(needs)... 31. The idea is worth... 32. He left
without... 33. Fancy him... 34. They didn't succeed in... 35. You are responsible for... 35.1 was surprised
at...
Self check
I. Use the gerund in the active or passive form.
1.1 prefer (drive) to (drive). 2. Stop (argue) and start (work).
304
3 He liked neither (read) nor (read) aloud to. 4. It's no use (cry) over spilt milk, (proverb) 5. Why do you
avoid (see) me? 6. He tried to avoid (see). 7.1 suggest (hold) another meeting next week, g. He finished
(speak) and sat down. 9. We insist on (send) him there at once. 10. He insists on (send) there instead of
me. 11. If you can't turn the key, try (put) some oil in the lock. 12. He showed no sign of (know) them. 13.
She showed no sign of (impress). 14.1 was annoyed at (interrupt) every other moment. 15. You can't
make an omelette without (break) eggs, (proverb) 16. He is thinking of (leave) his job and (go) to America.
17. She dreams of (invite) to the party. 18. After (read) this article you will give up (smoke). 19. On
(introduce) they easily fell to (talk). 20. In (discuss) this problem they touched upon some very interesting
items. 21. The equipment must go through a number of tests before (install). 22. The idea is worth
(consider). 23. If you put your money into that business you risk (lose) every penny. 24. Imagine (live) with
someone who never stops (talk). 25. He hates (remind) people of their duties or (remind) of his. 26. The
boys were punished for (break) the window. 27. The old man could not stand (make) fun of. 28. Is there
anything here worth (buy)? 29. You'd better consult the lawyer before (decide) to buy the property. 30.
She was so eagerly looking forward to (give) the leading part to play that she was greatly disappointed at
not even (offer) it. 31. Would you mind (put) your pet snake somewhere else? 32. By (work) day and night
he succeeded in (finish) the job in time. 33. He has a scheme for (make) grass grow in winter. 34. He
liked to do things without (disturb) anyone or (disturb). 35. She reproached me for not (keep) my promise.
36.1 don't feel like (work); what about (go) to a disco instead? 37. If a thing is worth (do) at all it is worth
(do) well, (proverb) 38. The boy was afraid of (punish) and hid himself. 39. She seemed sorry for (be)
rude to me. 40.1 hate (borrow) money. 41. After (talk) for ten minutes I succeeded in (convince) him that
there was no danger. 42.1 remember (read) a review of that book and (think) I'd like to get it. 43. He
stopped for a moment and then went on (speak).
"• Supply an appropriate verb form and preposition (if necessary).
1. Alice isn't interested (look) for a new job. 2. Henry is excited (leave) for India. 3. You are capable (do)
better work. 4. I have
305
no excuse (be) late. 5. I'm accustomed (have) a big breakfast. 6. The rain prevented us (complete) the
work. 7. Fred is always complaining (have) a headache. 8. Instead (study), Margaret went to a ball game
with some of her friends. 9. Thank you (help) me carry the packages to the post office. 10. Mrs Grant
insisted (know) the whole truth. 11. He showed us how to get to his house (draw) a map. 12. You should
take advantage (live) here. 13. Laura had a good reason (go, not) to class yesterday. 14. Everyone in the
neighbourhood participated (search) for the lost child. 15. I apologized to Diane (make) her wait for me.
16. The weather is terrible tonight. I don't blame you (want, not) to go to the meeting.
17. Who is responsible (wash) and (dry) the dishes after dinner 1?
18. In addition (go) to school full-time, Sam has a part-time job.
19. The angry look on his face stopped me (speak) my mind.
20. Where should we go for dinner tonight? Would you object (go) to an Italian restaurant? 21. The
mayor made another public statement for the purpose (clarify) the new tax proposal. 22. The thief was
accused (steal) a woman's purse. 23. The jury found Mr Adams guilty (take) money from the company he
worked for and (keep) it for himself. 24. Bill isn't used (wear) a suit and tie every day. 25. I'm going to visit
my family during the school vacation. I'm looking forward (eat) rny mother's cooking and (sleep) in my
own bed. 26.1 have a good reason (be) late. 27. It's getting late. I'm worried (miss) my train. 28. I'm not
used (drive) in the mountains. 29. Nothing can stop me (go) there. 30.1 apologized to my friend (be) late.
31. When Beth got tired, she stopped (work). 32. Would you mind (open) the door? Thanks. 33. The
police officer told him to stop, but he kept (drive). 34.1 enjoy (have) a long walk every morning. 35. I
would like to have some friends over. I'm thinking (invite) them to a dinner party. 36. He told a really funny
joke. We couldn't stop (laugh)! 37. Where are you considering (go) for vacation. 38. Sometimes I put off
(do) my homework. 39.1 quit (read) comic books when I was twelve years old. 40. You can't postpone
(make) that decision much longer. 41.1 wanted to go to Mexico. Sally suggested (go) to Hawaii. 42. Tony
mentioned (take) the bus to school instead of walking. 43.1 appreciate (be) able to study in peace and
quiet. 44. We went (sail) yesterday and enjoyed it very much. 45. Instead (ask) for help on each arithmetic
problem, you should use your book and try to figure out the answers yourself. 46.1 look forward (see) you
next time I'm in town. I'll let
306
u know ahead of time so that we can plan to get together. 47. Alice told us that she was tired (wash) the
dishes every night. 48. The four-year-old was blamed (break) the glass candy dish. 49.1 tried to prevent
him (come). 50. You should listen to other people instead (talk) about yourself all the time. 51. What do
you feel (have) for dinner? Does chicken and rice sound good? 52. Frank believes animals should be
protected from hunters. He objects (kill) wild animals for sport. 53. Please don't argue (finish) your
homework. Just do it. 54. Mario spent all month preparing for the tennis match, but in spite (practise) for
many hours, he lost the match to Ivan. 55. She is thinking (become) a rock star. 56.1 can't stand (watch)
romantic films. 57.1 have difficulty (get) to school on time. 58. He is good (organize) parties. 59. He is
fond (collect) things. 60. He insisted (give) that job. 61. These shoes want (mend). 62. The baby liked
(wash). 63.1 don't see any way (do) it.
III. Translate from Russian into English.
Gerund as subject, complement of subject
1. Переходить реку в этом месте опасно. 2. Сон на открытом воздухе очень полезен. 3. Играть в
теннис интересно. 4. Курение опасно для здоровья. 5. То, что они ушли до окончания концерта,
привлекло внимание. 6. Изучение иностранного языка занимает длительное время. 7. Интересно
встречать новых людей. 8. Спорить с ним — это только понапрасну терять время. 9. Работа
учителя требует терпения и мастерства. 10. Тратить деньги легче, чем их зарабатывать. 11.
Слушать его рассказы интересно. 12. Эта работа отнюдь не легкая. 13. Тем, что ты будешь
надоедать ему, ты только рассердишь его больше. 14. Занятия спортом принесли ей большую
пользу. 15. Важно ежедневно заниматься утренней гимнастикой. 16. Мой любимый вид спорта —
плавание. 17. Ее мечта — стать артисткой. 18. Ее хобби — вышивание. 19. В такое время года есть
только одна возможность добраться туда — это самолетом.
Verb + gerund
1- Дождь помешал мне придти вовремя. 2. Вам следует прекратить купаться в море, так как погода
стала очень холодной.
307
3. Я поблагодарил его за то, что он купил такие интересные книги. 4. Я помню, что меня уже
спрашивали об этом. 5 я думаю поехать в Крым осенью. 6. Доктор велел ей избегать сидеть на
солнце. 7. Он рискует тем, что может потерять все свои деньги. 8. Я сожалею о том, что
поделилась с ней своей тайной. 9. Он непрерывно посматривал на часы и ровно в 3 сказал, что
должен уйти. 10. Вы не возражаете, если я воспользуюсь вашим телефоном? 11. Когда мы
услышали конец рассказа, мы не могли не рассмеяться. 12. Вы можете рассчитывать на то, что он
даст вам точную информацию. 13. Доктор настаивает на том, чтобы он провел отпуск на юге. 14.
Продолжайте рассказывать вашу историю. 15. Он не любил, KOI да ему читали. 16. Пол
необходимо покрасить. 17. Я терпеть не могу стоять в очередях. 18. Она отрицала, что
встречалась с ним раньше. 19. Ребенок заслуживает, чтобы его похвали щ 20. Я помню, что
покупала эту книгу, но не помню, куда я се положила. 21. Моя сестра приезжает в мае. Я с
нетерпением жду встречи с ней. 22. Твой костюм нужно погладить. 23. Благодарю вас за то, что вы
присмотрели за моим ребенком. 24. Извините, что я еще раз беспокою вас. 25. Хотя было поздно,
он продолжал работать. 26. Я думаю вам понравится жить в этой гостинице. 27. Мы не можем
положиться на то, что он закончит эту работу в срок. 28. Ей очень нравится, когда ее хвалят. 29. Он
возражал против того, чтобы его положили в бочь-ницу. 30. Мне не хочется идти в ресторан. Я бы
предпочла сходить в кино. 31. Я помню что-то слышал об этой пьесе. Стоит ли ее посмотреть? 32.
Все зависит от того, выиграют ли они этот матч. 33. Его обвинили в том, что он украл деньги. 34 А
теперь мне надо упаковывать вещи. Мы уезжаем завтра утром. 35. Я предлагаю записать этот
отрывок на магнитофон. 36. Не будете ли вы любезны немного подождать? Ваши документы еще
не готовы. 37. Он пытался бросить курить, но ему это не удалось. 38. Простите, что я опоздал. 39.
Студенты не могут не волноваться перед экзаменами. 40. Они мечтают о том, чтобы | их сын стал
врачом. 41. Я предвкушаю хороший отдых на каникулах. 42. Он признал, что встречался с ней
раньше. 43. Я не припоминаю, чтобы я встречал его раньше. 44. Где Аня? — Она остановилась,
чтобы поговорить с Леной. 45. Не забудь отослать письмо. 46. Нам удалось достать билеты на
концерт. 47. ОН извинился за то, что заставил меня ждать. 48. Пожалуйста, из-
308
вини меня за то, что я тебе не писал. 49. Я хочу удержать его от поездки в Сибирь. 50. Я поздравил
его с тем, что он сдал экзамен. 51. Она настаивает на том, чтобы ему разрешили принять участие в
соревнованиях. 52. Разве ты забыла, что ты дала мне свои кассеты? 53. Я не знаю, где найти
работу. — Почему бы тебе не попробовать поместить объявление в газету? 54. Перестань
надоедать ей глупыми вопросами. 55. Ему удалось закончить работу к концу недели. 56. Я
откладывал чтение этого неприятного письма до последнего момента. 57. Они только что кончили
писать сочинение. 58. Шторм помешал кораблю прибыть в порт вовремя.
Adjective + gerund
1. Он привык рано вставать. 2. Она боялась, что ее будут оперировать. 3. Он страстно увлекается
рыбалкой. 4. Мы удивились, увидев ее. 5. Он ответственен за то, чтобы работа была закончена в
срок. 6. Я был разочарован тем, что они отказались помочь мне. 7. Я устал ждать ее. 8. Он был
занят переводом какой-то статьи, когда я пришел. 9. Она не привыкла получать подарки и была
удивлена, увидев на столе великолепные розы. 10. Он хорошо рисует. 11. Он гордится тем, что
стал студентом. 12. Мой друг увлекается коллекционированием марок. 13. Я доволен, что мой сын
занялся искусством. 14. Она очень хорошо плавает. 15. Он был возмущен, когда услышал это. 16.
Вы интересуетесь фигурным катанием?
17. Дети были взволнованы предстоящей поездкой за город.
18. Он уверен в том, что сдаст экзамен. 19. Он боялся, что его неправильно поймут 20. Она была
разочарована тем. что не встретила его там вновь. 21. Его признали виновным в воровстве. 22. Я
думаю, что он не способен на обман.
Noun + gerund
У меня нет надежды увидеть его скоро. 2. Мысль провести каникулы на Волге принадлежит моему
брату. 3. Он понимает важность изучения иностранных языков. 4. Он выразил большое удивление,
услышав это. 5. Я имел удовольствие познакомиться с вашим отцом на днях. 6. У него плохая
привычка курить перед завтраком. 7. У вас нет оснований
309
причины подозревать его. 8. У меня нет намерения ехать на юг этим летом. 9. Вы думаете у него
есть шанс сдать экзамен? 10. Я не имею возражений против того, чтобы они приехали сюда. 11. У
него мало опыта в преподавании английского языка. 12. У него было такое чувство, что за ним сле-
дят. 13. Какие современные методы обучения иностранным языкам используются в вашем
университете? 14. У меня нет надежды, что мне дадут эту роль. 15. Я слышал, что вы отказались
от мысли путешествовать по Европе. 16. У нас хорошая возможность выиграть матч.
Preposition +gerund
1. Вы можете улучшить свое произношение, читая вслух каждый день. 2. Я не смогу перевести этот
текст, не посмотрев нескольких слов в словаре. 3. Мы сократили путь, переплыв реку. 4. Я зайду к
вам перед тем, как уеду из Минска. 5. Придя домой, я сразу начал делать домашнее задание. 6. Он
вошел в комнату, не постучав. 7. Он послал письмо вместо того, чтобы послать телеграмму. 8.
После того как он провел месяц в Лондоне, он уехал в Варшаву. 9. Услышав эту новость, она
побледнела. 10. Просматривая журналы, он«на-толкнулся на очень интересную статью по
экономике Англии. 11. Он выглядит бодрым и веселым, как всегда, несмотря на то, что провел
бессонную ночь в поезде. 12. Услышав крик ребенка, мать бросилась в детскую. 13. Он ушел, не
назначив встречи. 14. Перед тем как лечь спать, он решил написать письмо своим родителям. 15.
Увидев вдали автобус, я бросилась бежать к остановке. 16. После окончания школы она стала
работать секретарем. 17. Она разорвала письмо, не читая его. 18. Проверяя годовой отчет,
бухгалтер обнаружил ошибку. 19. Вместо того чтобы поехать на автобусе, они пошли пешком и
опоздали на концерт. 20. Он пришел без приглашения.
Expressions + gerund
1. Бесполезная трата времени — смотреть детективы. 2. Нет смысла обсуждать этот вопрос в его
отсутствие. 3. Его советы полезны, им стоит следовать. 4. Этот фильм стоит посмот-
310
петь. 5. Бесполезно идти туда сейчас. 6. Я с трудом нашел его дом. 7. Вчера мы рыбачили, а
сегодня поедем кататься на лодке. 8. Не стоит упоминать об этом происшествии./Оно не за-
служивает внимания./ 9. Бесполезно звонить ему, его в это вре-мя не бывает дома. 10. Стоит ли
читать эту книгу? 11. Я с трудом перевел текст. 12. Вокзал недалеко отсюда. Нет смысла брать
такси. 13. Бесполезно спорить с ней. Она уверена в своей правоте. 14. Сегодня утром мы ходили
купаться.
Fluency •Listen, read and practise.

Jenny: I'm reading about recycling. Recycling is important for our environment. Do you know what it is?
Nick: Of course I know what it is.
Jenny: It means collecting things and using them again. Things like glass or paper.
Nick: Yes, that's right. It means not polluting our world.
A. Recall the sentences with gerunds.
B. Roleplay the conversation.
C. Now put the gerunds in the sentences.
eg ... stamps is an interesting hobby.
Collecting stamps is an interesting hobby.
1. ... waste glass and paper is called "recycling". 2. ... is a healthy sport. 3.... a Mersedes is expensive.
4.... to loud music is bad for your father's ears. 5. ... too much television gives Mrs Bell a headache. 6....
your room is boring. 7.... money is sensible. 8-... money is fun! 9.... books is one of Jenny's favourite
hobbies. 10.... football is Tom's favourite hobby.
Make sentences with the same meaning by using a gerund as the subject.
eg It is important to get daily exercise. Getting daily exercise is important.
311
I. It is fun to meet new people. 2. It is easy to cook rice. 3. It i s boring to spend the whole weekend in the
dorm. 4. It is relaxing to take-a long walk. 5. Is it difficult to learn a second language? 6. It isn't hard to
make friends. 7. It is wrong to cheat during a test. 8. Is it dangerous to smoke cigarettes? 9. Is it
expensive to live in an apartment? 10. It isn't easy to live in a foreign country. 11. It takes time to make
new friends.
Now you have to complete the sentences using gerunds
eg My hobby is ...
My hobby is fishing.
1. My brother's hobby is... 2. My favourite sport is... 3. Her favourite pastime is... 4. My ambition is... 5. His
aim is... 6. Her job was... 7. The first thing to do was... 8. Her ambition is... 9. His intention is... 10. The
only way out was... 11. Her dream is... 12. My hobby is...
Using your own words, complete the sentences using gerund phrases as subjects.
eg ... isn't easy.
Climbing to the top of a mountain isn't easy, eg ... is a demanding job.
Managing a major corporation is a demanding job.
1.... wears me out. 2.... can be difficult. 3.... turned out to be a mistake. 4.... will only add to your
problems. 5.... has changed my life. 6.... requires great skill and concentration. 7.... demands patience
and a sense of humour. 8.... is a complicated process. 9. . was a real disappointment. 10. ... looks easy.
D. Alan is planning an uncomfortable expedition. Bill isn't enthusiastic.
A: We'll have to walk twenty miles a day.
B: Well, I won't come if it means walking twenty miles a day
We 'II have to .
1. get up at five.
2. set off at dawn.
3. tell no one where we're going.
4. hitch-hike.
312
5. row across the Channel.
6. cycle for hundreds of miles.
7. carry heavy rucksacks.
8. swim across lakes.
9. climb mountains. 10. camp in the snow.
\ . The phone rang a few seconds ago. Someone wants to speak to Arthur.
"I'm awfully sorry," his secretary is saying. "Mr Tigers has gone out. He'll be back at 3. Would you mind
phoning then?"
2. Tom Atkins has to do the dishes because Susan's father is in hospital and she has gone to visit him.
Tom does not like washing dishes. In fact, he hates washing them.
"I wonder if you'd mind helping me?" he is saying to Peter.
3. Fred Collins joined the army a few months ago. He does not like being a soldier. In fact, he hates it. He
hates carrying a heavy rifle and wearing a uniform. He also hates getting up early. All the other soldiers
have already got up. "I wonder if you'd mind closing that window, Sergeant?" Fred is saying.
4. Frank Martin is in hospital. He has had to give up smoking and drinking beer, too. The doctor says
these things are very bad for him. Susan is visiting him now. "Susan, I wonder if you'd mind bringing some
cigarettes next time?" he is saying to her.
5. This is a political meeting. It has got out of control. The chairman is telling people to stop doing certain
things. At first he tried to be polite. "Would you mind not waving that red flag?" he said a few minutes ago.
Now he is shouting "Stop waving that red flag!" A group of men are shouting "freedom", two others are
blowing trumpets, another group is singing and a few men are fighting.
4- 1. Make questions with stop using the prompts:
eg Prompt; that terrible noise
Response: Would you please stop making that terrible noise?
Prompts:
313
a) those letters b) that guitar c) the radio d) those cheap cigarettes e) the phone so much f) your
dictionary g) so many sweets h) that book i) that song j) that trumpet
2. Now use the same prompts for examples with the verb mind
eg that terrible noise — Would you mind not making that terrible noise?
those letters — Would you mind typing those letters now, please?
3. Make questions (with and without not).
eg Would you ' waiting for me
Would they coming back later
Would she mind (not) having a new one Would he seeing him tomorrow
With someone else, practise asking and answering the questions using the following very frequent short
answer forms-
i) Yes, I (etc.) would. v) Of course he (etc.) ii) No, I (etc.) wouldn't. would(n't).
iii) Not at all. vi) I expect so.
iv) Of course not. vii) I don't think so.
eg — Would you mind my smoking here?
— No, I wouldn't. (Of course not.)
4. Using the structure "I wonder... ", ask very polite questions. Use the answers given above to work with
someone else.
eg — I wonder if you'd mind lending me your dictionary.
— Of course not.
eg — I wonder if he would mind me (my) using his car.
— I don't think so.
Julia and Jim are in a pub. They are standing at the bar. In English pubs, you always have to go to the bar
to get your drink. Nobody will ask you what you want if you sit down at a table first. Jim has just paid for
their drinks.
Barman: And here's your change, sir.
Jim: Thank you.
Julia: Can we sit somewhere, Jim? I don't like standing
here.
Jim: All right. Look! There's a table over there. Come on. Julia: (sitting down) This is much more
comfortable. I
think women look terrible standing at the bar. Jim: Really? I don't think so. Anyway, cheers! Julia:
Cheers!
Jim: Would you like a cigarette? Julia: No, thanks. I've decided to give up smoking. Jim:
Really? Why? Julia: Well... it's just that I think if you don't enjoy doing
something any more you should stop doing it. Jim: I see. You mean you don't enjoy smoking any
more? Julia: That's right. You should give it up, too. It's bad for
your health Jim: Stop talking like my mother. That's what she keeps
saying. Julia: But it's true. It's a nasty habit. I can't think why I
ever started. Anyway, it's obviously got you in its grip! Jim: What do you mean? What are you talking
about? Julia: I mean you couldn't give it up! Jim: Who? Me? Couldn't give up smoking? Nonsense!
Of course I could! I know I could! Julia: How do you know? Jim: Because I've already proved it.
Smoking's the easiest
thing in the world to give up. I've done it hundreds
of times!
A. Questions
1. Why does Julia want to sit down somewhere? 2. What does Jim say just before he takes his first sip
from his drink? 3. What has she decided to give up? 4. Ask and answer why she has decided to give up
smoking. 5. What does Jim say when Julia tells him he should give up smoking? 6. Jim thinks giving up
smoking is very hard, doesn't he?
Я Recall
Without looking at the text, see if you can remember some of the things Jim and Julia said.
314
315
Julia: think/women/terrible/bar.
Jim: a cigarette?
Julia: No/decided.
Jim: You mean/don't enjoy/any more?
Julia: right, you should/too, health.
Jim: Stop/mother, keeps.
C. Roleplay the conversation.
D. In this Unit, we have practised some verbs which are followed by the -ing form of a verb:
mind; hate; like; give up; stop; enjoy; keep (on). Remember these sentences:
a) Would you mind helping me? Would you mind not waving that red flag? I wonder if you'd mind closing
that window.
b) Tom hates washing dishes.
c) Fred does not like being a soldier.
d) Frank has had to give up smoking.
e) Stop waving that red flag!
f) You mean you don't enjoy smoking any more?
g) That's what my mother keeps saying.
E. Complete these sentences
a) I've just given up... b) Why don't you stop... c) Do you like... d) Do you really enjoy... e) We don't mind...
f) I hate . g) You really ought to give up... h) Shall I stop... i) Will you please stop... j) I wonder if you'd
mind ...
F. Give advice to these people. Use "You 'd better give up/stop
a) A friend who spends all his money.
b) A man who is putting on weight.
c) A light sleeper who always drinks coffee before he goes to bed.
d) A young girl who always drives very fast.
e) A student who has an exam next month, but who goes out every evening.
G. Write 5 true sentences about things you like, enjoy or hate
doing
Write 5 true sentences using stop or give up.

Keiko is looking through a newspaper. Lynn comes in.

Lynn: What are you doing?
Keiko: I'm looking for a new job. I hate being a secretary.
Lynn: What kind of job are you looking for?
Keiko: I'm not sure.
Lynn: Do you have any ideas?
Keiko: No. But I can't stand sitting at a desk all day. I don't like typing, and I don't like filing either.
Lynn: What do you like?
Keiko: Well, I love helping people, and I enjoy having responsibility.
Lynn: Do you like working for big companies?
Keiko: No. I work for a big company now. Big companies are too impersonal.
A. What did you find out about Keiko? Complete the sentences.
1. Keiko hates____a secretary.
2. She can't stand____at a desk all day. '''
3. She doesn't like____.
4. She doesn't like____either.
5. She doesn't like____for big companies.
6. But she loves____people.
7. She enjoys____responsibility.
B. Read and roleplay the conversation.
'What Do ^ou £.njoy Doing?
Lynn: Well, let's think. What do you enjoy doing?
Keiko: Well, I enjoy travelling.
Lynn: That's a good start. What about being a flight attendant?
Keiko: I can't do that part time. Besides, I'm afraid of flying.
Lynn : Do you like working outside? I know you love flowers.
Keiko: No. I'm not really interested in doing that. I can't stand working in the sun.
Lynn: Are you worried about making a lot of money?
Keiko: Not really. I'm just looking forward to getting a new
317
job. I'm good at doing clerical work, but I'm tired of having the same routine every day.
A. Listen and complete this conversation.
Lynn: Well, let's think. What do you enjoy____?
Keiko: Well, I enjoy____.
Lynn: That's a good start. What about____a flight attendant?
Keiko: I can't do that part time. Besides I'm afraid of____.
Lynn: Do you like____outside? I know you love flowers.
Keiko: No. I'm not really interested in____. I can't stand
____in the sun.
Lynn: Are you worried about____a lot of money?
Keiko: Not really. I'm just looking forward to____a new job.
I'm good at____clerical work, but I'm tired of____
the same routine every day.
B. Ask and answer questions on the text. Be sure to use gerunds.
C. Roleplay the conversation.
D. Complete the sentences about your partner and yourself. Don't forget to use at, about, of, in, or to.
My partner is tired__
(name) is afraid _ is worried
I am tired _
am afraid__
am worried
is interested am interested
is thinking am thinking
is looking forward am looking
forward
is good am good
E. Add у our own items to the list below. Then say what you like and don't like about your job or
profession.
LIKES and DISLIKES
travelling answering the telephone
working with my hands filing
helping people working with numbers
driving working for a big company having responsibility
working for a small company sitting at a desk all day typing
Hike
I love
I enjoy travelling.
I don't like
I hate
I can't stand
?4 7lew 'Job
Patti is looking through a newspaper and she has just found an advertisement which says:
Situations Vacant
Secretaries
Can you type 100 words a minute?
Would you like more responsibility? ч , .
Have you got an attractive personality?
Would you like to work in New York?
We are looking for British secretaries for an American
Company.
Phone: 01-722 8635 for an interview
318
Patti: Alice! Have you seen this ad in the paper?
Alice: Oh, yes... but I'm not interested in finding a new job.
I've been here since I left school. I like working here. Patti: Really? I've only been here for two months
and I'm
already tired of doing the same thing every day. I want
some adventure! Alice: Adventure! There's too much "adventure" in New
York. People are afraid of walking in the streets. Patti: Oh, come on! It's not that bad... and the salaries
are
fantastic! Alice: I'm not interested in earning more money. I've got
enough now.
Patti: Ah, yes... but you live at home with your parents. Alice: But I like living with my parents. What's
wrong with
that?
319
Pattr Nothing. But I like being independent. I like travel, ling, I enjoy meeting new people. I'm going to
apply for the job.
Alice: Well, good luck.
A. Complete the sentences.
anew job.
1. Oh, yes... but I'm not interested___
2.1 like__here.
3. I'm already tired_______the same thing every day.
4. People are afraid________in the streets.
5. I'm not interested_______more money.
6. But I like______with my parents.
7. But I like_______independent.
8.1 enjoy________new people.
B. Ask and answer questions on the text.
C. Roleplay the conversation.
D. Answer the questions using gerunds.
1. What do you like doing in spring (summer, autumn, winter)? at weekends? on holiday? 2. What are you
interested in? 3. What are you afraid of? Are you afraid of losing your job? Are you afraid of going to the
dentist?

Harriet's friends always tell her to stop smoking. They think that smoking is unhealthy. Harriet knows that,
but she still keeps on smoking. She wants to stop, but she can't. Smoking is a habit she just can't break.
Jennifer's mother always tells her to stop interrupting people while they're talking. She thinks that
interrupting people is very rude. Jennifer knows that, but she still keeps on interrupting people. She wants
to stop, but she can't. Interrupting people is a habit she just can't break.
Walter's wife always tells him to stop talking about business all the time. She thinks that talking about
business all the time is boring. Walter knows that, but he still keeps on talking about business. He wants
to stop, but he can't. Talking about business is a habit he just can't break.
320
A Read and retell the text.
$ You 're talking with the people in this story about their bad habits. Using this model, create dialogues
based on the story
— Harriet?
— Yes?
_— You know... I don't mean to be critical, but I really think you should stop smoking.
— Oh?
. — Yes. Smoking is unhealthy. Don't you think so?
— You're right. The truth is ... I want to stop, but I can't. Smoking is a bad habit I just can't break.
C. Do you have any habits you "just can 't break"? Tell about them.
Woman: Which do you prefer: driving a car yourself or being a passenger?
Man: Well — that depends. I enjoy driving, especially on long empty roads where I can go nice and fast.
But I'm not very fond of sitting in traffic jams waiting for lights to change, and things like that. I suppose I
don't mind being a passenger, but only if I'm sure that the other person really can drive properly.
Woman: So you don't really like being in other people's cars, then?
Man: Well, as I say, it's all right with a good driver. Then I can relax, sit back and enjoy the scenery. But
yes, you're right — on the whole I certainly prefer driving to being a passenger.
A. Which does the man prefer: driving himself or being a passenger?
Listen to the conversation again. Be sure to reproduce the sentences with gerunds
Study and practise the conversation. Look at this dialogue'
Ч За,
1ПО
321
Bill: ' Who is going to pay the bill? Tom: I don't mind paying it.
Make similar dialogues using the prompts.
1.... give me a lift?
2.... lend me $40 dollars till Monday?
3.... tell George the bad news?
4.... pay for the coffee?
5.... get the tickets?
6.... clean the car?
7.... ring the restaurant and book a table?
8.... open the wine?
E. Make similar dialogues. Do it as in the example.
Bill: I enjoy driving.
Tom: So do I.
Bill: I enjoy cycling.
Reg: Do you?
Note: By stressing the "do", Reg is not only asking a question but indicating that he is surprised that
anyone could enjoy it.
1.... playing football 2.... cooking
3. ... watching television
4. ... listening to music
5. ... going to the opera' 6.... going to parties
Now use the same phrases with the expression fond of.
Bill: I'm fond of driving. Tom: So am I. Bill: I'm fond of cycling. Reg: Are you?
F. Make similar dialogues.
Bill: I don't like people arguing. Tom: Neither do I. Bill: I hate grumbling. Tom: So do I.
322
1.... driving in heavy rain.
2.... waiting in long queues.
3.... making calls from public telephone boxes.
4.... listening to people complaining
5.... writing "thank you" letters.
6.... travelling in the rush-hour
7.... visiting hospitals.
8.... going to the dentist.
G. Say which you prefer:
1. watching TV or listening to the radio 2. going to bed early or late 3. walking or taking a bus to your
office 4. travelling by sea,,or by air 5. sunbathing or swimming 6. writing or receiving letters 6. taking a taxi
or going by bus.

Fishing is my favourite sport. I often fish for hours without catching anything. But this does not worry me.
Some fishermen are unlucky. Instead of catching fish, they catch old boots and rubbish. I am even less
lucky. I never catch anything — not even old boots. After having spent whole mornings on the river, I
always go home with an empty bag. "You must give up fishing!" my friends say. "It's a waste of time." But
they don't realize one important thing. I'm not really interested in fishing. I am only interested in sitting in a
boat and doing nothing at all.
A. Questions
1. What is the writer's favourite sport? 2. What do some unlucky fishermen catch? 3. Is the writer as lucky
as they are, or js he not so lucky? 4. Does he ever catch anything? 5. Is he really interested in fishing? 6.
What is the only thing that interests him?
*»• Complete the sentences.
1-... my favourite sport. 2.1 often fish for hours ... anything. 3' - fish, they catch old boots and rubbish. 4....
whole mornings °n the river, I always go home with an empty bag. 5. You must... 6' I'm not really
interested...
*-• Study and practise the text.
323
Ill
D. Join the sentences using gerunds.
eg He sat there. He didn't say anything. He sat there without saying anything.
1. He left and didn't say good-bye. 2. She went away and didn't say anything. 3. He passed and didn't
greet us. 4. They translated the text. They didn't use a dictionary. 5. She went She didn't switch off the
iron. 6. They spent hours there. They didn't do anything. 7. She bought the dress but she didn't try ц on.
8. She left and she didn't leave me a note. 9. She stood there She didn't notice him. 10. She left the
house. She didn't lock the door. 11. He went out of the restaurant. He didn't pay the bill.
E. Join the sentences using gerunds.
eg I didn't do my homework. I went to the cinema instead. Instead of doing my homework I went to the
cinema.
1. She didn't punish the boy. She gave him a sweet instead. 2 He didn't help me. He kept bothering me
instead. 3. She didn't write a letter (as she had promised). She phoned me instead. 4. He didn't go to
Spain. He went to Italy instead. 5. He didn't bring me the radio. He brought me the record-player instead.
6. She didn't do the house. She went swimming instead. 7. She didn't get a pair of shoes. She got a pair
of boots instead.
eg He packed his things. Then he hurried to the station. After packing his things, he hurried to the station.
or After having packed his things, he hurried to the station
1. He finished work. Then he went home. 2. He had supper Then he went to bed. 3. She heard the news.
Then she phoned her mother. 4. He spoke to the boss. Then he decided to leave. 5 1 worked in England
for five years. Then I went to Australia. 6. He made a lot of money. Then he decided to travel around the
world 7. The students did the test. Then they left the classroom. 8. She heard the news. She fainted. 9.
He paid the bill. Then he left the hotel. 10. He left school. Then he went to university. 11. He stui ei-for three
years but failed his exams. 12. He worked in an office for a while and then emigrated to Australia. 13. He
tried "~r ('ra' jobs and then he became a farmer.
324
f Make sentences.
eg He/smoke He gave up smoking.
1. She/take music lessons 2. He/keep late hours 3. He/study art 4. She/practise music 5. He/swim 6.
He/play hockey 7. She/ dance 8. He/fish 9. He/hunt 10. She/write poems 11. She/study German
eg My father/collect stamps My father is interested in
collecting stamps.
1. Betsy/travel 2. Kate/read 3. I/study English 4. John/play tennis 5. Nick/collect coins 6. Bob/fish 7.
Donald/hunt 8. Helen/draw
Qlving a Patty
We've been thinking about inviting our friends Kathy and Peter for a long time. My wife, Ann, has been
very busy, and we've postponed asking them for several weeks. But we finally got organized, called them,
and asked them to come to dinner tonight.
We explained why we kept putting off our invitation, but Kathy and Peter appreciated being asked to
spend the evening with us. As Kathy said, "It has been a long time since we've gotten together."
I used to practise baking pies and things when I was a kid — with my mother's help, of course. When I
grew, I kept on improving my baking skills. These days, I enjoy making all kinds of desserts. Today, I
finished working early so I could come home and make a cake.
At first, I considered making a cherry pie, but cherries are out of season right now. Ann suggested having
ice cream, but I thought that was too easy. Then we talked about making cookies but decided a chocolate
cake would be better. I always avoid doing things the easy way. Besides, we are pretty good cooks so we
know our guests are looking forward to eating a special meal.
4. Ask and answer questions on the text. Be sure to use gerunds. Retell the text.
°- Choose the correct answer.
1 • I don't appreciate____when I'm speaking.
A: interrupting B: being interrupted
325
2. Avoid____your houseplants too much water.
A: giving B: being given
3. The mountain climbers are in danger of____by an avalanche, (лавина, снежный обвал)
A: killing В: being killed
4. Does Dr Johnson mind____at home if his patients need
his help?
A: calling B: being called
5. I'm interested in____my communication skills.
A: improving B: being improved
6. Mrs Gates appreciated____breakfast in bed when she
wasn't feeling well.
A: serving B: being served
7. Jack Welles has a good chance of____. I know I'm going to vote for him.
A: electing B: being elected
8. Sally's low test scores kept her from____to the university.
A: admitting B: being admitted
9. Mr Miller gave no indication of____his mind.
A: changing B: being changed
10. Sometimes young people complain about not____by
their parents.
A: understanding B: being understood
C. Complete the sentences by using gerunds. Add a prepositi after the gerund if necessary:
1. It was cold yesterday, so we postponed____the botanical
gardens. 2. The Porters' house is too small. They're considering ____a bigger house. 3. When Martha
finished____the floor,
she dusted the furniture. 4. Sometimes students put off____their
homework. 5. I'm thinking about_____a biology course next
semester. 6. Beth doesn't like her job. She's talking about____ a
different job. 7.1 enjoy_____sports. 8. I'm considering____New
York city. 9. A: Are you listening to me? B: Yes. Keep_____. I'm
listening. 10. He tries to avoid____with dishonest people. 11. James
is looking forward to____for the Acme Insurance company. 12. Linda suggested____the weekend in the
country. 13. A: Do you v< ant
to have a break? В: No. I'm not tired yet. Let's keep on____another
hour or so. 14. They finished____the test at 12 o'clock. 15.1
326
'.Oil
haven't practised____the piano for a long time. 16. She doesn't
appreciate my_____ after her. 17. I don't enjoy____letters.
18.1 considered____the job but in the end I decided against it. 19. If
you use the shower, try and avoid_____water on the floor. 20.
Have you finished____the sink yet? 21. Why do you keep on____
at me like that? 22. They had to postpone____away because their
son was ill. 23. It's better to avoid____during the rush-hour.
24. Tom suggested____fish for dinner. 25. I'm looking forward
to my friend. 26. Do you think you'll get another Honda? —
No. I'm considering____a Toyota. 27. What do you usually do
in your free time in the evening? — I enjoy____a good book.
27. A: What are you doing? B: I'm helping Teddy with his
homework. A: When you finish____him, could you help me in
the kitchen?
I have an idea. We all need money, so how about writing and selling a newspaper? That's a good idea,
Tom. But is anybody interested in writing articles?
Well, I like writing stories. So does Ann. So do I. And I enjoy making up quizzes and puzzles. I don't mind
interviewing people. Neither do I.
How about asking Paul to do the drawings? He's good at drawing cartoons. So am I.
No, you're not. You can't draw anything. Neither can you. Anyway, I'd like to write about cleaning up the
environment. Everybody's interested in that.
4. Recall the sentences with gerunds.
°- Read and roleplay the conversation.
c
- Express solidarity, using the expression "good at + -ing".
~~- I'm good at swimming. — Betty isn't good at drawing. ~- So am I. — Neither is
Helen.
327
D. Put the verbs in brackets in the -ing form. Role-play the_ conversation.
Nick: People are tired of (read) about the same old things in newspapers.
Jenny: Have you got any new ideas?
Nick: Well, I'm good at (write) about football.
Jenny: That's not new! Can't you think of (do) anything else '
Nick: Why? Isn't everybody crazy about (play) football?
Jenny: No. How about (have) a music page? You're fond of (listen to) music.
Nick: And we could have a joke column. I'm good at (tell) jokes.
Jenny: Are you still interested in (do) an article about the environment?
Nick: Of course. And I' ve got an idea. How about (organize) a competition? Readers have to suggest
ways of (make) schools "greener". They should send in ideas on (reduce) waste paper like stopping
exams, tests, essays ..
E. Write true answers to the questions with verbs in the -ing/form
eg Are you good at drawing cartoons?
No, I'm not. But I am good at making model cars.
or Yes, I am. I'm also good at painting pictures.
1. Are you good at repairing things? 2. Are you interested in collecting stamps? 3. Are you bored with
watching television? 4. Are you good at saving money? 5. Are you interested in reading computer
magazines? 6. Are you tired of doing English exercises?
Colin:! enjoy doing lazy things, because I'm not a very active person. I'm not ambitious. I have a lot of
friends and I love spending time with them. I never quarrel and I like helping others to solve their
problems.
Sаrаh:I'm a busy, active person. I prefer moving around to staying in one place. I enjoy using my brain,
but sometimes I have difficulty in concentrating. I love discus-
sing, but sometimes I'm too talkative. I'm interested in doing lots of things, all at the same time. Brian:I
can't stand doing the same thing over and over again. I'm adventurous and competitive. I have a lot of
energy and I like taking risks. Sometimes I'm a bit selfish. If I want something, I keep on trying until I
succeed in getting it.
A. Read through the character description again and discuss what is generally true for you. Be honest 1
B. Paraphrase using difficulty:
eg I found a place to live but it was difficult. I found difficulty (in) finding a place to live.
1. Tom finds it difficult to meet people. Tom has... 2. He found a job. This wasn't difficult. He had no... 3. It
won't be difficult to get a ticket for the concert. You won't have any... 4. I find it difficult to understand him
when he speaks quickly. I have... 5.1 found it difficult to translate the article. I had... 6. He did the work.
This wasn't difficult. He had no...
C. Respond to the following statements expressing your dislikes.
eg Nina likes to sing.
I can't stand her singing.
1. Bob plays his violin from morning till night. 2. The baby keeps crying. 3. My son often leaves his things
about. 4. My husband smokes at home. 5. My wife does some typing at home. 6. She is always
grumbling. 7. He is always complaining.
D. Make sentences with the verb succeed. Use the prompts. eg He/pass the exam. He succeeded in
passing the exam.
1. Mike/win the prize 2. My sister/translate the text 3. Bob/do the test 4. My colleagues/carry out the
research5. They/complete the experiment 6. She/do the work in time.
Jane В.: I must apologize for being late.
Steve: That's quite all right, Miss Bruce. Perhaps you could
start by telling me how your career began.
Jane В.: Well, I suppose I was very lucky, really. I won a local beauty competition. At that time, I had no
expc. rience in modelling.
Steve: What do you enjoy most about your job?
Jane B.: Oh, there are so many things! I'm very fond of tra\ oiling, for example, and I'm interested in
meeting people. My job gives me the opportunity of doing both. I'm looking forward to going to New Yoik
next month.
Steve: Do you ever get tired of standing in front of cameras 9
Jane В.: No, that's my job. I'm used to working long hours
Steve: Is there anything you dislike about your job?
Jane В.: I don't like getting up early, and our work often begins at 7 o'clock. I can't risk catching a cold or
being ill. I've had to give up smoking and I have to watch my weight all the time.
Steve: One last question, are you ever afraid of losing your friends back home?
Jane В.: No, I try to go back whenever I'm in this countn I've still got the same friends I've always had.
Steve: Thank you very much, Miss Bruce.
A. Questions
1. How did Jane's career start? 2. What does she enjoy most about her job? 3. What is Jane looking
forward to? 4. What docs Jane dislike about her job? 5. Is she afraid of losing her friends back home?
B. Complete the sentences from the conversation.
I. I must apologise... 2. Perhaps you could start ... me how your career bagan. 3. At that time, I had no
experience... 4. I'm very fond... 5. I'm interested ... people. 6. My job gives me the opportunity... both. 7.
I'm looking forward ... to New York next month. 8. Do you ever get tired ... in front of cameras? 3. I'm used
... long hours. 10. I don't like ... early. 11. I can't risk . • a cold or... ill. 12. I've had to give up... 13. One last
question, are you ever afraid ... your friends back home?
C. Roleplay the conversation.
330
л Complete the following by usingby + a gerund. Use the words ' (he list or your own words.
eat smile watch
drink wag wave
guess wash write grow
1. Students practise written English by writing compositions.
2 We clean our clothes____them in soap and water. 3. I save
money on food____my own vegetables. 4. Khalid improved his
English____a lot of TV. 5. We show other people we are
happy____. 6. We satisfy our hunger____something. 7. We
quench our thirst____something. 8.1 figured out what "quench"
means____. 5. Alex caught my attention____his arms in the
air. 10. My dog shows me she is happy____her tail.
Complete the following with your own words. Use by and a gerund.
11. Students show teachers they want to say something____
their hands. 12. You can destroy bacteria in meat____ft. 13. You
can cook an egg____it or____it. 14. After work, I relax____
or____.
E. Make sentences with afraid an d tired followed by gerunds.
eg She is afraid of being punished, eg I'm tired of washing the linen.
F. Now read these situations and write a sentence with be/get used to.
eg Frank lives alone. He doesn't mind this. He has always lived alone, (he/used/live/alone) He is used to
living alone.
1. Ron sleeps on the floor. He doesn't mind this. He has always slept on the floor, (he/used/ sleep/on the
floor) He...
2. Sue moved from a big house to a much smaller one. What did she have to get used to? (she
had/used/live in a smaller house) Sue had...
3. Jack once went to the Middle East. It was too hot for him. (he/not/'used/the heat)
331
4. Bill doesn't have any money. He doesn't find this unusual because he has never had any money,
(he/used/have/no money)
5. Tom is going to live in your country. What will he have to get used to? (Write your own answer!) He'll
have to
Now you have to put the verb into the correct form, -ing or infinitive.
eg Jane had to get used to driving on the left, (drive)
Bill used to be very fit. Now he's in terrible condition, (be)
1. When I was a child, I used to... swimming every day. (go) 2 It took me a long time to get used to ...
glasses, (wear) 3. There used to ... a cinema on this corner but it was knocked down, (be) 4.1m the boss.
I'm not used to ... told what to do. (be) 5. You'll have to get used to ... less if you want to lose weight, (eat)
6.1 used to ... Ann but now she gets on my nerves, (like) 7. Ron got tired very quickly. He wasn't used to...
so fast, (run) 8. Tom used to... a lot of coffee when he was a student, (drink) 9. It won't take you long m
get used to ... with your new computer, (work) 10. My parents used to ... in London, but now they live in
Bristol, (live) 11. Bruno is Italian, but he has lived in London for over 5 years. He has got used to... English
food now, but when he first arrived in Eng] and he didn't like it very much, (eat) 12. Mike found Africa
strange at first. He wasn't used to... in such a hot climate, (live) 13.1 normally go to bed at about 10
o'clock. I'm not used to... up late, (stay) 14 I used to ... on a farm once and had to get up at 5 o'clock
every morning, (work) It was difficult at first because I wasn't used to ... so early, (get up)
Mrs Anne Sterling did not think of the risk she was taking when she ran through the forest after two men.
They had rushed up to her while she was having a picnic at the edge of the forest with her children and
tried to steal her handbag. In the struggle, the strap broke and, with the bag m their possession, both men
started running through the trees. Mrs Sterling got so angry that she ran after them. She was soon out of
breath, but she continued running. When she caught up with them, she saw that they had sat down
332
and were going through the contents of the bag, so she ran straight to them. The men got such a fright
that they dropped the bag and •ran away. "The strap needs mending," said Mrs Sterling later, "but they
did not steal anything."
д. Questions
1. How many men tried to steal Mrs Sterling's handbag? 2. What was she doing at the time? 3. Did they
take the bag after a struggle or not? Where did they run? 4. What did Mrs Sterling do? 5. Did she manage
to get her handbag back?
B. Study and practise the text.
C. Now you have to make sentences with need -ing. Use the verb in brackets.
eg This coat is rather dirty, (clean) It needs cleaning.
1. This room hasn't been painted for years, (paint) 2. Your hair is too long, (cut) 3. Those shoes are rather
dirty, (polish) 4. This plant hasn't been watered for some tune, (water) 5. Your jeans are too long, (take up)
6. Your passport is out of date, (renew) 7. The cat is hungry, (feed) 8. The brakes on my car aren't
working very well. I think they need (adjust).

When a plane from London arrived at Sydney airport, workers began to unload a number of wooden
boxes which contained clothing. No one could account for the fact that one of the boxes was extremely
heavy. It suddenly occurred to one of the workers to open up the box. He was astonished at what he
found. A man was lying in the box on top of a pile of woollen goods. He was so surprised at being
discovered that he did not even try to run away. After he was arrested, the man admitted hiding in the box
before the plane left London. He had had a long and uncomfortable trip, for he had been confined to the
wooden box for over ten hours. The man was ordered to pay £500 for the cost of the trip. The normal
price of a ticket was £370'
A. Read the text, ask and answer questions on the text.
B. Retell the text.
333
С. Put the verbs in brackets into the correct forms.
1. He hates (interrupt). 2.1 appreciated (invite) to your home? 3. Nobody likes (laugh) at. 4. She avoids
(introduce) to him. 5. She is proud of (offer) that interesting job. 6. He was surprised at (send) an
invitation. 7.1 know she hates (praise) 8. The man was astonished at (award). 9. She is looking forward to
(invite) to the party. 10. He insists on (tell) everything.
I crossed the street to avoid meeting him, but he saw me and came running towards me. It was no use
pretending that I had not seen him, so I waved to him. I never enjoy meeting Bert Dykes. He never has
anything to do. No matter how busy you are, he always insists on coming with you. I had to think of a way
of preventing him from following me around all morning. "Hullo, Bert," I said. "Fancy meeting you here!"
"Hullo, Elizabeth," Bert answered. "I was just wondering how to spend the morning — until I saw you.
You're not busy doing anything, are you?"
"No, not at all," I answered. "I'm going to..." "Would you mind my coming with you?" he asked, before I
had finished speaking.
"Not at all," I lied, "but I'm going to the dentist." "Then I'll come with you," he answered. "There's always
plenty to read in the waiting room!"
A. Complete these sentences.
1.1 crossed the street to avoid... him, but he saw me and came... towards me. 2. It was no use ... that I
had not seen him. 3.1 never enjoy ... Bert Dykes. 4. He always insists ... with you. 5.1 had to think of a
way ... him ... me around all morning. 6. Fancy ... you here! 7. "Would you mind ... with you?" he asked,
before I had finished...
B. Study and practise the text.
C. Compare these sentences'
Would you mind opening the window? Would you mind my opening the window?
(me)
334
Combine the following. Change "thatfact" to a gerund phrase. Use formal English. Discuss informal
usage.
1. Mary won a scholarship. We are excited about that fact. = •\Ve are excited about Mary's (Mary) winning
a scholarship. 2. He didn't want to go. I couldn't understand that fact. = I couldn't understand his (him) not
wanting to go. 3. You took the time to help us. We greatly appreciate that fact. 4. We talked about him
behind his back. The boy resented that fact. 5. They ran away to get married. That fact shocked
everyone. 6. You don't want to do it. I don't understand that fact. 7. Ann borrowed Sally's clothes without
asking her first. Sally complained about that fact. 8. Helen is here to answer our questions about the
company's new insurance plan. We should take advantage of that fact.
D. Paraphrase using gerunds.
eg My mother insists that I should give up smoking.
My mother insists on my (me) giving up smoking, eg He insists that his mother should be taken to
hospital.
He insists on his mother's (mother) being taken to hospital.
1. Her father insisted that she should take up medicine. 2. He insisted that we should join him. 3. He
insisted that the boy should be punished. 4. My wife insists that we should go to Italy. 5. She insists that
she should be given responsibility. 6. Why do you insist that he should give up sports? 7. He insists that
John should be invited. 8. My mother insists that I should get married. 9. My husband insists that we
should spend our holidays abroad. 10. The doctor insisted that she should follow his instruction. 11.1
insist that he should be invited. 12. Jack insisted that he should go by himself. 13. Tom insisted that he
should drive Ann to the station. 14. Mrs Lee insisted that her daughter should have a rest.
E. In this exercise you have to join two sentences to make one sentence.
eg Don't worry about it. It's no use.
It's no use worrying about it. eg Don't get a taxi. It's not worth it.
It's not worth getting a taxi.
1. Don't try to escape. It's no use. It's no use... 2. Don't smoke.
335
It's a waste of money. It's a waste... 3. Don't ask Tom to help you. It's no good. It's no good... 4. Don't
hurry. It's not worth it. It's not worth... 5. Don't study if you're feeling tired. There's no point. There's no
point... 6. Don't read newspapers. It's a waste of time. It's a... 7. Don't get angry. It's not worth it. It's not..
8. Don't work if you don't need the money. There's no point. There's... 9. Don't try to make him change his
mind. It's no use. It's...
F. Make sentences using prevent from.
eg see this scene You must prevent him from seeing this scene.
1. take part in the game 2. join the expedition 3. take up medicine 4. swim in this filthy river 5. go out
today 6. see her 7. waste his money 8. give up music 9. buy this coat
G. Respond to the following statements.
eg, — He won $ 500,000
— Fancy him winning $ 500,000.
eg — He didn't want to leave prison.
— Fancy him not wanting to leave prison.
1. They queued all night. 2. He spent a month underground 3. He was dismissed for working too hard. 4.
They keep a snake as a pet. 5. He lost all his savings. 6. She bought that expensive vase. 7. She wore
that awful dress. 8. He didn't recognize her.
H. Complete the sentences using(i) the object form + -ing or (u) the possessive + -ing form.
eg Do you mind ... (I/open) the window?
(i) Do you mind me opening the window? (ii) Do you mind my opening the window?
1.1 don't mind... (you/borrow) my car. 2. Do you mind... (I/ switch on) the TV? 3. They insisted on ...
(we/stay) for dinner with them. 4. How do you feel about... (they/get) married? 5. Ann's parents don't
like ... (she/go) to bed late. 6. I was surprised about... (Sue/forget) to come to the meeting. 7.1 can't
excuse (she/not answer) our invitation. 8. Please forgive ... (I/answer) like that. 9. They can't prevent ...
(he/become) an actor. 10. I
336
can't bear... (he/be treated) like that. 11. You must pardon... (he/ not answer) your letter. 12. Would you
mind ... (she/join) us?
/. Complete the sentences using gerunds.
1. There are several ways of... 2. There is no way of... 3. Is there any way of...? 4. I don't see any way
of... 5. There are different ways of...

It must have been about two in the morning when I returned home. I tried to wake up my wife by ringing
the door-bell, but she was fast asleep, so I got a ladder from the shed in the garden, put it against the
wall, and began climbing towards the bedroom window. I was almost there when a sarcastic voice below
said, "I don't think the windows need cleaning at this time of the night." I looked down and nearly fell off
the ladder when I saw a policeman. I immediately regretted answering in the way I did, but I said, "I enjoy
cleaning windows at night."
"So do I," answered the policeman in the same tone. "Excuse my interrupting you. I hate to interrupt a
man when he's busy working, but would you mind coming with me to the station?"
"Well, I'd prefer to stay here," I said. "You see I've forgotten my key."
"Your what?" he called.
"My key," I shouted.
Fortunately, the shouting woke up my wife who opened the door just as the policeman had started to
climb towards me.
A. Complete the sentences.
1. I tried to wake up my wife ... the door-bell. 2. I began ... towards the bedroom window. 3.1 don't think
the windows need... at this time of the night. 4.1 immediately regretted ... in the way I did. 5. I enjoy ...
windows at night. 5. Excuse my ... you. 6. Would you mind ... with me to the station? 7. Fortunately, the ...
w
»ke up my wife.
&• Questions
1. What time did the man return home? 2. Why did he have to Use a ladder to get into his house? 3. Who
saw him? 4. What did
337
the policeman think? 5. What did the man tell the policeman?
6. What was the policeman going to do?
C. Study and practise the text.
D. Make sentences with by ...-ing.
eg Richard often helps his brother. He gives him money and advice.
Richard helps his brother by giving him money and advice. *
1. Children learn how to speak without teachers. They listen and they practise. 2. David learned how to
play chess without a teacher. He watched his father play. 3. When Hugo was in England he listened
carefully and always spoke English. As a result he learned perfect English. 4. Susan wanted to lose
weight and she did. She ate less. 5. Fred lost a lot of weight, too. He took more exercise. 6. Bob simply
took pills. He lost a stone. (14 Ibs.) 7. Fred went out and looked for his first job and got it. 8. Bob's first job
was very good. He advertised for it in the paper. 9. Fred worked 16 hours a day and he got rich. 10. Bob
got rich too. He married a rich woman. 11. The film star killed herself. She took a bottle of sleeping pills.
E. Paraphrase the sentences using gerunds.
eg I'm sorry I'm late.
Excuse my being late.
1. I'm sorry I called you so late. 2. I'm sorry I bothered you. 3. I'm sorry I interrupted you. 4. I'm sorry I
didn't come on time. 5. I'm sorry I kept you waiting. 6. I'm sorry I broke the cup.
7. I'm sorry I gave you so much trouble.
eg I am sorry I have said this.
I regret saying (having said) this.
1. I regret that I came so late. 2. I regret that I missed that performance. 3. He regretted that he hadn't
booked a ticket in advance. 4. She was sorry that she hadn't taken part in the picnic. 5. We were sorry
that we hadn't sent him a telegram. 6. She is sorry that she hasn't seen the film. 7. I'm sorry I didn't meet
him.
338

L.K. Fontana is a Cambridge Don. He is also a famous writer. 30 years ago he wrote a strange fantasy
called "King of the Circles". It was about strange people called "Bobbins" who live in holes in the ground.
The book is very popular now, especially in America. In a recent interview on television, Mr Fontana said
this about himself. "I know some people think I'm some kind of philosopher. Actually, I'm a very ordinary
kind of person and I enjoy very ordinary things. For instance, the first thing I say after getting up in the
morning is always: "Ah, good! I'm still alive. Now I can enjoy smoking for another 24 hours." I probably
enjoy smoking too much. My doctor once told me I ought to stop. "What?" I said. "Stop smoking? Why
don't you ask me to stop living, too?"
Good simple food is another great pleasure. I really enjoy seeing, smelling, touching, and then, finally,
eating a good pork pie... or good mashed potatoes... or simple English cheese, not too new. I also enjoy
drinking good English beer.
There are things I hate, too. For instance, I hate getting up early in winter. I also hate eating watery
vegetables. Nasty overcooked things! Most of all however, I hate marking test papers. All poor professors
have to do it in the summer. That's how "King of the Circles" started, you know: I had to stay up late
marking one night, and then, around 3 in the morning, I just could not go on. Suddenly I saw a blank
piece of paper and I can remember writing the first sentence of the book on it. "Once upon a time, there
was a deep hole and a Bobbin lived in it."
A. Recall the sentences where gerunds are used.
B. Study and practise the text.
C. Malcolm can 'tjind his wallet anywhere. He is trying to recall how he lost it. Rewrite his thoughts
starting each one with I remember.
1.1 got off the train.
I remember getting off the train. 2.1 walked to the bus-stop.
3. Some boys came behind me.
4. They pushed past me.
339
5.1 dropped my briefcase. 6. One of the boys ran away.
Make sentences of your own with remember doing.
eg that book a long time ago =
I remember reading that book a long time ago
1. that film last year.
2. this word in the last lesson
3. all my money in my coat pocket
4. a toy horse for Christmas when I was 5
5. in that park last summer
6. in that hotel 4 summers ago
7. a steak in that restaurant
8. very late one night
D. Make progressive substitutions using stop doing smth.
eg You ought to stop smoking.
drinking — You ought to stop drinking, shouting — You ought to stop shouting. Please — Please stop
shouting We ought— We ought to stop shouting.
You ought to stop smoking.
1. going there 7. laughing
2. Please 8. saying that
3. shouting 9. doing that
4. they ought 10. you ought to
5. talking 11 • eating so much bread
6. Please 12. working so hard
Harry: Nora! Nora!
Nora (coming into the room): Yes, what is it now, Harry?
Harry: Oh, there you are. Look here, Nora. I'm tired of lyir -
here on my back with nothing to do. I hate don .
nothing.
Don't be silly, Harry. You've got a temperature, ai >
staying in bed is the only sensible thing to do. No'.
340
Nora:
just be quiet, and stop preventing me from doing my
housework. Harry: No, seriously, Nora. I can't bear it. Lying flat on my
back!
Nora: Well then, try lying on your stomach for a change! Harry: Stop being funny. I'm going to get up. I'm
quite all
right. What's the use of staying in bed? Nora: I think you're being very silly. You'll only make your
temperature go up again.
Harry: It's no use talking, Nora — being ill doesn't suit me. Nora: No — and trying to nurse you doesn't
suit me. Harry: Now don't be bitter about it. You know I'm grateful
to you for looking after me, but you mustn't try to
keep me in bed like a naughty boy.
Nora: Well, you began it by behaving like a naughty boy! Harry: I'm all against this staying in bed for no
reason. Nora: Harry, being ill is a reason. Now don't stand by that
window and catch another cold... Let me see, half past
eleven.
Harry: Why do you keep looking at the clock? Nora: I'm expecting mother. She's coming over for the day.
Harry: Good heavens! I didn't know that. Nora: Yes, I think she has something she wants to talk to
you about. Harry: Oh, heavens, has she? Oh, you know, Nora, perhaps I
had better get back to bed. Nora: Oh, what a pity! I thought, perhaps, you might stay up
and see her.
Harry: That's the very reason I'm getting back into bed. Nora: What did you say? Harry: Oh, nothing.
A. Recall the sentences with gerunds used in the conversation.
B. Learn the conversation at home and roleplay it in class.
C. Your friend has some problems and you have to be helpful, for each problem write a question with try.
eg I can't find anywhere to live, (put an advertisement in the newspaper)
341
Have you tried putting an advertisement in the newspaper?
or
Why don't you try putting an advertisement in the newspaper?
1. My electric shaver is not working, (change the batteries) 2.1 can't contact Fred. He's not at home,
(phone him at work)
3. I'm having difficulty sleeping at night, (take sleeping tablets)
4. The television picture isn't very good, (move the aerial)
In this exercise you have to put the verb into the correct foi т -ing or to+infinitive.
1. I'll try (come) to the meeting, but I'm not sure if I'll be able to. 2. If you get hiccups, you should try
(drink) a glass of water. If that doesn't work, try (hold) your breath. 3. You can borrow my camera, but
please try (be) careful with it. 4. "This soup doesn't taste very good." "Try (put) in some more salt." 5. We
tried (put) the fire out but we were unsuccessful. We had to call the fire-brigade. 6. Sue needed some
money. She tried (ask) Gerry but he couldn't help her. 7. He tried (reach) the shelf but he wasn't tall
enough. 8. "I need to borrow some money." "Why don't you try (ask) your parents to lend you some?"
D. What does it mean in each of these sentences? Use the -ing form of the words in the box in your
answers.
eg It can be dangerous, especially at midday.
Sunbathing can be dangerous, especially at midday.
live on your own babysit sunbathe smoke
read English swim watch late night horror films
1. It is a big responsibility, especially with very young children.
2. It is a very good way of keeping fit.
3. It can give you nightmares.
4. It is quite difficult if you are used to being with a lot of people.
5. It is much easier than speaking it.
6. It can ruin your health.
342
f Make up sentences with gerunds.
eg I'm against buying this house, eg I'm grateful to you for bringing the records, eg What's the use of
staying in bed? eg I'm angry with Peter because he keeps borrowing money from me.
p. Join the following pairs of sentences and rephrase them using by, instead of or without.
1. She ruined her watch. She dropped it in the sea. 2. We got to the station just on time. We took a taxi. 3.
He went out. He didn't take any money with him. 4. Don't complain. Why don't you help me instead? 5.
Don't look at the price tag. Guess how much I paid for this jacket. 6. He worked too long at his computer
screen. He damaged his eyes. 7. She made a speech. She didn't look at her notes.
G. Complete the sentences with one of the prepositions -by, instead of or without and the gerund (-ing
form) of the words in brackets.
1. It would be more sensible for him to save his money (spend) it like water. 2. It's a silly game where you
have to run with a glass of water (spill/any of it). 3. She irritates people (talk) in a funny voice all the time.
4. I don't like him. He's one of those people who talks and talks (ever/stop). 5. Now that I've become more
health-conscious, I'll always grill food (fry) it.

Juliet wants to go abroad for a holiday but Steve wants to stay at home, in Britain.
Juliet: Why don't we go abroad for .a change? Where I'd like
to go is France, Spain, or Italy even. Steve: Mm. I'm not all that keen really. I'd rather stay at home. Juliet:
Oh, come on, Steve. Think of the sun! Steve: Yes, but think of the cost! Going abroad is very expensive.
Juliet: Oh, it isn't Steve. Not these days. Steve. Of course it is, Juliet. The best thing about having a
holiday here in Britain is that it's cheaper. And another
• 343
thing, the travelling would be easier. No boats, plane s or anything.
Juliet: Even so, we've been to most of the interesting places in Britain already. What's the point in seeing
them again? Anyway, we can travel round Britain whenever we like. There's no point in wasting our
summer holiday here.
Steve: Mm, I suppose you're right. Nevertheless, what I can't stand is all the bother with foreign currency,
changing money and all that when we go abroad. I hate all that And it's so confusing.
Juliet: Oh, don't be silly, Steve.
Steve: And what's more, I can't speak any of the languages — you know that. It's all right for you. You can
speak foreign languages.
Juliet: Exactly. You see, what I'd really like to do is practise my French and Spanish. It would help me a lot
at work
Steve: Mm, but that's no use to me.
Juliet: But just think of the new places we'd see, the people we'd meet!
Steve: But look, if we stayed here, we wouldn't have to plan very much.
Juliet: I'm sorry, Steve. No, I just don't fancy another cold English summer.
A. Questions
1. Where does Juliet want to spend the holiday? 2. Why doesn't Steve want to go abroad? 3. Why is he
for spending the holiday in Britain? 4. Why is Juliet against?
B. Recall the phrases with gerunds used in the conversation.
C. Say why Juliet is for spending the holiday abroad and vvM Steve is against.
E. Roleplay the conversation.
F. Use the ideas and the language from this dialogue to write и short conversation between two friends
who are planning a holiday. The two friends could be discussing the points for ^ against two of the
following:
344
— having a holiday with the whole family.
— a camping holiday.
— a holiday in the south.
Here are some useful phrases from the conversation.
Introducing points Introducing points
For Against
Think of... Yes, but...
The best thing about... is... But look...
I'm sorry, I just don't...
Even so...
Nevertheless...
Linking two points
For or Against
And another thing...
Anyway...
And what's more...
UNIT 6 TOPIC: HOUSE. FLAT. RENTING A FLAT
Listen, read and practise.

Cliff had been given notice to leave his lodgings. His landlady who was elderly and unmarried did not like
his habit of giving noisy parties. She liked his habit of practising the guitar in the early hours of the
morning even less. He bought a copy of the local paper and turned to the Accommodation Vacant page.
There were a good many advertisements for rooms to let, but most of them were either too far out or too
expensive. Finally, right at the end of the last column on the page (lines 7-8) he found one that seemed
suitable. The rent was reasonable and it was in the centre of the town.
He went round to the address, and ringing the bell, waited. The man who came to the door was middle-
aged and had a round, smilmg face. But the main thing Cliff noticed was that he was wearing a very long
and shabby overcoat which had no buttons on it.
"I believe you have a room to let," Cliff said.
"That is so, yes. Won't you come in?"
The house was rather sparsely furnished. It was chilly too arid smelt a bit damp, which was probably the
reason, Cliff thought, why the man wore an overcoat indoors. Though this did not explain why the
overcoat hadn't got any buttons.
He was shown the room, a good-sized bed-sitter (i.e. bedroom and sitting-room combined) on the first
floor, looking out over the street. There was a chest-of-drawers and a wardrobe against one wall, a
double-bed against another, and on the floor a plun coloured carpet with ink marks on it. The walls were
pale green The ceiling had cracks in it and needed a coat of paint. There wa a large sash window with
faded curtains.
"This seems all right," Cliff said.
"I'm glad you like it," the man said. "The rent is nine pound a week."
"It says eight in the advertisement."
346
The man smiled. "I hate arguing about money," he said. "Just for you, as a friendly gesture, I will reduce
the rent to eight."
Cliff did not see how this could be regarded as a reduction, but he did not think it was worth arguing
about. "Does that include breakfast?" he said.
"No."
"Are there any cooking facilities?"
"Yes, you can have the use of the kitchen certainly."
"Would there be any objection to me having a small electric fire in here?"
"Small or large, as you like. It makes no difference to me, since you will be paying for it." The man
laughed, as if it was a good joke.
"There is a separate meter for electricity, as there is for gas," he said.
Cliff now mentioned the point which really interested him most. "Are there any restrictions," he said, "such
as not having parties, or not being allowed baths, or not being able to practise my guitar?"
"Good heavens, no. I want you to feel free here. I want you to behave as if you were at home. The only
restrictions are financial ones."
"What does that mean?"
"It means paying in advance, paying weekly and in cash please, not by cheque."
"I'd better think it over," Cliff said.
"I like you," the man said. "I took to you the moment I saw you. That is why I reduced the rent. I am often
away on business. Making a living today is hard work, and I want someone like you, a reliable young
man, to look after things while I'm away."
Cliff was not used to being described as reliable. The landlord struck him as eccentric and perhaps a bit
untrustworthy, but the room was cheap, and being able to do as he pleased appealed to him very much.
"All right," he said. "I'll take it. I'd like to move in next Saturday, if that's all right with you."
"Fine." The man smiled more broadly than ever, and held out his hand. "My name is Joseph. I am sure we
shall be good friends. Making friends is very important. You might care to pay a small deposit. As a
guarantee, you know. Shall we say five pounds?
347
Thank you. Now let's have a drink on it. I've got some excellent sherry. I got it cheap, through a friend.
Excuse me a moment."
A few minutes later Joseph came back with the sherry. Cliff sipped his sherry; the sherry tasted like petrol.
"Can I have my receipt for my £5?" he said.
A. Questions
I. Why did Cliff have to look for a flat? 2. What sort of paper did he buy? 3. What was wrong with most of
the rooms? 4. Where was the advertisement that seemed suitable? 5. What was the man who came to
the door like? 6. What was strange about the man's overcoat? 7. How did the house smell? 8. Where was
the room? 9. What colour were the walls? 10. What really interested Cliff most? 11. How did Joseph want
the rent paid? 12. What was Cliff not used to? 13. How did the landlord strike Cliff? 14 Why did he decide
to take the room?
B. Retell the text.
C. Special Difficulties
I. Join these sentences with the conjunctions to say why. More than one order is possible.
1. Service in this hotel ought taimprove. There's been a change of management, (because)
Service in this hotel ought to improve because there's been a change of management.
2. The Air Traffic Controllers are on strike. We have cancelled our holiday, (as)
3. She's never in when I phone. I'll have to write to her. (sincej
4. I've had to have the document translated. I can't read Russian, (since)
5. He phoned the police. He had lost his wallet, (because)
6. It was such a beautiful day. We decided to have a picnic, (as)
7. All the seats on the train were taken. We had to stand, (since)
8. We couldn't drive across the bridge. It was closed, (because)
9. We were late. We didn't get any food, (since)
П. Join these sentences using the conjunctions in brackets to introduce contrast. More than one order is
possible.
348
• eg She has plenty of money. She is very mean, (although) Although she has plenty of money, she is
very mean.
1. I'm going to buy a computer. I haven't got much money, (even though) 2. They have a car. They rarely
use it. (though) 3. He was innocent. He was sent to prison, (although) 4. He has a number of relatives
living nearby, but he never visits them, (even though) 5. She never takes any kind of exercise. She is
quite fit and healthy.(even though) 6. I intend to go for a walk this morning. It's raining, (even if) 7. The
play was wonderful. The film was a commercial failure, (whereas) 6. I try hard to play the piano. I don't
seem to improve, (although) 9.Your design is excellent. It isn't suitable for our purposes, (while) 10. She
likes hard work. He's quite lazy, (whereas) 11. She likes going out a lot. He prefers staying at home,
(while)
III. Complete each sentence in A using as if and the most suitable idea from B. Use the verbs in brackets
in the past tense.
eg 1. She's 50 years old, but she looks as if she was/were 30.
А В
1. She's 50 years old, but she looks... (own) the hotel
2. He's only a receptionist, but he acts... (belong) to him
3. They're quite rich, but they behave... (be) dying
4. He's only got a cold, but he acts... (be) poor
5. It's my car, but he treats it... (be) my boss
6. He isn't my boss, but sometimes
he acts.. (be) 30
7. I'm not a child, but sometimes
you talk to me... (know) me
8. She doesn't know me, so why did
she smile at me... (be) a child
IV. Complete the sentences using like or as.
Note: We use like when we compare things.
She looks beautiful — like a princess, (she isn't really a
princess)
He eats like a pig.
We use as as a preposition to talk about someone's job
349
or the function of a thing.
I once worked as a postman. (I really was a postman.)
Please don't use my shoe as a hammer.
1. Sarah looks a lot... her brother. 2.1 joined the company . a secretary. 3. Their garden is in a terrible
mess. It looks ... a jungle. 4. The building looks more... a church than a bank. 5. Stop behaving ... a fool.
6. A few years ago I worked... a bus driver. 7. He's been learning English for a few years but he still
speaks ... a beginner 8. My feet are really cold. They're ... blocks of ice. 9. Margaret once had a part-time
job ... a tourist guide. 10. We don't need all the bedrooms in the house, so we use one of them ... a study.
11. His house is full of interesting things. It's... a museum. 12. The news that he was getting married came
... a complete surprise to me. 13. He's 35 but he sometimes behaves ... a child.
V. Complete the sentences using at the end or in the end.
Note: At the end means "at the point where something stops". We're going on holiday at the end of this
week. At the end of the film I felt very sad. In the end means "finally" or "after some time". We couldn't
decide what to do yesterday evening. In the end we decided to stay at home. At first, I didn't like him, but
in the end we became good friends.
1. We were going to walk home, but... we decided to take a taxi. 2.1 hated school at first, but... I quite
enjoyed it. 3. They're going to Italy ... of next week. 4. At first he didn't want to come with us on holiday,
but ... he changed his mind. 5. I looked everywhere for my wallet and... I found it in my pocket. 6. She's
starting work... of May. 7. We were all exhausted... of the journey.
VI. Rephrase these sentences using the modal verbs in brackets.
eg Perhaps she is ill. (may) She may be ill.
Perhaps they went out. (might) They might have gone
out.
1. Perhaps you're right, (could) 2 Perhaps she'll win the race. (might) 3. Perhaps she forgot about the
meeting, (may) 4. Perhaps they were asleep, (might) 5. Perhaps he doesn't know the address.
350
(may) 6- Perhaps they left early, (could) 7. Perhaps he isn't coming now. (might) 8. Perhaps I'll see you
tomorrow, (may) 9. Perhaps they're going on holiday, (could) 10. Perhaps she didn't catch the bus. (may)
In the United States, many people once lived in large two-and three-story homes. Today many people
would like to live in such dwellings, but most people can't. They don't have enough money to buy them or
even to make the first downpayment. So, many people rent from month to month.
But some Americans really want to live in a house of their own. So they build their own home or they buy
a house that is situated in a vicinity where homes are cheaper. It is better to reside in a bad part of town,
they think, than not to live in a house at all. Or they buy an old house and remodel it. Then they decorate
it with antique furnishings. Sometimes, they can make an old house look more beautiful than a new one.
Usually, it is not difficult for people to find an old home to buy. Many older people decide that they don't
need a spacious home after their children leave. So they sell their house and move to a cosy apartment.
But when people move into a house, they sometimes have problems. Homeowners have to do their own
maintenance. For example, if there is a problem with the plumbing, one can't ask the landlord or landlady
to fix it. On the other hand, people can remodel their homes in any way they want without having to be
afraid of being evicted by the owner. Overall, most Americans would probably prefer to live in a house
rather than in an apartment.
A. Study and practise the text.
B. How much does the average house cost in your country? What makes one house more expensive
than another?

Many young Americans do not live with their families, but in Apartment blocks or residential areas where
everyone is more or less of the same age.
351
Young people often move away from home when they leav e school (if they can afford it) into shared
apartments or small one-room "studio" apartments. They do their own cooking and cleaning, and go to
the family home perhaps for the weekend.
Young married couples may move to new suburbs where most people have young families. In the
country, some even build their houses themselves.
If a family's income goes up, they often move to another suburb, where the houses are bigger, with two or
even three garages, a swimming pool, a games room for the children and everything a family could want.
Old people often do not live with their grown-up children. Many live in old people's homes. Some live in
special towns, built for old people, where there are no young children and the atmosphere is quiet.
Americans are always on the move, and some families change their homes every few years. Every year,
20% of Americans move house. Mr and Mrs Schultz could start life in an apartment in New York, go on to
a white painted wooden home in New England with small windows to keep out the cold in winter, and end
their life in a sunny house in California where oranges grow in the garden and big windows give a
wonderful view of the swimming pool and the sea.
A. Speak about American homes.
Pfcitish Q-tomes
British homes are usually smaller than American homes, but, like Americans, old people, young families
and unmarried people do not usually live together.
Many British people love old houses, and these are often more expensive than modern ones. They also
love gardening, and you will see gardens everywhere you go: in towns, villages and out in the country.
Some are very small, with just one tree and a few flowers. Others are enormous, with plenty of flowers
and enough vegetables and fruit trees to feed a family.
There are 22 million homes in Britain — big homes and small homes, old cottages and new high-rise
buildings, houses and flats. (Americans say "apartment", but British people say "flat".)
352
Two thirds of the families in Britain own their own homes. vlillions of these "owner-occupied" houses are
the same, with two Or three bedrooms and a bathroom upstairs, a sitting room, a dining room and a
kitchen downstairs and a small garden at the back and front of the house. To pay for their house, home
owners borrow money from a "building society" and pay back a little every month.
One quarter of British people live in rented state-owned homes, called "council houses". Many of these
are flats, but some are houses, each with a small piece of garden. Other people rent their homes from
private owners.
There are a great many different kinds of homes in Britain, but there are not enough! It is often very
difficult for young people to find a home when they want to start a family.
A. Ask and answer questions on the text.
B. Speak about British homes.
Many people have started living in condominium homes, houses and apartments that share the same
walls and the same services. Single people, young families, and the elderly buy condominiums, or
"condos", for several reasons. Also, condos are often cheaper than traditional individual houses.
Condominiums fit today's life style. A lot of people aren't interested in working in gardens, mowing lawns,
and doing other chores around the house in the evenings and on the weekends. They don't want these
responsibilities. When they aren't at work, they want to be able to travel, play sports, and enjoy other
leisure-time activities. When they are at home, they want to relax and enjoy themselves.
Of course, people still have to clean and paint the inside of their homes, but they don't have to worry
about cleaning or Painting the outside. And they don't have to mow the lawn or find someone to pick up
the garbage. In a condo, full- or part-time workers take care of these services.
The elderly often like living in condos because they aren't able to take care of traditional houses and
lawns. Also, they enjoy having friends nearby — for social reasons and for security. Security is another
good reason for living 'in a condominium.
'23ак 1110
People live in groups of three, four, or more homes. Also, if no one is at home, there are always several
neighbours who can keep their eyes on the empty house.
A. Study and practise the text
B. Think of a house you know and describe it to a classmate.
Mr Hernandez sells houses. At the moment he is showing 736 Pear-blossom Avenue to Mr and Mrs Willis.
"Here we are. As you can see, Mr and Mrs Willis, it's really quite a big house, with two stories. Upstairs
there are three bedrooms and a bathroom, and downstairs we have a large living rcom, a dining room,
and a kitchen. There is no basement under the house
"Before we go in, let's take a look at the house from the outside I think you'll agree that the front yard is a
nice size and the height around it makes it a little more private. There's a two-car garage next to the
house, and, as you can see, the driveway is in \ cry good condition. Now, look up there at the roof. It was
repaired only four months ago, so you won't have any trouble from the rain. As you can see, there's a
chimney up there. The house has a working fireplace. And the present owners put in a new furnace, so
you'll have plenty of heat all winter.
"O.K. Let's go in here through the front gate and up the walk to the front door. Follow me.
"I'll just open the door and here we are inside. Here's a little hall where you can hang your hats and coats.
On your right is the living room, and this door on your left leads into a small dining room. As you can see,
it has a lovely wooden floor. The dining room and the kitchen are connected, so you can cook in the
kitchen and serve the meals in the dining room. From the kitchen window you have a nice view of the
backyard, which, as you can see, has a wooden fence around it. You could have a nice flower or
vegetable garden back there.
"The house is in excellent condition. You'll have no problems with any of the walls, floors or ceilings. So,
any questions? Ah, yes, the price. Three bedrooms, a garage and a yard. Well, what do you think?
354
A Study and practise the text.
п. Describe a very traditional type of house in your country.
My favourite room is our kitchen. Perhaps the kitchen is the most important room in many houses, but it is
particularly so in our house because it's not only where we cook and eat but it's also the main meeting
place for family and friends. I have so many memories of times spent there: special occasions such as
homecomings or cooking Christmas dinner; troubled times, which lead to comforting cups of tea in the
middle of the night; ordinary daily events such as making breakfast on dark, cold winter mornings for
cross, sleepy children before sending them off to school, then sitting down to read the newspaper with a
steaming hot mug of coffee.
Whenever we have a party, people graviate with their drinks to the kitchen. It is always the fullest and
noisiest room in the house. So what does this special room look like? It's quite big, but not huge. It's big
enough to have a good-sized rectangular table in the centre, which is the focal point of the room. There is
a large window above the sink, which looks out onto two apple trees in the garden. The cooker is at one
end, and above it is a wooden pulley, which is old-fashioned but very useful for drying clothes in wet
weather. At the other end is a wall with a large notice-board, which tells the story of our lives, past,
present, and future, in words and pictures: a school photo of Megan and Kate, a postcard from Auntie
Nancy in Australia, the menu from a takeaway Chinese restaurant, a wedding invitation for next Saturday.
All our world is there for everyone to read!
The front door is seldom used in our house, only by strangers. All our friends use the back door, which
means they come straight into the kitchen and join in whatever is happening there. The kettle goes on
immediately and then we all sit round the table, drinking tea and putting the world to rights! Without doubt
some of the happiest times of my life have been spent in our kitchen.
•4. Study and practise the text. • Write a similar description of your favourite room.
355
Mr and Mrs Turvey both hated housework. They were a very messy couple who never put things away.
When they went to bed, for example, they always left their clothes on the floor. Their kitchen was always
in a mess, too. Even though they had a dishwasher they always left the dirty dishes in the kitchen sink
and only did the dishes when there wasn't a clean plate in the house. It was the same with their clothes.
They never put them into the washing machine until there was nothing else left to wear. The living room
always looked as though a bomb had just gone off. There were things everywhere. There was thick dust
on every piece of furniture and the carpet had not been vacuumed for weeks. And the bathroom 1
One day, when Mr Turvey couldn't find one of his shoes, and Mrs Turvey couldn't see her face in the
bathroom mirror, they decided it was time to get the house cleaned. So they found Maria, a foreign
student at a local language school, who needed some extra money.
Maria came to the house and worked all day long. She washed and dried all the clothes. Then she got out
the iron. She ironed the clothes, folded them neatly and put them away. She swept all the dust off the
floors with a large broom. She took a wet cloth and wiped the dust off every surface in the house and then
polished the furniture until it was shining. She got out the vacuum cleaner and vacuumed all the carpets.
In the kitchen the floor was filthy. It was too dirty to wash with a mop, so Maria got on her hands and
knees and scrubbed the dirt off with a scrub brush. Finally, she made the bed and, when she finished, the
house looked spotless.
Mr and Mrs Turvey came home that evening. There was nothing on the floor. There was no dust on the
furniture. The wood was shining and you could smell the polish. In their bedroom all their clothes were
clean and put away in closets. "So what do you think?" Mrs Turvey asked her husband.
"It looks nice and neat,'' he said, "but how are we ever going to find anything?"
4. Ask and answer questions on the text. Retell the text.
B.I. Are you a tidy person? 2. What does the room tell you about its owner? 3. Who does most of the
housework in your home? 4 What kind of housework do you do and how often? 5. What kind
356
of housework do you most hate doing? 6. What kind of housework do you least mind doing? 7. Which of
the following machines is the most useful for housework: a dishwasher, a washing machine, a vacuum
cleaner?

The Spring Garden Apartment Complex offers you and your family country living at its best. Surrounded
by beautiful woods and hills, Spring Garden is located ten miles outside the city but is only minutes from
downtown on the freeway.
Unfurnished two-bedroom apartments are available. Each apartment has a dishwasher, central heating,
air conditioning, and a laundry room. Children and pets are welcome.
In addition, there are tennis and basketball courts, two swimming pools, and a playground. There are two
parking spaces for each apartment.

Come and experience the luxury of Regency Towers and enjoy the convenience of living only a five-
minute walk from the city centre! Each apartment in this forty-story building has a wonderful view of the
city. A wide choice of apartments is available, from studios to large three-bedroom apartments.
Each apartment is completely furnished and offers every modern convenience: central heating, air
conditioning, laundry facilities, and your own microwave oven. Free maid service is available. Adults
preferred; no pets. Regency Towers also offers a swimming pool and an exercise room. There is twenty-
four-hour security service.
Л. Read these newspaper ads and find five differences between the apartment complexes.
•5. You have an apartment or a house for rent. Write an ad for it.
Dear Mom and Dad,
I'm really getting tired of the weather. It's been raining for two
days, and I wish it would stop.
357
I'm also getting tired of this apartment. There are so many problems. The living room ceiling leaks. The
carpets are dirty The kitchen hasn't been painted recently. The refrigerator should be replaced (it's so old
that it doesn't work very well). And the bathroom is in such terrible condition that I don't know what to do
— the toilet doesn't work, the shower leaks, and there isn't any hot water.
The landlord is very nice, but I don't think he is going to fix anything. I don't know what we are going to do.
We may have to move.
Any suggestions?
Love, Gina
A. You have rented a furnished apartment. Write-to your friend what you like and dislike about it.
Conversation Practice Listen, read and practise.

1. Woman: (Phone rings) Hello?

Caller: Hello. I'm calling about the apartment you have for
rent. Is it still available? Woman: Yes, it is. Caller: Now, it says it's partly furnished. What furniture
does it have? Woman: Well, it has a dining table with six chairs, two sofas
in the living room, a bed, and... let's see... Oh, yes,
a stove and a refrigerator. Caller: Uh-huh. And, um, six hundred and eighty dollars a
month •— does that include electricity? Woman: Yes, it does. Caller: Oh, good! Well, I think I'd like to
come and see it
When would be a good time?
Woman: How about this evening around seven o'clock? Caller: That'd be fine.
A. Roleplay the conversation.
358
2. Man: (Phone rings) Hello?
Caller: Hello. I'm calling about the studio apartment you're
advertising in the paper. Man: Yes, what would you like to know? Caller: Well, how big is it exactly?
Man: Uh, it's about three hundred square feet. Caller: Oh, that's very small! Man: There's one
room and then there's a separate small
kitchen.
Caller: Mm, well, what floor is it on? Man: It's on the thirty-fifth floor. It has a lovely view of
the city. Caller: Well, I think eight seventy-five is a bit too much
for my budget. Thanks anyway, bye.
A. Describe the apartment to let. Roleplay the conversation.
3. Woman: Hello, 224 6818.
Man: Hello, I'm phoning about the flat.
Woman: Of course. What would you like to know?
Man: Well, first, can you tell me where it is please? Is it
near some shops and the tube? Woman: Well, the flat is in Islington. We're only 100 metres
from the shops and a five minute walk from the
tube.
Man: That's a nice location. And how much does it cost? Woman: Three hundred and sixty pounds a
month. And you
have to pay a month's deposit.
Man: I see, and is it a big flat? How many square metres is it? Woman: Oh, I don't know. There are
two bedrooms and a
very large living room. Would you like to see it? Man: Yes, when can I come, please? Woman: Mm.
Can you come this afternoon? About four?
It's number 2, Canbury Road. Man: Yes, that's fine. I'll see you then. Goodbye.
4. Questions
1. Why is the man phoning? 2. Where is the flat? 3. How much does it cost? 4. Is the flat large? 5. Does
the man want to see the flat? 6. What time is he going to come?
359
B. Give a brief account of the conversation.
C. Roleplay the conversation.
D. Situation: You've read an advertisement for a flat to let. You need a small flat for yourself not far from
the centre of the city. At the moment you are phoning to make some inquiries about the flat.
4. Mr Andrews: Hello?
Max Ripley: Hello, Mr Andrews? This is Max from Rip.
ley's Realty.
Mr Andrews: Hi. Have you found a house for me yet? Max Ripley: Yes, I have a great house to show
you on Pad-ley Drive. It's only $ 200,000. Mr Andrews: Oh, that's too expensive for me. Max Ripley: I
have another one on Bank Street. It's only
$85,000. But it only has one bedroom. Mr Andrews: Oh, that's not big enough. Max Ripley: Well, how
about a house in the country? Mr Andrews: That sounds interesting. Max Ripley: Yes, it's fairly old, so
it needs a little work.
But it's really nice, and has a lovely view. Mr Andrews: Well, what about the yard? Max Ripley: Oh, it's
quite large. There's a beautiful apple
tree in the front yard. Mr Andrews: Sounds good! Uh, we have a dog. Is there a
fence around the yard? Max Ripley: Yes, there's an old-fashioned picket fence around
it. Very beautiful. Mr Andrews: Is there a big garage? And is there plenty of
room in the backyard?
Max Ripley: Well, yes. And it's within your price range. Mr Andrews: It sounds nice! My wife and I
would like to
see it.
A. Questions
1. Who is Mr Ripley calling? Why? 2. How much is the house on Padley Drive? 3. Does the price suit Mr
Andrews? 4. Wh} doesn't the house on Bank Street suit Mr Andrews? 5. Why does the house in the
country sound interesting to Mr Andrews?
360
g. Give a brief account of the conversation. C. Roleplay the conversation.
E. Flat to let. Centre of town. Three rooms, central heating. Short let only. Tel: 544 9011 evenings.
Luxury flat to let. Short stay only. Three bedrooms, living room, dining room. Central heating, double
glazing, TV, video, micro-wave, etc. Tel: 569 2927 days only.
House, town centre. Two large bedrooms. Near shops and bus station. Suit two couples or family. Only
£65 per week. Tel: 0220 317991
Bedsit. Spacious bed-sitting room with small kitchen and bathroom. Suit one person or couple. £30 per
week. Tel: 071432 023
Situation: You and your partner want to stay in a flat. Look at the advertisements above. Now telephone
and ask for details about the flat. Ask also for an appointment.
5. Kelly is looking for a place to rent. She is talking to an agent.
Kelly: (Dials)
Agent: Good afternoon. Victoria Home Rentals. May I help
you? Kelly: Uh, yes. Hi. My name's Kelly McDonald and I'm
looking for a place to rent.
Agent: All right. Are you looking for an apartment or a house? Kelly: A house.
Agent: OK. And what's your price range? Kelly: Umm, about eight hundred to a thousand dollars a
month. My husband and I need a pretty big place for
our family... at least three bedrooms. Agent: OK. And do you have your own furniture? Kelly: Yes, we do.
Agent: Are you interested in a particular part of town? 4 Kelly: Well, both of our children are going to
Webster High
School, so we'd like to find a place somewhere near
there.
Agent: All right. Anything else?
Kelly: Uh yes. We want a big yard because we have two dogs. Agent: Hmmm. Well, let me tell you what I
have here.
361
Kelly: OK.
Agent: I think I have a place you and your family will like.
It's a nice four-bedroom house that's unfurnished, but
it's about five miles from the high school. Kelly: Oh! Well, that shouldn't be a problem. I'm sure there
are school buses. Agent: Oh, yes. And the house has a large yard. It even has u
fence around it, which would be perfect for your dogs. Kelly: Wow! It sounds too good to be true! It must
be awfully
expensive. Agent: No, the rent is only seven hundred and fifty dollars a
month.
Kelly: That's wonderful! Agent: Would you like to see it? Kelly: Definitely! When could we come? Agent:
How about four o'clock this afternoon? We can meet
at the house. The address is five-seven-two Bush Road...
A. Questions
\. What is Kelly looking for? 2. What is their price range? 3. Do they want a furnished house? 4. What
particular part of town would they like? 5. Why do they want a big yard? 6. What sort ot house does the
agent offer Kelly? 7. Is she going to see it?
B. Give a brief account of the conversation.
C. Roleplay the conversation.
D. Make up a similar conversation.
6. Landlady: 447 4716.
Student: Hello. Is that Mrs Davies?
Landlady: Speaking.
Student: Good afternoon. My name's Stephen Brent. I was given your address by the student
accommodation agency. I understand you have a room to let.
Landlady: Yes, that's right. I've just got one room still vacant It's an attic room, on the second floor. It's
rather small, but I'm sure you'll find it comfortable.
Student: I see. And how much do you charge for it?
Landlady: The rent's £25 a week. That includes electricity, but not gas.
362
Student: Has the room got central heating?
Landlady: No, it's a gas fire which keeps the room very warm.
Student: I see... And what about furniture? It is furnished, isn't it?
Landlady: Oh yes... Er... There's a divan bed in the corner with a new mattress on it. Er... Let me see...
There's a small wardrobe, an armchair, a coffee table, a bookshelf...
Student: Is there a desk?
Landlady: Yes, there's one under the window. It's got plenty of drawers and there's a lamp on it.
Student: Oh good... Is there a washbasin in the room?
Landlady: No, I'm afraid there isn't a washbasin. But there's a bathroom just across the corridor, and that's
got a washbasin and a shower as well as a bath. You share the bathroom with the people in the other
rooms. The toilet is separate, but unfortunately it's on the floor below.
Student: Oh, that's all right... What about cooking? Can I | cook my own meals?
j Landlady: Well, there's a little kitchenette next to your room. \ It hasn't got a proper cooker in
it, but there's a gas
! ring and an electric kettle by the sink. I find my
students prefer to eat at the university.
Student: I see. And is the room fairly quiet?
Landlady: Oh yes. It's at the back of the house. It looks onto the garden and it faces south, so it's bright
and sunny, too. It's very attractive, really. And it's just under the roof, so it's got a low, sloping ceiling.
Would you like to come and see it? I'll be in for the rest of the day.
Student: Yes, I'm very interested. It sounds like the kind of room I'm looking for. Can you tell me how to
get there?
Landlady: Oh, it's very easy. The house is only five minutes' walk from Finchley Road tube station. Turn
right outside the station, and then it's the third street on the left. You can't miss it. It's got the number on
the gate. It's exactly opposite the cemetery.
363
A. Ask detailed questions on the text. Answer the questions
B. Describe the room to let.
C. Roleplay the conversation.
E. Flats to let. In centre of London. Two rooms, kitchen and bathroom. Central heating, double glazing.
Short let only. Tel: 6043221.
Large flat. In good area N.I. Four rooms and balcony. Suit professional couple. Good location for shops
and underground. Tel: 224 8818.
House to let. Walton-on-Thames. (30 mins from London) Short let only. Tel: 0932 41120
Situation You're looking for a good flat or a house to rent. Look at the advertisements above. Now
telephone and ask for details. Also ask for an appointment.
(I=Interviewer; Mrs R.=Mrs Robinson)
I: Mrs Robinson. You live in Milton Keynes.
MrsR.: Yes, that's right.
I: Do you live in a house or in a flat?
MrsR.: I live in a house.
I: Is it an old house?
Mrs R.: No, it's new. Milton Keynes is all new.
I: Is it a large house?
Mrs R.: No, it's not very large.
I: How many bedrooms are there?
Mrs R.: There are three. Two large bedrooms and one small bedroom.
I: How large is the kitchen?
Mrs R.: I think it's eleven square metres.
I: Is there a garage?
Mrs R.: Yes, there is.
I: And do you like Milton Keynes?
Mrs R.: Yes, I do. I like it a lot. I live in a semi-detached house, with three bedrooms, two living rooms, a
kitchen and one bathroom. It's also got a large
364
garden. The two living rooms are very large, and two of my bedrooms are also large, fifteen square
metres, nine square metres and eight square metres, I think. The kitchen is ten square metres.
A. Questions
1. Where does Mrs Robinson live? 2. Does she live in a house or in a flat? 3. Does she seem to like her
house or not? 4. Is the house old or new? 5. How many bedrooms are there? 6. Are they large? 7. How
many living rooms are there? 8. Are they large? 9. Is there a garage?
B. You are Mrs Robinson. Speak about your house.
C. Roleplay the conversation.
D. Find out which of your classmates lives in a house. Ask him/ her questions about the house.
Mr Tard: Good morning, Mr Menning. How are you?
Mr Menning: Fine, thank you. How are you?
Mr Tard: Fine, thanks. I am on my way home. Do you
want to see my new house? Mr Menning: Yes, I do. Is it far? Mr Tard: No, I walk to the college every
morning. It takes
about 10 minutes. Mr Menning:! like this street.
Mr Tard: It's Maple Street. Here is our house now. Mr Menning: You've got a beautiful yard, Mr Tard.
Mr Tard: Thank you. My family enjoys it very much. We spend a lot of time here in the summer.
Please, come in. Mr Menning:Your living-room is very attractive. I like your large windows. Mr Tard:
We like plenty of light.
Mr Menning:Is your furniture new? It seems quite modern. Mr Tard: Yes, it's new. My wife and I like
modern furni- ture. It's very comfortable. In fact we have a com-
fortable house.

365
Mr MenningiDo you have a bedroom downstairs?
Mr Tard: No, our three bedrooms are upstairs. Downstairs we have a living-room, a dining-room and'a kit-
chen. We have a bathroom downstairs too. We have a toilet and a wash-basin.
Mr Menning:Do you have a bathroom upstairs too?
Mr Tard: Yes, the upstairs bathroom has a tub and a shower. And, of course, it has a toilet and a wash
basin.
Mr Merming:Do you have a large family, Mr Tard? -
Mr Tard: We have three children. Our two boys have their room and the baby-girl has her room. They use
the yard for their play-room in the summer.
Mr Menning: Do they have a play-room in the winter?
Mr Tard: They use the boys' room. It's quite large.
Mr Menning: I like your living-room very much. Do you own your home?
Mr Tard: No, we rent our house but we want to buy a house soon. We enjoy ours. Please, drop in again.
Mr Menning: Thank you very much.
A. Questions
1. Is Mr Tard's house far from the college? 2. In what street is his house? 3. Has he got a beautiful yard?
4. Is the living-room attractive? 5. Is the furniture old or new? 5. How many bedrooms are there? 6. Are
they downstairs or upstairs? 7. Is Mr Tard's family large? 6. Where do the children have their play-room in
the summer and in the winter?
B. You are Mr Tard. Speak about your new house.
C. Roleplay the conversation.
D. Situation: You are at your friend's house. It is large and comfortable, it is also well furnished. You
compliment your friend on the flat and the furniture.
E. Have you ever been to the USA? What is a typical American house like?

Tom: Have you moved to your new apartment yet, Fred?

Fred: Yes, we moved in last Saturday.
Tom: So, how do you like it?
Fred: Oh, it's great! There's plenty of room, and it's quiet, too.
Tom: Yeah? Uh, what's the building like? Does it have a pool?
Fred: No, it doesn't have a pool, but there's a big yard for the
kids to play in. Tom: It sounds nice.
Fred: It is. Why don't you come over this weekend and see it? Tom: So, Fred, tell me about your new
neighbourhood. What's
it like? Fred: Well, the location is really convenient. We can walk
everywhere ... to the post office, the bank, the grocery
store... Tom: Great!
Fred: And we're only a ten-minute walk from downtown. Tom: Hey, that's nice! But, uh, isn't there a lot of
traffic? Fred: No, not really. Uh, even though we're close to downtown, our apartment is on a side street,
so it's quiet...
there's not much traffic at all. Tom: Mm, that's good! Fred: And besides all those conveniences, the
neighbourhood
has another big advantage... Tom: Oh? What's that? Fred: There's a terrific Chinese restaurant right
across the
street from our apartment. You know how my wife and
I both hate to cook! Tom: (Laughs) I sure do.
366
A. Ask and answer questions on the text.
B. You are Fred. Speak about your new apartment.
C. Roleplay the conversation.
D. Pair work: Talk about the place where you live. Ask these and other questions of your own.
Your home
Do you live in a house or an apartment? 367
How long have you lived there?
How big is it?
Does it have...?
Do you like it there?
Is there anything you don't like about it?
Your neighbourhood
What are your neighbours like?
What kind of neighbourhood is it?
Do a lot of families with young children live there?
Are there many older people living there?
Are there any shops in the neighbourhood?
Is there good transportation nearby?
What do you like most about the neighbourhood?
Is there anything you don't like about it?
E. Write a paragraph like this about your home and neighbourhood.
I live in a two-bedroom apartment. It's on the tenth floor of a large apartment building near the downtown
area, and the rent is fairly reasonable. It's quite a nice area to live in because there are lots of shops and
restaurants neafby. However, sometimes it is too noisy at night because of all the buses and cars that go
by. Even though it isn't perfect, I wouldn't want to move. I can easily walk to work in ten minutes, and my
neighbours are very friendly.

Andy and Rose live in Bristol. One evening they invite their friend, Mike, to visit them.
(Door chime)
Andy: Come in Mike.
Mike: Hello. Sorry I'm late Rose.
Rose: What's the matter Mike? You don't look too good.
Mike: Oh, I'm all right. I'm just a bit tired, that's all.
Rose: Come and sit down. Would you like a glass of wine?
Mike: Yes ... thanks, (drinks) Oh, that's delicious.
Andy: Why are you so tired Mike?
Mike: I've got a new flat. I'm busy getting furniture for it.
Andy: That's great! Where is it? Is it near your work?
368
Mike: It's in Clifton. It's a long way from the office but there's
a good bus service. It only takes half an hour. Rose: Tell us about the flat. Is it nice?
Mike: Yes, it's on the top floor of a house in Belldock Avenue ... er ... number 34.
Rose: How big is it? I mean... how many rooms?
Mike: Well, it's got a lovely sitting room... There's a big window in it.,. I can see Elsley Park. Then there's a
nice bedroom at the back.
Rose: What about the kitchen and the bathroom ... what are they like?
Mike: The bathroom's rather small... but... er... the kitchen's nice and big.
Andy: What sort of furniture have you got?
Mike: Well, I haven't got very much furniture yet. I bought a fridge and a cooker today. They were very
expensive!
Andy: Where did you get them? Did you buy them in a shop?
Mike: Yes, at Curry's in the High Street.
Andy: Why don't you look in the newspaper? I was looking at some advertisements this afternoon. There
were lots of advertisements for furniture.
Mike: Yes, that's a good idea. I want to buy some furniture for the sitting room.
Rose: Andy, would you like some more wine?
Andy: No, thanks. And why don't we go out and eat?
Rose: Oh, I don't know ... er... what do you think Mike? Are you feeling better?
Mike: Yes, I'm fine. I'd love to go out and eat.
Andy: Good. Where shall we go? Any suggestions?
Rose: There's a new Chinese restaurant in South Street...
Mike: I'm not so keen on Chinese food... There's an Italian restaurant near my new flat... How about going
there?
Rose: Yes, I love Italian food.
Andy: So do I.
Mike: Good. Let's go then. I can show you my new flat after the meal.
Andy: Fine, where are my car keys...
A. Questions
1. Why does Mike look tired? 2. Where is his new flat? 3. Is it far
369
from his office? 4. How many rooms are there in his flat? 5. What are the rooms like? 6. What furniture
has Mike got? 7. Is he going to buy any more furniture? 8. What are the three friends going to do?
B. Give a brief account of the conversation.
C. Roleplay the conversation.
D. Situation: Your friend is moving to a new flat. He says he likes it very much. You want to know where
his new flat is, whether it's large or small, whether it's high up, if the layout of the rooms is nice and the
like.
E. Where do your classmates live? Find out about their homes.
The bell rings. Susan's mother is at the door.
Mother: Hallo dear. Oh! I see I've arrived too late. You've
almost completely settled in.
Susan: Not quite. By the way, I didn't expect you to come
here to work. Come in! I'll show you the flat. This
is the living room, which isn't completely furnished
* yet, but it's comfortable enough to receive my friends,
isn't it?
Mother: Well of course! And that balcony is really very useful. You should plant some flowers there.
Susan: Don't worry mother. I'll plant some soon. But come and have a look at my bedroom. For the
moment there's only a bed and a cupboard, but you'll see, when I've got some bookshelves and a desk I'll
be able to work quite nicely. Mother: And what's more, a tiled bathroom! Susan: I must say I looked for
nearly six months. I asked estate agents and friends and went through advertisements.
Mother: I hope the rent isn't too high. Susan: No. It's quite reasonable. But I've been lucky because
most of the flats I was offered were less comfortable and the rents were too high. Mother: You've done
very well! You're really very lucky.
370
A. Questions
1. Was Susan expecting her mother to help her settle into the new flat? 2. What does Susan say about
the room? 3. What is the balcony like? 4. What suggestion does Susan's mother make regarding the
balcony? 5. What furniture is there in the bedroom? 6. What pieces of furniture is Susan planning to get?
7. Had Susan been looking for a flat for a long time? 8. What did she do in order to find a flat? 9. Is the
rent of the flat expensive? 10. Why does Susan believe she has been lucky?
B. Here is a reported version of the conversation. Study and practise it.
The bell rings.
Susan's mother is at the door.
They say hello. Susan's mother is surprised to see that Susan has almost completely settled in. Susan
says she will show her the flat. They look into the living room, which is not completely furnished yet, but is
comfortable enough to receive friends. Susan's mother comments on the balcony which is very large and
sunny. She suggests that Susan should plant some flowers there. Then they look into the bedroom. For
the moment there is only a bed and a cupboard there but, as Susan says, when she has got some
bookshelves and a desk she'll be able to work nicely. Her mother is very impressed with the tiled
bathroom. Susan mentions that she looked for a flat for nearly six months. She asked estate agents and
friends and went through advertisements. Her mother enquires about the rent. Susan reassures her and
tells her it is quite reasonable. She also thinks she has been lucky because most of the flats she was
offered were less comfortable and the rents were too high. Her mother congratulates her and says Susan
is really very lucky.
Note: enquire = inquire . C. Roleplay the conversation.
I D. Situation: You are showing your friend your flat. Both you and i your guest make some comments on
the flat, the furniture, etc.
| E. How often have you moved in the last five years? In your life- 1 time?
371
F. Imagine you are about to move to a new neighbourhood. Find out all the details about it.
G. Situation: You talk about your new flat and compare it with the old one.
Listening
Judson Webb was an American businessman. He had a comfortable flat in New York but in summer he
left the city and went to the country. There he had a cottage of three rooms, a bathroom and a kitchen. In
one of the rooms there was a big closet where he kept his guns, fishing-rods, wine and other things. He
liked his cottage very much, especially his own closet and he got very angry when anybody else entered
his closet and touched his things.
It was autumn now and Judson was packing his things for the winter. When he looked at the shelf on
which the whisky stood his face changed. All the bottles were unopened except one. The bottle was less
than half full. As he took it from the shelf, Helen, his wife, came into the room carrying her suitcase. She
stopped and looked in surprise as she saw the bottle of whisky in her husband's hand. She watched her
husband take small white tablets out of his pocket and put them one by one into the bottle. Helen's face
became pale. She looked at her husband in horror. "What are they?" she asked at last. "Will they make
the thief sick?"
"Not only sick. They will kill him," he answered with satisfaction.
He closed the bottle and put it back on the shelf. He looked pleased.
"Don't do it Judson," Helen cried. "It's murder. What right have you to punish the man if he steals a little
whisky?"
"It's my house and I make my laws here. A thief is a thief."
She knew it was useless to argue with him. He had always been ruthless. She went to the door.
"I'll walk down the road and say good-bye to the caretaker's wife," she said quietly. She made up her mind
to tell the caretaker's wife about it. Someone had to know.
"All right, my dear," he smiled, "and don't worry about your poor little thief. No one will be hurt unless he
drinks some whisky."
372
Helen went down the road and Judson started to close the closet door. He suddenly remembered he had
not packed his hunting boots lying on the table in the garden. He left the door open and went to the
garden to fetch them. But when he wanted to take his boots he suddenly slipped on a stone and his head
struck the heavy table as he fell.
Several minutes later he felt a strong arm round him and the caretaker's voice was saying: "It's all right,
Mr Webb. Take this — it'll make you feel better."
A small whisky-glass was pressed to his lips. Half-conscious, he drank.
A. Questions
1. Where did the Webbs spend the summer? 2. What did Judson notice when he was packing his things?
3.What did he do? 4. Did his wife approve of that? 5. What did she decide to do? 6. What happened
some time later?
Reading

Over half the people in Britain live in their own houses, about a third live in property rented from the local
council and one in eight live in privately-rented accommodation. The total number of dwellings is more
than 22 million and houses are much more common than flats (the ratio is approximately four to one).
More than 40 per cent of families live in a home built after 1945.
Although the number of houses built during the 1980s went down (especially in the public housing sector
traditionally provided by local authorities) the number of people owning their own homes has more than
trebled in the last thirty-five years: in 1951 only 4 million dwellings were owned by the people who lived in
them; by 1988 it was more than 13 million and still rising. Under the Conservative government many
people who previously rented their homes from the local council were given the opportunity to buy them.
There are tax incentives for people who buy their own homes.
Buying a house is a large financial investment for many people and the majority buy their homes with a
mortgage loan from a
373
building society or bank. The loan is repaid in monthly instalments over a period of twenty years or more.
Some people rent or buy accommodation through housing associations which provide a financial
alternative to the mortgage system. There has also been an increase in the amount of accommodation for
older people, as the number of pensioners increases. Accommodation known as "sheltered" housing
provides homes (with some degree of assistance) for elderly and disabled people.
The standard of housing has improved but while most of the old slum areas in cities have been cleared,
many of the large square blocks of flats which replaced them as part of the high-rise housing programme
of the 1960s have been criticized as being badly designed and built. Some have been pulled down and
replaced with low-rise housing. However, because fewer houses were built and more council property
was sold off, there were fewer houses available, especially for young people and those who could not
afford a mortgage. House prices tend to adjust according to how much money people are earning (with
occasional "booms" in property prices): in Britain the cost of buying somewhere to live varies considerably
according to the area.
A. Questions
1. What are the three types of housing mentioned? 2. What is the ratio of houses to flats in Britain? 3.
What has happened to home ownership in Britain? 4. What is happening to housing rented from local
authorities in Britain? 5. Explain the following, "sheltered" housing, a mortgage, a slum area. 6. What
differences are there between housing in Britain and in your country?

There are many different types of housing in Britain, ranging from the traditional thatched country cottage
to flats in the centre of towns. Houses are often described by the period in which they were built (for
example, Georgian, Victorian, 1930s, or post-war) and whether they are terraced, semi-detached or
detached. As well as preferring houses to flats, for many people a garden is also an important
consideration. Although Britain is relatively small the areas where people live vary considerably: there are
new towns and inner cities, suburbs, commuter belts and the open countryside.
374
Paying for the home you live in is the biggest single item in the budget of most families and getting on the
housing "ladder" can be difficult. First-time house buyers on an average salary may have to borrow 90 or
even 100 per cent of the value of the property they want to buy. It is possible for people to borrow up to
three times their annual income or sometimes even more. As prices vary, the cost of a six-bedroom
farmhouse in a remote part of Scotland is about the same as a small flat in an expensive area of west
London. People moving from the north to the south of Britain have to pay a lot more for the same type of
house.
The average family moves once every seven years and the process of moving involves an estate agent
(responsible for advertising houses for sale), a building society, bank or insurance company for the
finance, and a solicitor to handle the legal aspects of the buying and selling. The size of a house or flat in
Britain still tends to be measured by the number of bedrooms rather than the area in square metres. In
keeping with a nation of home owners, gardening is a popular spare time activity.
A. Questions
1. What are the main types of houses in Britain? 2. How much do some people borrow to buy a house? 3.
What does the text say about the differences in house prices in Britain? 4. How often do people move
house? What other people are involved if you want to move house? 5. How is the size of a house still
measured in Britain? 6. What type of house would you prefer to live in? Give your reasons.

Terraced houses Terraced houses are usually found in inner cities. They can be anything up to 150
years old and were often built by industries to house their workers near the factories. They are built in
long rows where each house is attached to the ones on either side. The back of this type of house faces
the back of another identical row of houses, so they are often known as "back to backs". In recent years
many terraced houses have been renovated: central heating has been added and other improvements
made to what was originally a simple and sometimes primitive home with an outside toilet and no
bathroom.
375
Semi-detached houses Semi-detached houses have been built in large numbers since the 1930s when
Britain's towns and cities expanded into suburbs. Each house is part of a pair and is joined on one side to
its partner. The semi usually has a small back and front garden, three bedrooms and a small bathroom. It
is the most popular type of house in Britain and could be called the home of "Mr and Mrs Average". Towns
in Britain have areas which contain streets and streets of semis, often with well-kept gardens.
Detached house The detached house stands by itself, usually with a garden all around it. These houses
are much more expensive than semis and are often owned by professional people. Most detached
houses are to be found in affluent suburbs or in the "green belt" — a strip of protected open countryside
around a city, where no industrial development or major building schemes are allowed. Some large cities
(particularly London) also have a "commuter belt" — so called because the professionals who live there
travel (commute) every day to work into the city by train or car. London is surrounded by miles and miles
of "commuter belt". Some commuters travel up to three or four hours a day to get from their homes to the
inner city.
Country cottages Britain is famous for its country cottages which were often built on the country estates
of wealthy landowners. The workers on the estate rented the cottages from the landowner and worked on
the land. Cottages were also frequently built around a village green. Cottages have low ceilings, wooden
beams and sometimes a thatched roof. In recent years some cottages have become second homes,
bought by professionals during the economic boom of the 1980s.
Tower blocks In the 1950s and 1960s local councils cleared a lot of slums in the inner city areas and
knocked down terraced houses in very poor areas. The people were re-housed in tower blocks on the
outskirts of the city or in the centre of the city. Tower blocks can vary from 3-5 storeys high up to 10-20
storeys high. Each storey contains 5 or 6 flats for families. In recent years local councils have tried to
improve the areas around tower blocks by creating "green space" children's playgrounds and facilities for
the community to use. Some tower blocks in large cities like London can be very dangerous at night and
they have been criticized for their long dark corridors, which encourage crime and vandalism.
Self check
I. Put the verbs in brackets into the correct tense.
A. Am (look) for a bed-sitter. She (see) an advertisement in the local paper and (ring) up Mrs Smith, the
owner of the house. Mrs Smith (answer) the phone.
Ann: Good afternoon. I (ring) about the room you adver-
tised,
Mrs Smith: Oh yes.
Ann: The advertisement (say) "Share bathroom and
kitchen". How many other people (use) the bathroom and kitchen?
Mrs Smith: Only one other — an Italian girl. And she (use) the kitchen very little. She (eat) out most of the
time. I (not think) she (like) cooking.
Ann: That (suit) me all right. I (like) cooking.But how
we (arrange) about paying for the gas we (use) in the kitchen?
Mrs Smith: The rent (include) gas for cooking, also hot water and light. But it (not include) heating. Each
room has its own fire and meter.
Ann: I(see). And the room (face) the front or the back?
Mrs Smith: It (face) the front. It (look) out on the garden square; and it (get) a lot of sun.
Ann: That (sound) very nice. Could I come and see it
this evening?
Mrs Smith: Yes, the earlier the better.
Ann: 7 p.m. (suit) you? I (not be able to) come before
that as I usually (not get) away from the office till 6 p.m.
Mrs Smith: 7 p.m. (be) all right. I (not think) you (have) any difficulty in finding us. The 14 bus (pass) the
house and (stop) a few doors further along, outside the Post Office.
Ann: I'm sure I (find) it all right. I (see) you at 7.00
then, Mrs Smith.Goodbye.
At 6.30 Mr Smith (come) home from work. He (ask) his wife about the room.
377
376
Mrs Smith: I haven't let it yet but a girl (come) to see it at 7.00. Mr Smith: She probably (come) at 7.30
just as we (sit) down
to supper. People coming here for the first time
always (get) lost. I (not think) you (give) proper
directions. Mrs Smith: Oh yes, I (do). But nobody (listen) to directions
these days. Anyway I'm sure this girl (be) in time.
Just then the doorbell (ring). Mrs Smith (look) at her husband and (smile).
"You see," she (say), and (go) to open the door.
B.
Dear Sir
I (be) interested in the furnished cottage near Dedham which you (advertise) in yesterday's "Telegraph",
for my husband and I (come) to England in June and (require) accommodation for three months. You
please (tell) me exactly where it is and give me details of bus and train services in the area. I also (like) to
know about the local shops. I (be able) to shop without a car? My husband (hope) to hire a car, but I (not
drive) and he (not be) free very often to take me shopping, so we (need) a cottage on a bus route. The
local shops still (deliver)? I (know) they (do) ten years ago. I also (like) to know whether you supply
sheets etc. and whether a laundry (call) at the house. The rent you (ask) (sound) reasonable for the size
of the cottage. How you (like) it paid? Weekly, monthly or in advance?
My husband and I (be) abroad for ten years, but before that we (live) near Dedham, that's why we (want)
to spend our holidays there. My husband also (write) a book about Constable and (like) to finish it in the
area where he, Constable, (paint) most of his pictures. Mr Jones, the bank manager, (know) us since we
(live) in the area and I (be) sure he (recommend) us as suitable tenants. I of course (be willing) to send a
deposit.
I (be) grateful for an early reply and (enclose) a stamped addressed envelope.
Yours faithfully, Pamela Smith
378
КЛЮЧИ К УПРАЖНЕНИЯМ
Unit I Exercise I, p. 12
1 does Mary have, she does, has 2 is it raining, it isn't, don't think 3 do you like, I don't, like 4 do your
friends write, they do, get 5 are the students taking, they aren't, are doing 6 do you know, I don't 7 does
your desk have, it does 8 is Jean studying, she isn't, is, is playing, does Jean play, she doesn't, usually
studies, is she, she is, plays, do you know, I do, am not
Exercise II, p. 13
1 hear, do you hear, I do 2 is, it isn't, doesn't belong, belongs, don't you ask 3 are you listening, am, want
4 do you see, am talking, is wearing, do you know, don't think, don't know 5 is the baby sleeping, is
taking, don't want 6 are you thinking, am thinking, don't think, don't believe
Exercise III, p. 13
I doesn't take, walks, do you take, do you walk 2 isn't raining, is shining, does it rain 3 am looking, see 4
need, don't know 5 like, prefer 6 are, are having, have, are playing, like, are sunbathing, are trying, are
listening, hear 7 am thinking, think 8 is sitting, is writing, is using, doesn't belong, belongs, is looking up,
wants 9 do you prefer, like, am reading, prefer, are, value, means, is, loves, sounds 10 do you believe,
are you talking, exist 11 are you writing, am making, do you always prepare, always try 12 is always
interrupting, is always asking 13 are you doing, am tasting, tastes 14 is raining, is standing is holding, is
waiting 15 am looking, looks, has, isn't having 16 costs 17 don't own, wear 18 is putting, are rewiring, is
building 19 do you hear, is blowing 20 do you see, am looking, don't see 21 are you walking, usually walk,
am hurrying, am meeting, doesn't like 22'do you recognize, think, don't remember 23 wonder, are waiting
24 don't you see, see, am not wearing, does it say, says 25 do you need, do you feel 26 does
379
it save, take, doesn't matter 27 am saving, am going 28 think, are getting 29 are looking at, is just taking
off 30 does, is always working, is he doing, think, is polishing 31 is coming, do you want 32 is Peter
getting on, seems 33 does Mrs Pitt look, is smoking and dropping 34 are leaving, arriving, spending,
setting out, sounds, get 35 makes, finds, goes, doesn't forget, returns, looks, finds, recognizes, coils, kills,
does the snake feel, don't know, ends 36 do you end, begins, put, prefers 37 does the word "catastrophe"
mean, means 38 are you waiting, am waiting, doesn't open, know, want, starts/is starting 39 are you
smoking, don't smoke, am smoking, want, says, removes 40 owns, don't know, is using, knows, owns 41
do you mind, ask, depends, concerns, refuse 42 leaves 43 are you enjoying, am enjoying, want 44 do you
get, go, am going 45 are you putting on, am going, are you coming, do you mind 46 do you belong, do
you read, do you change, change 47 do you like, am giving 48 are always complaining 49 are you writing,
always write, do you want 50 are having, wonder, are talking 51 do you believe, don't believe, do you read
52 is making, do you think, doesn't matter, makes 53 is smoking, expect, are building, don't you put, does,
doesn't seem 54 are doing, are cutting 55 are you waiting, am waiting, is just getting 56 are saying, is
making 57 is always losing and asking 58 is knocking, am coming, am just washing 59 are you doing, am
going 60 are having, is catching 61 are digging, are they doing, are looking 62 is making, are repairing 63
are you sitting, hope, are studying, have, doesn't include, are trying, regard 64 hope, are enjoying,
sunbathe, go, are going 65 is taking, goes, are sitting, are arguing 66 are you going, am going, do you
want, are always buying, do you smoke, don't smoke, smokes, do, spends 67 sees, are you waiting, am
waiting, usually go, belongs, wants, is using, go, takes, passes, is working, am queuing, are you coming,
are you waiting, think, wait, are, looks 68 are waiting, is dialling, do you know, phones, does he come,
comes, speaks, wonder, is speaking, comes, suppose, is speaking 69 are having, are both opening,
writes, get, do you have, says, is coming, wants 70 do you have, don't think, don't see, does a traffic
warden do, walks, stays, parks, sticks, is putting, sees, hates 71 happens, does the teacher give, gives,
shows, discusses 72 is that man standing, is trying, is waiting, doesn't he use/isn't he using, don't bother,
prefer 73 are wearing, do you like, suits, doesn't fit 74 are you
380
doing, am packing, am catching, are you staying 75 am just going, is pouring, don't you wait, stops 76
writes, know, is doing, does your son write, seems 77 am seeing, am changing, are always changing,
don't you leave 78 look/are looking, are you thinking, am thinking, are only just starting, know, am
reading, says, starts
79 are you staying, am leaving, am going, are you coming, are you going, depends, agrees, expect, is
seeing, don't you come
80 are all those people doing, are they wearing, are making, are working, sounds, do you think, don't
know, see, finish, are still taking, does Ann act, does not act, imagine, knows 81 are you looking, am
looking, am always looking, puts, put, don't you try
82 are travelling, is reading, is doing, is looking, stops, falls
83 hear, am not living, are still working, is taking, think, take, expects
Exercise IV, p. 20
1. Ring him up now. I think he is not sleeping yet. 2. I'm working hard now. I'm taking my exams. 3. He
doesn't see that I'm looking at him. He's reading something with great interest. 4. Where's Nina? — She's
having an English class. She always has an English class on Fridays. 5. Let's go for a walk. It is not
raining. 6. My brother works as an engineer at a plant. He says he likes his work very much. 7. Does your
daughter go to school? — Yes, she is in the fifth form. — Do you help her with mathematics? —
Regularly. 8. My father knows English very well. He reads English books without a dictionary. 9. Listen.
The telephone is ringing. 10. My son doesn't do very well at school. He spends too much time on sports
and too little time on his homework. 11. Where do you usually spend your holidays? — In Belarus. My
parents live there. — Is there a river or a lake there? — There is a big and beautiful lake there. I have a
good time there. 12. My brother lives far from me. I don't often see him. 13. Where are you hurrying? •—
To the cinema. My friend is waiting for me outside the cinema. 14. Who does this house belong to? — It is
my uncle's house. 15. How much does this tape recorder cost? — 200 dollars. 16. Who is she talking to?
— Her boss. 17. My brother is a diplomat. He often goes abroad. 18. The man is staring at you. Do you
know him? 19. What are you listening to? — I'm listening to folk songs. I like them very much. 20. My
brother has a car,
381
but I never use it. I want to buy my own car. 21. Phone the railway station and find out, when the train
from Berlin comes/is coming. 22.1 don't like her. She is constantly grumbling. 23. Do you often write to
your parents? — Every week. 24. Don't take this book My brother is reading it. 25. It is getting dark.
Switch on the light. 26.1 never drive to work. I always walk. 27. Are you going to the university? — No. I'm
going to the library. 28. She is very absent-minded. She is constantly losing things. 29. My sister is living
in Moscow now. She is studying at Moscow University. 30. Is it still raining? — Yes. 31. We are leaving on
Friday at 8 a.m. We are meeting at the station at 7.30. 32. What does she like him for? — She says he's
kind and clever. 33. Do you remember me? We were at the institute together. 34. Why don't we go to the
country on Sunday? — Good idea. 35. Tom is very busy now. He's building a garage. 36. When is your
father coming? — In a week. 37. What do you think of this film? — It is a bit boring. 38. What are you
thinking about? — I'm thinking about my childhood. 39. What time does the shop close?—At eight. 40.
When does the performance begin? — At 7 p.m. 41. What goods does your country export? 42. What are
you laughing at? — Tom has told us a funny story. 43. He never misses classes without a good reason.
44. My parents are at the seaside now. They are having a-good time. 45. What are you looking for? — My
car keys. 46. Why aren't you listening to me? It is very important. 47. Don't you like football? It is such an
exciting game. 48. I'm meeting Ann tomorrow. We're playing tennis. 49. What are you doing here? — I'm
looking through the new magazines. I do it every week. 50. Why are you learning English? — I'm going
abroad for some months. Besides, I need English for my research work. 51. What are they talking about?
— I think, they are discussing the results of the conference. 52. You may switch off the TV set. I'm not
watching it. 53. Who looks after your children when you're at work? As a rule, my mother does. She is not
working/doesn't work now. 54. Why are you so angry? Why are you crying at me? 55. She doesn't like
meat, she prefers fish. 56. There are a lot of mistakes in her dictation, though she usually makes few
mistakes. 57. The conference begins on the 8 th of June and finishes on the 14 th of June. 58. Where is
Ann? — She's taking a shower. 59. Why don't you write to her? — I don't know her address. 60. She
doesn't know when her brother is coming. 61. You often see Ann, don't
382
you? •— No, she lives/is living in the country now. 62. How many foreign languages does John know? —
Two, if I'm not mistaken. And now he's learning Arabic. — Really? Does he need it for his work?—Yes. He
is going to Egypt. 63. The next train starts/is starting at 10 o'clock. You may catch it, if you hurry up. 64.1
wonder what she is doing now.
Exercise I, p. 37
1 didn't hear, was sleeping 2 was shining, was blowing, were singing 3 were arguing, walked 4 got,
opened, found 5 was climbing, tripped, fell, didn't hurt 6 was reading, fell, closed, tiptoed 7 enjoyed, was
snowing, was shining, were shovelling, was lying 8 finally found, was already, were busily talking, were
speaking, were conversing, sounded, were just sitting, chose, sat, walked, stopped 9 arrived, was having,
apologized, lunched 10 always wore, carried 11 shared, was always complaining/always complained 12
realized, was travelling 13 was playing, threw 14 was just opening, blew 15 was opening, heard, put,
crawled 16 were playing, heard, hid, took 17 didn't allow, was blowing 18 was making, was saying 19 was
standing, was waiting 20 heard, went, opened, didn't recognize, wasn't wearing 21 were dancing, broke,
stole 22 was always buying 23 told, was spending/spent, listened 24 woke, got, went, bought, had, was
usually grazing, didn't chase, made, was crossing, went, annoyed, began, was carrying, was raining,
threw, ran, stopped, began, was doing 25 did you interrupt, was having 26 were walking, heard, turned,
held, stopped 27 was making, felt, brought, was able 28 saw, were you using, was using, were you riding
29 did you damage, ran, were driving, were going 30 was just writing, remembered, had 31 said, was
building, thought 32 did you lend, was still reading, didn't know, you were still reading 33 did you hear,
said, wasn't listening, was thinking 34 weren't you, was waiting 35 was she wearing 36 did you break,
slipped, was crossing 37 decided, chose, looked, were getting, was mixing, was washing, were, asked,
was doing, replied, was going, went, knew, were looking, began, found, were, were waiting, remembered,
had, started, was telephoning, did, came, grumbled, was always telephoning, retorted, was always
complaining, worked, were starting, rang, was, wanted, was playing, stayed, went, left, returned, came,
wasted, said, thought,
383
was just climbing, rang, said, got, went, opened, was, was coming, was arriving 38 didn't get, were
having, rang, said, were making, pointed out, was, had 39 did you do, got, worked, did you stay, stayed,
left, went, became 40 did you break, fell, was putting, was, was, was going, didn't go, cancelled, spent 41
looked, said, was leaving and going, said, was, was going, told, was getting on 42 was running, struck 43
was snowing, woke, remembered, was coming, decided, lost 44 was, was, was raining, was getting,
heard, looked, noticed, was turning, rushed, turned, asked 45 introduced, shook, smiled 46 hurt, cut
Exercise II, p. 40
I. It was raining hard yesterday evening, so we couldn't go to the stadium. 2.1 didn't expect to meet you
here. When did you come? 3.1 missed the 10 o'clock train so I had to wait for the next one the whole
hour. 4. We misunderstood each other. I was waiting for him inside the university, while he was waiting for
me outside. 5. The stewardess asked the passengers to fasten seat belts, as the plane was landing. 6.
Were you at home yesterday evening? — No, I went to the theatre. I enjoyed the performance. The acting
was superb. 7. When were you on holiday last? — Last winter. — How did you spend it? — Very well. I
went skiing and skating. 8. When you phoned yesterday, I was busy. I was translating our new contract.
9.1 was late for my English class yesterday. When I came, the students were writing a composition. 10.
Ann swept the floor, washed up the dishes and began to do her homework.
I1. Yesterday we swam, lay in the sun, went boating, played tennis. We had a lot of fun. 12. Was it raining
when you left home? 13. He was walking downstairs, when I saw him. 14. Who were you talking to when I
met you in the corridor? 15. What were you doing when I rang you up yesterday evening?—I was making
supper. 16. Were you at home at 5 o'clock yesterday? — No, I was at the university. I was taking my
exam in Grammar at that time. 17. While I was looking for the keys in the sitting-room, my wife was
looking for them in the dining-room. 18. She was constantly breaking the dishes. 19. She was always
complaining. 20. Why weren't you at the meeting yesterday? — I had to meet my sister at the station.
21. When did you see him last? — A week ago in the library.
22. While I was making dinner, my husband was repairing the
384
car. 23. When did you last write to your parents? — A month ago. 24. We lived in Moscow for ten years,
then we moved to Minsk. 25. When I entered the hall, the students were still discussing the first report.
26. The boy was fishing, when he fell down into the water. 27. Fiveyears ago I used to get up early. 28. A
week ago I lost my glasses, but two days later I found them. 29. It was a fine summer day. The sun was
shining and the birds were singing. 30. He was very busy, when I saw him, because he was going away
on business on the next day. 31. Why were you so angry with him? 32. Last Saturday my father went
fishing and caught a lot of fish. 33. Why didn't you phone me? — I came home too late. 34. Who saw
Helen yesterday? — I did. 35. What journals did he want to show me? — I don't know. 36. The whole
evening yesterday they were discussing their plans for summer holidays. 37. Did you work at this plant
three years ago? 38. Did you look through the documents yesterday? 39. We were having supper when
my elder sister returned from the university. 40. Where did you meet Ann? — I met her outside the library
when I was going home. 41. Who bought the present for Jane? — Nick did. 42. How many letters did you
type yesterday? — Twenty. 43. When the clock struck twelve, we went to bed. 44.1 was having dinner
when he called me. 45. Where did you go after our classes? — To the department store. 46. When did he
come back from London? — A week ago. 47. He showed you his new flat, didn't he? 48. It was raining
from five to seven. 49. Peter was looking through the newspapers, while Ann was watching television. 50.
You were translating the article the whole evening, weren't you? — Yes, the article was rather difficult and
I had to look up many words in the dictionary. 51. When I came, the typist was still typing my documents.
52. Was there much snow last year? —• Yes, there was. 53. When did you get this letter? — Yesterday
morning. 54. The weather was nice, and the children asked me to take them to the park. 55. At our
English lesson the teacher asked questions and we answered them. 56. I read my sister's composition.
There were some mistakes in it. 57. Where did you see him last week? — We saw him at the theatre. 58.
Who visited you yesterday? — My son's friends. 59. Where were you this afternoon? I came to see you.
but you weren't at home. CO. What time did you have dinner toda/? -— At two o'clock. 61. He shook niy
hand and wished me success in my work.
13
Зак in
385
Exercise I, p. 61
A. have you worked, I've worked, I worked, were you, I moved, I've had, I had, I sold, I came
B. I we've been working 2 I've been cleaning 3 he's sitting 4 have you been 5 have you known 6 I've been
learning 7 they live, they've been
C. I I've read 2 they've been repairing 3 I've broken 4 Sally has saved 5 have you lost 6 I've always
worked 7 has eaten
Exercise II, p. 62
1 bought, haven't sold 2 was, began, ran, made 3 have you been waiting 4 rang, said, said, haven't had,
didn't you tell 5 met, said, didn't see, did you miss, didn't miss, replied, haven't missed, gave 6 have been
standing 7 went, worked, went 8 have been working, haven't been getting 9 tried, heard, called, have you
been, has been 10 has she been doing, has been playing 11 has been, did she go, went 12 met, offered,
said, have just had 13 read, enjoyed 14 has stopped 15 hasn't smoked 16 arrived, started 17 has been 18
did you lock, left 19 did you wear, insisted, left, cut, has worn 20 have been going out 21 began, lasted,
enjoyed 22 have missed 23 broke 24 worked, retired, went 25 have you been, spent, did you have,
stopped 26 haven't seen, told 27 did you find, found, didn't you leave 28 have lost, have you seen,
haven't, did you last wear, wore, left 29 left, did he go, didn't see, went 30 haven't you brought, haven't
you typed 31 have you been sunbathing, has been raining 32 have you finished, have done 33 did you
get, got 34 have been making 35 didn't know, knew, have you known, have known 36 did you hear, did,
did you think 37 didn't know, were, have you been, have been, have you been, went 38 have you ever
tried, tried, found, started 39 you've been telephoning, haven't you nearly finished, haven't got, have been
trying, has been engaged 40 have you seen, has anything interesting happened, have escaped 41 has
Mary fed, fed, did she give, gave 42 have you known, have known, did he do, came, was 43 has failed,
has been practising, has got 44 haven't seen, hasn't been, bought 45 has that horrible monument been,
has been, have written, has been 46 have been searching, haven't seen 47 have you been
have just started, did you find, answered 48 has been, has been looking, hasn't found 49 lost, has been,
did he lose, was 50 has been ringing 51 have just been, have you seen, haven't, haven't read, read, was,
did Tolstoy write, wrote, has he written 52 have been bathing 53 ha\c you booked, wrote, haven't
answered 54 has Mary been crying, hasn't been crying, has been peeling 55 have been drinking 56 have
you seen, went, saw, did you like, loved, didn't understand 57 hasn't Tom come, came, went, didn't hear
58 have you been, was, did you go, hitch-hiked 59 was, started, did you get, haven't got, have only been
60 have been playing, haven't played 61 has been standing, has already gone 62 has happened, have
been waiting, has often kept, he has never been 63 have you met, met, did you talk/were you talking,
talked/ were talking 64 haven't seen, have you been, have been, meant, hadn't/didn't have, did you have,
did you stay, have just got, enjoyed, skied, danced, skied, was, broke, haven't done 65 have you been,
went, were, did you go, went, hired, have you been, came, have been, have seen, did you go, went, took,
did you see, were, saw, walked, asked, had, said, has just returned, have you been, have been, haven't
been 66 was, did you see, took, was, said, needed, haven't been able, haven't watched 67 have you
visited, have been, have never been, were you, have also visited, took, have you visited, have always
wanted, haven't had. went, haven't gone 68 haven't seen, saw, didn't see, was, have moved, found, have
been, have you passed, passed, haven't bought, has anything... happened, hasn't been, did he leave,
didn't do, hasn't found, have just given 69 have you been working, has known, have been typing, haven't
finished, haven't had, haven't smoked, have you started, have you been smoking, started 70 have read,
have you been waiting, have been waiting, have only been, didn't make, just dropped in, has been giving,
have you been, have ever been, have been coming, have you just come in, have lost/lost, have you filled
in, have already given 71 have met, has travelled, was, decided, has changed, went, was, took, hitch-
hiked, has visited, was, made, has never forgotten, was, stole, lost, had, made/ has made, has returned,
went, worked, has made, has learnt, has had, has often been sick, has never thought, went, has
changed, have wanted
Exercise III, p. 68
1. You won't have to go to the booking-agency. I have already booked the tickets by telephone. 2.
Where's your brother? I haven't seen him for a long time. — He lives (is living) in France now. They
emigrated three years ago. 3.1 saw this play long ago. I've already forgotten it. 4. Have you translated the
text yet? — Not yet. There are too many unknown words in it. 3. You know the city very well. How long
have you lived/have you been living in London? — Since 1985. 6. Can I speak to Mr Smith? — He has
just gone out. 7. I've been calling her since three o'clock, but she is out. 8.1 have never been to Rome
and I'm looking forward to going there in May. 9. Why did you miss your English class on Thursday? — I
went away on business. 10. Has the train from Warsaw come yet? — No, it is coming in half an hour. 11.
How long have you lived/have you been living in the hostel? — For two years. 12. The whole evening my
wife has been writing letters. She has already written five letters. 13. Have you ever been to Washington?
— Yes, I went to Washington five years ago. There was a conference on human rights there, and I made
a report. 14. Where's Ann? — She went out for a walk an hour ago and hasn't come back yet. 15. There
were a lot of people in the library, and I decided to go there in the evening. 16. She looks very tired. — No
wonder. She's been working very hard lately. 17.1 wanted to see this film last week, but I was able to see
it only yesterday. 18. How long have you been here? — Since five o'clock. 19. I haven't seen Helen lately.
— Neither have I. 20. What are you reading? — "Gone with the Wind". It is a very interesting book. Have
you read it? — Not yet. 21. Where's Nick? I've been waiting for him for an hour. — I saw him in the library
about ten minutes ago. 22. I haven't seen Victor since we were at the theatre last time. 23. When did the
children come back from school? — About three hours ago. — Have they done their homework yet? —
Not yet. They are having a rest now. 24.1 have lost my keys. Haven't you seen them? — Look at that
desk. There are two keys there. Perhaps, they are yours. 25. Let's go out for a walk. — I'm sorry but I
can't. I haven't written my composition yet. 26. Nina looks upset. — Yes, she has been preparing for the
exam for a week, but she has got a satisfactory mark. 27. Where were you yesterday evening? — I went
to see my friend. He has been ill for two
388
weeks. 28. Once or twice a month I get letters from my parents. But last month I didn't get any letters from
them and I'm worried. 29. We're leaving early in the morning. I've booked a taxi in
order not to miss the train. 30.1 have found the reference book at last. I've been locking for it everywhere.
31. Have you packed the things yet? We're leaving in an hour. 32. We have been doing the laboratory
work for half an hour already. Some of the students have already finished it. 33. Have you moved to your
new flat yet? — No, we're moving next week. 34. Who are you waiting for? — Mary. — Have you been
standing here long? — About twenty minutes. 35. While Miss Green was writing a letter, Mr West was
looking through the documents. 36. When are you leaving for Rome? — In a week. I have already booked
a ticket for the 15th of May. 37.1 have never been to China, but I've been to Japan. Last year I went there
on business. 38. I've been typing the documents for an hour already, but I haven't finished typing them.
39. Have you lived/ Have you been living in Minsk for a long time? -— No, we moved to Minsk two years
ago. 40. What are you doing? — I'm doing my homework. 41. When did they come back from Moscow?
— Yesterday evening. — They took part in the exhibition, didn't they? — Yes, and they liked the exhibition
very much. 42. Have you been here before? — Yes, I spent my holiday here last year. — Did you have a
good time? — Yes, the weather was nice, we had a lot of fun. 43. I'm sorry I'm late. Have you been
waiting long? 44. Victor isn't at work today. He has been ill for two weeks already. 45. Do you know
whether they have booked a room at the hotel? — I think they have. 46. What have you been doing all
morning? — I've been working in the garden. I've just come in. 47. Have you seen Robert today? — Yes,
he came here not long ago and soon left. 48. Have you bought the foodstuffs I asked you to buy? — Yes,
I went shopping after dinner. 49. The examiners have come already; three students are getting ready to
answer. 50. I shall never forget your kindness. You have always been so considerate to me. 51. I've
known him for many years; he has always been my good friend. 52. Where did you buy this wonderful
carpet? — I've had it since I moved to this flat. I bought it at the Central Department Store three years
ago.
389
Exercise I, p. 81
1 had never flown 2 were you, saw, had just had 3 tried, was, had changed, knew, had moved 4 had been
standing, realized, was 5 was, was first driving, had not driven 6 heard, knew, had spoken, remembered,
had already met, remembered, didn't like 7 was, hadn't been waiting 8 moved, did he live 9 had just
started, rang 10 got, had started 11 waited, was, started 12 did you catch, had already left, got 13 had
done, found 14 didn't laugh, had heard 15 found, discovered, had taken 16 felt, had been standing 17 had
been playing, was feeling 18 had been swimming 19 hadn't been feeling, went 20 were not eating, went,
had just finished 21 invited, had already arranged 22 hadn't seen 23 had been driving, realized, were lost
24 was, had gone 25 was, had broken, was trying, stopped 26 was looking 27 had been walking,
stopped, offered 28 arrived, was sitting, were eating 29 arrived, was waiting, was, had been waiting 30
had already begun, got, quietly took 31 had never seen, visited 32 saw, hadn't seen, didn't recognize, had
lost 33 have been studying 34 had been studying 3 5 have been sleeping 3 6 were waiting, had been
standing, decided 37 had been, became 38 felt, had taken 39 was raining, was, had stopped 40 had been
listening/was listening , arrived, turned, finished, turned, have been dancing and singing 41 has been
training 42 had been trying, found, has been teaching 43 had been running, collapsed, received 44 have
been waiting, hasn't arrived
45 gave, thanked, said, had enjoyed, knew, hadn't read, were
46 had seen, returned, didn't have, didn't have, had already done, was, didn't have, did, left, had, was,
decided, picked, went, slammed, felt, had reminded, had searched and (had) found, remembered, was,
had left, remembered, were 47 returned, saw, had broken, was, was, were, had just left, was still burning,
had heard, had run, had helped, was, poured, wondered, had found, hoped, had been given, had died,
hadn't had, hadn't liked, seemed, had taken 48 put, took, had forgotten/forgot, had put 49 came, said, had
just swallowed 50 thought, left, was, arrived, learnt, had just left, found, had been using/had used 51
parked, rushed, came, was, wondered, had stolen, had driven 52 opened, saw, had clearly been listening,
wondered, had heard, asked, had been doing/was doing, said, had dropped, had been looking/was
looking
390
Exercise II, p. 84
1 When I came home the children were sleeping already. My mother said that they had been sleeping
since 9 o'clock. 2. Call the children to dinner. They've been playing in the yard since early morning. 3.
Last year we rested in Yalta. By the end of June I had passed all the exams and was free. My parents had
booked the tickets in advance and at the beginning of July we started for the Crimea. 4. He asked what
we had done since we began (had begun) to work at this problem. 5. While (as) we were going from the
station, he managed to tell me about everything that had happened since my departure. 6. Has Victor
come yet? — Yes, he has been here for two days already. He came on Friday. 7. Dinner was already
ready; everybody had got hungry, but two of the guests were missing. 8. The girl was crying. She had lost
her way. 9. The bus was late, and I was sorry that I hadn't taken a taxi. 10. As soon as I booked (had
booked) a room at the hotel, I went to the plant. 11. She gave me the letter only after I had told her my
name. 12. The teacher said that his pronunciation had improved after he had worked in the sound
laboratory. 13. The sun had not risen yet, when we started. 14. He couldn't take part in the expedition
because he hadn't recovered yet. 15. We had been sightseeing all day long. In the evening we returned
to the hotel, tired but happy. 16. When I woke up, it had already got dark. I looked at the clock. I had been
sleeping for three hours. 17. The teacher said that I had missed a lot of classes and I would have to work
hard. 18. He had sent the telegram before we phoned him. 19. When I came he was sitting by the fire-
place looking through a magazine. 20. The students have been writing the test almost for two hours. So
far only two of the students have handed in their papers. 21.1 returned home at 5 o'clock. By that time my
wife had already packed our things and was waiting for me. We called for a taxi and half an hour later we
were at the airport. We had hardly come to the airport, when they called our flight. 22. The artists have
been working since morning, as we want to put up the wall newspaper tonight. 23. The morning was
sunny, but the weather has changed since 11 o'clock and it is raining now. 24. She looks tired. I think she
has been reading at night again.
391
Exercise I, p. 94
I shall/will recognize 2 will Mrs Pitt say, will not/won't mind 3 will be 4 are having 5 starts 6 am not going,
are you going 7 will grow 8 are going, will you come 9 does the next train leave 10 are you meeting, am
meeting 11 will not forget 12 opens, finishes 13 are getting 14 will succeed 15 shall/will know 16 will arrive
17 will still be 18 will drive 19 are you doing, am going 20 will present 21 is giving, are you going 22 will
not be 23 shall we do 24 are celebrating 25 shall we go 26 shall we do 27 will you hear, shan't/ won't hear
28 shan't/won't have 29 shall I put 30 am going, is taking 31 shall/will see 32 shall/will put on 33 am
catching, are you leaving, am not taking 34 will you turn off 35 are you going, shall/will probably go 36 are
having, is leaving 37 am seeing, will refuse 38 shall/will probably come, shall/will give, am coming 39 will
not know, shall/will leave 40 are you meeting, are meeting, is taking 41 shall I wait, will take 42 am flying,
are you taking 43 am ringing, shall I ask, shall/will be, shall/will write 44 are going, are having and going,
will come, is coming, shall/will ask
Exercise I, p. 97
1 shall/will go 2 shall/will come 3 am going to faint 4 shall/will get 5 are going to crash 6 will pay 7 am
going to make 8 will get 9 am going to buy 10 will do 11 am going to wear 12 am going to spend 13 are
going to move, will help 14 are going to get married 15 will walk, will meet you 16 shall/will probably see
17 am going to be 18 are you going to paint, are going to paint 19 am going to make 20 will take 21 will
telephone 22 are you going to buy, am not going to eat, am going to eat 23 are you going to put 24 will
you open 25 are you going to do 26 will you lend, will not lend 27 am going to give up 28 aren't you going
to answer 29 is going to sink 30 aren't you going to climb 31 will you lend, are you going to fish 32 are you
going to eat, shall I tell 33 are you going to bath, will you help 34 are going to sail, will complete, will set,
will be, will probably be 35 will take, is going to take 36 are we going to spend, shall run, am going to
stop, are going to get stuck, shall have, will give, is going to rain, shall/will wave, is going to stop 37 are
going to go, am going to work, will be, will be, will certainly be/it's certainly going to be, are you going to
leave,
392
shall be, won't be, will be sad, shall be, won't be/aren't going to
be, are going to visit, shall see 38 is going to give, is he going to speak
Exercise I, p. 100
I are going to miss 2 are you going to eat 3 is going to crash 4 am not going to do 5 am playing/am going
to play 6 are you going to tell, I'm going to tell 7 are you going to do 8 am going to read 9 are going to be
10 am not going to finish 11 is not coming 12 are giving, are inviting 13 is going to ask 14 is he going to
wash 15 is singing /is going to sing 16 is going, is he flying, is going 17 are you going, am not going, am
going to stay, am going to write 18 are you doing, are coming, am showing, are you going to take, am
going to take 19 are you going, am going, are you going to do, am going to fish 20 are starting, are going,
are you going to climb, is going to climb, am going to sit 21 are going, are you going to sail, are taking,
are going to try 22 aren't you going to ask, am leaving, are you going to do, are you going to have, am
starting 23 is going, is going to have, is going to look, is coming 24 am going to send, am seeing 25 am
going to buy, is going to be 26 am moving, are you going to have, am going to paint 27 is going to fall off
28 are you going to do, are you going to sell, am going to learn, am having 29 are going to break 30 is not
coming 31 are going to hurt 32 is going to snow
Exercise I, p. 102
I will still be having 2 will walk 3 will not do 4 will meet, will forget 5 will be watching, will ring 6 will be able,
won't be teaching, will be 7 shall be doing, shan't be eating 8 will get, will do 9 will you have, shall/will be
doing 10 shall we meet, won't be coming 11 will be coming 12 shall/will be working, will be 13 will have 14
will be looking 15 will be fishing 16 will meet, shall I recognize, will be wearing 17 will do, shall/will be
thinking 18 shall/will go 19 will be working 20 shall/will post, will be going 21 will be dancing 22 shall/will
be sitting, won't be reading, will be looking 23 will cook, won't clean 24 will be changing 25 will come 26
will be teaching 27 won't/shan't be showing 28 won't/ shan't be washing, will/shall be having 29 will bring
393
30 won't/shan't be wearing, will/shall be wearing, won't recognize
31 will you be using 32 will drive 33 shall be entering 34 will be arriving/will arrive 35 won't lend 36 will be
leaving 37 will get, will still be, will be going, will ask 38 will write, will try, will type 39 will just be coming 40
will be seeing/will see 41 will tell, won't believe 42 will be reading, will be ringing 43 will you be using 44
will be rising
Exercise I, p. 105
I will have already risen 2 will/shall have been listening 3 will/ shall have been riding 4 will have smoked 5
will/shall have been flying 6 will have saved 7 will have taught 8 get, will have already arrived 9 will/shall
have been sitting 10 will have been running
II will have had 12 will/shall have been married 13 will have repaired 14 will have done 15 will/shall have
had 16 shall have been working 17 will have lost 18 will have finished 19 will/ shall have passed 20 will
have taught/will have been teaching 21 shall/will have been sleeping
Exercise I, p. 107
1 will break 2 won't write,write 3 will understand, are 4 will/ shall believe, see 5 will be able, have/have
had 6 runs, won't catch 7 will lend, ask 8 go, shan't/won't have 9 will be, don't invite 10 will have, is 11
leave, will fall, fall, will sue 12 will your father say, hears, won't say, won't lend 13 get, will give 14 will be,
sees 15 hear, will let 16 won't start, press 17 will stay, strikes 18 begin, will become 19 get 20 will pay, get
21 rains, won't/ shan't go 22 goes, brushes 23 goes, will write 24 get, drink 25 will meet, arrives 26 am,
will stay 27 will go, is 28 is watching, is over, will cut 29 get, run 30 go, am, see 31 don't study, shan't pass
32 will get, will be, doesn't get 33 am not 34 won't/shan't start,arrives 35 come 36 will you be, am 37 leave
38 will be, passes 39 need, will/shall ask 40 will be, are 41 do, will/shall come 42 watch, will/shall write 43
cat, will/shall/probably take 44 stops, will/ shall walk 45 arrive, will be waiting 46 get, will be shining, will
be singing, will still be lying 47 are, will/shall stay' be staying 48 returns, will start 49 will be, is 50 are you
going to stay, am planning, hope, are you going to do, leave, will return
394
and get, will/shall be, return and get 51 begins, 52 are, will take 53 will/shall send, receive 54 won't take
off, lifts 55 are doing 56 saves, retires, will have saved 57 have read
Exercise II, p. 108
1. As soon as I come to London I'll write to you. 2. If the weather is nice we'll be able to go to the forest to
pick mushrooms. 3. If you go to the south, book a return ticket. 4. If he is sleeping when I come I'll wake
him up. 5. I'll go for a walk before I go to bed. 6. I'll look through the newspapers after we have had (have)
supper. 7. While I'm doing the flat you'll be making dinner. 8. I'll come if I don't fall ill. 9.1 don't know
whether Nina will come. 10. He will be punished if he doesn't keep his promise. 11. As soon as you pass
your examinations we'll go to the south. 12. I wonder whether he will take part in the expedition. 13. What
will you do-if nobody meets you at the station? — I'll leave my things in the cloakroom and go by bus. 14.
We'll discuss this question after the director returns. 15. Please, look after my son until I return. 16. We'll
go fishing on Saturday if it doesn't rain. 17. I'll call for you as soon as I'm free. 18. She doesn't know when
her brother will come. 19. Let's drop in at the cafe after the meeting is over. 20. If he phones me today I'll
ask him to book tickets for the plane. 21. Before I leave I'll speak to the manager. 22. I'll stay here until I
settle everything. 23. If Peter is late we'll have to wait for him. 24. When you see Mr Smith, ask him to
give me a call. 25. If you stay here another three days I'll be able to take you sightseeing. 26. Before I
leave I have to buy some presents formy friends. 27. If I don't catch the train, I'll spend the night at the
hotel. 28. I'll come as soon as I have done (do) my homework. 29. Do you know when he will come? —
When he comes I'll tell you. 30. I'll buy him a present if I don't spend all my money on books. 31. When is
your next German class? — On Wednesday. — Are going to attend it? — No, on Wednesday morning I'm
going t° London on business. — How long will you stay there? — About two weeks. I'm very sorry that I'll
have to miss my German Basses. 32. Let's go to the cinema tomorrow. They are showing a good
detective at the October..— Will you be able to buy tickets? — *es, certainly. Shall we go to the cinema in
the daytime or in the evening? — I'd prefer an evening show. — Then I'll buy tickets
395
for the eight o'clock show. I'll phone you as soon as I buy the tickets. — Thank you. — And what are you
going to do tonight? -— Tonight I'll be writing letters to my relatives. And you? — I'll be watching TV the
whole evening. 33. Ann, would you like to play tennis on Saturday morning? — I'm sorry. I'm going to the
hairdresser's on Saturday morning. — And what about Sunday ~> Why don't we go cycling? — On
Sunday I'll be getting ready for my exam in physics. 34. Tomorrow I'm giving a party. — Ho\\ many people
are coming/will come to the party? — About ten people. — Shall I stay and help you? — Oh, do please.
That s very kind of you. 35. How long have you been married? — Next year I'll have been married for ten
years. 36. How long have you been working at this plant? — I'll have been working here for five years in
May. 37. How long have you known Mr Smith? — At the end of the year I shall have known him for five
years. 38. How long have you been studying English? — I'll have been studying it for two years m July.
39. (At) what time does the plane take off? — At 8 a.m. — How long does the flight last? — About t\\ о
hours. — When do we arrive in Moscow? — At 10 a.m. 40. Wheie are you going on holiday? — I'm going
to Brighton. — When aic you leaving9 — On the 1 Oth of August. — Are you going by train? — Yes. —
How long are you going to stay/are you staying there? — (For) two weeks. — Where are you going to
sta\' where are you staying9 — At a hotel. —I wish you a nice holida_» 41. Are you going to stay at school
next year? — No, I'm fed up with school. — What are you going to do? — I'm going to look for a job. —
What sort of job? — I'm going to work in a bank. -1 think it's a boring job. — I don't agree with you. 42.
What aic you doing/are you going to do/will you be doing tomorrow morning? — I will be doing/am doing/
am going to do/ m> homework. — And what are you doing/will you be doing/ arc you going to
do/tomorrow afternoon? — Tomorrow afternoon I'm playing/will be playing football. It's a very import <nt
match. — What a pity! — Why? — We're going to the Fair tomorrow. I wanted to invite you to come with
me. — I'm sorry but I can't Thank you for your invitation.
Unit 2 Exercise!, p. 166
д..— My cousin Mary's staying with us at the moment, and she's a bit bored. I was going to the cinema
with her tonight, but my boss asks me to work overtime. Mary and I arranged to meet outside the Odeon
at 8 o'clock. The film begins at 8.30. Could you take her to the cinema?
— I'm not sure. How old is she?
— Fourteen. Oh, go on, Nick! She's very nice.
— But how shall I recognize her?
— She's tall, and she's got long brown hair.
— I see. And what's she wearing?
— She's wearing a dark blue raincoat.
— Is she wearing boots or shoes?
— I'm sorry, I can't remember.
— Oh well, never mind. I think I'll recognize her.
B. — My brother got married not long ago.
— What's his wife like?
— She's a pretty, slim girl with fair hair and large blue eyes. She has regular features and a good
complexion. Besides, she's clever and kind. I like her very much.
— I have never met your brother. What does he look like?
— He's medium height, well built and quite good-looking. He has brown hair and black eyes. He's good-
natured. He's open and easygoing. Besides, he's very hardworking and helpful, he can be relied on.
С
D. E.
396
C. — What do you think of the new engineer?
— I think he's clever and talented.
— I agree with you. Besides, he's very tactful and polite.
D. — What is Ron's wife like?
— She's quite plain, short and a bit shy.
E. — Mum, look at that girl over there. She's Nick's new
girlfriend.
— Which girl1? What does she look like?
— That girl with black curly hair.
— Black curly hair... And what's she wearing?
397
— That girl in the red jacket and the blue dress.
— That's Rita Smith, isn't she?
F. — How did you like Dick's sister?
— She's a very attractive girl. She's friendly, and she has a good sense of humour.
— Yes, I agree with you. She isn't like her brother. He's a bit rude and boring.
G. My sister has three children: two boys and one girl. Her elder son's name is Robert. He's eighteen
years old. He's a tall young man with grey eyes and fair hair. Robert is very friendly He's a merry, sociable
man, but he's a bit absent-minded. Her younger son's name is Victor. He's ten He goes to primary school
He's a capable boy, but he's a bit lazy. Victor, unlike Robert, is not very sociable. He's a quiet child and
likes to spend his time at home. My sister's daughter's name is Kate. Kate is sixteen. She's a student.
Kate is a very charming slim girl. She's honest and open. Kate is very hardworking and serious.
H. — How do you like your son-in-law?
— I don't like him at all. He has a bad temper, he's selfish and ambitious.
Unit 3 Exercise I, p. 171
I will give 2 stand 3 eats 4 will telephone 5 will arrest 6 reads 7 will steal 8 doesn't open 9 washes 10
needs 11 don't go away 12 makes 13 is late 14 hears 15 will make 16 will bury 17 won't be 18 doesn’t
start 19 won't let 20 goes 21 sells 22 will you repay 23 rises 24 works 25 turns 26 burns 27 don't like 28
will have 29 see 30 will you promise 31 don't believe 32 likes 33 won't be able 34 knows 35 find, will give
36 isn't working, will have 37 leaves, will be 38 freezes, will be 39 don't take, will have 40 takes, will have
41 don't feel 42 isn't working 43 write 44 will write 45 don't eat 46 will get 47 don't know 48 refuses 49
doesn't help 50 hate, don't you change 51 hear 52 rings
Exercise I, p. 173
I would type 2 knew 3 would look 4 wouldn't make 5 were 6 had 7 would you visit 8 gave 9 would buy 10
would you be able 11 won 12 would you do 13 knew 14 gave 15 stopped 16 wouldn't come 17 saw 18
had 19 did 20 would grow 21 would keep 22 lived 23 would offer 24 got 25 painted 26 changed 27
wasn't/weren't 28 gave, would sell 29 went, would lose 30 worked, would finish 31 saw, would climb,
wouldn't be, would climb 32 rang, would be 33 bought, would lose 34 had, would bring 35 were/was,
would still be 36 were/was, wouldn't be staying/wouldn't stay 37 kept, wouldn't be running/wouldn't run 38
had, would now be sitting 39 were/was, would take 40 was/were, would not exist 41 were/ was, would not
want 42 consisted, would be 43 were, would call and talk 44 studied, would get 45 would take, were/was
46 grew, would be 47 would be, had 48 were, would tell 49 would eat, were/was 50 were not, would go 51
had, would write 52 bought, would drive 53 weren't/wasn't, would go 54 were, would go 55 were/ was,
would look 56 could, would open 57 had, would take up 58 were, could
Exercise I, p. 176
I would have visited 2 had arrived 3 had been 4 hadn't seen 5 would have fallen 6 would you have
accepted 7 had had 8 had known 9 would have offered 10 wouldn't have lent 11 had put 12 wouldn't have
tried 13 had spoken /had been speaking 14 wouldn't have been 15 had tried 16 wouldn't have got 17
wouldn't have put 18 had been 19 wouldn't have turned 20 had looked 21 had tried 22 would have taken
23 would have saved 24 had paid, wouldn't have been sent 25 had told, would have cooked 26 had had,
would have been 27 had known, would have lent 28 hadn't had, would have fallen 29 had realised,
wouldn't have accepted 30 wouldn't have been, hadn't knocked 31 had been, would have been able 32
had known, wouldn't have thrown 33 would have refused, had offered 34 would you have done 35 hadn't
rained, would have been 36 hadn't been wearing, would have recognized 37 had been, would have
phoned 38 had played, would have had 39 had booked, would have had 40 had been, wouldn't have
been arrested 41 had read, would have refused 42 wouldn't have
known, hadn't told 43 had been sitting, would have been killed 44 had gone, would have been 45 had
been wearing, wouldn't have been hurt 46 hadn't been, hadn't been, wouldn't have met, wouldn't have got
married, wouldn't have been born 47 had told, would have given 48 had used, would have received 49
had realized, wouldn't have made 50 had known, wouldn't have voted 51 had read, wouldn't have washed
52 would have come and washed, had asked, would have come, had called 53 had brought, wouldn't
have had 54 had been invented, would have been interviewed
Exercise I, p. 179
I would still be alive, hadn't taken 2 had been lit, would be 3 hadn' t rung 4 had been waiting, would be 5
had turned, would be 6 were practical, wouldn't have bought 7 were careful, wouldn't have got 8 hadn't
been working, wouldn't look
Exercise I, p. 180
1 will/shall have 2 will happen 3 didn't talk/weren't talking 4 wouldn't have bought 5 will you stay 6 would
you choose 7 gets 8 had read 9 comes 10 would you do 11 will sit 12 wouldn’t have 13 had worn/had
been wearing 14 had 15 comes 16 leave 17 don't change 18 would be able 19 would have brought 20
wouldn’t have printed 21 wouldn't buy 22 want 23 would jump 24 would answer 25 had made 26 had
known 27 will bake 28 would bake 29 would have baked 30 will/shall go 31 would go 32 would have gone
33 were, would know 34 had studied, would пал passed 35 were, would tell 36 had had, would have
taken 37 haven’t will give 38 wouldn't have got, had remembered 39 would change, were 40 is 41 were ,
would accept 42 stays, will be 43 didn't know, wouldn't understand 44 were not 45 don't you sell, had.
would sell 46 leaves, will steal 47 hadn't loved, wouldn't have waited 48 would you like 49 would have
been, had become 50 had, would make 51 were, would get 52 do, remind 53 had, would grow, would be
54 spend, won't have 55 hadn't been, wouldn't have been
Exercise XII, p. 187
Type I conditionals
1 If it is frosty tomorrow we shan't go skiing. 2.1 wonder whether he will come. If he comes he will be very
surprised. 3. She'll be worried if you don't phone her. 4. If I find her address I'll write to her. 5. They'll get
the letter on Monday if it is sent today. 6. He will be delighted to come if he is invited. 7. If I'm free
tomorrow evening I'll visit my parents. 8. If he is still working when you come, tell him to go to bed. 9. If he
doesn't come tomorrow send him a telegram. 10. She'll get angry if you do this. 11. If you have some
time, phone Ann. 12.1 think that if she is offered this job, she'll accept it. 13. If you work hard you will have
finished the work by the end of the day. 14. You won't become a good sportsman if you don't train hard.
15. His parents will be happy if he marries her. 16. If I get my salary tomorrow I'll buy this suit. 17. If I have
time I go fishing every week. 18. If I buy the tickets today I'll give you a ring. 19. What will you do if you
don't get the documents? 20. If the weather doesn't change we'll go boating tomorrow. 21. If the bus is
overcrowded they'll walk to the station. 22. You'll get into trouble if you don't follow his advice. 23. If I work
hard I get very tired by the end of the day. 24. I'll call on you tonight if you don"t mind. 25. If you wish, I
may ask her about it. 26. If he comes tell him that I'm at the barber's. 27. If she doesn't book
accommodation at the hotel she will stay at her friends'. 28. I'll write to her if you send me her address.
29. What shall we do tomorrow if the weather is nice? 30. If you don't catch the 10.30 train there's a train
at 10.50. 31. If he is in a good mood he's always joking.
Type 2 conditionals
1. If you knew grammar better you wouldn't make so many mistakes in your exercises. 2. He would
certainly help us if he were here now. 3.1 would phone her if it weren't so late. 4. If she Were more patient
she would be easier to deal with. 5. If I had more time I would call on you next week. 6. If I were you I
would spend the holiday in the south. I'm sure it would do you good. 7. You Would feel better if you spent
more time in the open air. 8. If you Were really fond of reading you would always find time for
reading. 9. If he were having his classes now we would have to wait long. 10. You wouldn't be late for
your classes if you left home ten minutes earlier. 11. If he were no so lazy he would be one of the top
pupils in his class. 12. If we had less luggage we could go to the station on foot because we have enough
time to catch the train. 13. She wouldn't lose things so often if she were not so absent-minded. 14. If I
were you I would accept this offer
15. If you knew him better you wouldn't think so badly of him.
16. If I were you I would give up this idea. It is difficult to realize
17. What would you say if he asked you for advice? 18. If she went to the library just now she would still
find the librarian there. 19. If the film were colour, it would make a better impression. 20.1 like this watch
very much. If it were/was cheaper I would buy it. 21. There are too many unknown words in this text. If I
had a dictionary I might be able to translate it. 22. If women didn't have to do housework they would save
a lot of time. 23. You would feel better if you didn't keep late hours. 24. It is too cold. We might go to the
skating-rink if it weren't so cold 25. If it were not raining we might go to the country now. 26. If I were you I
would consult a doctor. 27. She wouldn't feel so lonely if the children were with her.
Type 3 conditionals
1. If you had left a message for me I would have called on you yesterday. 2. We wouldn't have missed the
train if we had taken a taxi. 3. If I hadn't been so busy last week I would have joined your excursion too. 4.
If he hadn't refused to help us we would have completed the work already. 5. If she had been asked she
would have sent these books long ago. 6. If it hadn't been so cold yesterday we might have gone to the
skating rink. 7. We might not have lost our way if the night hadn't been so dark. 8. If you had come to the
meeting yesterday you would have heard an interesting report. 9. If I had known that you needed this
book I would have taken it with me. 10.1 wouldn't have made this mistake if I had been more careful when
I was writing the dictation. 11. Even if you had phoned me yesterday I wouldn't have been able to come.
12.1 wouldn't have fallen down if it hadn't been so slippery. 13. He wouldn't have come if you hadn't
invited him. 14. It took me a long time to translate this article. If you had given me a good dictionary I
would have spent
less time. 15.1 would have been delighted if you had called on us yesterday. 16. This wouldn't have
happened if you had been there. 17. If I had been told about it before I would have done all I could to help
you. 18. If you had come here between two and three o'clock you would have seen him. 19. Why didn't
you ask him to come? I'm sure he would have come if you had asked him to. 20. If I hadn't been so
excited I would have answered better. 21. If he had wound the alarm clock he wouldn't have overslept
and he wouldn't have missed his plane. 22. If I hadn't had a swim yesterday I might not have caught cold.
23. If I hadn't missed so many classes I would have done my test better. 24.1 would have visited you
yesterday if I had had more time. 25. If we had booked tickets in advance we might have seen that
exciting match. 26.1 would have helped you if you had asked me to. 27. If I hadn't been so busy
yesterday I would have gone to the station to see him off. 28. Even if you had warned me beforehand I
couldn't have come because I was very busy.
Type 2 and type 3 conditionals mixed
1. If he had been studying regularly all through the term he wouldn't be afraid of his exams now. 2. If we
knew his address we would have informed him about the results of his exams yesterday. 3. He wouldn't
be making so many mistakes now if he hadn't missed so many classes. 4. You would be feeling well
today if you had taken the medicine yesterday. 5. You would know the language better if you had read
some English books in summer. 6. If we had worked harder yesterday our work would be finished now. 7.
If he were no so a., sent-minded he wouldn't have left his suitcase in the train. He's constantly losing
things. 8. If we had sent the letter yesterday they would receive it tomorrow morning. 9. If we hadn't been
walking so quickly we wouldn't be so tired now and we could continue our way. 10. If I had brought my
dictionary with me I could translate this document now. 11. If I hadn't called on them yesterday we
wouldn't know about it even now. 12. If he had a sense of humour he wouldn't have got offended. 13. If
the train had If' the station on time it would reach the destination early in the morning tomorrow. 14. If you
had followed the doctor's instructions you would have recovered long ago and you would be working
together with us now. 15. If they loved each other they would have got married long ago.
402
403
Mixed conditionals
1. If you had been at the stadium yesterday you would have seen the best sportsmen. 2. If the nights are
warm we shall be sleeping in the open air. 3. You would have enjoyed yourself greatly if you had taken
part in our excursion. 4. If I were you I would hurry up. If you don't hurry up you will miss your train. 5. If h e
had been taken to hospital at once he wouldn't have lost so much blood. 6. If I were you I would buy a
tape-recorder. 7. If you had reminded me of it yesterday I would have brought you these books today. 8. If
I had a holiday now I would travel about the Caucasus. 9. You might go to the country for a couple of days
if you finished the work in time. Everything depends on you. 10. If you had a telephone I would have
warned you beforehand. 11. If it doesn't rain tomorrow we'll go to the Botanical Gardens. 12. If I were you
I would apologize to her. 13. If you enjoy the film I'll also go to see it. 14. Why didn't you ask me? I would
have looked after your children if you had asked me. 15. I wouldn't have missed the train if I had packed
my things in the evening. 16. If he were/ had been more careful he would have written the dictation better.
17. You would speak English better if you (had) regularly studied in the sound laboratory. 18. If the coffee
is not sweet enough, add some sugar. 19. If they hadn't trained/hadn't been training so hard they wouldn't
have won. 20. I would willingly take you sightseeing if I were not so busy. 21. I'll wait for him if he isn't at
home when I come. 22. I'll be very disappointed if they don't come. 23. If I am there and see him I'll tell
him about it. 24. If I don't feel better I'll go to the doctor's tomorrow. 25. If he were an honest man he
wouldn't have done that. 26. If I were you I would persuade her to go to the south. It would do her a lot of
good. 27. If I knew his address I would immediately write to him. 28. If he were not capable he wouldn't
have done this work. 29. If the documents had been signed we would send them today. 30. if I'm in
trouble I always tell my sister. 31. If you had visited me last week you might have seen my brother. He
came to Minsk с n business. 32. If I were you I would send him a telegram. 33. Where would you go if you
were free now? 34.1 would visit my parents in the country if I weren't so busy now. 35. If you hurry up you'
;1 catch the 7 o'clock train. 36. If you were me you would have' done the same. 37. If I had known that my
parents would come to
404
see me I would have made a cake. 38. What would you do if you lost your money in an unknown city?
Exercise XII, p. 228
1 would change 2 had 3 had 4 had done 5 knew 6 had asked 7 would shave 8 is/were/was addressing 9
were 10 would send 11 would end 12 had tied 13 hadn't given 14 had known 15 is/were/was 16 had been
insured 17 had never been invented 18 had kept 19 hadn't said 20 had taken 21 had never set 22 hadn't
tried 23 had never got 24 would pick 25 were, were 26 had come, had come, would have had 27 were
not, were not, would go 28 had paid 29 did 30 had 31 didn't have, were 32 would go 33 were made 34
would change and decide
Exercise XIII, p. 229
Wish, if only
1.1 wish she were not so light-minded. 2.1 wish you had come earlier. You would have met my sister. 3.1
wish I had followed his advice. 4.1 wish I could see this film again. 5.1-wish she were with us. 6.1 wish I
had a telephone. 7.1 wish he wouldn't spend so much time on sports. 8.1 wish it were spring now. 9.1
wish I had told him about it yesterday. 10. I wish you had visited us yesterday. 11. She wishes she had
known about it before. 12. I wished I hadn't asked him about it. 13.1 wish you would think over my offer
again before finally rejecting it. 14. I wish you would read this book. 15. If only my parents lived in Minsk!
16. I wish I could read this book in the original. 17.1 wish I could come to your lecture tomorrow. 18.1 wish
she were not so hot-minded. 19.1 wish we would settle down here for ever. 20. She wishes she could
speak English. 21.1 wish she had a sense of duty. 22.1 wish I could join you. 23. He wished he hadn't lost
his temper and shouted at them. 24. I wish I had borrowed some money then and bought the dictionary. It
isn't on sale now. 25. If °nly you had seen him at that moment! 26. I wish it were not raining. I wish the
weather were nice so that we might go to the country. 27.1 wish it were summer now! 28.1 hear you can
play the piano very well. I wish you would play for me. 29. The weather
405
was so bad that I wished I hadn't left home. 30. I wish ynг wouldn't be so absent-minded and wouldn't ask
the same question several times. 31.1 wish you would stop interrupting me. 32. wish you would stay with
me. 33.1 wish I had taken part in thaе excursion, they say it was very interesting. 34.1 wish you would
keep your things in order. 35.1 wish I could follow your advice but it's impossible. 36. They wished they
had gone to Moscow by plane, they would have saved a lot of time.
As if/as though
37. He always looks as if he were hurrying somewhere. 38. She behaved as if she were quite indifferent.
39. She looks as if she had been ill. 40. You treat me as if I were a child. 41. It looked as if the letter had
been written by a child. 42. She had a feeling as if she had known him all her life. 43. They looked as if
they were brother and sister but not husband and wife, so much alike they were. 44. He introduced her to
his brother as though they had never met before
45. He was looking at us as if he were surprised at seeing us there
46. It had been raining for some days and it looked as if the rain would never stop. 47. She behaved as if
she were the hostess. 48. You're so sunburnt as if you had spent the whole summer in the south. 49. He
looks tired as if he hadn't rested for a long time.
50. He spoke German as if he had lived in Germany all his life.
51. It looked as if nothing had happened. 52. He spoke French as if he were a real Frenchman. 53. The
girl was looking at me with such surprise as if she saw me for the first time in her life. 54. He looks as if he
had never heard about it.
Unit 4 Exercise I, p. 264
doesn't seem, arrived, has flown, have now adjusted, was, have to work, am, go, am, came, haven't
saved, have saved, am really looking forward, am, have never been skiing, shall get by, shall be skiing,
are you coming, come, have run out, is, have picked, arrived, shall be speaking, forgot, do, won't be,
wonder, is, shall see, am coming
Exercise 2, p. 265
had, would open; wouldn't be, would be, lived, saw, would help and make; wouldn't be, existed, might,
promised, would know; would be; had; would stick; hadn't wished, wouldn't have wished; would fall
Units Exercise I, p. 304
1 driving, being driven 2 arguing, working 3 reading, being read 4 crying 5 seeing 6 being seen 7 holding
8 speaking 9 sending 10 being sent 11 putting 12 knowing 13 being impressed 14 being interrupted 15
breaking 16 leaving and going 17 being invited 18 reading, smoking 19 being introduced, talking 20
discussing 21 being installed 22 considering 23 losing 24 living, talking 25 reminding, being reminded 26
breaking 27 being made 28 buying 29 deciding 30 being given, being offered 31 putting 32 working,
finishing
33 making 34 disturbing, being disturbed 35 keeping 36 working, going 37 doing, doing 38 being
punished 39 being 40 borrowing 41 talking, convincing 42 reading and thinking 43 speaking
Exercise II, p. 305
1. in looking 2 about leaving 3 of doing 4 for being 5 to having 6 from completing 7 about (of) having 8 of
studying 9 for helping 10 on knowing 11 by drawmg 12 of living 13 for not going 14 in searching 15 for
making 16 for not wanting 17 for washing and drying 18 to going 19 from speaking 20 to going 21 of
clarifying 22 of stealing/having stolen 23 of taking, keeping 24 to wearing 25 to eating, sleeping 26 for
being 27 about missing 28 to driving 29 from going 30 for being 31 working 32 opening 33 (on) driving
34 having 35 about/of inviting 36 laughing 37 going 38 doing 39 reading 40 making 41 going 42 taking 43
being 44 sailing 45 of asking 46 to seeing 47 of washing 48 for breaking 49 from coming 50 of talking 51
like having 52 to killing 53 about finishing 54 of practising 55 of becoming 56 watching 57 in getting 58 at
organizing 59 of collecting 60 on being given 61 mending 62 being washed 63 of doing
406
407
Exercise III, p. 307
Gerund as subject, complement of subject
1. Crossing the river in this place is dangerous. 2. Sleeping in the open air is very useful. 3. Playing tennis
is interesting. 4. Smoking is dangerous for health. 5. Their leaving before the end of the concert attracted
everybody's attention. 6. Learning a foreign language takes a lot of time. 7. Meeting new people is
interesting. 8. Arguing with him is a waste of time. 9. Teaching requires patience and skill. 10. Spending
money is easier than making it. 11. Listening to his stories is interesting. 12. Doing this work is not easy at
all. 13. Your bothering him will make him still more angry. 14. Going in for sports did her a lot of good. 15.
Doing morning exercises is important. 16. My favourite sport is swimming. 17. Her dream is becoming an
actress. 18. Her hobby is knitting. 19. The only way to get there at this time of the year is going by plane.
Verb + gerund
1. The rain prevented me from coming in time. 2. You should stop swimming in the sea because the
weather has got cold. 3 I thanked him for buying/having bought such interesting books. 4 I remember
being/having been asked about it. 5.1 think of going 1 о the Crimea in autumn. 6. The doctor told her to
avoid sitting m the sun. 7. He risks losing all his money. 8.1 regret having tol'l/ telling her my secret. 9. He
kept (on) looking at his watch and >t 3 sharp he said he must be going. 10. Would you mind my usir j your
telephone? 11. When we heard the end of the story v.: couldn't help laughing. 12. You may rely on his
giving you ехаЛ information. 13. The doctor insists on his spending the holidf / in the south. 14. Go on
telling your story. 15. He didn't like beir j, read to. 16. The floor needs painting. 17.1 can't bear standing i
queues. 18. She denied having met/meeting him before. 19. T! • child deserves praising. 20. I remember
buying this book but I don't remember where I put it. 21. My sister is coming in Mav I'm looking forward to
meeting her. 22. Your suit needs pressin z (ironing). 23. Thank you for looking after my child. 24. Excuse
my bothering you again. 25. In spite of being late he went on working. 26.1 think you'll enjoy living in this
hotel. 27. We can't rely on his completing this work in time. 28. She likes being
408
nraised. 29. He objected to being taken to hospital. 30. I don't feel like going to a restaurant. I would
rather go to the cinema. 31.1 remember hearing/having heard something about this play. j s it worth
seeing? 32. Everything depends on their winning this match. 33. He was accused of having
stolen/stealing the money. 34. And now I must start packing. We're leaving tomorrow morning. 35. I
suggest recording this passage. 36. Would you mind waiting for a while? Your documents aren't ready
yet. 37. He tried to give up smoking, but he didn't succeed in doing this. 38. Excuse my being late. 39.
Students can't help being excited before exams. 40. They dream of their son's (son) becoming a doctor.
41. I'm looking forward to having a good rest during my holidays, or I anticipate having a good rest during
my holidays. 42. He admitted having met/meeting her before. 43.1 don't recall/ recollect meeting/having
met him before. 44. Where's Ann? — She's stopped to talk to Helen. 45. Don't forget to post the letter. 46.
We succeeded in getting tickets for the concert. 47. He apologized for having kept/ keeping me waiting.
48. Excuse my not writing to you. 49.1 want to stop him from going to Siberia.
50. I congratulated him on having passed/passing his exam.
51. She insists on his being allowed to take part in the competition.
52. Did you forget giving me your cassettes? or Don't you remember your giving me your cassettes? 53.1
don't know where to find a job. — Why don't you put an ad in a newspaper? 54. Stop asking her foolish
questions. 55. He succeeded in finishing the work by the end of the week. 56.1 postponed/put off reading
that unpleasant letter till the very last moment. 57. They have just finished writing their composition. 58.
The storm prevented the ship from landing on time.
Adjective + gerund
1. He's used/accustomed to getting up early. 2. She was afraid of being operated on. 3. He's keen on
fishing. 4. We were surprised at seeing her. 5. He's responsible for the work being completed in time. 6.1
was disappointed at their having refused to help me. 7.1 was tired of waiting for her. 8. When I came he
was busy (in) translating an article. 9. She was not used to getting presents and she was surprised at
seeing beautiful roses on the table. 10. He's good at drawing. 11. He's proud of having become/becoming
a
409
student. 12. My friend is keen on collecting stamps. 13. I'm pleased at my son's (son) having taken
up/taking up art. 14. She's good at swimming. 15. He was indignant at hearing this. 16. Are you interested
in figure skating? 17. The children were excited about going to the country. 18. He's sure of passing his
exam. 19.He was afraid of being misunderstood. 20. She was disappointed at not meeting him there
again. 21. He was found guilty of stealing. 22.1 think he is not capable of cheating.
Noun + gerund
1.1 have no hope of seeing him soon. 2. The idea of spending our holidays on the Volga belongs to my
brother. 3. He understands the importance of learning foreign languages. 4. He expressed great surprise
at hearing that. 5. The other day I had the pleasure of meeting your father. 6. He has a bad habit of
smoking before breakfast. 7. You have no reason for suspecting him. 8.1 have no intention of going to the
south this summer. 9. Do you think he has a chance of passing his exam? 10.1 don't mind their coming
here. 11. He has little experience in teaching English. 12. He had a feeling of being watched. 13. What
modern methods of teaching foreign languages are used at your university? 14.1 have no hope of being
given this role. 15.1 hear you gave up the idea of travelling about Europe. 16. We have a good chance of
winning the match.
Preposition + gerund
1. You can improve your pronunciation by reading aloud every day. 2.1 won't be able to translate this text
without looking up a few words in the dictionary. 3. We shortened our way by crossing the river. 4. I'll visit
you before leaving Minsk. 5. On coming home I started doing my homework. 6. He entered the room
without knocking. 7. He sent a letter instead of sending a telegram. 8. After spending a month in London
he left for Warsaw. 9. At hearing the news she turned pale. 10. In looking through the journals he came
across an interesting article on the English economy. 11. He looks cheerful and gay as usual in spite of
having spent a sleepless night in the train. 12. At hearing the baby's cry the mother rushed into the
nursery. 13. He left without making an appointment. 14. Before going to bed he decided to write a letter to
his parents. 15. At seeing a bus at a distance I rushed to the bus
410
stop. 16. On (after) finishing school she began to work as a secretary. 17. She tore the letter without
reading it. 18. (In) checking the annual report the accountant found a mistake. 19. Instead of going by bus
they went on foot and were late for the concert. 20. He came without being invited.
Expressions + gerund
1. Watching detectives is a waste of time. 2. It's no use discussing this question in his absence. 3. His
advice is useful. It is worth following. 4. This film is worth seeing. 5. It's no use going there now. 6.1 had
difficulty in finding his house. 7. Yesterday we went fishing and we are going boating today. 8. This event
doesn't deserve mentioning. 9. It's no use phoning him, he is never at home at this time. 10. Is this book
worth reading? 11.'I had difficulty in translating the text. 12. The station is not far from here. There's no
point in taking a taxi. 13. It's no use arguing with her. She's sure she's right. 14. This morning we went
swimming.
Unit 6 Exercise I, p. 377
A. is looking, sees, rings, answers; am ringing; says, use; uses, eats, don't think, likes; would suit/suits,
like, would we arrange/ do we arrange, use; includes, doesn't include; see, does the room face; faces,
looks, gets; sounds; would 7 p.m. suit/will 7 p.m. suit; wouldn't be able to, don't get; will/would be, don't
think, will have, passes, stops; I'll find, I'll see; comes, asks; is coming; she'll probably come, are sitting,
get, don't think, give; do, listens, will be; rings; looks, smiles, says, goes
B. am, advertised, are coming/shall be coming, (shall) require; would you please/could you please tell
me; should/would like; would I be able/ could I, hopes, don't drive, won't be/wouldn't be, need/shall need/
should need; do the local shops still deliver; know, did; should/would like, calls; ask/are asking, sounds;
would you like/do you like; have been, lived, want; is also writing, would like, painted; has known, lived,
am, would/will recommend; should/would of course be/am of course willing; should/would be, enclose
411
ГРАММАТИЧЕСКИЙ СПРАВОЧНИК
УрокЗ § 1. Mood (Наклонение)
Наклонение — это форма глагола, которая показывает отношение действия к реальности. Это
отношение устанавливается говорящим. Он может с помощью формы глагола представить
действие как реальное, проблематичное, нереальное или как просьбу или приказание.
Действия, представленные как реальные, выражаются в форме изъявительного наклонения (the
Indicative Mood), которое существует в виде всех видовременных форм, которые были описаны
выше.
I worked at a plant at that time. В то время я работал на заводе.
I only met Peter six months Я познакомился с Петром толью
ago. шесть месяцев тому назад.
I'm going to London next На следующей неделе я еду
week. в Лондон.
Просьбы и приказания выражаются в форме повелительного наклонения (the Imperative Mood).
Be careful! Будьте осторожны!
Don't be late! He опаздывайте!
Действия, представляемые говорящим как нереальные или проблематичные, выражаются
различными способами в современном английском языке, что объясняется причинами
исторического характера.
Раньше в английском языке для выражения нереальных или проблематичных действий
использовались особые формы — формы сослагательного наклонения (the Subjunctive Mood). Но в
ходе своего исторического развития английский язык утратил большое количество окончаний, и в
результате этого процесса многие формы бывшего сослагательного наклонения совпали с
формами изъявительного наклонения.
Употребление форм выражения нереальности необходимо в целом ряде случаев, в частности, в
сложноподчиненных предложениях с придаточными нереального условия.
412
Subjunctive Mood (Сослагательное наклонение) § 2. Conditional Sentences (условные
предложения)
В английском языке имеется 3 типа условных предложений.
1. В условных предложениях I типа сказуемое употреблено в изъявительном наклонении и
обозначает реальное действие или реальный факт действительности.
If he sends me a telegram Если он пришлет мне телеграмму, мне
I'll have to go to the station придется поехать на станцию, чтобы
to meet him. встретить его.
We shan't go to the country Мы не поедем за город, если завтра
if it rains tomorrow. будет дождь.
2. В условных предложениях II типа сказуемое употреблено в сослагательном наклонении и
выражает предполагаемое или желаемое действие, которое может относиться либо к настоящему,
либо к будущему времени. В этом случае в придаточном предложении употребляются формы,
совпадающие с Simple Past и Past Continuous, а в главном — сочетание should или would +
простой инфинитив для 1 -го лица ед. и мн. числа и would + простой инфинитив для остальных
лиц, например:
I should (would) wnte to him Я бы написал ему, если бы знал if I knew his address. его адрес.
Не would lend you his Он бы дал тебе свой словарь, если
dictionary if you asked him to. бы ты попросил его об этом.
Примечания:
а) Глагол to be в условных придагочных предложениях имеет форму were для всех лиц. Однако в
современном английском языке наблюдается тенденция употреблять was для 1-го и 3-го лица
единственного числа.
If I were (was) not so tired Если бы я так не устал, я бы по-
I should (would) go with you. шел с тобой.
If he were (was) not so tired he Если бы он так не устал, он пошел
would go with you. бы с тобой.
б) Формула If I were you, I should (would)... часто употребляется, когда говорящий советует, как
поступить собеседнику.
413
w
If I were you I'd order beefsteak. Будь я на вашем месте, я бы заказал
бифштекс.
3. В условных предложениях III типа сказуемое обозначает предполагаемое или воображаемое
действие, которое относится к прошлому Это невыполнимое или невыполненное действие.
If I had seen him yesterday Если бы я видел его вчера, я
I should (would) have asked спросил бы его об этом.
him about it.
Nothing would have happened Ничего не случилось бы, если бы он
if he had kept silent. промолчал.
If he hadn't phoned me I Если бы он не позвонил, я бы не
wouldn't (shouldn't) have come, пришел.
4. В условных предложениях так называемого "смешанного типа" условие может относиться к
настоящему или будущему времени, а следствие к прошедшему времени и наоборот. В этом
случае в одной части предложения может употребляться форма II типа, а в другой — III типа.
If he had taken my advice (III), Если бы он последовал моему
he would be a famous singer совету, он был бы знаменитым
now(II). певцом сейчас.
If I hadn't missed the plane Если бы я не опоздал на самолет
yesterday (III) I'd be bathing in вчера, я бы сейчас купался
the sea now. (II) в море.
If he were not so lazy (II), Если бы он не был так ленив
he would have done it long (вообще), он бы давно сделал это.
ago (III).
5. Если сказуемое главного или придаточного предложения содержит глагол сап или may, то в
сложноподчиненном предложении с придаточным нереального условия в любой его части
употребляются could/might + простой инфинитив для действий, относящихся к настоящему
времени, и could/ might + перфектный инфинитив для действий, относящихся к прошедшему
времени, например:
If I could write poems I would Если я бы мог писать стихи, я бы
dedicate them to you. посвятил их тебе.
If he could paint he might Если бы он умел рисовать, мы, мо-
find a job with us. жет быть, нашли бы для него работу.
414
If we could have talked with him Если бы мы смогли поговорить с ним
that night, he wouldn't have в тот вечер, он бы не уехал.
gone away.
If his father hadn't been there Если бы там не было его отца, могло
something serious might have бы случиться что-нибудь серьезное.
happened.
6. Если одна из частей условного предложения II и III типа имеет дополнительное предложение, то
его глагол-сказуемое употребляется в одном из прошедших времен (т.е. соблюдаются правила
согласования времен).
If he phoned you now I Если бы он позвонил тебе сейчас, я
would tell him you were out. бы сказала, что тебя нет дома.
If I were you I would ask Если бы я был на вашем месте, я бы
him if she would come. спросил его, придет ли она.
If I met him I would tell Если бы я встретил его, я бы сказал,
him that she had arrived. что она приехала.
§ 3. Wish clauses, If only...
Формы сослагательного наклонения употребляются и в дополнительных придаточных
предложениях, зависящих от глагола wish.
В этом случае действие придаточного предложения представляется нереальным и в зависимости
от того, как оно соотносится с действием главного предложения, оно будет выражаться
следующими формами:
1) если действие придаточного предложения одновременно с действием главного предложения, то
употребляется форма were или Simple Past/Past Continuous.
I wish (ed) he were with us. Мне (было) жаль, что его нет с нами.
(Я хотел бы, чтобы он был с нами.) I wish (ed) you wore a warm coat. Как жаль (как было жаль), что
ты не
в теплом пальто. I wish it were not raining now. Жаль, что сейчас идет дождь.
2) если действие придаточного предложения предшествует действию главного предложения, то
употребляется форма Past Perfect.
415
I wish (ed) you had brought your camera Мне (было) жаль, что ты не принес. свой фотоаппарат.
(Как мне хотелось
тогда, чтобы ты принес свой фотоаппарат.) .^
3) если действие придаточного предложения следует за действием главного предложения, то
употребляются модальные глаголы would и could.
I wish (ed) he would tell me everything. Я бы хотел (как мне хотелось
тогда), чтобы он мне все рассказал.
I wish (ed) he could come to Мне бы хотелось (как мне хо-
the party. телось тогда),чтобы он при-
шел на вечер. (Мне было жаль, что он не сможет прийти на вечер.)
Сослагательное наклонение употребляется также в восклицательных предложениях с oh, if only...,
выражающих невыполнимое желание.
В этом случае употребляется Simple Past или форма were, если действие относится к настоящему
времени, Past Perfect, если действие относится к прошлому, и could/would + инфинитив, если
действие относится к будущему.
Oh, if only Father were at home! Ax, если бы отец был дома!
Oh, if only 1 knew what to do! О, если бы я знал, что мне делать!
Oh, if only he had listened to me! Если бы он только меня послушал!
Oh, if only I hadn't missed Если бы я только не опоздал на
my train! поезд!
Oh, if only it would stop raining! Ax, если бы дождь прекратился!
If only their life could always be О, если бы их жизнь всегда была
like that! такой!
§ 4. Clauses with as if/as though
Сослагательное наклонение употребляется также в придаточных сравнения, вводимых союзами as
if или as though.
В этом случае в придаточном предложении содержится нереальное сравнение и в зависимости от
того, как действие придаточного предложения соотносится с действием глав-
416
ного предложения, в придаточном предложении употребляются следующие формы:
а) если действие придаточного предложения одновременно с действием главного предложения, то
оно выражается в форме Simple Past или Past Continues или формой were, которая часто
заменяется формой was в современном английском языке.
The house is (was) so quiet as if В доме было так тихо, как будто в
there were (was) nobody in it. нем никого нет.
They speak (spoke) of her Они говорят (говорили) о ней, как
as though she did not exist. будто (словно) она не существует.
Her eyes are (were) sparkling Ее глаза сверкают (сверкали), как as though she were (was)
laughing будто (словно) она смеется (смея-
at us. лась) над нами.
б) если действие придаточного предложения предшествует действию главного предложения, -то
оно выражается в форме Past Perfect или Past Perfect Continuous.
Our life goes on (went on) as if Наша жизнь продолжается (продол-nothing had happened.
жалась), словно ничего не случилось. She is (was) breathing deep Она тяжело дышит
(дышала), as though she had been running, как будто она бегала перед этим.
в) если действие придаточного предложения следует за действием главного предложения, то оно
выражается сочетанием would с инфинитивом.
Не moved towards me as though Он двинулся на меня, как будто he would strike me.
хотел ударить.
Урок 4 § 5. Модальные глаголы must, may
Must может выражать предположение, основанное на уверенности.
Не looks so pale. He must be ill.
В зависимости от того, к какому времени относится действие, выражаемое смысловым глаголом,
must сочетается с Разными формами инфинитива.
417
The streets are deserted. It Улицы пусты. Должно быть, уже
must be late поздно.
The book is not on the shelf. Книжки нет на полке. Ее, вероятно,
Mary must be reading it. читает Мэри.
The light is on in her room У нее в комнате свет. Она, должно
She must have come. быть, пришла.
The streets are wet. It must На улицах сыро Должно быть, всю
have been raining all the night, ночь шел дождь
May может выражать предположение, основанное на неуверенности. В зависимости от того, к
какому времени относится действие, выраженное смысловым глаголом, may сочетается с разными
формами инфинитива.
It may ram in the evening. Вечером, возможно, пойдет дождь
Не may not know it. Он, может быть, не знает этого.
Mother may be cooking dinner. Мама, возможно, готовит обед.
Your friend may have taken Твой приятель, может быть, взял твои
your books. книги.
Не may not have received our Он, возможно, не получил нашей
telegram. телеграммы.
The baby may have been crying Ребенок, может быть, плачет с тех
since it woke up. пор, как проснулся
Употребление формы might придает всему высказыванию более мягкий и неуверенный характер.
Не might come soon. Он, может быть, и придет скоро.
Не might be at home now. Он, может быть, и дома сейчас.
Не might be writing letters now. Может быть, он пишет письма сейчас
Не might have visited them Может быть, он был у них в гостях
yesterday. вчера.
§ 6. Субстантивация прилагательных
Прилагательные иногда субстантивируются, т.е. начина ют выполнять функции существительного в
предложении В этом случае они употребляются с определенным артиклем и могут обозначать:
1) обобщенную группу людей, например: the poor — бедняки, бедные; the dead —мертвые; the old
—cnut
418
пики, старые; the young — молодежь, молодые. Такие прилагательные имеют значение
множественного числа и согласуются с глаголом во множественном числе.
The blind are taught trades in Слепых учат ремеслам в специаль-special schools.
ных школах.
2) отвлеченное, абстрактное понятие, и тогда прилагательное имеет значение единственного числа
и согласуется с глаголом в единственном числе, например:
The good m him overweighs the bad. Хэрошего в нем больше, чем плохого.
Неличные формы глагола § 7. Общие сведения
К неличным формам глагола относятся: инфинитив (the Infinitive), герундий (the Gerund) и
причастие (the Participle).
1. В отличие от личных форм глагола, неличные формы выражают действие без указания лица и
числа и поэтому не могут служить в предложении сказуемым. Неличные формы сочетают свои
глагольные свойства со свойствами других частей речи и выполняют в предложении
синтаксические функции этих частей речи. Так, инфинитив и герундий, сочетая свойства глагола со
свойствами существительного, выполняют функцию существительного, т.е. служат в предложении
подлежащим, именной частью сказуемого, дополнением, определением и обстоятельством.
Причастие, сочетая свойства глагола со свойствами прилагательного и наречия, выполняет
функцию прилагательного и наречия, т.е. служит в предложении определением и обстоятельством:
То skate is pleasant Кататься на коньках приятно.
(инфинитив в функции
подлежащего)
I am fond of reading Я люблю читать.
(герундий в функции
дополнения)
The book lying on the table Книга, лежащая на столе, принадле-
belongs to Rita. жит Рите.
419
(причастие в функции
определения)
Не sat at the table thinking. Он сидел за столом, задумавшись.
(причастие в функции \
обстоятельства)
2. Подобно личным формам глагола, неличные формы выражают время.
Однако в отличие от личных форм, которые выражают время по отношению к моменту речи,
неличные формы выражают время по отношению к моменту действия, выраженного глаголом в
личной форме. Таким образом, время, выраженное неличными формами, имеет относительное
значение, а именно: неличные формы обычно выражают действие как одновременное или
предшествующее по отношению к действию, выраженному глаголом в личной форме:
I saw him cross the street. Я видел, как он перешел улицу.
(инфинитив выражает
одновременное действие)
They are said to have left Moscow. Говорят, что они уехали из Москвы.
( инфинитив выражает
предшествующее действие)
Не was surprised at Он был удивлен, увидев ее там.
seeing her there.
(герундий выражает
одновременное действие)
I remember having read Я помню, что читал об этом В
about it m the newspaper. газете.
(герундий выражает
предшествующее действие)
Не sat on the sofa reading a book. Он сидел на диване, читая книгу.
(причастие выражает
одновременное действие)
Having lost the key he Потеряв ключ, он не мог войти
couldn't get into the room. в комнату.
(причастие выражает
предшествующее действие)
3. Подобно личным формам глагола, неличные формы выражают залог:
420
I want to inform you of it. Я хочу информировать вас об этом,
(инфинитив в действительном залоге)
I want to be informed of it. Я хочу, чтобы меня информировали
(инфинитив в страдатель- об этом,
ном залоге)
Не likes asking questions. Он любит задавать вопросы,
(герундий в действительном залоге)
Не likes being asked questions. Он любит, когда ему задают вопросы, (герундий в страдательном
залоге)
The man reading a newspaper at Человек, читающий у окна газету, — the window is my teacher.
мой преподаватель,
(причастие в действительном залоге)
I want to show you a list of the Я хочу показать вам список книг, books read by the students in
прочитанных летом студентами, summer.
(причастие в страдательном залоге)
Урок 5 § 8. The Gerund (Герундий)
Герундий, как и причастие и инфинитив, — неличная форма глагола. В русском языке нет
соответствующей глагольной формы.
Герундий обладает свойствами как глагола, так и существительного.
I. Свойства глагола.
1. Как и глагол, герундий имеет формы времени и залога.
_______________Active__________Passive______________
Simple writing being written
Perfect having written having been written
The Simple Gerund (being, walking, writing etc.) выражает Действия, происходящие одновременно с
действием глаго-
421
ла-сказуемого или следующие за ним во времени, например;
They insisted on coming Они настаивали на том, чтобы пойти
with me. со мной.
I like skating. Я люблю кататься на коньках.
Простой герундий может употребляться в пассиве (being written, being done, being discussed, etc),
например:
She hated being interviewed. Ей не нравилось, когда ее интервьюи-
ровали.
Nobody likes being laughed at. Никому не нравится, когда над ним
смеются.
The Perfect Gerund (having told, having walked, having been, etc.) выражает действия, которые
произошли раньше действия глагола-сказуемого, например:
She denies having spoken to him. Она отрицает, что говорила с ним. She was ashamed of herself for
Ей было стыдно, что она так на-having been so rude to him. грубила ему.
Перфектный герундий может иметь пассивную форму (having been sent, having been read, etc.)
I remember having been shown Я помню, что мне показывали это the letter.
письмо.
Необходимо иметь в виду, что в современном английском языке употребляются главным образом
простые активные v пассивные формы герундия. Сложные формы употребляются значительно
реже. К ним прибегают только тогда, когда возникает опасность искажения смысла. В некоторых
случаях герундий в форме Active употребляется со значение?* герундия в форме Passive. Такое
употребление герундий. встречается после глаголов to need, to want, to require нуле даться,
требоваться, to deserve заслуживать и после прилагательного worth стоящий, например:
My shoes need mending. Мои ботинки нужно починить.
The dress wants washing. Это платье надо выстирать.
These bags require drying. Эти сумки надо просушить.
The child deserves praising. Ребенок заслуживает того, чтобы его
похвалили. The book is worth reading. Эту книгу стоит прочесть.
422
2. Как и глагол, герундий может принимать прямое дополнение.
I remember reading this book. Я помню, что читал эту книгу.
I finished doing my homework Я кончил делать домашнее задание
and went to the cinema. и пошел в кино.
3. Герундий, как и глагол, может определяться наречием.
Не likes reading aloud. Он любит читать вслух.
Не hates working hard. Он не любит много работать.
II. Свойства существительного.
1. Герундий может определяться притяжательным местоимением или существительным в
притяжательном или общем падеже.
Excuse my interrupting you. Извините, что я вас прерываю.
I insist on his (Peter's, Я настаиваю на том, чтобы он (Петр)
Peter) taking part in the принял участие в обсуждении, discussion.
2. Герундий употребляется с предлогом.
Before leaving Minsk I called Прежде чем уехать из Минска, я on my brother.
зашел к брату.
Функции герундия в предложении
Герундий выполняет следующие функции в предложении:
1. Подлежащего.
Reading is her favourite occupation. Чтение — ее любимое занятие.
2. Части составного глагольного сказуемого.
She began crying. Она начала плакать.
When they saw me they Они перестали разговаривать, когда
stopped talking, увидели меня.
3. Части составного именного сказуемого.
The important part of his job Важной частью его работы является is looking after the children.
присмотр за детьми.
423
4. Дополнения.
а) прямого.
I simply love riding. Я просто обожаю кататься верхом.
She enjoyed singing and Ей нравилось петь и танцевать,
dancing.
б) предложного.
She apologized for coming Она извинилась за то, что опоздала
late.
5. Определения.
I don't want her to make а Я не хочу, чтобы у нее появилась при-
habit of being late. вычка опаздывать.
I began to have a feeling Я почувствовал, что за мной наблю-
of being watched. дают.
6. Обстоятельства.
The bus passed us without Автобус проехал мимо нас, не
stopping. остановившись.
Learn to swim by swimming. Учись плавать, плавая.
Употребление герундия
Герундий употребляется: 1. после глаголов

а) без предлогов to admit, to avoid, to burst out, to delay, to deny, to enjoy, to excuse, to fancy (in
imperative sentences as an exclamation of_surprise), to finish, to forgive, to give up, to go on, to keep
(on), to leave off, to mention, to mind (in negative and interrogative sentences), to postpone, to put off, to
recall, to remember, to risk, to stop, to suggest, cannot help и др.
He avoided looking at Sabma. Он избегал смотреть на Сабину.
She burst out crying. Она расплакалась.
We all burst out laughing. Мы все рассмеялись.
She denied having seen him. Она отрицала, что видела его.
Excuse my bothering you. Извините за беспокойство.
Fancy meeting you here! Я даже и представить себе не мог,
что встречу вас здесь!
424
Forgive my speaking plainly. Простите, что говорю так прямо.
She finished drawing and went Она кончила рисовать и пошла спать.
to bed.
Не gave up smoking. Он бросил курить.
They went on talking. Они продолжали разговаривать.
They kept (on) interrupting me. Они продолжали прерывать меня.
I have left off shooting. Я перестал охотиться.
He mentioned having read it in Он упомянул, что читал об этом
the paper. в газете.
Would you mind waiting a week Вы ничего не имеете против
or two? того, чтобы подождать недельку-другую?
I don't mind walking. Я не возражаю пойти пешком.
Do you mind my asking you Вы ничего не имеете против того,
one or two more questions? чтобы я задал вам еще один-два
вопроса1?
We put off going to the south. Мы откладывали поездку на юг.
I remember being asked about it. Я помню, что меня спрашивали об этом.
At midnight he finally stopped В полночь он, наконец, перестал
working.' работать.
I suggested going on an excursion. Я предложил пойти на экскурсию.
She couldn't help smiling. Она не могла не улыбнуться.
б) с предлогами и наречиями (постпозитивами): to apologize for, to accuse of, to agree to, to approve
of, to complain of, to congratulate on, to depend on, to feel like, to insist on, to look like, to object to, to
persist in, to prevent from, to rely on, to speak of, to succeed in, to suspect of, to thank for, to think of и
др.
I apologized for being late. Я извинился за то, что опоздал.
My father will not agree to our Мой отец не согласится, чтобы мы
being married so soon. так скоро поженились.
Не did not approve of my playing Он не одобрял того, что я играл
cards. в карты.
All the happiness of my life Все счастье моей жизни зависит от
depends on your loving me. того, полюбите ли вы меня или нет.
I don't feel like going out. Я не хочу выходить.
Do you feel like having a swim? Ты хочешь искупаться?
He insists on Mary's joining us. Он настаивает на том, чтобы Мария
присоединилась к нам.
425
It looks like raining. Похоже, что будет дождь.
I object to his joining us. Я против того, чтобы он присоединился к нам.
I tried to prevent him from Я попытался помешать ему
seeing her. встретиться с ней.
You may rely on my settling Вы можете рассчитывать на то, что
the matter. я все улажу.
My doctor succeeded in saving Моему врачу удалось спасти мне
my life. жизнь.
You suspect me of stealing your Вы подозреваете меня в том, что я
diamond. украл ваш брильянт.
I think of going abroad this Я хочу поехать за границу этим ле-
summer. том.
I really thank you heartily Я сердечно благодарен вам за то,
for taking all this trouble. что вы взяли на себя все эти заботы.
I congratulated them on Я поздравил их с тем, что они выиг-
- winning the Cup. рали кубок.
2. после существительных с предлогами: idea of, way of способ совершения чего-л., plan for, habit
of, reason for, excuse for, opportunity of и др.
I didn't like the idea of spending Мне не нравилась мысль провести
the summer in town. лето в городе.
Не gave up the idea of Он отказался от мысли стать
becoming a doctor. врачом.
Do you know the reason for his Ты знаешь, по какой причине
missing his English classes so он пропускает занятия по
often? английскому языку так часто?
3. после прилагательных с предлогами: to be aware of, to be busy in, to be capable of, to be fond of, to
be guilty of, to be indignant at, to be pleased (displeased) at, to be proud of, to be sure of, to be surprised
(astonished) at и др.
He was not aware of his daughter Он не знал, что его дочь вышла having got married.
замуж.
She was not pleased at my coming. Она была недовольна, что я пришел. She is proud of being so
pretty. Она гордится тем, что она такая
хорошенькая.
Не is sure of beating his Он уверен, что победит своего
opponent. • соперника.
426
1 was surprised at seeing him at Я был удивлен, увидев его на вечере, the party.
4. с предлогами: on (upon) no, после, after после, before перед, in в то время как, при для
выражения времени, с пред-логом by путем, при помощи (на вопрос каким образом? чем?) для
выражения образа действия, с предлогами besides кроме, instead of вместо, without без и др.
On receiving the telegram Получив (после того, как он получил)
Mr Brown left for London. телеграмму, г-н Браун выехал в Лондон.
On arriving at the cottage Подъехав к дому, она обнаружила,
she found it locked. что он заперт.
After hesitating a moment or Поколебавшись минуту-другую, он
two he knocked at the door. постучал в дверь.
He thought a long time before Он долго думал, прежде чем
answering. ответить.
In speaking to you I always При разговоре с тобой мне всегда
have to check my emotions. приходится сдерживать свои эмоции.
In typing the report I made Печатая доклад, я сделал несколько
some spelling mistakes. орфографических ошибок.
You begin learning a language Язык начинают учить, прислуши-
by listening to the new sounds. ваясь к новым звукам.
I cut him short by giving him Я прервал его, подав ему чашку чая. a cup of tea.
Besides being clever he is Кроме того, что он очень умен, он
very industrious. очень трудолюбив.
Instead of writing the letter Вместо того, чтобы написать письмо
himself he asked his friend самому, он попросил своего друга
to do it. сделать это.
Не left the room without Он вышел из комнаты, не ожидая
waiting for a reply. ответа.
Примечание: Как видно из приведенных выше примеров, герундий может переводиться на русский
язык существитель-ным, инфинитивом, деепричастием или придаточным пред-ложением.
Отличие герундия от отглагольного существительного
От Simple Gerund Active следует отличать отглагольное
427
существительное, которое также оканчивается на-ing. В отличие от герундия, отглагольное
существительное обладает только свойствами существительного и употребляется с артиклем,
может иметь форму множественного числа и может определяться прилагательным:
Не took part in the sittings Он принимал участие в заседаниях
of the committee комитета
I was awakened by their loud Я был разбужен их громким
talking. разговором
Не обладая глагольными свойствами, отглагольное существительное, в отличие от герундия, не
имеет форм времени и не выражает залога. В отличие от герундия, после отглагольных
существительных не может стоять прямое дополнение:
They started the loading Они приступили к погрузке судна
of the ship
Учащиеся часто ошибочно употребляют после герундия от переходных глаголов вместо прямого
дополнения, т.е. вместо существительного без предлога, существительное с предлогом of. Следует
иметь в виду, что герундий является формой глагола и потому требует такого же дополнения, как и
глагол в личной форме:
They loaded the ship.
They started loading the ship (а не: loading of the ship). , I read English books.
I like reading English books (а не: reading of Englisl books).